JP7453630B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been gaming machines in which, when a predetermined condition is met, a player is given a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined condition . (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-340046

Now, some fraudsters make it difficult for a predetermined condition to be met, or conversely induce people to make it easier to meet a predetermined condition. However, measures to detect such fraudulent acts were insufficient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suitably detect fraudulent activities .

To achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is a gaming machine that can provide a benefit to a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming machine shows the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine. a gaming performance information display means for displaying gaming performance information; a confirmation display means for making a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether normal display is possible in the gaming performance information display means; a storage means for storing information regarding the gaming performance information displayed by the information display means; an initialization means for initializing the information stored in the storage means after the gaming machine is powered on; When the information stored in the storage means is initialized by the initialization means, the game performance information based on the information newly stored in the storage means is used to play the game in a manner different from normal for at least a specific period of time. a post-initialization display means for displaying on the performance information display means; a control means provided with the gaming performance information display means; an operation means for acting on the content of control by the control means on the condition of at least a predetermined operation; a second control means different from the second control means, a connection means for connecting the control means and the second control means, and covering at least a part of the rear side of the gaming machine of the control means so that the operation means are exposed; The gaming machine further includes a cover means for covering at least the rear side of the gaming machine of the connecting means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the gaming machine is capable of awarding a benefit to a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and displays gaming performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine. a confirmation display means for performing a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether or not normal display is possible on the gaming performance information display means; and a confirmation display means for displaying information by the gaming performance information display means. storage means for storing information regarding the gaming performance information to be stored; initialization means for initializing the information stored in the storage means after the gaming machine is powered on; When the information stored in the storage means is initialized, the gaming performance information based on the information newly stored in the storage means is displayed on the gaming performance information display means in a manner different from normal for at least a specific period of time. A post-initialization display means for displaying information, a control means provided with the gaming performance information display means, an operation means acting on the control content by the control means under the condition of at least a predetermined operation, and a second control means different from the control means. a control means, a connection means for connecting the control means and the second control means, and at least a portion of the control means on the rear side of the gaming machine so that the operation means are exposed; A cover means for covering the rear side of the gaming machine is provided. This has the effect that fraudulent acts can be detected in a suitable manner.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a held ball storage area, and a held ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a jackpot in the case of , and (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a miss (normal) when the number of reserved balls is 2. , and (e) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for losing (probability variation) when the number of reserved balls is 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a prize ball number table. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing switch reading processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the accessory ratio management main process executed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception processing performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception processing performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio calculation process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the test result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (b) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (c) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a main control device in a second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the winning information storage process executed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the test result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hand ratio process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the winning ratio main processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hand ratio process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the winning ratio main processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a base display device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the base display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the information necessary for displaying the base value, which is stored in the external work area of the RAM in the MPU of the main controller, and (b) is a schematic diagram for each base. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of value data. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a base value process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a base value calculation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a part of base value display processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining part of base value display processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the setting key showing the setting key in the off state, and (b) is a front view of the setting key showing the setting key in the on state. A diagram showing the start-up modes of a pachinko machine and the states of the RAM erase switch, setting key, and door release switch when turning on the power of the pachinko machine to start up the pachinko machine in the start-up mode for each start-up mode. It is. (a) is a diagram showing the role of the RAM erase switch and the setting key in the setting change mode, and (b) is a diagram showing the role of the setting key in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents of the base display device in a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when error history is displayed on the base display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the first symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the first symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing how the round number notification LED indicates that the maximum number of rounds is 2. The lighting pattern, the lighting pattern to notify that the maximum number of rounds is 15, the lighting pattern to notify that the display is changing settings, and the lighting pattern to notify that the display is checking settings. It is a figure showing a pattern. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in an external work area of RAM in the MPU of the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing base display processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process performed by MPU in the main control device of the pachinko machine in 7th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in an eighth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in a working area of RAM in the MPU of the main control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining startup modes that are set in response to each startup operation when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change or setting confirmation. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (a) is a left front perspective view of the protective cover in the ninth embodiment as seen from the left front side, and (b) is a right rear perspective view of the protective cover in the ninth embodiment as seen from the right rear side. It is a right view of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a left front perspective view for demonstrating the attachment method of the protective cover member to the outer frame in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the outer frame and the protective cover member attached to the outer frame in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the board box of the main control device in a 9th embodiment. 68 is a sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line AA in FIG. 67. FIG. 74 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the main control device and the protective cover member in area B of FIG. 73. FIG. It is a left front perspective view which shows the inner frame and front frame expanded with respect to the outer frame in which the protective cover member in 9th Embodiment was attached. The start-up modes of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment and the information of the RAM erase switch and setting key when turning on the power of the pachinko machine to start up the pachinko machine in the start-up mode for each start-up mode are shown. It is a diagram. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the pachinko machine in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 10th embodiment. The start-up modes of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment and the information of the RAM erase switch and setting key when the pachinko machine is powered on to start up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode are shown. It is a diagram. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in an 11th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 12th embodiment. It is a right view of the pachinko machine in a 12th embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26, a first embodiment will be described in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, prize openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door open switch 208g (see FIG. 6) that detects when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). There is.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later. Further, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the so-called super reach, which is one aspect of the variable performance.

The fluctuating performance is a performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described later, a ball fired into the front area of the game board 13 enters a specific winning opening (second starting opening 64b described later). (Refer to 2.) The execution is triggered by the ball entering the ball (starting prize), and after the symbol (the third symbol described below) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is used to win the starting prize. This is a performance that presents the result of the lottery (big win or not) to the player.

A stage is a performance mode that provides uniformity to various performances displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three performance modes: "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Various performances, such as the above-mentioned fluctuating performance and the reach performance executed during the fluctuating performance, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

The stage change is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period in which no variation effect is being performed or during high-speed variation in which the third symbol is displayed in high-speed variation and invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the display is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage" → "sky stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" →... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when the normal reach effect is started in the variable effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the normal reach effect is developed from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect, the selection screen for the performance mode of the super reach effect is displayed on the third symbol during the normal reach effect. It is configured to be displayed on a display device 81.

On the selection screen, a plurality of performance mode candidates that can be selected as the super reach performance mode are displayed, and one of the performance mode candidates is selected. When the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected performance mode candidate is changed. Then, the performance mode of the super reach is determined based on the performance mode candidate selected when developing to the super reach, and the super reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the performance mode.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player can press the frame button 22 in a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in front of the pachinko machine 10). , rearward, rightward, and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted, the selection of the presentation stage may be changed or the presentation mode of the super reach may be selected.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50 and is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, a ball firing unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the operation, a push-button stop switch 51b that stops firing the ball while the button is pressed, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. (not shown) is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, and thereby the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. The ball firing interval in the ball firing unit 112a is determined to be approximately 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62 for guiding the ball, a first normal prize opening 63a, It is constructed by assembling the second normal winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral part is on the back side of the inner frame 12. can be attached to. The first normal winning hole 63a, the second normal winning hole 63b, the first starting hole 64a, the second starting hole 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arcuate member 70 on the front side of the game board 13 (a winning opening etc. is provided, and a space where the fired balls are placed). (area flowing downstream).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

At the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2), there is a first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10.

The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variable display that is performed when a ball enters either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (start winning prize) by the lighting state of the LED 37a, or displays a variable display. As the stop symbol after the end, a symbol according to the result of the lottery held for the starting prize is displayed in a lit state, or a symbol that changes among the balls that entered the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b is displayed. The number of pending pitches, which is the number of pending pitches (pending pitches), is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery) when a ball enters the first starting port 64a or second starting port 64b, and if it is determined to be a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. It also makes a judgment. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, but also as a stop symbol after the end of the variation that is executed when the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. , In the case of a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the "15R certain variable jackpot" is a certain variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the "2R certain variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and is in a time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, so-called probability fluctuation (probability change, probability change state).In other words, it is a special gaming state (jackpot ) is a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to The high probability state (during probability change, variable probability state) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b.

On the other hand, a "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased and the second starting port 64b Refers to the state of the game where it is easy for the ball to hit the ball.

In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b, which will be described later, is released or the one-time winning probability of the second symbol can be changed. It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessory is released depending on the hit. Specifically, in the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is released is made longer than in the case other than the time saving state, or the number of times the electric accessory is released in one win. may be made larger than in cases other than the time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, at least two of the following may be performed at the same time: increasing the probability of winning the second symbol, lengthening the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times the electric accessory is opened. good.

A first normal winning hole 63a is provided on the lower left side of the gaming area, and a second normal winning hole 63b is provided on the lower right side of the gaming area. When a ball enters the first normal winning port 63a, the first normal winning port switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first normal winning port switch 208c is turned on. Eight balls are paid out as prize balls. Also, when a ball enters the second normal winning port 63b, the second normal winning port switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second normal winning port switch 208d is turned on. As a result, eight balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first normal winning hole 63a and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the second normal winning hole 63b do not necessarily have to be the same; for example, the former is 6. The number of prize balls may be different, such as the latter being eight balls.

A variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83. The third symbol display device 81 is operated in synchronization with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, using the ball entering the starting hole (starting prize) of either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b as a trigger. , a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays a variable display (variable effect) of the third symbol. The second symbol display device 83 is provided with a second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol using passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display, for example, 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later. and the three symbol rows on the right are displayed.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the game status is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main controller 110, while decorative displays are displayed in accordance with the display on the first symbol display device 37. This is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 4(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "0" to "9" attached to the rear symbol made of a wooden box, among which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , a large number is added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, for the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8), attached designs imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. Small even numbers are added in green to the lower right side of the attached symbol, and are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display (a variable effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on the active line L1 is provided. ) is performed, and the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuating display ends. When shifting to a high probability state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to "high probability symbols") are aligned on the active line L1. On the other hand, when shifting to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuating display is performed in which main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to "low probability symbols") are aligned on the active line L1.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower 2/3 displays the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable manner (variable effect). The upper 1/3 of the remaining area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying preview effects, characters, etc. Further, in the center portion of the lower base side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, there is provided a reserved ball number display area Db that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and the symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, the symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2, and the display region The symbol row Z3 is displayed on Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows of upper, middle, and lower rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variable production, the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Stop display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The number of reserved pitches display area Db displays the number of reserved pitches, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variable display (variable performance) has not been performed among the balls entered into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. This is the area to display.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to lead to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, and usually a black boy Preview effects include changes in the color of the character's hair and the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b while the variable performance (fluctuating display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of pitches entered will be suspended up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the number of reserved balls display area Db. In the reserved pitch number display area Db, one reserved pitch number symbol ("●" symbol) is displayed for each reserved pitch number, and the number of reserved pitches is displayed according to the displayed number of the reserved pitch number symbol. .

That is, when one pending pitch number symbol is displayed in the pending pitch number display area Db, it indicates that the number of pending pitches is one, and when four pending pitch number symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of pending pitches is one. Indicates that the number of pitches is 4. Further, if the number of reserved balls symbol is not displayed in the number of reserved pitches display area Db, this indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there are no reserved balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that balls entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are held up to a maximum of four times in total, the maximum number of balls being held is limited to four times in total. The number of times is not limited to three, or may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the number of reserved pitches display area Db, the number of reserved balls can be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed for the number of reserved pitches. The display may be made in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display that alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. be. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory provided at the second starting port 64b is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured such that it is activated (opened) only when the

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 mentioned above, and also lit on the second pattern holding lamp 84. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reservations is displayed based on the number of second symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. This may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, instead of lighting the second symbol holding lamp 84, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may display a variable display of the second symbol. Furthermore, similarly to the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can also set it to . Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first starting port 64a is provided below the variable display unit 80, and a second starting port 64b is provided below the first starting port 64a. The first starting port 64a is provided with an opening into which a ball can enter upward. The opening of the first starting port 64a is always open so that a ball can enter. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a, the first starting port switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is activated due to the turning on of the first starting port switch 208a. A jackpot lottery is made in the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variable effect of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. executed. The first starting hole 64a also serves as one of the winning holes from which, when a ball enters, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with an electric accessory having two blades that cover the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The electric accessory opens and closes the two blades to put the second starting port 64b in an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). Under normal conditions, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state where the blades of the electric accessory are closed (the blades stand upward), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b. It's a difficult situation.

Then, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the "○" symbol, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated for a predetermined period of time. While the electric accessory is being operated, the blades of the electric accessory stand upward. It is in a state where it moves in a substantially V-shape (inverted V-shape), and the second starting port 64b is in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can enter the second starting port 64b more easily than in the closed state. In other words, when the second symbol display device 83 stops at the "○" symbol and becomes a hit as a result of the variable display, and the second starting port 64b becomes open, the ball enters the second starting port 64b. Thus, it is possible to create a state in which many jackpot drawings can be performed.

When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is activated due to the turning on of the second starting port switch 208b. A jackpot lottery is made in the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variable effect of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. executed. The second starting hole 64b also serves as one of the winning holes from which, when a ball enters, two balls are paid out as prize balls.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second starting hole 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular big winning hole (also referred to as a large open opening or a specific winning hole) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the jackpot stop symbol is turned on. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the grand prize opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This big prize opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the big winning prize mouth 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the grand winning opening 65a, and a grand winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with The grand prize opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large winning hole solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the large winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

When a ball enters the big winning hole 65a, the big winning hole switch 208e (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times the big winning hole switch 208e is turned on is counted. The number of balls that have entered the grand prize opening 65a is counted, and the conditions for closing the grand prize opening 65a are determined. Furthermore, due to the turning on of the big prize opening switch 208e, 12 balls are paid out as prize balls. Then, by repeating the open state and closed state of the big winning hole 65a due to the jackpot, many balls are in a state where it is easy to win the big winning hole 65a, and the player is given the value of the game (gaming value). As a reward, a larger amount of prize balls than usual will be paid out. This state is one form of special gaming state advantageous to the player.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described form. A specific winning opening and a large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the gaming area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A special game state may be formed in which the large opening is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the special winning port while the specific winning port is open.

Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) in the vertical direction through which the ball passes. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to this turning on, the main controller 110 displays the second symbol ( A winning lottery (also called a regular symbol) is held.

As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) performed on the ball that passed through the through gate 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the second symbol display device 83 and then " After the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated. As a result, the blades of the electric accessory that make it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b move from a substantially vertically standing state to a substantially V-shape (inverted V-shape), allowing the ball to enter the second starting port 64b for a predetermined period of time. The ball enters the second starting port 64b, or the ball enters the second starting port 64b more easily than in the closed state.

Pasting spaces K1 and K2 are provided at the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 for pasting certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In addition, the balls that enter the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided to the ball ejection path after passing through a switch for detecting the ball entering each winning hole. Ru. The balls guided to the ball discharge path pass through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided balls, and then are discharged to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed. .

Here, the ball launched into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters one of the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out hole 66. Therefore, the balls that have entered these winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out port 66 are guided to the ball ejection path and always pass through the out switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to grasp the number of balls fired into the game area (the number of balls used in the game). Further, the out switch 208f detects a ball that actually passes through the game area and enters any of the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out hole 66. In other words, a ball that is fired into the game area but gets stuck somewhere in the game area and is not used in the game as a result is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to prevent balls that are not used in the game as a result of this from being counted as balls fired into the game area.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

Further, the main board is provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance of the game machine, such as the ratio of accessories, can be connected. The test terminal 207a is normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and is exposed by opening the back pack 92. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the test terminal 207a, and the test terminal 207a may be exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the testing device 300 is inserted into the testing terminal 207a, the testing device 300 can test the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as the ratio of accessories.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in.

The main control device 110 controls the main functions of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of variable display (variable effect) on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. Execute processing. The main processes of this pachinko machine 10 are executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When this happens, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the big winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a grand prize opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. Send.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group including various switches for detecting balls that have entered each winning hole and balls that have been guided to the ball ejection path through each winning hole and out hole. The MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and RAM erase signals output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

The main controller 110 is provided with an accessory ratio management chip 207 that manages information regarding the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The accessory ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via the bus 206, receives information necessary for managing the accessory ratio from the MPU 201, and processes and stores the received information to control the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information regarding ratios.

An inspection terminal 207a is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 that inspects the performance of the game machine, such as the ratio of accessories, and when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, Information regarding the accessory ratio managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 and other information regarding the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300. The inspection device 300 can determine whether the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is within a normal range based on the information regarding the accessory ratio received via the inspection terminal 207a.

Here, the detailed configuration of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 6. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of main controller 110.

As described above, the input/output port 205 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 253 on the input side, and the output side includes the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, In addition to being connected to the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208 connected as input side include a first starting port switch 208a for detecting a winning ball in the first starting port 64a, and a second starting port switch 208a for detecting a winning ball. The second starting port switch 208b for detecting the winning ball in the starting port 64b, the first normal winning port switch 208c for detecting the winning ball in the first normal winning port 63a, and the winning ball in the second normal winning port 63b. The second normal winning hole switch 208d for detecting the ball that has won the prize, the big winning hole switch 208e for detecting the ball that has won in the big winning hole 65a, the winning ball in each winning hole 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a. and an out switch 208f that detects a ball that has entered the out port 66 and has been guided to the ball ejection path; and an out switch 208f that detects that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is locked and opened. A door open switch 208g is connected.

The input/output ports 205 include a first port 205a into which the output of the first starting port switch 208a is input, a second port 205b into which the output of the second starting port switch 208b is input, and a first normal winning port switch 208c. The normal 1 port 205c to which the output is input, the normal 2 port 205d to which the output of the second normal winning port switch 208d is input, the large winning port port 205e to which the output of the large winning port switch 208e is input, and the out switch. An out port 205f to which the output of the door opening switch 208f is connected, and a door opening port 205g to which the output of the door opening switch 208g is connected are provided.

The MPU 201 executes switch reading processing (see FIG. 11) for checking the states of various switches during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) that is executed every 2 milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the first port 205a, the second port 205b, the first port 205c, the second port 205d, the big prize opening port 205e, and the out port 205f, and reads the winning opening where the prize has been won. and the presence or absence of balls guided to the ball ejection path, and the number of balls won in each winning hole and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path within 0.5 seconds (i.e. The number of balls fired into the game area is counted. Then, the number of each ball counted and the game status at that time (whether there is a jackpot, whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, whether there is an error state, etc.) are calculated. It is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates and manages the accessory ratio based on the number of each ball. Note that whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and checking the output of the door opening switch 208g.

The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a prize ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. The main controller 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables 202a to 203d stored in the ROM 202. In addition, the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used to manage the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the main controller 110 is powered on, the accessory ratio It is sent to the management chip 207.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are mainly used for jackpot lottery, setting of variable display (variable effect) on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, etc. It is used by MPU 201 of control device 110. Furthermore, in the description of the various counters, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

To set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first winning random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot symbol are used. A per hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per random number counter C1 are used. .

Further, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery on the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 10), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 17). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas has a first starting port 64a and a holding ball storage area 203b. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are respectively stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting port 64b.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 899). It is configured to return to . In addition, when the first winning random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and from that initial value, the first winning random number counter CINI1 is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and if the ball wins in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, At the timing when the first winning random number counter C1 is entered (starting winning), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the first winning random number counter storage area of any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. 203b1. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reservation area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If the value of the random number matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability state that is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period that is not in a variable probability state), and for a jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher than the low probability state. It is divided into two types: one for high-probability states and one for high-probability states, which is used for high-probability states (with variable probability). The numbers of random numbers that constitute a jackpot included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state are set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot in a low probability state (jackpot random number value) is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. ing.

On the other hand, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot in a high probability state (jackpot random number value) is 30, and the values are "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322 , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892'' are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random numbers for the low probability state and the jackpot random numbers for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so that they do not overlap. It is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, that value will be easily predicted from the outside, so there is a risk that there will be a high possibility that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), a jackpot can be achieved. Since the value of the random number can be made difficult to predict, fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The first winning type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and is added to the maximum value (for example, from 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the configuration is such that it returns to 0 after reaching 99). For example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated when the ball is started at either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning a prize (starting prize winning), the value of the first winning type counter C2 at that time is the value of the first winning random number counter C1 among the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first win type counter storage area 203b2 of the same reservation area as the storage area.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that results in a loss, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance The type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of miss. On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern and stop type in the fluctuation performance will be those at the time of jackpot. . In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined in accordance with the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Based on this first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202, the jackpot type is determined. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 8(b). FIG. 8(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8(b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table that associates the jackpot types with the values of the first winning type counter C2.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots are the "15R probability variable jackpot" which shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and the "15R probability variable jackpot" which shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds and a 100 There is a "15R normal jackpot" which is a time-saving state during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R certain variable jackpot" which shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first win type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8(b), the value "0~39" of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot, and the value "40~39" of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79'' is associated, and the value ``80-99'' of the first winning type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variable jackpot.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is determined as " 15R normal jackpot" is determined, and if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "90", then "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. . Note that the probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, in accordance with the set probability, the value of the first winning type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table.

Note that the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the first winning type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the starting hole in which the ball enters. That is, as the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 64a is a random number that becomes a jackpot, For example, ``15R regular jackpot'' is set to 40%, ``15R normal jackpot'' is set to 40%, and ``2R fixed variable jackpot'' is set to 20%, and the ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b when the ball enters the second starting port 64b. As the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number that becomes a jackpot, for example, "15R probability variable jackpot" is 55%, "15R normal jackpot" is 40%, "2R probability variable jackpot" ' may be set to 5%.

In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first starting port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second starting port 64b are prepared, and in each jackpot type table, the first winning type is associated with each jackpot type. The number of values in the counter C2 may be changed. In the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203b, the values of various counters stored in each area are determined based on whether the winning starts at either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. A flag indicating whether the winning type has been stored is also stored, and based on the flag, the jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first winning type counter C2 stored in each area. It is also possible to select a table. Alternatively, separate flags may be provided corresponding to each of the first to fourth holding areas, and the flags may cause the values of various counters stored in the corresponding areas to be set at the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. The jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first winning type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag, which indicates which starting opening was stored with the winning. It is also possible to select a table.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. There are 3 types of stops: ``Reach out of front and back'' where the reach stops after reaching, ``Reach other than out of front and back'' where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and ``Complete off'' where no reach occurs ( direction) pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the ball enters either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning a prize (starting winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first winning random number counter C1 among the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 in the same reservation area as the reservation area.

A plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are provided in the ROM 202, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, with different ranges of random numbers for selecting stop types. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared is to change the selection ratio of stop types depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, the stop pattern table 202c has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. ``Completely missed'' is more likely to be selected. In this stop pattern table 202c, the "front/back off reach" is narrowed to 98, 99, and the "front/back off reach" is narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult for "front/back off reach" or "front/back off reach" to be selected. Become.

In addition, in a low probability state, in order to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the random value range corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is set from 0 to 79. , the narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, and it becomes difficult for "completely off" to be selected. In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front/back off" is wide, from 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front/back off". Therefore, in a low probability state, many reach displays with long production times can be performed, so the time for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b can be secured, and the fluctuations caused by the third symbol display device 81 can be secured. It becomes easier to continue displaying. In addition, also in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "front/back off reach" is set to 98 and 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). Also, at the timing when a ball enters a prize in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting prize), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203b4 of the same reservation area as the reservation area in which the first random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth reservation areas.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a variation pattern. That is, when performing a fluctuation effect based on various counters stored in one holding area, the MPU 201 uses the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 of the holding area and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the ROM 202. A variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d. The determination of the fluctuation pattern is specifically the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation. The audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 change the reach type and detailed pattern of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and whether or not to execute the preview performance and the execution mode of the preview performance are determined.

Here, details of the variation pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 8(c) to 8(e). In this pachinko machine 10, as a variable pattern table 202d, a jackpot variable pattern table 202d1 is used when a jackpot is won, and a losing variable pattern table 202d2, 202d3 is used when a player loses. In addition, as the variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for losing, depending on whether the gaming state is a time-saving state or a high-probability state in a probability-variable state, or a low-probability state in a normal state excluding a time-saving state, A variation pattern table 202d3 and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are prepared.

Furthermore, each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 includes a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 0 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1, and a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1. A table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 4 are provided separately.

Note that, as in this embodiment, it is not necessarily necessary to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for each number of balls on hold, but each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is prepared so that the table to be referred to is simply changed based on the number of balls on hold. may be provided. For example, each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 may be prepared separately into a table that is referred to when the number of reserved pitches is less than 3, and a table that is referred to when the number of reserved pitches is 3 or more. . Further, in each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3, the conditions for the number of reserved pitches for determining the table to be referred to may be different. For example, the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot includes a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, and a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. A different table 202d2 may be prepared for each number of balls on hold, and a single table may be prepared as the variation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation) regardless of the number of balls on hold.

FIG. 8(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variable pattern table 202d1 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 among the jackpot variable pattern tables 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups based on the jackpot type, regardless of which number of reserved balls it corresponds to. Specifically, the jackpot type is divided into 15R jackpot common, which is referred to when 15R definite variable jackpot and 15R regular jackpot is determined, and 2R definite variable jackpot, which is referred to when 2R definite variable jackpot is determined. There is. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot (jackpot random number value), a fluctuation pattern is generated according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. A group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 that determines is determined. In the group of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance held in the holding area. be done.

For common 15R jackpots, three variation patterns are available for selection: variation A with a variation time of 30 seconds, variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and variation C with a variation time of 90 seconds. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variable type counter CS1.

Variation A is a variation pattern in which a so-called normal reach in which the third symbol is aligned after a reach with a short variation time is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Variation B is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called super reach in which the third symbol is aligned after a reach whose variation time is longer than the normal reach. Super reach includes, for example, a reach that develops from a normal reach, as well as a long reach that simply has a long reach. Variation C is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called special reach in which the third symbol is aligned after a reach whose variation time is even longer than the super reach. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that develops further after the super reach, as well as a special reach that develops from the normal reach and is different from the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8(c), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern when the number of reserved balls is 2 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for fluctuation A, It is 11 to 99 for B, and 100 to 198 for variation C. The 15R jackpot common table is selected when it is a 15R definite variable jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, so in order to give players a sense of expectation, variation C, in which a special reach is executed, is more likely to be selected. It has become. However, by configuring the variation A in which a normal reach is executed and the variation B in which a super reach is executed to be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which a jackpot can be expected from any reach.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, there are many different effects for each reach. For example, in the super reach, the back image (the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81) There are leeches that quickly change the image (displayed on the back side of the screen), leeches that suddenly display a certain character, etc. In addition, there are leeches that add a preview effect before the start of the change, and effects that lead to a jackpot when the change occurs again. Contains multiple reaches with different effects, such as those with added . The main control device 110 determines only fluctuation A, fluctuation B, and fluctuation C as the fluctuation patterns in the case of a 15R definite strange jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, and the audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 determine each fluctuation A to fluctuation pattern. Determine the detailed variation pattern corresponding to C. According to the detailed variation pattern, a variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

Only the "2R variation" variation pattern with a variation time of 59 seconds is available for selection exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, no matter which number of reserved balls it corresponds to, in the group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 7(c), all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ( 0 to 198) are associated with 2R fluctuations. In other words, when the jackpot variation type is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

When the 2R fluctuation is selected by the main controller 110, the detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Therefore, when the main control device 110 determines the 2R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type, a variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. In this pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation, for example, while displaying characters such as "chicken" or "girl" in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, These include a variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol due to lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, and the like.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a preview effect foretelling the start of a jackpot or a reach effect before or during a change effect may be determined by another change type counter, and if a reach effect is achieved, the final It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols are shifted from the third symbol to be stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted from the front or back, etc.).

In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, but in this pachinko machine 10, when a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, only the variation pattern of "2R variation" is selected. Instead of providing a group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, the variation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot may only define the association between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot. In this case, if the jackpot type is a 2R variable jackpot, the 2R variation may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, only "2R variation" is selected when a 2R probability variable jackpot occurs, but one variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of variation patterns when a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs. You can do it like this. In this case, like a group common to 15R jackpots, even in a group dedicated to 2R probability variable jackpots, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in the event of a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a certain hold area is The fluctuation pattern associated with the stored value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 may be determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance held in the holding area.

FIG. 8(d) schematically shows an example of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for errors, which is referred to when the number of reserved pitches is 2, among the variations pattern table 202d2 for errors (normal) stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8(d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is dedicated to complete separation, which is referred to when complete separation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and front and rear deviation reach, and front and rear deviation. It is divided into groups based on the common reach, which is referred to when the reach is determined, and the stop type at the time of a miss, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each divided group. It is attached.

If the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a jackpot value (jackpot random number value), that is, it is an outlier value, the gaming state is normal except for the time saving state. When in a low probability state, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is changed according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stopping pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1. A variation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

For complete disconnection, two variation patterns are available for selection: variation D with a variation time of 7 seconds and variation E with a variation time of 10 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. are associated. When variation D or variation E is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variation performance in which a high-speed variation of the third symbol is started and then stopped and displayed without reaching a reach. As shown in FIG. 8(d), in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved pitches is 2, the correspondence between each variation exclusively for complete deviation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is that the variation D is 0 to 98, and the fluctuation E is 99 to 198.

In addition, common reaches include the three variations A to C mentioned above, namely variation A in which normal reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 30 seconds, and super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds. Three variation patterns are selectably prepared: variation B executed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and variation C in which the special reach is executed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds. In the losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each common variation in reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A and 99 to 190 for variation B. , the variation C is 191-198.

FIG. 8(e) schematically shows an example of the (probable) variation pattern table 202d3 for misses, which is referred to when the number of reserved pitches is 2, among the variation pattern tables 202d3 for misses (probable variables) stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d3. Variation D and variation E can be selected as a variation pattern for complete off-only reach, and when a front/back off reach and a reach other than front/back off reach are determined, it is referred to and variations A to C can be selected as a variation pattern for a common reach. It is divided into groups based on the stop type at the time of deviation, and in the divided groups, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each selectable fluctuation pattern.

If the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is a value that does not result in a jackpot, that is, a value that is an outlier, and the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in that holding area is a deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern. It is determined from table 202d3.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), in the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the correspondence between each variation exclusively for complete deviation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved pitches is 2 is as follows: 0 to 190, and the fluctuation E is 191 to 198. Furthermore, when the number of held pitches is 2, the correspondence between each variation in the common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. That is, the correspondence between each variation in common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same in the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for losing and the (probable variable) variation pattern table 202d3 for missing.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at variable probability, the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b, and complete misses (variation E) with a long fluctuation time are often performed. If this happens, it will take a long time until the next variable display starts, which may cause the player to wait and feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it is not preferable as a hall because the operating rate decreases.

Therefore, if a complete loss occurs when the gaming state is in a time-saving state or a high-probability state with variable probability, a complete loss with a shorter fluctuation time than in other gaming states (normal state excluding time-saving state) In order to facilitate selection of variation D), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and a deviation (probable) variation pattern table 202d3 are configured. Thereby, by starting the next variable display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operating rate from decreasing excessively.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be selected using a plurality of fluctuation type counters together (selecting whether or not to display a notice, etc.). In addition, the selection of the winning type is configured to be divided into a winning (normal) fluctuation pattern table and a winning (probable) fluctuation pattern table, but even if the gaming state is normal, there are multiple reserved balls (for example, , 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the variation display may be terminated early, and the selection may be made with reference to a variation pattern table for deviations (probability variations).

In addition, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is a reach that is out of front or back or a reach other than a reach that is out of front or back and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state, The fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (normal) and the variation pattern table for losing (probable variation) 202d3 do not include groups common to reach, and these variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referenced only when the stop type is completely missed. In addition, a variation pattern table may be separately prepared which is referred to when the stop type is a reach that is out of front or back or a reach other than out of front or back, no matter what the gaming state is.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is a reach that is out of front and back or a reach other than a reach that is out of front and back and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state. Although it is assumed that there is one, it may be different depending on the gaming state.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8(d) and 8(e), the variation D and the variation E are simply set as "complete deviation variation", and the "complete deviation variation" is selected. In this case, the variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability by referring to another table. Of course, in this case as well, tables corresponding to the number of reserved pitches may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7, the second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated at every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through either the right or left through gate 67. There are 149 random number values that will win, and the range is from 5 to 153. That is, when the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined to be a win, and the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated, and the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined period of time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10). It is updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 17).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. It is possible to execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of (variable effect) and the lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The prize ball number table 202e in the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) each winning hole 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a. Here, details of the prize pitch number table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the prize ball number table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the prize ball number table 202e, the "starting hole type" is the first starting hole 64a, the second starting hole 64b, the first normal winning hole 63a, the second normal winning hole 63b, and the big winning hole 65a. is defined, and for each winning hole, the "number of prize balls" corresponding to that winning hole is specified. Specifically, in the prize ball number table 202e, the number of prize balls 3 is associated with the first starting port 64a, the number of prize balls 2 is associated with the second starting port 64b, and the number of prize balls 2 is associated with the first starting port 64a. The number of prize balls 8 is associated with the opening 63a, the number of prize balls 8 is associated with the second normal winning opening 63b, and the number of prize balls 12 is associated with the large winning opening 65a.

The prize ball number table 202e defines the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole for all winning holes provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 has winning holes other than the above-mentioned winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a, the prize ball number table 202e includes the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning holes. is defined.

Further, in this pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same in the first normal winning hole 63a and the second normal winning hole 63b. Therefore, in the prize ball number table 202e, the first normal winning hole 63a and the second normal winning hole 63b are combined and the "starting hole type" is defined as the "normal winning hole", and the "normal winning hole" is associated with the first normal winning hole 63a and the second normal winning hole 63b. The number of prize balls may be 8. In addition, if the number of prize balls in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same as "3", in the number of winning balls table 202e, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are combined. The "starting hole type" may be defined as "starting hole", and the number of prize balls (3) may be defined in association with the "starting hole".

The prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 during the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the power is turned on to the main control device 110, and the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and Used when calculating ratios.

The trigger information data 202f is data that defines the timing (trigger) at which the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio. Although details will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

The accessory ratio management chip 207 supports three timings (triggers) as timings (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio. The first is the number of balls fired, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio every time the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number. The second is the time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio when a predetermined time arrives. The third is the playing time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio when the player's playing time has elapsed for a predetermined period of time.

In the trigger information data 202f, information indicating any one of "number of shots", "time", and "gaming time" is defined as the calculation timing (trigger) of the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

When information indicating the "number of shots" is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating the "number of balls fired" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", each time the number of balls fired reaches 500 balls, the accessory ratio The management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio.

When information indicating "time" is defined, trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "time" and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as "predetermined times," the time is 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio.

When the trigger information data 202f specifies the information indicating the "gaming time", the trigger information data 202f also specifies the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "gaming time" and information indicating 2 hours as the "predetermined time," each time the playing time elapses for 2 hours, the accessory ratio management chip 207 The accessory ratio is calculated in .

The trigger information data 202f is sent to the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the prize ball number table 202e during the initialization process of the MPU 201 that is executed when the power is turned on to the main control device 110. It is used in the management chip 207 to determine the trigger for calculating the accessory ratio.

In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I/O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as the following are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies hereinafter), a power outage signal SG1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201. By this input, power-off occurrence information is set by the executed NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15). Then, in the main processing of the MPU 201 (FIG. 17), when it is determined that there is information on the occurrence of a power outage, the stack pointer and the values of each register at that time are stored in the RAM 203.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 19).

The RAM 203 further includes a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a first 1 counter 203d, a first 2 counter 203e, a regular 1 counter 203f, a regular 2 counter 203g, a grand prize opening counter 203h, and an out It has at least a counter 203i.

The number of reserved balls counter 203a is the starting port of either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the ball entering (starting prize winning), the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) is counted up to 4 times. This is a counter for This reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S616 in FIG. 16). Then, each time a starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time a variable effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

The value of this held pitch number counter 203a (ie, the number of held balls) is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by a held pitch number command (see S205 in FIG. 12). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the held ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The audio lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of balls held in the variable performance held in the main control device 110 by the number of balls held in the hold command. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of times the variable performance is suspended without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a starting prize is detected, by transmitting a command for the number of held balls from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the number of held balls for the variable performance managed in the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced to noise. Even if there is a deviation from the number of balls held in the actual variable performance held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of such factors, the deviation can be corrected by the number of held balls command received next.

Note that the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display held pitch number command for notifying the number of held balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of held balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol in the number-of-reserved-balls display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this number-of-reserved-balls command for display.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a held pitch number command to the audio lamp control device 113, in the held pitch number command, not only the value of the held pitch number counter 203a that is incremented by 1 is transmitted. , the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter are acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in response to the above-mentioned starting winning that triggered the addition of the number of reserved balls counter 203a. C3 and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are also included.

That is, when there is a starting prize, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the main controller 110 is , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the number of held pitches command.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the values of the first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1, which are transmitted by the held pitch number command, based on the respective values. The system reads in advance before the performance is executed, and determines what the variable performance will be like (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will be the variable time, etc.) before executing the variable performance. Then, based on the results of the pre-read judgment, it is possible to decide whether to perform various effects.

The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of a starting prize. This is a memory for storing each value. In the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), when the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting winning), the MPU 201 transfers the information from each counter buffer to the counter buffer. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (reserved 1st to 1st) so that the data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting prize can be stored (reserved) for up to four times. 4 areas) (see Figure 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c contains data (each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) that should be referenced in processes such as jackpot lottery and setting of variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (values).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the fluctuating effect, it executes processes such as jackpot lottery and setting of the fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. , Among the data corresponding to each starting winnings (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the above-mentioned held ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in this held ball execution area 203c. Shift to. Note that a shift in this embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, etc. used by

To set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first random number counter C1 used for determining the jackpot type are used. A winning type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the stop type at the time of loss, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to determine the fluctuation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when a ball enters either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting winning). Store each value.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each of the four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4) includes a first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first winning type counter C2. A per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variable type counter storage area 203b4 that stores the value of the variable type counter CS1 are provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1, the first winning type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variable type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, the held ball storage area 203b stores up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when a ball enters the second starting port 64b (starting winning). However, in that case, data is stored in the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (first to fourth reservation areas) in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the older the data corresponding to the starting winnings will be stored, and the first reservation area will store the data corresponding to the oldest starting winnings.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c consists of only one area. This held ball execution area 203c, like the held ball storage area 203b, stores a first winning random number counter storage area 203c1 that stores the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a value of the first winning type counter C2. A first winning type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variable type counter storage area 203c4 that stores the value of the variable type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the MPU 201 transfers the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the first holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b to this held ball. The execution area 203c is shifted to each of the areas 203c1 to 203c4. Then, the data shifted to the held ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 17), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command, and are also notified to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. . Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

Details of data shifting will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is the timing to start executing the variable effect, it transfers the random value in the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding first area to the first winning random number counter storage area 203c1 of the holding ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random value in the first win type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first win type counter storage area 203c2, and the random value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , shifts the random value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

Then, when the shift of data to the held ball execution area 203c is completed, the first held area becomes vacant, so the data stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the held ball storage area 203b is stored (held). Shift processing is performed to shift data to areas (first to third) with one smaller area number. In this embodiment, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b will be explained. For example, if the value of the held ball number counter 203a is "4" when the start judgment of the variable effect is made, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the held ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, when the data in the first holding area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c and the first holding area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to the holding ball execution area 203c. Shift to the area with one lower number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data in the second reservation area is shifted to the first reservation area, the data in the third reservation area is shifted to the second reservation area, and the data in the fourth reservation area is shifted to the third reservation area.

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the pending pitch number counter 203a is "2" when the start determination of the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the pending second area to the first pending area. , finish shifting the data. As described above, in this embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the holding areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (held), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Incidentally, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the holding areas (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The first 1 counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the first starting port 64a, and the first 2 counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b. is a counter that counts the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning slot 63a, a second normal counter 203g is a counter that counts the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning slot 63b, and a large winning slot counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning slot 63a. The winning opening 65a is a counter for counting the number of winning balls, and the out counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). be. These counters 203d to 203i are all set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S616 in FIG. 16).

In addition, in the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds, the MPU 201 performs the first port 205a, the first two ports 205b, and the first port 205b. Referring to the port 205c, normal 2 port 205d, large winning port port 205e and out port 205f, the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, and the second normal winning port switch 208d. , it is determined whether or not a ball is detected in each of the big prize opening switch 208e and the out switch 208f. When there is a prize in any of the winning holes (a ball is detected in the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning hole in which the prize was won is incremented by 1, and the ball is detected in the out switch 208f. If detected, the out counter 203i is incremented by one.

The counters 203d to 203i continue counting the number of balls for 0.5 seconds. When 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information in the accessory ratio management chip 207 along with information indicating the gaming state at that time. be done. When the setting of the values of each counter 203d to 203i to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and each winning slot in the next 0.5 seconds wins again. The number of balls played is counted for each winning hole, and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and also counts the number of balls that have entered the winning hole for each winning hole, and counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball ejection path. The number of balls (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing to calculate the accessory ratio, so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 can use the The number of balls that entered each winning hole until the timing to calculate the object ratio, or from the previous calculation of the object ratio until the timing to calculate the object ratio next time, is calculated as the number of balls that entered each winning hole. In addition, the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

In this way, the number of winning balls in the winning openings actually detected by the MPU 201 is input from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, so the accessory ratio management chip 207 can control You can accurately determine the number of balls recognized as winning.

Also, suppose that the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that entered each winning hole for each winning hole, and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). If you do not do this and perform these counts only with the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio management chip 207 will also enter prizes into each prize opening and guide the ball to the ball ejection path at short intervals (for example, 2 millisecond intervals). The target balls must be monitored, which increases the processing load and may increase power consumption.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the counting results of the MPU 201 are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at 0.5 second intervals, so the accessory ratio management chip 207 sets the counting results every 0.5 seconds. Each winning prize will be awarded between the time when the power is turned on and the timing to calculate the accessory ratio for the first time, or between the time when the accessory ratio is calculated the previous time and the time when the accessory ratio is calculated the next time. The number of balls that entered the winning hole may be counted for each winning hole, and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be counted. Therefore, increases in processing load and power consumption on the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole for each winning hole, and also counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls that have been used in the game). In order to do this, the winnings in each prize opening and the balls guided to the ball ejection path are monitored at 2 millisecond intervals, for example, but in the first place, these monitors are used for the main games such as jackpot lottery and prize ball determination. This is necessary for performing control, and processing is originally performed at short time intervals of 2 milliseconds. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) fires balls into the game area at an interval of about 0.6 seconds, so each winning slot is counted at an interval of 0.5 seconds. The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) is in most cases 0 or 1 ball, and at most a few balls. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, by processing this count, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203. Therefore, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that entered each winning hole within 0.5 seconds, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game). Even if the process of counting the number of

The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first reading memory 263, a second reading memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") 266. These are connected to each other via a bus 206. The bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and the test terminal 207a.

Further, a large capacitor 267 is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The capacitor 267 is charged while power is being supplied to the main control device 110, and when the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power outage or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 The power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to execute processing associated with power-off. Note that instead of the capacitor 267, a rechargeable secondary battery may be connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207.

The CPU 261 is a calculation device that controls the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and controls the role in the pachinko machine 10 by executing a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207. The accessory ratio management chip 207 manages the ratio of objects. By having the CPU 261 manage the accessory ratios in the accessory ratio management chip 207, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the functions and specifications of the accessory ratio management chip 207 by changing the software.

The RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 has a built-in rechargeable and dischargeable secondary battery (not shown), and using the secondary battery as a power source, the RTC 266 always keeps track of the current time and outputs the current time. The time output by the RTC 266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio set by the trigger setting area 265b is "time", and the time indicated by the RTC 266 is set in the trigger setting area. When the time matches or exceeds the "predetermined time" set in 265b, processing for calculating the accessory ratio is executed. In addition, details will be described later, but the first reading memory 263 stores jackpot information, door open information, error information or When out-of-hours information is added, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266, and the read time is added to each piece of data together with each piece of information.

The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various information set by the MPU 201, and is constituted by SRAM (Static Random Access Memory), which is a volatile memory in which data can be read and written. The buffers 262 include a starting 1 buffer 262a, a starting 2 buffer 262b, a regular 1 buffer 262c, a regular 2 buffer 262d, a big winning opening buffer 262e, an out buffer 262f, a jackpot buffer 262g, an open buffer 262h, an error buffer 262i, etc. is provided at least.

The first 1 buffer 262a stores the value of the first 1 counter 203d set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The value of the first 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the first 2 buffer 262b. The value of the normal 1 counter 203f, which is set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals, is stored in the normal 1 buffer 262c. The value of the Ordinary 2 counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the Ordinary 2 buffer 262d. The value of the big winning hole counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the big winning hole buffer 262e. The out buffer 262f stores the value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals.

When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is a jackpot, the information (jackpot information) is stored in the jackpot buffer 262g. When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened, the information (door-opening information) is stored in the opening buffer 262h. When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is in error, the information (in-error information) is stored in the in-error buffer 262i.

In the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 performs settings (writes) to various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and upon receiving an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 performs setting information reception processing (FIG. 19), which will be described later. (see). The setting information reception process counts the number of winning balls for each winning slot based on various information set in the buffer 262, and calculates the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the balls launched into the gaming area). The number of balls is counted and stored in the first reading memory 263, and information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

The setting register 265 is a register for setting setting values necessary for the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The setting register 265 is provided with at least a prize ball number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

A prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. Trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set in the trigger setting area 265b. When the main control device 110 is powered on, the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, the CPU 261 sets the prize ball number table 202e in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and sets the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b.

The prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the accessory ratio. Here, the number of winning balls for each winning hole is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and conventionally, this information is stored in the ROM 202. Every time the power is supplied, the information regarding the number of prize balls is sent to the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the prize ball number data setting area of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is sent. 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls, which differs for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, manufacturing of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Furthermore, if the models of pachinko machines are different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the same accessory ratio management chip 207 is used for different models of pachinko machines, the ratio of the characters can be calculated accurately.

The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261, and it is determined whether or not the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated in the trigger information data 202f has arrived, and when the timing has come. If it is determined, a process of calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity in which information regarding the accessory ratio can be recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but takes into consideration the jackpot probability, probability variation rate, etc. in the pachinko machine 10. Like this pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the ratio of accessories determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the power is supplied. By transmitting the trigger information data 202f to the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 each time the accessory is played, the accessory ratio management chip 207 releases the accessory at a timing that matches the jackpot probability and probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264.

Note that only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f that are transmitted during the startup process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 are the prize ball number data. It is configured to be set in a setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b. The startup process is a so-called boot process, and is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false prize ball number table or trigger information data in the prize ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

The first reading memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 while accumulating it until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. The first reading memory 263 is constituted by a volatile memory in which data can be read and written, for example, SRAM. Note that the first reading memory 263 may be configured by DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing a larger amount of data.

The first reading memory 263 includes a start 1 counter 263a, a start 2 counter 263b, a normal 1 counter 263c, a normal 2 counter 263d, a big winning opening counter 263e, an out counter 263f, a jackpot data 263g, an open data 263h, and an error state. At least data 263i and overtime data 263j are stored. These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on an initialization signal sent from the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on ( (See S710 in FIG. 18).

In addition, these counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are referenced by the accessory ratio calculation process executed by the CPU 261 when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, and necessary processing is executed. After that, they are all initialized to 0 again by the CPU 261 (S744 in FIG. 21). As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 while accumulating it again until it is time to calculate the accessory ratio next time. .

The first starting counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the first starting opening 64a until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the first counter 203d indicating the number of balls that hit the first starting port 64a for 0.5 seconds in the first starting buffer 262a, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the first starting buffer 262a. (That is, the number of balls that hit the first starting port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first starting counter 263a.

The second starting counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the second starting opening 64b until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the first 2 counter 203e, which indicates the number of balls that hit the first starting port 64a for 0.5 seconds, in the first 2 buffer 262b, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the first 2 buffer 262b. (That is, the number of balls that hit the second starting port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first two counter 263b.

The normal 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning opening 63a until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the normal 1 counter 203f indicating the number of balls that entered the first normal winning slot 63a for 0.5 seconds in the normal 1 buffer 262c, the CPU 261 sets the value in the normal 1 buffer 262c. The value (that is, the number of balls that entered the first normal winning slot 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 1 counter 263c.

The normal 2 counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning opening 63b until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the Ordinary 2 counter 203g, which indicates the number of balls that entered the second ordinary prize opening 63b for 0.5 seconds, in the Ordinary 2 buffer 262d, the CPU 261 sets the value of the Ordinary 2 counter 203g in the Ordinary 2 buffer 262d. The value (that is, the number of balls that entered the second normal winning slot 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 2 counter 263d.

The big winning hole counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole 65a until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the big winning hole counter 203h indicating the number of balls that entered the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds in the big winning hole buffer 262e, the CPU 261 sets the value in the big winning hole buffer 262e. The value (that is, the number of balls that entered the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big winning hole counter 263e.

The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, balls launched into the game area) until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the out counter 203i, which indicates the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path for 0.5 seconds, in the out buffer 262f, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the out buffer 262f (that is, 0 The number of balls guided to the ball ejection path for 5 seconds) is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the accessory ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is the "number of shots", this out counter 263f is referenced, and the number of balls (number of shots) indicated by the out counter 263f is set in the trigger setting area When the number of pitches exceeds the "predetermined number of pitches" set in 265b, the CPU 261 executes processing to calculate the ratio of accessories.

If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot before the timing for calculating the accessory ratio, the jackpot data 263g stores jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has won a jackpot at the time and the time. This data is also specified. When the MPU 201 sets jackpot information indicating that a jackpot is in progress as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot buffer 262g, the CPU 261 converts the jackpot information, together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266, into the jackpot buffer 262g. Added to medium data 263g.

Opening data 263h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 will open the door if the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the opening of the inner frame 12 or front frame 14 (door) by the time the accessory ratio is calculated. This is data that specifies door-open information indicating that the door is open, along with the time at that time. When the MPU 201 sets door open information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the open buffer 262h, the CPU 261 sets the door open information to the open buffer 262h. is added to the open data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes an error state before the timing to calculate the accessory ratio, the error data 263i stores error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state at that time. This data is specified together with the time of day. When the MPU 201 sets error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in error as a gaming state in the error buffer 262i, the CPU 261 saves the error information along with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. , is added to the error data 263i.

The after-hours data 263j is stored in the pachinko machine 10 when the MPU 201 sets (writes) to the buffer 262 during late-night hours (for example, between 0:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m.), which is normally outside business hours. This is data that specifies out-of-hours information indicating that some activity was performed late at night, together with the time at that time. When setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 reads the current time from the RTC 266, and if it is determined that the time is in the late night time period, the out-of-hours information is It is added to the after-hours data 263j together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

The second reading memory 264 is composed of a nonvolatile memory in which data can be read and written, such as a flash memory. The second reading memory 264 only needs to retain stored data even when the power is turned off, and may be a ferroelectric random access memory (FeRAM) or a magnetoresistive RAM other than a flash memory. (MRAM: Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory), resistance change memory (ReRAM: Resistive Random Access Memory), etc. may be configured. Furthermore, while the second reading memory 264 is configured with a DRAM, by continuing to supply backup voltage to the DRAM from the power supply device 115 even when the power is turned off, data can be retained even when the power is turned off. You may also do so.

The second reading memory 264 stores at least accessory ratio data 264a, continuous accessory ratio data 264b, fired ball number data 264c, and game state data 264d.

The accessory ratio data 264a is data in which data representing the accessory ratio calculated at each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous accessory ratio data 264b is data in which data representing the continuous accessory ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) is recorded together with the calculated time.

Here, the accessory ratio is the percentage of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player that are paid out in accordance with winnings to the second starting opening 64b and the grand prize opening 65a where the accessory operates. It shows the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) and is set at 70% or less. In addition, the continuous accessory ratio is the number of balls (prize balls) that are paid out as a result of winning into the grand prize opening 65a where the accessory is activated continuously, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. It shows the ratio of the number of balls) and is set at 60% or less.

Originally, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio refer to the above-mentioned ratio when a test shooting test of game balls is conducted for 10 hours. At each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in , the CPU 261 determines whether the player The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out as a result of winning to the second starting hole 64b and the big winning hole 65a is calculated out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out in It is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time. Also, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power is turned on until reaching the timing for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing, the big prize The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out upon winning into the mouth 65a is calculated and recorded in the continuous role object ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to discharge the electricity between the timing (trigger) for calculating the most recent accessory ratio and the time when it is determined that the power is cut off. Based on the number of balls (prize balls) received, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, and each is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a or the continuous accessory ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and recorded, even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is cut off, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio will be maintained without leaking. The ratio can be calculated.

The number of balls that entered the first starting port 64a indicated by the first starting counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls entering the second starting port 64b indicated by the second starting counter 263b, and the number of balls that entered the second starting port 64b indicated by the first starting counter 263b stored in the first reading memory 263. The number of balls that entered the first normal winning hole 63a indicated by the first normal winning hole 63c, the number of balls that entered the second normal winning hole 63b indicated by the second normal winning hole counter 263d, and the large number of balls that entered the second normal winning hole 63b indicated by the large winning hole counter 263e. The number of prize balls associated with each winning hole shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a for each of the number of winning balls in the winning hole 65a. By multiplying , it is possible to calculate the number of balls paid out for each winning hole when the winning hole is won. By summing these numbers, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

As a result, the number of balls paid out as a result of winning into the second start opening 64b and the number of balls paid out as a result of winning into the grand prize opening 65a, relative to the total number of balls paid out to the player. By calculating the ratio of the total to the number of , the accessory ratio can be calculated. In addition, the continuous role object ratio can be calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out as a result of winning to the grand prize opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player.

The fired ball count data 264c calculates the total number of balls fired into the game area counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263, at each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio, and the time at that timing. This is the data recorded together. The total number of balls fired into the game area from the time when the power is turned on until reaching the timing for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing is indicated by the out counter 263f. When it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the fired ball number data 264c together with the time indicated by the RTC 266.

The gaming state data 264d includes jackpot information 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and overtime data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263, jackpot information, door open information, error information, and overtime information. This is data recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. When the timing to calculate the accessory ratio is reached, the jackpot information, door open information, stored in the jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and out-of-hours data 263j in the first reading memory 263, The error information, the out-of-hours information, and the time associated with each piece of information are recorded by the CPU 261 in the gaming state data 264d.

At this time, for example, if the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that jackpots are occurring continuously as a gaming state, so the jackpot with the oldest time is Only the information and its time are recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Similarly, for door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information, if each piece of information is stored in each data 263h to 263j at intervals of less than 1 second, the oldest time information and that time are stored respectively. only is recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the gaming state data 264d can be kept small.

When recording jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information in the gaming state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) each piece of information starting from the oldest time information and records the information in the gaming state data 264d. Record. When outputting the information recorded in the gaming state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the order in which it was recorded. As a result, each piece of information is output in order from the oldest to the oldest, so the inspection device 300 can easily analyze changes in gaming status over time by analyzing the information in the order in which it is output.

However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily have to store each piece of information in the game state data 264d in order from the oldest information. In this case, when outputting the information recorded in the gaming state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read information from the gaming state data 264d in order from the oldest time and send it to the inspection device 300, or the CPU 261 may , each piece of information may be output to the inspection device 300 in the order in which it was recorded, and the inspection device 300 may rearrange the pieces of received information starting from the oldest information.

In addition, the jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information stored in the first reading memory 263's jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and overtime data 263j are respectively supported. All of them may be recorded in the gaming state data 264d together with the attached time. Although the storage capacity required for the gaming state data 264d is large, by outputting this to the inspection device 300, the operating state of the pachinko machine 10 can be analyzed while observing minute changes in the gaming state.

Here, the information regarding the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the total number of balls fired into the game area that can be recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, and the number of fired balls data 264c are stored in a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information that can be recorded in the gaming state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of balls fired 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is replaced. is recorded. For example, the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each configured like a ring buffer, and the position at which information is written on each ring buffer is managed. By separately preparing a memory in the second reading memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second reading memory 264, and shifting the writing position by 1 every time information is written, the oldest information can be stored. The process of erasing the data and recording the latest information there can be realized. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data item, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. In addition, when the number of information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can analyze the information including the latest status of the pachinko machine 10. You can make it happen. Note that by preparing a memory in the second reading memory 264 for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer, even if the power is cut off midway, this information can be saved after the power is supplied. New information can be added and recorded from the continuation of previously stored information.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 outputs the accessory ratio data 264a and the continuous accessory ratio data 264b recorded in the second reading memory 264. The pitch count data 264c and the game status data 264d are transmitted to the inspection device 300 in order. When transmitting each data 264a to 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 transmits each information recorded in each data 264a to 264d (including the recorded time information associated with each information) to the recorded They are read out in order and sent to the inspection device 300. Just by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs and the process of transmitting each piece of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is executed, so the transmission can be quickly executed. can be completed. Therefore, the inspection device 300 analyzes the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and can quickly and easily discover fraudulent acts from the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio.

Specifically, if the data to be transmitted from now on to the inspection device 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds information to the data. The information recorded from the location where is written to the location indicated in the memory that manages the location where information is written (i.e., the location where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Send to device 300. On the other hand, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 satisfies the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) determined for each, the data is indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written. The reading position is shifted one by one starting from the position next to the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the oldest time information is recorded), and the position indicated by the memory that manages the writing position of the information (i.e. , the position where the latest time information was recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, information is outputted to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

Since the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, even if the power is cut off midway through, the second reading memory 264 records information regarding the ratio of accessories in the pachinko machine 10, etc. continues to be. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can receive and analyze information regarding the accessory ratio, etc., including information before the power is turned off.

Here, some fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some means, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b There are people who try to increase the chances of hitting the jackpot by increasing the number of winnings. Also, there are people who try to obtain a large number of prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening 65a or by guiding the balls to the big winning hole 65a. If such a fraudulent act occurs, the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio will increase.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with an accessory ratio management chip 207, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 obtains winning information for each winning opening from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. , the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10 are calculated at a predetermined timing and continue to be recorded. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300. Thereby, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, it is possible to discover the fraudulent act if it has been carried out.

Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls fired into the gaming area and information regarding the gaming state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are high, the cause is investigated based on information regarding the number of balls fired into the gaming area and information regarding the gaming state. be able to.

Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, ROM 202, and the like. This makes it difficult for a fraudster to alter the winning information etc. input into the accessory ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, it is difficult to falsify or delete the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, high reliability can be maintained for the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated and output by the accessory ratio management chip 207.

In addition, the accessory ratio management chip 207 includes a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264, and counts the number of winning balls for each winning opening in the first reading memory 263. The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the number of winning balls for each winning opening counted in , and are recorded in the second reading memory 264. Here, the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, but generally non-volatile memories require a large amount of power to write, take a long time to write, and have poor durability. There may be a limit to the number of times you can write. This embodiment separates the first reading memory 263 made up of volatile memory and the second reading memory 264 made up of non-volatile memory. By performing the process of counting and storing the number of winning balls for each winning opening at high speed, it is possible to count the winning balls for each winning opening without missing anything. Then, later, from the number of winning balls for each winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263, the process of calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio and recording it in the second reading memory 264 is performed at a predetermined timing ( Since the number of times of writing to the second reading memory 264 can be reduced by executing the command for each trigger (trigger), it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problems caused by non-volatile memory from becoming apparent.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds with a force corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs turning on and off from a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable effects and continuous output. It controls the setting of the display mode of performances performed on the third symbol display device 81, such as advance notice performances.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the presentation mode of the time.

When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the presentation mode of Super Reach, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

The RAM 223 is a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a command storage area (not shown) that indicates that a variable effect should be started in the on state. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). Then, it is turned off when the variable display setting on the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and controls various screen displays such as the variable display of the third symbol (variable effect) and the jackpot effect at the time of a jackpot, using an audio lamp. Control is performed according to commands sent from the control device 113 (main control device 110).

The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239, 240. have. The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. The image controller 236 is connected to a video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235, and is also connected to an output port 238 via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. It should be noted that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different jackpot lottery probability or a different number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot, there are models with exactly the same pattern configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command and other various commands output from the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores performance data (character information) such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 includes an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of character information read out from the character ROM 235 in a decompressed format in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an area (not shown) for storing the decompressed plural character information. This memory has a frame buffer area (not shown) that temporarily stores one frame of display data generated using at least a portion of character information until the display data is displayed.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to It is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminal of the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 10 to 17. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and main processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is started by inputting a power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then startup processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt processing, first, external output processing is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt processing and main processing, commands to be sent to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, the reserved ball count command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 12) is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13) and the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14), which is one process of the fluctuation process, are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball launch signal set when a ball is launched in the process of S111 described below is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of a jackpot state, the big prize opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning prize device 65 is opened or closed. A large opening opening/closing process is executed to open and close the large opening (S103). That is, the big winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the big winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the big prize opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the big prize opening 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the second symbol display device 83 executes a display control process for a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "○" or "x") (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passing, and the second symbol is changed on the second symbol display device 83. Display is performed. Then, a second symbol lottery is carried out based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in a winning state, the electric accessory attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Next, switch reading processing is executed (S106). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information). Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 11.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value. (In this embodiment, 899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively) are cleared to 0, respectively. In addition, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. It is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the initial value is set in the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then, the first starting port 64a And a starting prize winning process is executed in response to a winning to any one of the second starting ports 64b (S110). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and the details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process, a firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. Then, when the ball launch is on, in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112, information on the ball launch signal is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Further, the other processes (S112) include a process of determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, even though the information on the ball firing signal is set in the process of S111, the ball guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the ball fired into the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for more than a predetermined time. If there is no such error, it is determined that there is a possibility that the ball is jammed and an error condition exists. Further, if the payout abnormality signal is read in the process of S102, it is determined that the ball payout is in an error state. Furthermore, if a large vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 or if it is determined that a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been committed in the game and that the game is in an error state. .

Note that the determination as to whether large vibrations have been applied to the pachinko machine 10 can be made by installing a vibration sensor in the pachinko machine 10 to detect vibrations, and inputting the output of the vibration sensor to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. This is performed by reading the output of the vibration sensor during the process of S112. Further, in order to determine whether or not a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a magnetic sensor that detects changes in magnetism, and the output of the magnetic sensor is input to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. This is performed by reading the output of the magnetic sensor in the process of S112.

In the process of S112, if it is determined that there is an error state, an error command including information regarding the error type is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type can be output from the audio output device 226, the display lamp 34 can be turned on or blinked, and an image can be displayed according to the error type on the third symbol display device 81. .

Next, the switch reading process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing this switch reading process (S106).

In the switch reading process, first, each switch of the first starting port switch 208a, second starting port switch 208b, first normal winning port switch 208c, second normal winning port switch 208d, big winning port switch 208e, and out switch 208f is The output is read by referring to the start 1 port 205a, start 2 port 205b, normal 1 port 205c, normal 2 port 205d, big prize opening port 205e and out port 205f of the input/output port 205, and the first starting port 64a, The detection information ( winning detection information) is saved (S151). Determination of one ball winning a prize and one ball guided to the ball ejection path is performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the respective switches 208a to 208f.

Next, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a prize has been won through the process of S151 among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. If there is a determined winning hole, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole (that is, the number specified by the prize ball number table 202e) corresponding to the winning hole is paid out in a manner that corresponds to the number of balls won. A prize ball command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S152). As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Then, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a prize has been won through the process of S151 among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. If there is a winning opening that has been determined, one of the first 1 counter 203d, first 2 counter 203e, ordinary 1 counter 203f, ordinary 2 counter 203g, and big winning opening counter 203h corresponds to the winning opening that has won. If it is determined that there is a ball guided to the ball ejection path, the out counter 203i is counted up by 1 (S153).

Next, it is determined whether 0.5 seconds have passed since the previous winning information (values of each counter 203d to 203i and information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10) was set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 ( S154). As a result, if 0.5 seconds have not elapsed (S154: No), the switch reading process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have passed (S154: Yes), the processes of S155 to S157 are executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the ordinary 1 counter 203f, the ordinary 2 counter 203g, and the big winning opening counter 203h are used as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is used as out information, and at that time This is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (S155).

As a result, the value of the first 1 counter 203d is set to the first 1 buffer 262a of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the value of the first 2 counter 203e is set to the first 2 buffer 262b of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the value of the first 2 counter 203e is set to the first 2 buffer 262b of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The value of 203f is set to the ordinary 1 buffer 262c of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the value of the ordinary 2 counter 203g is set to the ordinary 2 buffer 262d of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the value of the big prize opening counter 203h is set to the ordinary 2 buffer 262c of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The value of the out counter 203i is set to the big winning opening buffer 262e of the object ratio management chip 207, and the value of the out counter 203i is set to the out buffer 262f of the object ratio management chip 207.

In this way, the counters 203d to 203i continue to count the number of balls for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds, the values of the counters 203d to 203h become winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with information indicating the gaming state at that time. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole every 0.5 seconds, and also counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball ejection path ( That is, the number of balls used in the game is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing to calculate the accessory ratio, so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 can use the The number of balls that entered each winning hole until the timing to calculate the object ratio, or from the previous calculation of the object ratio until the timing to calculate the object ratio next time, is calculated as the number of balls that entered each winning hole. In addition, the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

Suppose that the MPU 201 does not count the number of balls that entered each winning hole for each winning hole or the number of balls that were guided to the ball ejection path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game). If these counts are performed only with the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio management chip 207 will also allow players to enter prizes into each prize opening or be guided to the ball ejection path at short intervals (for example, 2 millisecond intervals). The bulbs must be monitored, which increases the processing load and may increase power consumption.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the counting results of the MPU 201 are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at 0.5 second intervals, so the accessory ratio management chip 207 sets the counting results every 0.5 seconds. Each winning prize will be awarded between the time when the power is turned on and the timing to calculate the accessory ratio for the first time, or between the time when the accessory ratio is calculated the previous time and the time when the accessory ratio is calculated the next time. The number of balls that entered the winning hole may be counted for each winning hole, and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be counted. Therefore, increases in processing load and power consumption on the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole for each winning hole, and also counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls that have been used in the game). Therefore, the winnings in each prize opening and the balls guided to the ball ejection path are monitored at 2 millisecond intervals when the timer interrupt process is executed, but in the first place, these monitors are not used for jackpot lottery or ball ejection. This is necessary for performing the main controls of the game such as determining prize balls, and processing is originally performed at short time intervals of 2 milliseconds. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) fires balls into the game area at an interval of about 0.6 seconds, so each winning slot is counted at an interval of 0.5 seconds. The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) is in most cases 0 or 1 ball, and at most a few balls. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, by processing this count, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203. Therefore, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that entered each winning hole within 0.5 seconds, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game). Even if the process of counting the number of

The gaming state set by the process of S155 includes, for example, a jackpot, an opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and an error. Whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and checking the output of the door opening switch 208g.

Further, whether or not the gaming state is in error is based on the result determined by the timer interrupt process S112. In the process of S155, when it is determined that the game is in an error state in the process of S112, information indicating that the gaming state is in an error is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

If the gaming state set by the process of S155 includes a jackpot, jackpot information is stored in the jackpot buffer 262g, and if the gaming state includes the inner frame 12 or front frame 14 being opened, the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot buffer 262g. Door-open information is stored in the middle buffer 262h, and if the game state includes an error, the error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, this information is finally recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information regarding the gaming state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with information regarding the accessory ratio. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the ratio of accessories in the pachinko machine 10 and finds an inexplicable tendency in the ratio of accessories, the inspection device 300 searches for the cause by referring to information indicating the gaming state. Can be done.

After the process of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S156). Based on this interrupt signal, the accessory ratio management chip 207 executes a setting information reception process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, and determines the winning ball for each winning opening based on various information set in the buffer 262. , the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the balls fired into the game area), and the number of balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the pachinko machine Information regarding the game state of No. 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

After the process of S156, the first 1 counter 203d, first 2 counter 203e, ordinary 1 counter 203f, ordinary 2 counter 203g, big winning opening counter 203h corresponding to each winning opening, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are set to 0. is initialized (S157), the switch reading process is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the process of S157, the number of balls that entered each winning hole in the next 0.5 seconds is counted again for each winning hole by the counters 203d to 203h. In addition, the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out counter 203i.

In addition, in the process of S154, if this process is executed for the first time after power is supplied to the main controller 110, the winning information (values of each counter 203d to i and the pachinko machine It is assumed that 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the information regarding the gaming state (No. 10) was set (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. As a result, the number of balls won into each prize opening detected before the power was cut off, and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path, which are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the time of the power cut. The values of the counters 203d to 203i in the RAM 203 that have not been set can be set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 immediately after power is supplied, provided that the values are maintained even during power outage. Therefore, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress omission of recording of winning information and out information due to power cutoff.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the starting opening (starting winning), which is either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, and if there is a starting winning, each counter C1 to C3, A process of storing (holding) the value of CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is executed. It also executes a process for transmitting the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the MPU 201 executes this starting prize winning process, it first determines whether or not a ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (S201). Here, by the process of S151 of the switch reading process (see FIG. 11), the first starting port switch 208a that detects winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port switch 208a that detects winning in the second starting port 64b are activated. The result of whether or not there is a winning in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, which is determined based on the output signal of the opening switch 208b, is used.

When it is determined that a ball has entered the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (a start entry has occurred) (S201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N for the variable performance reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S202). Then, if there is no entry into either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (S201: No), or if there is a entry into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b but the number of reserved balls N is not less than 4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N<4 (S202: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (reserved 1 is added to the number of pitches (N) (S203). Then, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1, the first winning type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved pitch number counter 203a. 203b3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the reserved pitch number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", it is stored in each storage area of the reserved second area, and if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", it is stored in the reserved third area. If the value of the reserved pitch number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the fourth reservation area.

Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 (number of reserved balls N), the 1st hit random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the process of S204, the 1st hit random number counter C1, In order to transmit the held ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 to the audio lamp control device 113, the held ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the held pitch count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

By receiving the held pitch number command, the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the held pitch number symbol corresponding to the held pitch number N in the held pitch number display area Db (see FIG. 4). do. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the held pitch count command to read in advance before executing a variable effect based on each value, and determines how the variable effect is executed. It is determined whether the change will be like that (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will be the change time, etc.) before the execution of the change effect. Then, based on the results of the pre-read judgment, it is possible to decide whether to perform various effects.

Note that the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 to be included in the held ball count command in the process of S205 may be the values themselves read from the counter buffer in the process of S204, or the values of the held ball storage area in the process of S204 may be used. A read value stored (suspended) in 203b may be used.

After completing the process in S205, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the fluctuation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The variation process (S109) is to control the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and the variation performance performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is currently a jackpot (S301). During a jackpot game, the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 during a jackpot game and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends are included. As a result of the determination, if it is a jackpot (S301: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

If it is not a jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined time has passed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (S303: No), the present process is ended. Thereby, the stopped symbols in the variable production are displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the stopped symbols can be visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S303, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the held pitch number counter 203a (the number of held balls displayed in the fluctuation display held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the number of reserved pitches counter 203a (number of reserved pitches N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to start executing the variable production, and first, the value of the number of reserved pitches counter 203a (number of reserved pitches The number of pitches (N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because execution of one of the suspended variable performances is started by the fluctuation start process (S307), so the number of suspended balls decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the held ball storage area 203b toward the held ball execution area 203c, from the first held area to the held ball execution area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area 203c, second pending area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area.

After the data shift process in S306, a fluctuation start process is executed for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), returning to timer interrupt processing. Note that the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 14.

In the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is 0 (S304: No), a demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, it is determined whether a demonstration is being performed (S308). In this determination process, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the reserved pitch number counter 203a (the number of reserved pitches N) is greater than 0. The period is determined to be a demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during the external output process (S101 in FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the demo command, the audio lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the demonstration command is set when, as described above, there is no held ball when a predetermined period of time has passed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the variable display does not start even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the variation is stopped, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that if it is determined in the process of S308 that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether a second predetermined time period longer than the predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S309 when the second predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Thereby, when there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation is stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration performance immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S310). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and when this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S310: No), the display on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is lit, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode is set in which the red LED is turned on.

Note that the variation processing is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time a fluctuation process is executed, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbols are set in advance by a variation start process (S307) which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start processing, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the processing of S306, and if it is a jackpot, the first winning type counter C2 is Depending on the value, either the symbol will become a 15R variable jackpot after a jackpot (a variable probability jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15), or a 2R probability variable jackpot (a pattern that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2). It is determined which symbol will result in a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, after a jackpot, if it becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot, the blue LED is lit, if it becomes a 2R probability variation jackpot, the red LED is lit, and if it becomes a 15R normal jackpot, the red LED and blue LED are lit. The LED will light up. In addition, if it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set in order to confirm the display (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm the display of the stopped symbol. conduct.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the variation start process (S307), which is one process of the variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S307). In this fluctuation start process (S307), a "jackpot" or "miss" lottery (jackpot lottery) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and the first symbol display device 37 And the effect pattern (variable pattern) of the variable effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a jackpot is determined to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(a)). A lottery (judgment determination) process is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the mode at the time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal low probability state, "7,307,582" is defined as the jackpot random number value. In addition, when the possible game state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892'' are defined as the jackpot random value.

In the process of S401, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match. In this case, it is determined that it is a jackpot. As a result of the processing in S401, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(b) (see), the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. A 15R regular jackpot that transitions to a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds, a 15R regular jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2, or a 2R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2. It is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of a jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. 3 Set the display mode on the symbol display device 81 at the time of jackpot.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, the variation time until the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are stopped and displayed in the display mode at the time of the jackpot is determined. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8(c)) to be used is selected according to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. Then, if a 15R sure-variable jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "15R jackpot common" group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. That is, in this case, one of the variation A, variation B, and variation C is selected.

In addition, when 2R probability variable jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, in the group of "2R probability variable jackpot only" of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c A variation pattern associated with the value of counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, only the 2R variation is selected in this case. Note that the relationship between the variation patterns (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) and variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a jackpot (S401: No), a display mode for a win is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the third symbol is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of front and back off reach, front and back off reach, and complete off is set. In this embodiment, as described above, the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. Tables are set up differently.

Next, the variation pattern for the loss is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, the variation time until the loss symbol is displayed is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. At this time, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state other than the time-saving state, the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 8(d)) corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball counter 203a is selected. Also, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state or a high probability state during a certain probability period, the loss (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 8(e)) corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball counter 203a is selected.

Then, when complete failure is set as the stop type in the process of S404, in the "complete failure only" group of the selected fluctuation pattern table for failure (normal) 202d2 or fluctuation pattern table for failure (probable variation) 202d3, A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation D or variation E is selected.

In addition, in the process of S402, if the stop type is set as front/rear off reach or front/back off reach, then "reach common" in the selected out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or out (probable) variation pattern table 202d3. In the group, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation A, variation B, and variation C are selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the process of S406, based on the variation pattern determined in the processes of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113 (S406). Furthermore, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 (S415), and the process returns to the variation process. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are converted into audio in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) that is executed next. It is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process moves to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S614 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S606), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S614 in such a case.

Note that, as will be described later in the process of S706 in FIG. 17, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 203, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S615, S616).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. In addition, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S615, S616) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( (S607: Yes), clearing the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S610, an initialization signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S610). Thereby, by receiving the initialization signal, the accessory ratio management chip 207 executes initial setting processing such as initializing the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 to all 0 (S711 in FIG. 18), The accessory ratio management chip 207 is initialized so that it can manage accessory ratios.

Next, information on the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize is set when a prize is won in each prize opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. Based on the number of balls, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Here, the number of winning balls for each winning hole is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and conventionally, this information is stored in the ROM 202. Every time the power is supplied, the information regarding the number of prize balls is sent to the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the prize ball number data setting area of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is sent. 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls, which differs for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, manufacturing of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Moreover, when the models of pachinko machines are different, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202, and even if the same accessory ratio management chip 207 is used for different models of pachinko machines, the ratio of the characters can be calculated accurately.

Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S612). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b, and when the timing (trigger) to calculate the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f comes, the pachinko machine 10 The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated.

Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity in which information regarding the accessory ratio can be recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but takes into consideration the jackpot probability, probability variation rate, etc. in the pachinko machine 10. Like this pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the ratio of accessories determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the power is supplied. By transmitting the trigger information data 202f to the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 each time the accessory is played, the accessory ratio management chip 207 releases the accessory at a timing that matches the jackpot probability and probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264.

After the process of S612, interrupts are permitted (S613). Then, the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 10) (S703), and the process moves to S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 10 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, opening and closing of the jackpot 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is controlled. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired first winning random number counter C1 depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process will vary depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at the time.

The above-mentioned processes of S702 and S703, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, since the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated. The counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first random number counter C1, the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. . In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first per random number counter C1 and the second per random number counter C4 are updated using these as initial values for updating. can be given randomness.

In the process of S701, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. , it means that the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 15 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). At the same time, power-off information is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S701 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processes in S702 and S703, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the timing when various settings by timer interrupt processing are completed and the updates of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are completed. . Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer can be saved in the initial setting process (S601). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S701. As a result, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which a process to be executed periodically is executed by a timer interrupt process, and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, in this embodiment, the prize ball counting signal, payout abnormal signal reading process (S102), large opening opening/closing process (S103), second symbol control process (S105), and switch reading that are executed in the timer interrupt process Part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step is provided in the main process to determine whether a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals is executed depending on the state of the game. Since the time required for this changes, even with this configuration, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22. The processing of the CPU 261 can be roughly divided into the main processing for managing the ratio of accessories that is activated when the power is turned on, and the setting information reception that is executed based on the interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201. and a test result output process that is executed based on the fact that the test device 300 is connected to the test terminal 207a.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, the accessory ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this accessory ratio management main process. This accessory ratio management main process is started when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207.

When the accessory ratio management main process is executed, first, it is determined whether an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal has not been received (S710: No), the determination in S710 is continued. If it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711 and initial settings are performed (S711). As a result, the accessory ratio management chip 207 waits until at least the initialization of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 is completed and the MPU 201 is ready to start controlling the game, and then executes the initial settings of the accessory ratio management chip 207. I will do it.

In the initial setting at S711, necessary initialization is performed for each device in the accessory ratio management chip 207 before starting the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. For example, the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to zero. As a result, in the buffer 262, even if there is a buffer that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, it is possible to prevent meaningless data from remaining in the buffer, and the meaningless data is It is possible to prevent the data from being stored in the memory 263. In addition, in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning opening and the guide to the ball ejection path are stored in the first reading memory 263 from when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207 until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. It is possible to cumulatively count the number of balls fired into the game area (that is, the number of balls fired into the game area), and to store information regarding the game status during that time.

Next, it is determined whether information on the prize ball number table 202e has been received from the MPU 201 (S712). Then, while it is not received (S712: No), the process of S712 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has been received (S712: Yes), the received prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize is set when a prize is won in each prize opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. Based on the number of balls, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Next, it is determined whether the trigger information data 202f has been received from the MPU 201 (S714). Then, while it is not received (S714: No), the process of S714 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the trigger information data has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. Thereby, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and A continuous role ratio is calculated.

In this way, only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted during the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main control device 110 is powered on are the prize balls. It is configured to be set in the numerical data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false prize ball number table or trigger information data in the prize ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

Next, when the processing of S710 to S715 is completed, interrupt permission is set (S716). As a result, from now on, when receiving an interrupt signal transmitted after winning information etc. are set from the MPU 201, the setting information reception process is executed, and an error occurs based on the fact that the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. Test result output processing is executed by the interrupt signal.

Note that if the interrupt signals are input at the same time, the setting information receiving process is executed with priority over the test result output process. As a result, the latest winning information, out information, and information regarding the game status inputted from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and then information such as the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 can perform analysis including the latest information. On the other hand, if the interrupt signals are input at the same time, the test result output process may be executed with priority over the test device output process. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information regarding the accessory ratio, etc. can be transmitted to the inspection device 300.

Next, it is determined whether power-off information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717), and unless power-off information is received (S717: No), S717 is continued. In addition, during that time, if the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the setting information reception process is executed with priority over the process in S717, and an interrupt generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a is executed. If the test result signal is received, the test result output process is executed.

As a result of the processing in S717, if power-off information is received (S717: Yes), the power to the main control device 110 (accessory ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Therefore, the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S718), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

Next, the setting information reception process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this setting information receiving process. This setting information receiving process is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201.

The setting information reception process includes the winning information set in each buffer 262a to 262e by the MPU 201 (the values of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the ordinary 1 counter 203f, the ordinary 2 counter 203g, and the large winning opening counter 203h) and This is a process of storing in the first reading memory 263 the out information (value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the gaming state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i. In addition, when it is the timing to calculate the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on each counter 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263, and data regarding the number of balls fired and the game state are calculated. At the same time, processing for recording in the second reading memory 264 is also performed.

First, refer to FIG. 19. In the setting information reception process, first, it is determined whether or not there is door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720). If there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: Yes), the door opening information is set (added and stored) in the opening data 263h along with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. S721).

If it is determined through the process of S720 that there is no door release information in the open buffer 262h (S720: No), and after the process of S721, it is then determined whether there is error information in the error buffer 262i. (S722). If there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the error information is set (added and stored) in the error data 263i along with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723). .

If it is determined that there is no error information in the error buffer 262i through the process of S722 (S722: No), and after the process of S723, then the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is in the midnight time zone (midnight 0 to 6 a.m.) (S724). Normally, late night hours are non-business hours, so the fact that the MPU 201 sent an interrupt signal and executed this setting information reception process during this late night hours means that some kind of fraudulent activity occurred during late night hours. It is also possible that the incident occurred. Therefore, if it is determined that it is the midnight time zone through the process of S724 (S724: Yes), in order to keep a record of this, the after-hours information is added to the after-hours data 263j based on the current information indicated by the RTC 266. It is set (added and stored) together with the time (S725).

If it is determined that it is not the late night time zone through the process of S724 (S724: No), and after the process of S725, it is then determined whether there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726). If there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (added and stored) in the jackpot data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S727).

If it is determined through the process of S726 that there is no jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: No), and after the process of S727, the information is set in the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to each winning opening and the out switch 208f. The calculated values are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first reading memory 263 (S728).

Specifically, the value set in the first start buffer 262a corresponding to the first start port 64a (that is, the number of balls that hit the first start port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first start counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the first starting port 64a is accumulated in the first starting counter 263a. The value set in the first 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (that is, the number of balls that hit the second starting opening 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b is accumulated in the first two counter 263b.

The value set in the 1st normal winning slot 63a corresponding to the 1st normal winning slot 63a (that is, the number of balls that entered the first normal winning slot 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the 1st winning slot 263c. As a result, the number of balls that have won into the first normal winning slot 63a is accumulated in the normal 1 counter 263c. The value set in the Ordinary 2 buffer 262d corresponding to the second ordinary winning hole 63b (that is, the number of balls that entered the second ordinary winning hole 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the Ordinary 2 counter 263d. As a result, the number of balls that have won into the second normal winning opening 63b is accumulated in the normal 2 counter 263d. The value set in the big winning hole buffer 262e corresponding to the big winning hole 65a (that is, the number of balls that entered the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big winning hole counter 263e. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole 65a is accumulated in the big winning hole counter 263e.

Each of the counters 263a to 264f and each data 263g to 264j of the first reading memory 263 performs initial setting processing (see FIG. 18) that is executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the accessory ratio. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later and is executed when it is time to calculate. As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 while accumulating it again until the next timing to calculate the accessory ratio. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the description of the setting information winning process will be continued. After the process of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, if the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio, which is indicated by the trigger information data 202f, is the "number of shots" (S729: "number of shots"), the value of the out counter 263f (i.e., the game It is determined whether the number of balls fired into the area is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). If the value of the out counter 263f is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of pitches" (S730: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733). , the process moves to S734. Note that details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. On the other hand, if the value of the out counter 263f is not equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of pitches" (S730: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

By specifying the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio based on the number of balls fired, it is possible to always calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio when a predetermined number of balls are fired. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the ratio of bonuses and the ratio of continuous bonuses at the stage when many balls enter various winning slots and prize balls are played, so the average ratio of bonuses and the ratio of consecutive bonuses can be calculated. can. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate fluctuations in the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects in a short period of time in a normal game, so that the inspection device 300 can more easily analyze fraudulent activities.

In the process of S729, if the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f is "time" (S729: "time"), the current time shown in the RTC 266 is , it is determined whether the "predetermined time" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f has been reached (S731). Here, reaching includes not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 matches the "predetermined time" but also the case where the "predetermined time" has passed for the first time.

If it is determined by the process of S731 that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the "predetermined time" (S731: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to calculate the accessory ratio. Then, the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the process moves to S734. On the other hand, if the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

By specifying the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio based on the current time, even in situations where there are not many games played on the pachinko machine 10, the accessory ratio can be reliably calculated at the arrival of the predetermined time. and the continuous role object ratio can be calculated. Therefore, using the reliably calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio, the inspection device 300 can reliably analyze the presence or absence of fraudulent activity.

In the process of S729, if the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f is "gaming time" (S729: "gaming time"), the player at the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether the cumulative time (gaming time) in which the game was played is equal to or longer than the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

Here, the playing time can be calculated, for example, by the following method. That is, a gaming time counter is provided in the first reading memory 263. Like other counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263, the game time counter performs an initial setting process (see FIG. 18) that is executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later and is executed when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio. Then, in the setting information reception process, the value of the out buffer 262f is checked, and if a value of 1 or more is set, it means that the ball guided to the ball ejection path has been detected, that is, the ball is in the game area. Since this means that the shot has been fired, the game time counter is incremented by one. The setting information reception counter is activated by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. Therefore, the gaming time can be calculated by adding 0.5 seconds to the value of the gaming time counter.

If it is determined by the process of S732 that the playing time has exceeded the "predetermined time" (S732: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to calculate the accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio calculation process is executed. (S733), the process moves to S734. On the other hand, if the gaming time is less than the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are originally calculated by conducting a test shooting test of game balls for 10 hours. By specifying the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio based on the playing time, the accessory ratio management chip can calculate the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio that are close to the original definition. Analysis can be performed using the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio that are close to the original definition.

In the process of S734, the buffer 262 is initialized to all 0s (S734). As a result, even if there is a buffer that is not set for each buffer 262a to 262i when setting winning information, out information, and game information from the MPU 201 next time, it is possible to prevent meaningless data from remaining in the buffer. It is possible to prevent such meaningless data from being stored in the first reading memory 263. After the process of S734, the setting information receiving process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the accessory ratio calculation process (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this accessory ratio calculation process. The accessory ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording it in the second reading memory 264, and the timing for calculating the accessory ratio ( In addition to being executed when a trigger occurs (see FIG. 20), it is also executed when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18).

In the accessory ratio calculation process, first, the accessory ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the accessory ratio data 264a together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. and record it (S740). Next, the continuous accessory ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and is added and recorded to the continuous accessory ratio data 264b together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S741 ).

The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls that entered the first starting port 64a indicated by the first starting counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, and the number of balls that entered the second starting port 64b indicated by the second starting counter 263b. , the number of balls that entered the first normal winning hole 63a indicated by the normal winning hole counter 263c, the number of balls that entered the second normal winning hole 63b indicated by the normal winning hole counter 263d, and the number of balls that entered the winning hole 63b indicated by the large winning hole counter 263e. The prize corresponding to each winning hole shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is set for each of the number of balls that entered the big winning hole 65a. By multiplying the number of balls, for each winning hole, the number of balls paid out as a result of winning into that winning hole is calculated. Next, by summing these, the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated.

Then, the number of balls paid out as a result of winning into the second start opening 64b and the number of balls paid out as a result of winning into the grand prize opening 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player. The accessory ratio is calculated by calculating the ratio of the total to the number. Furthermore, the continuous role object ratio is calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out as a result of winning to the grand prize opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player.

Originally, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio refer to the above-mentioned ratio when a test shooting test of game balls is conducted for 10 hours, but in this embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b At each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in 202f, the player is asked to Out of the total number of balls paid out (prize balls), the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out as a result of winning into the second starting opening 64b and the big prize opening 65a is calculated as the accessory ratio. This is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. Also, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power is turned on until reaching the timing for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing, the big prize The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out as a result of winning into the mouth 65a is calculated as a continuous role object ratio, and is recorded in the continuous role object ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to discharge the electricity between the timing (trigger) for calculating the most recent accessory ratio and the time when it is determined that the power is cut off. Based on the number of balls (prize balls) received, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, and each is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a or the continuous accessory ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and recorded, even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is cut off, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio will be maintained without leaking. The ratio can be calculated.

Next, the value of the out counter 263f indicating the total number of balls fired into the game area is added to the fired ball number data 264c and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S742). In addition, various types of jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information stored in the jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and out-of-hours data 263j are associated with each piece of information. The time (the time when the information was stored) is arranged (sorted) in order from the oldest time information, and is added to and recorded in the gaming state data 264d (S743).

In the process of S743, for example, if jackpot information is stored in the jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, this means that jackpots are occurring continuously as a gaming state, so the oldest time Only the jackpot information and the time are recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Similarly, for door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information, if each piece of information is stored in each data 263h to 263j at intervals of less than 1 second, the oldest time information and that time are stored respectively. only is recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the gaming state data 264d can be kept small.

As described above, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 receives winning information, out information, and information regarding the gaming state from the MPU 201, it accumulates and temporarily stores this information in the first reading memory 263. Every time it is the timing (trigger) to calculate the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and are added to the second reading memory 264. Record. Thereby, it is possible to manage the accessory ratio, etc. with a small storage capacity, and to transmit information regarding the accessory ratio, etc. to the inspection device 300.

Further, the second reading memory 264 also stores the time when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264. Furthermore, the second reading memory 264 stores information indicating not only the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects, but also the total number of balls launched into the game area, and the time and date at which the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. In addition, information regarding the game status (jackpot information, door open information, error information, out-of-hours information) is recorded in the second reading memory together with the time each piece of information was stored in the first reading memory 263. 264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, if there is a large change in the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio, the changed accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio is By analyzing the total number of balls fired into the game area and the game state around the time recorded in the 2-reading memory 264, it is possible to find out the cause of the change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio.

Here, the information regarding the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the total number of balls fired into the game area that can be recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, and the number of fired balls data 264c are stored in a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of winning information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of balls fired 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is replaced. is recorded.

Specifically, the continuous role object ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each configured in a ring buffer, and a memory is provided for each to manage the position where information is written on the ring buffer. By shifting the writing position by 1 every time information is written, it is possible to erase the oldest information and record the latest information there.

In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data item, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. In addition, when the number of information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can analyze the information including the latest status of the pachinko machine 10. You can make it happen.

After the process of S743, the first reading memory 263 is initialized to all 0s (S744). As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 while accumulating it again until it is time to calculate the accessory ratio next time. .

When the process of S744 is finished, the accessory ratio calculation process is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this test result output processing. This test result output processing is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the test device 300 is inserted into the test terminal 207a. In the test result output process, data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the test device 300.

When the test result output process is executed, first, all the accessory ratios recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a and the accessory ratios associated with each accessory ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264. and the recorded times are outputted to the inspection device 300 in order of the accessory ratio with the oldest recorded time (S751).

Specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the accessory ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 writes the information on the accessory ratio first to the accessory ratio data 264a. The information on the accessory ratio recorded from the position where the information is written to the position indicated in the memory that manages the information writing position (i.e., the position where the information on the accessory ratio at the latest time is recorded). The information is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio data 264a, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., The reading position is shifted one by one starting from the position where the information on the role ratio at the earliest time was recorded (i.e., the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written) (i.e., the position where the information on the role at the latest time The information recorded up to the position where the information on the physical ratio was recorded is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thereby, information on accessory ratios is outputted to the inspection device 300 in order from the information with the oldest time.

Next, all the continuous accessory ratios recorded in the continuous accessory ratio data 264b and the time when the continuous accessory ratio was recorded in the second reading memory 264, which is associated with each continuous accessory ratio, are , the accessory ratios are output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest recorded time (S752).

Specifically, if the continuous accessory ratio data 264b does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 first adds information about the continuous accessory ratio to the continuous accessory ratio data 264b. Continuous roles recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information on the continuous role ratio at the latest time is recorded) The information on the physical ratio is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when the continuous accessory ratio data 264b satisfies the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the next position after the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e. , the position where the information on the continuous role ratio at the earliest time was recorded), the reading position is shifted one by one, and the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position at the latest time) is shifted one by one. The information recorded up to the position where the information on the continuous accessory ratio was recorded is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thereby, the information on the continuous accessory ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information with the oldest time.

Next, the information regarding the number of balls fired to all the game areas (number of fired balls) recorded in the fired ball number data 264c and the information on the number of fired balls that is associated with the information on each number of fired balls are stored. 2 and the times recorded in the reading memory 264 are outputted to the inspection device 300 in order of the accessory ratio with the oldest recorded time (S753).

Specifically, if the number of fired balls data 264c does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 first writes information on the number of fired balls into the number of fired balls data 264c. information on the number of balls fired from the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information on the number of balls fired at the latest time is recorded). The information is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the number of fired balls data 264c satisfies the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the next position after the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., The reading position is shifted one by one starting from the position where the information on the number of balls fired at the earliest time was recorded, and the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information on the number of balls fired at the latest time was recorded) The information recorded up to the position where the information on the number of pitches was recorded is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thereby, information on the number of fired balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

Next, all the jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information recorded in the gaming state data 264d, and the time when the information was stored in the first reading memory 263, which is associated with each information. are output to the inspection device 300 in order of time starting from the oldest information (S754).

Specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the game state data 264d, the CPU 261 updates the information from the position where the information was first written in the game state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position indicated in the memory that manages the writing position (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, in the game state data 264d, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the next position (i.e., the most The read position is shifted one by one starting from the position where the oldest time information was recorded (i.e. the position where the latest time information is recorded). ) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As described above, in the game state data 264d, each piece of information regarding the game state is arranged (sorted) from the oldest information and recorded in the game state data 264d. Therefore, information regarding the gaming state is outputted to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

Through the processes of S751 to S754, each piece of information is output in order from the oldest to the oldest, so the inspection device 300 analyzes each piece of information in the order in which it is output, thereby determining the ratio of accessories as time passes, Changes in the ratio of continuous role objects, the number of balls fired, and the game state can be easily analyzed.

After the process of S754, the test result output process ends.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio. and record it. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information regarding the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

Here, some fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some means, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b There are people who try to increase the chances of hitting the jackpot by increasing the number of winnings. Also, there are people who try to obtain a large number of prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening 65a or by guiding the balls to the big winning hole 65a. If such a fraudulent act occurs, the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio will increase.

On the other hand, since the present pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, the inspection device 300 can analyze the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio to determine if a fraudulent act has been committed. can be discovered.

Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls fired into the gaming area and information regarding the gaming state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are high, the cause is investigated based on information regarding the number of balls fired into the gaming area and information regarding the gaming state. be able to.

Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, ROM 202, and the like. This makes it difficult for a fraudster to alter the winning information etc. input into the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, high reliability can be maintained for the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated and output by the accessory ratio management chip 207.

In addition, instead of having the MPU 201 manage the ratio of accessories, etc., a dedicated accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided to manage the ratio of accessories, etc., so it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load on the MPU 201, and the main The MPU 201 can be dedicated to control.

In addition, a prize ball number data setting area 265a is provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. However, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio using the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. This eliminates the need to store information on the number of prize balls, which differs for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, manufacturing of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Furthermore, if the models of pachinko machines are different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the same accessory ratio management chip 207 is used for different models of pachinko machines, the ratio of the characters can be calculated accurately.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 23, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off process in S915 (see Figure 24). ) is started during execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S915. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S915 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S802: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S915 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S806. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process moves to S804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process moves to S808.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process moves to S804. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the process moves to S808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S915, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 24). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S915 is executed, so the reason why the process in S808 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S809), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), the interrupt Permission is set (S811) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process in S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through the processes in S804 to S806 and then proceeds to S808. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S810, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), interrupt permission is set. Then (S811), the process moves to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S809 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S804 when the process reaches S808 from S804 through the process in S806. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S901 was executed (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S901: No). , the process proceeds to S910 without performing the processes of S902 to S908. In the process of S901, it is determined whether 1 millisecond has elapsed or not, whereas S902 to S908 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas the variable display process of S910 This is because the command determination process in S911 is a process that is preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process in S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S910 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S901 was previously executed (S901: Yes), the process moves to S902. Note that if the process in S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process directly advances to S902.

In the process of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S906, which will be described later (S903), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S904). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S905 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period where the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process to change the stage is performed, and the back image is changed to the display control device 114 in place of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information regarding the type of back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 will display the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect will display the expectation of a jackpot. It is also possible to change the effect to one that can be held, or use the frame button 22 as a decision button for selecting one of the ready-to-reach effects from a plurality of ready-to-reach effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S905 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/production processing (S905) is finished, lamp editing processing is then executed (S906), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing in S907, liquid crystal presentation execution management processing is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process in S906 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process in S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81. executed in time. After the process of S908, the process moves to S910.

In the process of S910, in order to display a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. Execute the variable display process, which is the process set for sending. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After the fluctuation display processing, a command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S911). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

When the process of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off process is executed (S915). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S916), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S911). This command determination process (S911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1001). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The fluctuation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the fluctuation display processing (see FIG. 26) described later, a display fluctuation pattern command is sent to the display control device 114 to notify the start of the fluctuation effect and the fluctuation pattern. Used when setting.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1003). If it is determined that a stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set on (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. .

In addition, the stop type command is used to indicate the stop type of the fluctuating performance for which the fluctuating pattern was indicated by the fluctuating pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the fluctuating pattern command when starting the fluctuating performance. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag to ON in the process of S1005, in the fluctuation display processing executed later, the fluctuation pattern extracted from the previously received fluctuation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command are used. , generates a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command that notify the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types, and executes processing for transmitting them to the display control device 114.

As a result of the process in S1003, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), then it is determined whether or not a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1006). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the held ball number command (i.e., the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the held variable performance number of pitches) and stores it in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1007).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b, so the starting prize is Each time, the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 by the process of S1007. Therefore, even if the value of the number of reserved balls in the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, the value of the number of reserved balls in the voice lamp control device 113 is The value of the number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Next, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the received held pitch number command is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the held ball count command are acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. It is what was done. The audio lamp control device 113 is able to perform prefetch processing by referring to each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223. That is, if the suspended variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will be the variable time, etc.) is determined before the variable effect is executed. It is possible to decide on the execution of various effects.

Next, a command for displaying the number of reserved pitches to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of reserved pitches stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved pitch count command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S902) of the main processing. Thereby, the display control device 114 executes a process such that the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches.

As a result of the processing in S1006, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (S1006: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to confirm and display the variable performance being executed. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command (S1011), and the process returns to the main process. . The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 through command output processing (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display confirmation command, the variable performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and corresponds to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command. By displaying the stop symbol, the display is confirmed.

As a result of the processing in S1010, if it is determined that a confirmed command has not been received (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S1012), the process moves to main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is used for display control. A command is set to be sent to the device 114. The demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command through the process of S1013, and is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, after which the command output process of the main process (S902 ) is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation display processing (S910).

This fluctuation display processing (S910) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to do this, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and stop type command received from the main control device 110, and settings are made to send these commands to the display control device 114. This is the process of

In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S1101: No), this fluctuation display processing is performed because the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish and return to main processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and the fluctuation pattern command extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25) is The variation pattern in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The fluctuation pattern extracted here is fluctuation time. In the audio lamp control device 113, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns are prepared for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the extracted fluctuation pattern (variation time). A pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S1104).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 through command output processing (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the detailed variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. , starts display control of the variable effect.

Next, the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the extracted stop type (S1104). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 through command output processing (S902) of the main processing. The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when permanently displaying the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set in the process of S1105. do.

Next, as the display variation pattern command is set, the value of the number of reserved balls in the RAM 223 is decreased by 1 as the reserved balls are consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls is set). (S1107), a command for the number of held balls for display is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated value of the number of held balls (S1108). Then, the process returns to the main processing.

The display reserved pitch count command set by the process of S1108 is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. . The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved balls symbols corresponding to the number of reserved pitches indicated by the display number of reserved pitches command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved balls symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 236. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is started when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

When the power is turned on and the MPU 231 executes main processing, first, initial setting processing is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, the MPU 231 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 233 and video RAM 234 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and is stored in an area in the video RAM 234 that is different from the area in the video RAM 234 that stores the decompressed character information. Write the extracted character information to the prepared frame buffer area. Also, perform other settings necessary for initialization.

When the initial setting process is completed, interrupt permission is then set (S1402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(c), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27(c) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. and instructs the image controller 236 to display the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of images is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it is not possible to start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 27(c), first, command determination processing (S1602) is executed. In this command determination process (S1602), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, if a display variation pattern command is stored, the image is drawn so that the third symbol display device 81 executes a variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command. and start controlling the display.

If a display stop type command is stored, during high-speed fluctuation ( While the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner so that the content of the third symbol cannot be recognized by the player, the third symbol being displayed is replaced. If a display confirmation command is stored, image drawing and display are controlled so that a confirmation display is made in the variable production being executed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, in this command determination process (S1602), all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command, a stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 and other performances, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the command determination process (S1602) is completed, display setting process (S1603) is then executed. In the display setting process (S1603), one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602) etc. Specifically identify the content of the image.

After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, task processing is then executed (S1064). In this task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third display device 281, which was specified in the display setting process (S1603), the character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is In addition to specifying the type, various parameters necessary for drawing are determined for each character (sprite), such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle.

Then, drawing processing is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which were determined in the task process (S1503), are transmitted to the image controller 236. As a result, the image controller 236 executes the image drawing process according to this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn according to the information received 1 V ago on the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed to transmit image data to the third symbol display device 81.

Thereafter, after executing other necessary processing, for example, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing is ended.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main controller 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 Calculate and record the object ratio and continuous role object ratio. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information regarding the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

Here, some fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some means, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b There are people who try to increase the chances of hitting the jackpot by increasing the number of winnings. Also, there are people who try to obtain a large number of prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening 65a or by guiding the balls to the big winning hole 65a. If such a fraudulent act occurs, the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio will increase.

On the other hand, since the present pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, the inspection device 300 can analyze the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio to determine if a fraudulent act has been committed. can be discovered.

Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls fired into the gaming area and information regarding the gaming state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are high, the cause is investigated based on information regarding the number of balls fired into the gaming area and information regarding the gaming state. be able to.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263. A case has been described in which the following is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b occurs, each The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded as they are in the second reading memory 264, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second reading memory 264 are output as they are to the inspection device 300.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is that in the second reading memory 264 of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio data 264a of the first embodiment and The point is that winning counter data 264e is recorded in place of the continuous accessory ratio data 264b.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates the trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 to the second reading memory 264. Note that the only difference from the first embodiment is the meaning of the trigger information data 202f, and the content itself is the same as the first embodiment.

That is, in the trigger information data 202f, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are used as the trigger (timing) to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 to the second reading memory 264. Information indicating either "gaming time" is defined.

When information indicating the "number of shots" is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating the "number of balls fired" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", each time the number of balls fired reaches 500, the first reading The values of each counter 263a to 263e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

When information indicating "time" is defined, trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "time" and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as "predetermined times," the time is 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the values of each counter 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

When the trigger information data 202f specifies the information indicating the "gaming time", the trigger information data 202f also specifies the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "gaming time" and information indicating 2 hours as the "predetermined time", each time the playing time elapses for 2 hours, the first reading memory 263 The values of each of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

The winning counter data 264e is stored in the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 at every timing (trigger) when the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The total number of balls that entered the first starting port 64a that were counted, the total number of balls that entered the second starting port 64b that were counted by the second starting counter 263b, and the first normal that was counted by the first normal counter 263c. The total number of winning balls in the winning hole 63a, the total number of winning balls in the second normal winning hole 63b counted by the second normal winning hole counter 263d, and the winning ball in the big winning hole 65a counted by the big winning hole counter 263e. This is data that records the total number of balls thrown, together with the time at which they were recorded.

The total number of balls that entered each winning slot from the time the power was turned on until reaching that timing for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing, is calculated by the counters 263a to 263e corresponding to each winning slot. It is shown by. When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 to the second reading memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time will be recorded at the time indicated by the RTC 266. This time is recorded in the winning counter data 264e.

The winning counter data 264e corresponds to one time and includes the total number of balls that entered the first starting port 64a, the total number of balls that entered the second starting port 64b, and the number of balls that entered the first normal winning port 63a at that time. The total number of balls, the total number of balls won in the second normal winning hole 63b, and the total number of balls won in the big winning hole 65a may be recorded.

In addition, the winning counter data 264e includes an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second starting opening 64b, and an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the first starting opening 63a. The first reading memory includes an area for recording the total number of balls won in the second normal winning slot 63b, an area for recording the total number of balls winning the big winning slot 65a, and an area for recording the total number of balls won in the second normal winning slot 63b. When the timing (trigger) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the 263 into the second reading memory 264 is reached, the total number of balls that entered the corresponding winning slot is calculated for each area. The winning counter data 264e may be configured to be recorded together with the time in the timing.

Here, the information regarding the total number of balls won in each winning hole that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, in association with one time, the total number of balls that entered the first starting slot 64a at that time, the total number of balls that entered the second starting slot 64b, the total number of balls that entered the first normal winning slot 63a, In the case where the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls that entered the second normal winning hole 63b and the total number of balls that entered the large winning hole 65a, a predetermined number of information has already been recorded in the winning counter data 264e. If so, the oldest information will be deleted and the latest information will be recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e may be configured like a ring buffer, and a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer may be prepared separately, and the writing position may be shifted by 1 each time information is written. The process of erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in the prize winning counter data 264e, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. In addition, when the number of information recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is recorded. Analysis can be performed.

In addition, there is an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second starting opening 64b, and an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the first normal winning opening 63a. When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second normal winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of winning balls for the big winning opening 65a, , a ring buffer may be configured for each area, an upper limit may be set on the number of information that can be recorded in each area, and the control may be performed as described above. As a result, when the number of recorded information reaches the upper limit in each area, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, including the latest status of the pachinko machine 10, in the inspection device 300. Analysis can be performed.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 reads the winning counter data 264e, the fired ball count data 264c, and the game status data recorded in the second reading memory 264. 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection device 300. When transmitting each data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 transmits each information recorded in each data 264e, 264c, 264d (including recorded time information associated with each information). , read out in the recorded order and transmitted to the inspection device 300.

Specifically, if the data to be transmitted from now on to the inspection device 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds information to the data. The information recorded from the location where is written to the location indicated in the memory that manages the location where information is written (i.e., the location where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Send to device 300. On the other hand, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 satisfies the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) determined for each, the data is indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written. The reading position is shifted one by one starting from the position next to the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the oldest time information is recorded), and the position indicated by the memory that manages the writing position of the information (i.e. , the position where the latest time information was recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, information is outputted to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

In addition, there is an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second starting opening 64b, and an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the first normal winning opening 63a. When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second normal winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of winning balls for the big winning opening 65a, By reading the information for each area as described above, the total number of balls that entered the winning hole for each winning hole will be output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the winning information storage process (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this winning information storage process. In the first embodiment, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 occurs when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio comes (see FIG. 20) and when the power is cut off (see FIG. 18). Although the accessory ratio calculation process was executed in which the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio were calculated from and recorded in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 21), in the second embodiment, the When the timing (trigger) is reached to record each piece of information in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 20), and when the power is cut off (see FIG. 18), the prize winning process is performed instead of the accessory ratio calculation process. Executes information storage processing. This winning information storage process is a process of recording each piece of information stored in the first reading memory 263 into the second reading memory 264.

In the winning information storage process, first, the values of the counters 263a to 263e corresponding to the winning openings stored in the first reading memory 263 are combined with the current time indicated by the RTC 266, and are stored in the second reading memory 264. It is added to and recorded in the winning counter data 264e (S761). As a result, for each winning timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, the period from when the power is turned on until reaching that timing for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. Until the timing of , the total number of winning balls in the first starting port 64a counted by the first first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second starting port 64b counted by the second starting counter 263b of the first reading memory 263 are calculated. The total number of winning balls, the total number of winning balls in the first normal winning slot 63a counted by the first-round counter 263c, and the total number of winning balls in the second normal winning slot 63b counted by the second-round counter 263d. The total number and the total number of balls won in the big winning hole 65a counted by the big winning hole counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power stored in the capacitor 267 is used for the period from the timing (trigger) of the most recent recording to the second reading memory 264 when it is determined that the power is cut off. The total number of balls that entered the first starting port 64a counted by the first starting counter 263a of the first reading memory 263, and the total number of balls that entered the second starting port 64b counted by the second starting counter 263b of the first reading memory 263. , the total number of balls that entered the first normal prize opening 63a counted by the first ordinary winning counter 263c, the total number of balls that entered the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the second ordinary winning counter 263d, and the grand prize. The total number of balls won in the big winning opening 65a counted by the opening counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, even for winnings in each winning opening that occurred between the timing (trigger) at which the most recent recording was performed in the second reading memory 264 and the time when the power was judged to be cut off, the winnings will not be missed. The total number of balls received can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning slot.

In subsequent S742 to S744, the same processes as S742 to S744 of the accessory ratio calculation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) are executed, and the winning information storage process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the test result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this test result output processing. Similar to the first embodiment, this test result output processing is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the test device 300 is inserted into the test terminal 207a. In the test result output process, data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the test device 300.

When the test result output process in the second embodiment is executed, first, the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is output to the inspection device 300 (S771). Next, all the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole recorded in the winning counter data 264e is recorded as the recording time along with the time when the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264, which is associated with each piece of information. outputs the information to the inspection device 300 in order of oldest information (S772). In S753 and S754 that are executed subsequent to the process in S772, the same processes as S753 and S754 in the test result output process of the first embodiment are performed, and the test result output process is ended.

The inspection device 300 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole outputted in S772 and the prize ball number table 202e outputted in S771. Then, analyze the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio. If the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are high, the cause is investigated based on information regarding the number of balls fired into the gaming area and information regarding the gaming state. be able to. In addition, through the process of S772, information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole is output in order from the oldest to the oldest, so the inspection device 300 analyzes each piece of information in the order in which it is output. , it is possible to easily analyze changes in the proportion of ornamental objects and the ratio of continuous ornamental objects over time.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, each time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b occurs in the accessory ratio management chip 207, The values of the counters 263a to 263e, which count the total number of winning balls for each winning opening, stored in the first reading memory 263 are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is transferred to the winning ball number table 202e. It is also transmitted to the inspection device 300.

In this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the total number of balls won in each winning hole is determined for each winning hole, and is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, compared to the case where the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264 as in the first embodiment, the storage capacity required for the second reading memory 264 becomes larger; Since the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is transmitted to the device 300, if there is a large change in the ratio of accessories or the ratio of continuous accessories as a result of analysis by the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 By referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning opening, the cause can be more accurately understood.

Furthermore, the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning slot, which is transmitted to the inspection device 300, is associated with the time when the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264, and is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Ru. Therefore, in the inspection device 300, as a result of analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio based on the information indicating the total number of balls that entered each winning hole, if there is a large change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. , Specify the time when the total number of balls that entered each winning slot used to calculate the changed role object ratio or continuous role object ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and around that time, By analyzing the total number of balls that entered each winning hole, the total number of balls fired into the gaming area, or the game state, it is possible to find out the cause of the change in the winning combination ratio or continuous winning ratio.

In addition, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the same effects as those obtained by the configuration can be achieved.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 manages information regarding the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10. explained. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the MPU 201 manages information regarding the accessory ratio. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a winning ratio display device 400, and displays information regarding the winning ratio display device 400.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machines 10 of the first and second embodiments in that the configuration of the main control device 110 is different. The other configurations are the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

As described above, the main control device 110 of the third embodiment is not provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the MPU 201 manages information regarding the accessory ratio. Specifically, the accessory ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is executed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201. . At this time, each counter and data stored in the first reading memory 263 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 are stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

Further, the second reading memory 264 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 in a manner connected to the input/output port 205. Further, in the third embodiment, the RTC 266 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment is built in the MPU 201 (not shown).

Furthermore, the inspection terminal 207a to which the inspection device 300 is connected is connected to the input/output port 205. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, the MPU 201 executes a test result output process, and information regarding the accessory ratio and other information regarding the inspection is transmitted to the inspection device 300.

Further, the hand ratio display device 400 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110. This hand ratio display device 400 is composed of, for example, a plurality of 7-segment displays, and is arranged on a main board that constitutes the main control device 110. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is assembled so that the display screen of the winning ratio display device 400 can be seen when looking at the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the pachinko machine 10 may be assembled so that the display screen of the winning ratio display device 400 can be seen from the front side.

The role ratio display device 400 displays the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio (eg, base value, etc.). For example, the information regarding the winning ratio and the continuous winning ratio displayed on the winning ratio display device 400 may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out for each winning opening, or information indicating all winning balls. The total number of balls paid out by winning into the opening, the total number of balls paid out by winning into the winning opening where the accessory is activated (the second starting opening 64b and the big winning opening 65a), and the accessory is consecutive. The information may also be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning into the winning opening (big winning opening 65a) which operates as follows. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired into the game area (number of fired balls) may be included in the information regarding the winning ratio and the continuous winning ratio displayed on the winning ratio display device 400. The role ratio display device 400 is configured with a liquid crystal display, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, etc. with a predetermined number of pixels instead of a 7-segment display, and displays the role ratio, continuous role ratio, or , information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed.

The MPU 201 has a built-in ROM 202 and a RAM 203, as well as a plurality of registers 200 that store various data at the layer closest to the ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit), which is the heart of the MPU 201. The plurality of registers 200 are used for general purposes in various situations without a specific purpose, such as temporarily holding values in the middle of an operation or storing memory addresses necessary for processing. Various registers are included, such as a general-purpose register and an accumulator register for accumulating and calculating the sum of the operation results of the ALU.

The plurality of registers 200 also include a flag register 200a (also referred to as a status register or the like) that is configured with a flag indicating an overflow due to an ALU operation, a flag indicating an interrupt state, and the like. Due to the nature of the register, the contents of the flag register 200a can be updated every time one instruction is executed.

The RAM 203 is provided with an inner use area 203x and an outer use area 203y, each of which has a work area (inner work area 203x1, outer work area 203y1) and a stack area (inner stack area 203x2, outer stack area 203y2). ) is provided.

While the MPU 201 performs the main control of the game, if the MPU 201 is configured to manage information related to the ratio of accessories, various counters and information stored in the RAM 203 and used for the main control of the game This is because it is necessary to prevent the data from being erroneously destroyed by various counters and data stored in the RAM 203 and used for managing information regarding the ratio of accessories. That is, various counters and data used for main control of the game must be protected with priority in order to protect the interests of the players. In addition, the data saved in the stack area of the RAM 203 when performing the main control of the game can be used to continue the main control of the game again without problems after the processing related to the management of information regarding the ratio of accessories is performed. must be ensured to ensure that it is carried out.

Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various counters and data used for the main control of the game in the work area 203x1 of the area 203x in the usage area, and also stores the various counters and data used for the main control of the game in the stack area 203x1 when performing the main control of the game. The data to be saved is saved to the inner stack area 203x2 of the used area 203x. On the other hand, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data used for managing information regarding the ratio of accessories in the outside work area 203y1 of the area outside the use area 203y, and also stores the data in the stack area when managing information regarding the ratio of accessories. The data to be saved is saved to the outer stack area 203y2 of the area 203y outside the used area. This makes it possible to reliably protect various counters and data used for the main control of the game, as well as data saved in the stack area when performing the control.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, it is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing, various types of processing that should be periodically executed are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a game process that performs the main control of the game is executed (S2001). For example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment are executed in the process of S2001. That is, the main control of the game includes the jackpot lottery, the setting of the variable display, the opening/closing control of the big prize opening (large opening opening) 65a at the time of a jackpot, the winning lottery of the second symbol display device 83, etc. . As described above, the MPU 201 uses the in-use area 203x (inner work area 203x1 and inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process in S2001.

Next, a role ratio process for managing information regarding the role ratio is executed (S2002). Details of the hand ratio processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After the process of S2002, the timer interrupt process ends.

In this manner, in the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the game process is performed first, and then the winning ratio process is performed, so that the main control of the game, which is an important control, is executed with priority.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, details of the win ratio process (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the role ratio processing. In this role ratio processing, first, interrupts are prohibited (S2011), then the flag register 200a is saved to the inner stack area 203x2 using the PUSH instruction (S2012), and then the role ratio main processing is executed using the CALL instruction. The subroutine program to be executed is read out and the winning ratio main processing is executed (S2013). Details of the role ratio main processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Note that at the processing stages of S2011 and S2012, the MPU 201 executes the processing using the area 203x within the used area of the RAM 203.

When the process of S2013 is completed and the subroutine program of the role ratio main process returns to this role ratio processing, the flag register 200a saved in the inner stack area 203x2 is restored by the POP instruction (S2015) and allocated. The winning combination is permitted (S2016), and then the hand ratio processing is ended. Note that the MPU 201 also executes the processing in S2015 and S2016 using the area 203x within the used area of the RAM 203.

In addition, in the process of S2012, the flag register 200a is saved to the inner work area 203x1 using the load (LD) instruction, and in the process of S2014, the flag register 200a is saved to the inner work area 203x1 using the load (LD) instruction. The flag register 200a may be restored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, details of the winning ratio main process (S2013) executed when the subroutine program is read by the winning ratio processing (S2002) (see FIG. 33) will be explained. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the role ratio main processing.

In the role ratio main processing, first, the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to the start position of the outer stack area 203y2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2021). As a result, data is saved to the outer stack area 203y2 in subsequent processing. Furthermore, after this process, the MPU 201 uses the external work area 203y1 as the work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 uses the outer work area 203y1 to store various counters and data, and also uses the outer stack area 203y2 as necessary.

Next, among the registers 200, the registers 200 (excluding the flag register 200a) used in processing related to the ratio of accessories are individually loaded into areas determined for each of the external work areas 203y1 by a load (LD) command. It is evacuated (S2022). Then, processing regarding the accessory ratio is executed (S2023).

In the process of S2023, for example, the same process as the accessory ratio management main process (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is executed. , and also executes processing for controlling the display of the winning ratio display device 400. Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process is executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment (see FIGS. 22 and 30). Processing similar to that may be executed in the processing of S2023.

When the process of S2023 is completed, the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is then set to a fixed address in the inner stack area 203x2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2024). As a result, in the subsequent processing, data starts to be stored in the inner stack area 203x2 again.

Here, the winning ratio processing (S2002) in which this winning ratio main processing (S2013) is executed is a complete set of the gaming processing (S2001) that executes the main control of the game in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It will be done after it is finished. In addition, the timer interrupt processing is read when the counter update processing (S702 to S703) is not executed in the infinite loop (loop of S701 to S703) of the main processing (FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201. and executed.

Therefore, when the process in S2024 is executed, the inner stack area 203x2 contains the data saved when transitioning from the main process to the timer interrupt process and the flag register 200a saved in the process in S2012. The data is saved (however, if the flag register 200a is saved to the inner work area 203x1 by a load instruction, it does not exist in the inner stack area 203x2), and the number of saved data is fixed. Therefore, in the process of S2012, when specifying the stack pointer to a stacked position in the inner stack area 203x2, the position can be reliably specified simply by setting the fixed address for the stack pointer. Then, before moving the stack pointer from the inner stack area 203x2 to the outer stack area 203y2 (before executing the process of S2012), there is no need to save the value of the stack pointer indicating the inside of the inner stack area 203x2. It is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 due to the evacuation.

Next, in the process of S2022, the values of each register 200 that have been individually saved to a determined area of the external work area 203y1 are respectively loaded from the corresponding determined area of the external work area 203y1 using a load (LD) instruction. It is restored by reading it and setting it in the corresponding register 200 (S2025). After the processing in S2025, the winning ratio main processing is ended and the processing returns to the winning ratio processing. Further, after the process of S2025 is completed, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 as the work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 to store various counters and data, and also uses the inner stack area 203x2 as necessary.

In this way, in the MPU 201, when executing the process related to the ratio of accessories (S2023), each process is executed using the area 203y outside the use area (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2). At the stage of proceeding to the process of S2023 that uses the outside area 203y, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the process regarding this accessory ratio are individually saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203. do. Then, before the process in S2023 ends and the MPU 201 returns to the process using the in-use area 203x, the registers 200 saved in the outside work area 203y1 are returned to their respective corresponding registers 200. Thereafter, a game process that uses the use area 203x (inner work area 203x1 and inner stack area 203x2) and performs main control of the game is executed.

Here, from the game process that performs the main control of the game that uses the area within the usage area 203x, to the process regarding the ratio of accessories that uses the area outside the usage area 203y, the game that uses the area within the usage area 203x is started again. In order to protect the interests of the players and to ensure that the main control of the game can be continued without any problems when returning to the game processing that has the main control of the game, the game that has the main control of the game Processing must not be affected by processing related to accessory ratios. Therefore, the RAM 203 is divided into an in-use area 203x used for processing the main control of the game and an out-of-use area 203y used for processing related to the ratio of accessories. However, the register 200 has a smaller capacity than the RAM 203, and there are also registers 200 whose purpose of use is specified. It is impossible or difficult to separate the

In addition, before and after the process related to the accessory ratio is performed, in other words, the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the usage area is shifted to the process regarding the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the usage area. The contents of the register 200 are made the same at the stage of performing the process and at the stage of transitioning from the processing related to the ratio of accessories using the area outside the usage area 203y to the game processing that performs the main control of the game using the area within the usage area 203x. Therefore, there is a desire to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio that is executed in between.

On the other hand, before performing processing related to the ratio of accessories that uses the outside area 203y, the contents of all registers 200 are saved at once to the outer stack area 203y2 using the PUSH command, and processing related to the ratio of accessories is performed. After that, it is also conceivable to return all the registers 200 at once from the outer stack area 203y2 using a POP instruction. However, in this case, in order to save the contents of all the registers 200, it is necessary to set the capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 large in advance. must be transformed into

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from a game process that mainly controls a game using the area 203x within the usage area to a process regarding the proportion of accessories using the area 203y outside the usage area, the MPU 201 is provided with a Among the registered registers 200, the registers 200 used in the process related to the role ratio are individually saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and after the process related to the role ratio process is executed, the area outside the use area 203y is saved. When shifting (returning) from a process related to the ratio of accessory objects to be used to a game process that mainly controls a game using an area 203x within a use area, the registers 200 saved to an outside work area 203y1 are individually restored. As a result, a stage of transition from a game process that mainly controls the game using the area 203x inside the usage area to a process related to the proportion of accessories that uses the area 203y outside the usage area, and a stage where the game process that uses the area 203y outside the usage area Since the contents of the register 200 can be the same at the stage of transition from the processing related to the object ratio to the game processing that performs the main control of the game that uses the area 203x within the usage area, the game that performs the main control of the game It is possible to reliably guarantee that the processing is not affected by the processing regarding the accessory ratio executed in between.

In addition, there is a stage of transition from the game process that mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the usage area to a process regarding the ratio of accessories that uses the area 203y outside the usage area, and At the stage of transitioning from the processing related to the ratio to the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x in the usage area is performed, the contents of all the registers 200 are not saved/restored, but the processing related to the accessory ratio is performed. Since the contents of only some of the registers 200 that are used are saved/restored, the capacity of the RAM 203 (outside work area 203y1) required to save the contents of the registers can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203, and to secure a large area in the outside work area 203y1 for storing other data.

It should be noted that the register 200 that is not used in the processing related to the accessory ratio is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio in the first place, and its contents continue to be held before and after the processing related to the accessory ratio is executed. Therefore, without saving/restoring the contents of the registers 200 that are not used in the processing regarding the accessory ratio, only the contents of some registers 200 used in the processing regarding the accessory ratio can be saved/restored. It can be ensured that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed in between.

However, since the flag register 200a is a register used in all instructions executed by the MPU 201, it is naturally a register that is also used in processing related to the accessory ratio, but in the process of S2022, the flag register 200a is Exceptionally, they did not evacuate. This is because the content of the flag register 200a changes just by reading the winning ratio main processing (S2013) in the winning ratio processing shown in FIG. 33, and the game processing that executes the main control of the game shifts to the processing regarding the winning ratio. This is because the value of the flag register 200a at the time when the game processing is completed cannot be saved at the processing stage of S2022.

Therefore, in this embodiment, before reading the winning ratio main processing (S2013) in the winning ratio processing shown in FIG. , only the flag register 200a is restored from the inner stack area 203x2. Thereby, the value of the flag register 200a at the time when the game process is completed can be reliably restored after the process related to the accessory ratio is executed.

In addition, there is a stage of transition from the game process that mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the usage area to a process regarding the ratio of accessories that uses the area 203y outside the usage area, and The save/restore of the register 200 is performed individually for each register at the stage of transition from the processing related to the ratio to the game processing that performs the main control of the game using the area 203x within the usage area. Only the registers 200 that need to be saved/restored in order to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed in between (that is, the registers 200 that are used for the processing related to the accessory ratio) are (only registers 200) can be individually specified to save/restore them.

Further, since the register 200 is saved to the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, the capacity required for the outer stack area 203y2 can be reduced, and a large capacity of the outer work area 203y1 can be secured. Furthermore, some MPUs 201 specify a stack area and a work area in advance depending on the model (type). Some of these MPUs 201 have a function that clears (initializes to 0) the contents of the RAM 203 when data is further saved and stacked beyond the pre-designated stack area. be. On the other hand, by saving the register 200 to the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, it is possible to prevent the outer stack area 203y2 from quickly filling up with stacked data. Therefore, in the MPU 201 having such a function, it is possible to prevent the RAM 203 from being cleared due to data being further stacked beyond the pre-specified area of the outer stack area 203y2.

Further, since the register 200 is saved using a load (LD) instruction instead of using a PUSH instruction/POP instruction, the location where the register 200 is saved can be fixed by a program. Therefore, by programming a program to clearly avoid the area where the register 200 is evacuated and use the outside work area 203y1 while performing processing related to the ratio of accessories, a game in which the main control of the game is performed. The contents of the register 200 used in processing can be reliably protected.

In addition, when all the registers 200 are used in the process related to the ratio of accessories, all the registers 200 are individually saved/restored to a predetermined area of the external work area 203y1 using a load (LD) command. You may also do so. This also makes it possible to enjoy the effect of evacuating the register 200 to the outside work area 203y1.

In addition, when saving some of the registers 200 used in processing related to the ratio of accessories, each register is saved to a predetermined area of the outer stack area 203y2 using a PUSH command, and The registers 200 that were saved in the saved area may be restored individually using a POP instruction. Thereby, the capacity of the RAM 203 required to save the contents of the register can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and to secure a large area for storing the outside work area 203y1. In this case, when restoring the register 200 that was saved using the POP instruction, it is necessary to use the LIFO method, that is, the register 200 that was saved later using the PUSH instruction must be restored using the POP instruction first. .

In addition, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the same effects as those obtained by the configuration can be achieved.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the main control device 110 shifts from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the usage area to the processing regarding the proportion of accessories that uses the area 203y outside the usage area. At this stage, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are individually saved, and after the processing related to the accessory ratio is completed, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are A case has been described in which the saved registers 200 are individually restored at the stage of transitioning to the game processing that performs the main control of the game using the area 203x. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the main controller 110 uses the in-use area 203x in the accessory processing (S2002) executed during the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32). During execution of the process, at the stage of reading out the accessory main process (S2013) that executes the processing regarding the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the usage area using the CALL instruction, the register 200 used in the processing regarding the accessory ratio is read out using the CALL instruction. are individually cleared to 0, and the accessory main processing (S2013) is read out using a CALL command. In addition, in the accessory main processing (S2013), when the accessory main processing (S2013) that uses the area outside the use area 203y is finished and the process returns to the process that uses the area 203x within the usage area, processing regarding the ratio of the accessory is performed. After clearing the registers 200 used in each step to 0, the process returns to the role ratio processing.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following explanation of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments. The explanation will be omitted.

Compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment performs a win ratio process (S2002), which is a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The partial processing is different from the partial processing of the winning ratio main processing (S2013), which is one processing of the winning ratio processing (S2002).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the role ratio processing (S2002) in the fourth embodiment. In this winning ratio processing, first, after executing the same processing as S2011 and S2012 as in the third embodiment, all the registers 200 (excluding the flag register 200a) used in the processing regarding the winning ratio are executed. are individually cleared to 0 using a load (LD) instruction. Then, the process moves to S2013, where a subroutine program for executing the winning ratio main processing using the area outside the usage area 203y is read out by the CALL command, and the winning ratio main processing is executed. Then, the process of S2014 and S2015, which is the same as in the third embodiment, is executed, and then the winning ratio process is ended.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the role ratio main processing (S2013) in the fourth embodiment. In this role ratio main process, first, the process of S2021, which is the same as in the third embodiment, is executed, and then the process of S2023, which is the same as in the third embodiment (i.e., the process related to the role ratio), is executed. Next, the registers 200 used in the process regarding the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 (S2041). Then, the process of S2024, which is the same as in the third embodiment, is executed to end the winning ratio main processing using the area outside the usage area 203y, and returning to the winning ratio processing and processing using the area within the usage area 203x. Execute.

In this fourth embodiment, in the register 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the usage area, the value is changed by the processing related to the accessory ratio, and the value is left as it is in the corresponding register 200. However, even if the MPU 201 executes a game process that mainly controls a game using the area 203x, it is assumed that the game process will not be affected in any way. In this case, originally, the MPU 201 should be provided with the necessary information at the stage of transitioning from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the usage area to the processing related to the ratio of accessories that uses the area 203y outside the usage area. Of the registers 200 that were created, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are saved, and after executing the processing related to the accessory ratio, from the processing related to the accessory ratio that uses the area 203y outside the usage area, the register 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio is There is no problem even if the evacuated register 200 is not restored at the stage of transitioning to the game processing that performs the main control of the game using the area 203x. However, in this case, the value of the register 200 changes before and after the processing related to the ratio of accessories, so it is impossible for an outside person to judge whether or not there is really a problem with this.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, first, in the winning ratio processing, the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the usage area is shifted to the processing regarding the ratio of accessories using the area 203y outside the usage area. In other words, before reading the subroutine program that executes the winning ratio main processing using the CALL command, all the registers 200 used in the processing related to the winning ratio carried out in the winning ratio main processing are individually set to 0. Clear to. Then, in the role ratio main process, after executing the process related to the role object ratio, from the process related to the role object ratio using the outside area 203y, the game process performs the main control of the game using the area 203x inside the area 203x. At the stage of transitioning to , all the registers 200 used in the process related to the role ratio (that is, the same register 200 that was cleared to 0 before executing the role ratio main process) are individually set to 0. clear. Thereby, a step of transitioning from a game process that performs the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area to a process regarding the role ratio that uses the area 203y outside the use area (a step of reading the role ratio main process); A stage of transitioning from a process related to the role ratio using the area outside the use area 203y to a game process that performs the main control of the game using the area within the use area 203x (a stage of returning from the role ratio main process to the role ratio process) Thus, the contents of the register 200 can be made the same at first glance. Therefore, it can be ensured that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed in between. Note that the register 200 that is not used in the processing related to the accessory ratio does not change its contents before and after the processing related to the accessory ratio, and continues to be held, so even if the register 200 that is not used is not cleared to 0, It will be the same at both stages.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S2031 and S2041, a case has been described in which the registers 200 used in the processing regarding the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0, but it is not necessarily necessary to clear them to 0. For example, the above effect can be achieved even if the same predetermined value is stored in the processes of S2031 and S2041. However, considering that all registers are initialized to 0 immediately after the power is turned on and the reset input to the MPU 201 is released (at a stage where software initialization is not executed), S2031 and S2041 In the process, it is desirable to individually clear (initialize) the registers 200 used in the process related to the accessory ratio to 0. Furthermore, by individually clearing the registers 200 used in the process related to the accessory ratio to 0, it is possible to understand at a glance that the registers 200 have been cleared to 0.

In addition, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the same effects as those obtained by the configuration can be achieved.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 44. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, instead of the role ratio display device 400 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third or fourth embodiment, four 7-segment displays (lower right of the 7-segment part A base display device 401 (see FIG. 38(a)) is provided, which includes dot segments provided on the sides) 401a, 401b, 401c, and 401d. This base display device 401 displays the base value of the pachinko machine 10 as one of the information regarding the accessory ratio.

The base value is the number (ratio) of balls that are paid out (prize balls) for 100 balls in normal times, excluding jackpots, high probability (variable probability) times, and short time times. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the number of out balls guided from the gaming area to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls launched into the gaming area, in other words, the number of balls used in the game). Each time the total number of outs (hereinafter referred to as the "total number of outs") reaches 60,000, the base value for those 60,000 balls is measured and stored.

The base display device 401 displays the base value measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 (hereinafter referred to as "real-time base value") and the previous (most recent) total number of outs. In addition to the base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 (hereinafter referred to as "previous base value"), the base value was measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 one time before the previous time (two times before). the base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 (hereinafter referred to as the "previous time base value") and the base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 pieces one time before the time before the previous time (hereinafter referred to as the "previous time base value"). "time base value") are switched and displayed every predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In addition to the real-time base value, by displaying multiple past base values (previous base value, base value the day before last, base value the day before last), it becomes possible to more accurately judge whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. Furthermore, the timing of the fraudulent act can be predicted to some extent.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. is configured to light up for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this embodiment). In the base display device 401, if some segments do not light up due to a failure such as a disconnection, the base value etc. cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a risk that an incorrect determination will be made as to whether or not there is fraudulent activity. By lighting all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for a predetermined period each time the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether all segments can be lit normally, and the base display device It can be easily determined whether or not the display of 401 is performed normally.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is suitable for new pachinko machines 10, such as when starting up a completely new pachinko machine 10 in a manufacturing factory, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a used machine. When starting up, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. . When starting up a new pachinko machine 10, balls may be manually inserted into each winning slot and prize balls may be paid out during a shipping inspection to check the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time differs greatly from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when starting up a new pachinko machine 10, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is not the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. Moreover, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourth embodiments. The explanation will be omitted.

Figure 37 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment in that, whereas in the third embodiment, the winning ratio display device 400 is connected to the main control device 110, in the fifth embodiment, a base display device 401 is connected to the main control device 110. As described above, this base display device 401 is for displaying the base value of the pachinko machine 10.

Note that the winning ratio display device 400 in the third embodiment may switch and display the base value of the pachinko machine 10 at predetermined intervals in addition to the winning ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the inspection terminal 207a, and it is not necessary to configure the inspection device 300 to output information regarding the accessory ratio. Furthermore, if information regarding the accessory ratio is not output to the inspection device 300, the second reading memory 264 may be omitted.

Here, details of the base display device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. First, FIG. 38(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the base display device 401. As shown in FIG. The base display device 401 includes four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d arranged horizontally in a row, and is arranged on a main board constituting the main control device 110. That is, when looking at the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen, and four-digit numbers or letters can be confirmed. Note that the pachinko machine 10 may be assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen from the front side.

Each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d has a 7-segment section and a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment section. Of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d, the base display device 401 uses the two 7-segment displays 401a and 401b on the left as identification segments, and the two 7-segment displays 401c and 401d on the right as ratio segments. do. The identification segment is used to indicate identification information for specifying the content to be displayed in the ratio segment. The ratio segment is used to display the ratio of the content specified by the identification information indicated in the identification segment.

FIG. 38(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the base display device 401. As mentioned above, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value that is measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the last (most recent) time when the total number of outs reached 60,000. The previous base value measured in ) The base value measured two days before the previous time when the total number of outs reached 60,000 is switched and displayed every 5 seconds.

In the base display device 401, when displaying a real-time base value, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the real-time base value being measured is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "bL." in the identification segment, the viewer can recognize that the numbers displayed in the ratio segment are real-time base values.

In the base display device 401, when displaying the previous base value, "b1." is displayed in the identification segment, and the previous base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b1." in the identification segment, the viewer can recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the previous base value.

In the base display device 401, when displaying the base value from the time before the previous time, "b2." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value from the time before the previous time is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b2." in the identification segment, the viewer can recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value two times before.

In the base display device 401, when displaying the base value two times before, "b3." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value two days before the previous time is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b3." in the identification segment, the viewer can recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value two days before.

In this way, the base display device 401 displays, in addition to the real-time base value, base values for a plurality of past times (the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, the base value the time before the time before the last time). Here, the real-time base value is a base value that is measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, as described above. Generally, in a hall, approximately 10,000 to 20,000 balls are launched per pachinko machine 10 per day. That is, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time measured for 60,000 balls indicate base values over several days, about 3 to 6 days. If the real-time base value is hidden on the base display device 401, it will take about 3 to 6 days to measure the base value for 60,000 balls, so even if it is the previous base value, It could be the base value from 3 to 6 days ago. Therefore, if there is some kind of misconduct after the previous base value measurement, the base value for the next 60,000 balls will be measured and displayed on the base display device 401 for 3 to 6 days. Misconduct may not be detected. On the other hand, by displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, it is possible to show the current base value as a preliminary value, so that in the event that some kind of fraud is committed, the real-time base value will immediately identify the fraud. It is possible to discover the possibility that an act has taken place.

On the other hand, the real-time base value is a base value that is measured in real time when the total number of outs is less than 60,000, as described above. As mentioned above, the base value is the number (ratio) of balls that are paid out (prize balls) out of 100 balls in normal times, so it can be used to determine the changes in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. There is a possibility that the real-time base value may fluctuate depending on the situation (for example, the normal state happened to continue for a long time, the jackpot state happened to occur frequently, the variable probability state happened to continue for a long time, etc.). Therefore, if only the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not fraud has occurred.

On the other hand, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time measured for 60,000 balls indicate base values over several days, about 3 to 6 days. No matter what kind of gaming state the pachinko machine 10 follows during the corresponding several days, the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, and the base value the time before the previous time can be averaged. Therefore, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the base value measured for 60,000 balls, such as the previous base value, on the base display device 401, it is possible to more accurately determine the presence or absence of cheating. can.

On the other hand, if only the previous base value is displayed as the base value measured for 60,000 balls, it is possible that a player who happened to be familiar with the pachinko machine 10 played the game during the period in which the previous base value was measured. This generally results in a lower base value. Therefore, even when only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. In contrast, by displaying not only the previous base value as the base value measured for 60,000 balls, but also multiple base values such as the base value before the previous time, the base value the time before the previous time, etc., each base value It can be determined whether there has been a change in the base value based on the familiarity of the player who played the game. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity.

In this embodiment, the base display device 401 switches and displays the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value the day before the previous time, and the base value the day before the last time every 5 seconds. may be increased, and a mode in which the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed simultaneously, and a mode in which the two-previous base value and the two-previous base value are simultaneously displayed may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals. Further, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, and the base value the time before the time before the last time may all be displayed on the base display device 401 at the same time.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, three base values measured for 60,000 balls are displayed on the base display device 401: the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value the time before the previous time. As explained above, it is also possible to display two values: the previous base value and the base value from the time before the previous time. It is also possible to further display the base value of the second time before (the second time before last) that was measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000. That is, any number of base values greater than or equal to 2 may be displayed on the base display device 401 as the base values measured for 60,000 balls.

Returning to FIG. 37, the explanation will be continued. The base display device 401 is connected to a base display device control circuit 402 provided within the main control device 110 and connected to the input/output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the seven segment displays 401a to 401d of the base display device 401 based on drive and control signals from the MPU 201, and displays various types of displays as shown in FIG. 38(b). It performs display.

In the process for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the process is performed using the out-of-use area 203y of the RAM 203. That is, information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is stored in the outer work area 203y1 of the outer area 203y. Here, with reference to FIG. 39, details of the information stored in the outside work area 203y1 and necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 will be described. First, FIG. 39(a) is a schematic diagram showing information stored in the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 and necessary for displaying the base value.

The information stored in the outside work area 203y1 and necessary for displaying the base value includes a total out number counter 203j, a low probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, and base value data from the time before last. At least 203n, base value data 203o from the time before last, a new start-up flag 203p, and a display type counter 203q are prepared.

Among these, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data 203n before the previous time, the base value data 203o the time before the previous time, and the new launch flag 203p. Even if the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, the information continues to be held without being initialized (cleared). As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that has been performed before the operation is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. can be done. Furthermore, the base display device 401 can display the previous base value, the base value from the time before the previous time, and the base value from the time before the previous time held before the RAM erase switch 122 was operated.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a RAM all erase switch (not shown) is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is housed, and only when the power is turned on while the RAM all erase switch is operated, The RAM 203 includes the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time, the base value data 203o from the time before the previous time, and the new startup flag 203p. It is now initialized (cleared). When starting up a new pachinko machine 10, such as when starting up a completely new pachinko machine 10 at a manufacturing factory, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a used machine, operate the RAM all erase switch. By turning on the power while doing so, total out number counter 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, base value data 203n before last, base value data 203o before last, new The start-up flag 203p can be initialized, and base value measurement can be newly started from there. In addition, by making it possible to initialize (clear) this information when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a second-hand machine, it is possible to prevent the base value of the pachinko machine from being committed in the previous hall. Even if the information has changed, by continuing to display that information at the next store, it is possible to prevent suspicions from arising that fraudulent activity has occurred at the next store. Further, since the RAM all erase switch is provided in the board box 100 which is connected in an unopenable manner, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and unsealed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from deleting information necessary for displaying the base value, and to reliably protect this information.

In addition, instead of the RAM all erase switch, a hole such as a keyhole is provided, and only when a key etc. that fits into the hole is inserted, the total number of out pieces counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, The previous base value data 203m, the base value data 203n the time before last, the base value data 203o the time before last, and the new startup flag 203p may be initialized. As a result, only those who have a key that fits the hole can erase the information necessary to display the base value, so fraudsters are prevented from erasing the information necessary to display the base value. , to ensure that this information is protected.

The total number of outs counter 203j is a counter for counting the total number of outs, which is the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). The total out number counter 203j is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, and when a ball is detected at the out switch 208f, the ball is guided to the ball ejection path. 1 is added as . Then, when the total number of out items counter 203j reaches 60,000, the MPU 201 determines that the total number of out items has reached 60,000, executes a predetermined process described later, and initializes the total number of out items counter 203j to zero. become As a result, the total number of outs is again counted by the total number of outs until the total number of outs reaches 60,000.

The low-probability payout number counter 203k is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out in normal times, excluding when there is a jackpot, when the probability is high (change in probability), and when the time is short. The low-probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch. When a ball is paid out (prize ball) when the gaming state is normal, the number of balls paid out is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

For example, in this embodiment, in normal times, the first starting opening 64a, which is called a so-called "belly button" whose opening is always open, the first normal winning opening 63a, and the second normal winning opening 63b, which are general winning openings, are opened. When it is detected by the first starting opening switch 208a, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, and the second normal winning opening switch 208d that a ball has entered the ball, the number of prize balls set for the corresponding winning opening is determined. is determined by the prize ball number table 202e (see FIGS. 6 and 9), and the number of prize balls is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

In addition, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a "small win" is provided as a form of "missing" and the large prize opening 65a is opened for several seconds and several times when a "small win" occurs, the game state In normal times, when the big winning hole 65a for a "small win" is opened and a ball enters the big winning hole 65a and a prize ball is played, the number of prize balls is counted in the low probability payout number counter 203k. may be added to. Further, when the game state is normal and a ball enters the second starting port 64b and a prize ball is played, the number of prize balls may be added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

The number of prize balls is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k in an accumulative manner until the total number of out balls counter 203j reaches 60,000. In other words, when the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000, the value of the low probability payout number counter 203k is the value of the number of balls paid out when the gaming state is normal compared to the 60,000 balls hit into the gaming area. The number of pieces.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000, the low probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero together with the total out number counter 203j. As a result, until the total number of balls out reaches 60,000 again, the number of balls paid out in the normal gaming state is counted by the low probability number of balls paid out counter 203k.

The MPU 201 calculates the real-time base value every predetermined period (for example, every 4 milliseconds when timer interrupt processing is executed) using the following equation (1).
Real-time base value = value of low probability payout number counter 203k/value of total out number counter 203j x 100...(1)
The real-time base value calculated by equation (1) is stored in the real-time base value data 203l.

That is, the real-time base value data 203l is data indicating a measured (calculated) real-time base value. Further, the previous base value data 203m is data indicating the previous base value, the base value data 203n is data indicating the base value two times before, and the base value data 203o is data indicating the base value two times before. be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39(b), the configurations of the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data 203n the time before the previous time, and the base value data 203o the time before the previous time will be described. FIG. 39(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of each base value data 203l to 203o.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), each base value data 203l to 203o consists of 8 bits (1 byte), the 7th bit (most significant bit) on the MSB side is a valid data flag, and the remaining The base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits (lower 7 bits). Each base value data 203l to 203o means that a valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits when the valid data flag is 1. On the other hand, in each of the base value data 203l to 203o, when the valid data flag is 0, it means that no valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits.

Each of the base value data 203l to 203o is initialized to zero for both the valid data flag and the base value when the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch. That is, immediately after the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, valid data is not stored in the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, and the base value the time before the last time.

Thereafter, until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the base value calculated by formula (1) is stored in the base value of the real-time base value data 203l, while the real-time base value data 203l The valid data flag remains at 0. In this case, when displaying the real-time base value in the base display device 401, "88." is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as a ratio. Display blinking (or lighting) on the segment.

As mentioned above, the RAM all erase switch is used when starting up a completely new pachinko machine 10 at a manufacturing factory, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a used machine, etc. It is operated when When a new pachinko machine 10 is launched, balls may be manually inserted into each winning opening and prize balls may be paid out during a shipping inspection for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time differs greatly from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when starting up a new pachinko machine 10, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches 300 is made to flash (or light) "88." in the identification segment. At the same time, by displaying the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l in a special display mode that is different from the normal base value display, in which the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed blinking (or lit) in the ratio segment, the base value being displayed is normalized. It can be shown that the value is not the base value (valid base value). Moreover, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state. In this special display mode, both the identification segment "88." and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may be lit or blinked. Alternatively, the identification segment "88." may be lit and the ratio segment's real-time base value blinks, or conversely, the identification segment's "88." may be blinked and the ratio segment's real-time base value is lit. You can.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. As a result, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l becomes a valid base value. Therefore, based on the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l becoming 1, "bL." is lit in the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment. By doing so, it is possible to notify an effective real-time base value.

On the other hand, at this stage, the valid data flags of all of the previous base value data 203m, the base value data 203n the day before the previous, and the base value data 203o the day before the previous remain 0. At this time, if the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, and the base value the time before the time before the previous time by switching every predetermined period, the identification segment displays a display corresponding to each base value, while the ratio segment “--” lights up. This can indicate that no effective base value has been obtained as the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, or the base value the time before the previous time.

When the total number of outs counter 203j reaches 60,000, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l at that time becomes the base value for the total number of outs of 60,000. Therefore, after shifting the base value data 203n from the previous time to the base value data 203o from the time before the previous time, and shifting the base value data 203m from the previous time to the base value data 203n, the real-time base value data 203l is changed to the base value data 203m from the previous time. shift. As a result, the base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 is held as the previous base value.

Here, when shifting data to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift is is also "1". Therefore, from now on, when displaying the previous base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed in the ratio segment as the valid base value.

In addition, when shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data 203n from the time before last, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch), After all the initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed (this applies when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time), the valid data flag of the base value data 203n after the shift becomes "1". Therefore, from now on, when displaying the base value from the previous time on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

Furthermore, when shifting the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time to the base value data 203o from the time before the previous time, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time is "1" (the power is turned off while operating the RAM erase switch), After being turned on and all the initialization of the RAM 203 is executed, the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time), the valid data flag of the base value data 203o two times before after the shift is "1". ”. Therefore, from now on, when displaying the base value from the time before the previous time on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o from the time before the previous time is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

When the total out number counter 203j becomes 60,000 and the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the real-time base value data 203l is initialized to 0 as well as the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0. Initialized to 0 including the valid data flag. Then, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is held as 0 until the total number of out pieces counter 203j reaches 300 pieces again, and when the total number of out pieces counter 203j reaches 300 pieces, the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l 1 is stored in the flag. Thereafter, 1 is held in the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000.

Here, while the total number of outs is small, the real-time base value measured is greatly affected by the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it will be a meaningless base value, and it will have a negative impact on the determination of fraudulent activity. There is a risk of harm. Therefore, when the total number of outs is between 0 and 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the real-time base value is displayed in the identification segment. While "bL." indicating the value is lit, "--" is lit in the ratio segment. This can indicate that a valid real-time base value is not currently obtained because the total number of outs is small. In this case, "bL." indicating the real-time base value may be blinked in the identification segment, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed in the ratio segment. This makes it possible to indicate that a currently valid real-time base value is not obtained due to the small total number of outs, and also to notify the real-time base value at that time for reference.

On the other hand, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the real-time base value is displayed in the identification segment. While "bL." indicating the base value is lit, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as the valid base value in the ratio segment.

Returning to FIG. 39(a), the new start-up flag 203p is set when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing factory, or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand machine. 10 is a flag indicating that the new startup period is in progress. When the new start-up flag 203p is on, it shows that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, and when it is off, it shows that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the new start-up period.

The new start-up flag 203p is initialized to ON when the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch that is operated when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, and is initialized to ON during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10. It is shown that The new startup flag 203p is kept on until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, and when the total out number counter 203j differs by 300, the new startup flag 203p is set to off. Thereafter, the new startup flag 203p remains off.

When the new start-up flag 203p is on, the base display device 401 has the above-mentioned special display mode, that is, "88." flashes (or lights up) in the identification segment, and the real-time base value data 203l appears in the ratio segment. The real-time base value is displayed in a blinking (or lighting) manner. Moreover, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

The display type counter 203q is a counter for determining the type of base value to be displayed on the base display device 401. When the display type counter 203q is 0, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value, and when the display type counter 203q is 1, the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, and the display type counter 203q When is 2, the base display device 401 displays the base value of the time before the previous time, and when the display type counter 203q is 3, the base display device 401 is caused to display the base value of the time before the time before the last time.

The display type counter 203q is set when the new start-up flag 203p is set to OFF, that is, when the new start-up period ends when the total number of outs reaches 300 after the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. is initialized to 0. Then, the display type counter 203q is counted up by 1 every 5 seconds, and if the value of the display type counter 203q is 3 when counting up, it is returned to 0. As a result, the base value displayed on the base display device 401 changes every 5 seconds in the order of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value from the time before the previous time, and the base value from the time before the last time, and the base value from the time before the last time is displayed. After that, the display returns to the real-time base value, and the display of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value from the time before the previous time, and the base value from the time before the time before the last time is repeated while switching every 5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this startup process. Here, this start-up process will be explained, focusing on the differences from the start-up process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Note that, as described above, the same reference numerals are given to the parts where the same processes as the start-up process of the first embodiment are executed, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, in the case where it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the process of S604 (S604: Yes), and in the case that it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S605 ( S605: No), and in the case where the calculated RAM judgment value is determined to be not normal through the process of S607 (S607: No), after transmitting the payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 (S614), the RAM 203 is Among the used areas, information necessary for displaying the base value is the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data 203n before the previous time, and the time before the previous time. The area excluding the base value data 203o and the new start-up flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3001), and an initial value is set for the cleared area of the RAM 203 excluding information necessary for displaying the base value (S3002). .

As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that has been performed before the operation is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. can be done. Furthermore, the base display device 401 can display the previous base value, the base value from the time before the previous time, and the base value from the time before the previous time held before the RAM erase switch 122 was operated. Even if the fraudster operates the RAM deletion switch 122 to erase the evidence, the information necessary for displaying the base value continues to be retained, so that the evidence of fraud can be prevented from being erased.

If it is determined in the process of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604), then it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S3003). If the RAM all erase switch is not turned on (S3003: No), the process moves to S605.

On the other hand, if the RAM all erase switch is turned on (S3003: Yes), a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111 (S3004), and then the RAM 203 Full initialization processing (S3005, S3006) is executed. In the entire initialization process (S3005, S3006) of the RAM 203, information necessary for displaying the base value is a total out number counter 203j, a low probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, and the previous base value. The used area of the RAM 203 including the value data 203n, the base value data 203o from the time before last, and the new startup flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3005), and then initial values are set in the RAM 203 (S3006).

As mentioned above, the RAM all erase switch is used when starting up a completely new pachinko machine 10 at a manufacturing factory, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a used machine, etc. It is designed to be operated when Then, by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erase switch, the total number of out pieces counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data 203n from the previous time, and the previous one The base value data 203o and the new start-up flag 203p can be initialized each time, and from there, measurement of the base value can be newly started. In addition, by making it possible to initialize (clear) this information when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a second-hand machine, it is possible to prevent the base value of the pachinko machine from being committed in the previous hall. Even if the information has changed, by continuing to display that information at the next store, it is possible to prevent suspicions from arising that fraudulent activity has occurred at the next store. Further, since the RAM all erase switch is provided in the board box 100 which is connected in an unopenable manner, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and unsealed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from deleting information necessary for displaying the base value, and to reliably protect this information.

When any one of S609, S3002, and S3006 is executed, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are then turned on (S3007), In this state, wait processing is executed for 5 seconds (S3008). As a result, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are lit continuously for at least 5 seconds. .

In the base display device 401, if some segments do not light up due to a failure such as a disconnection, the base value etc. cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a risk that an incorrect determination will be made as to whether or not there is fraudulent activity. By lighting all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for at least 5 seconds each time the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether all segments can be lit normally, and the base display It can be easily determined whether the display on the device 401 is performed normally.

Further, during the 5 seconds during which this lighting is performed, the progress of the start-up process is waited, and the start of the normal game process is awaited. As a result, if the base value cannot be displayed correctly on the base display device 401, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding without being able to determine whether or not there is cheating, and even if there is cheating. In this case, it is possible to prevent any disadvantage from occurring to the players, the hall, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time the power is turned on, while all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit, the game is stopped for 5 seconds so that the game does not proceed. However, while the light is turned on, normal game processing may be started and the game progressed. In this case, only the display of the base value on the base display device 401 may be made to stand by while measuring the real-time base value in accordance with the progress of the game. As a result, when a momentary power outage occurs, even if all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit, the player can immediately resume playing. Can be restarted.

In the start-up process, after the process in S3008, the process moves to S613.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the base value processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the base value processing. This base value processing is the role ratio processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) that is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, as shown in the third embodiment. This is executed as one process of (S2002), and calculates (measures) a base value and displays the base value.

In this base value processing, first, base value calculation processing is executed (S3101), real-time base value is calculated (measured), and when the total number of outs reaches 60,000, each base value data 203l to 203o is Performs shift processing, etc. Details of this base value calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, it is determined whether one second has passed since the last execution of the base value display process (S3103) (S3102), and it is determined that one second has passed since the last execution of the base value display process (S3103). If so (S3102: Yes), base value display processing is executed (S3103), and processing for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is executed. Note that details of the base value display process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44.

When the process of S3103 is completed, the base value process ends. On the other hand, as a result of the process in S3102, if it is determined that 1 second has not elapsed since the previous base value display process (S3103) (S3102: No), the base value display process (S3103) is skipped. The base value processing ends. As a result, the base value display process (S3103) is executed at one second intervals, and the display of the base display device 401 is driven and controlled every second.

Note that in the determination process of S3102, if the process of S3102 is executed for the first time after the main controller 110 is powered on (that is, after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed), the previous base Without checking whether one second has elapsed since executing the value display process (S3103), an affirmative determination is made (S3102: Yes) and the base value display process (S3103) is executed. Thereby, after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed, the drive control process for the base display device 401 can be executed immediately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the above-mentioned base value calculation process (S3101), which is one process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the base value calculation process.

In the base value calculation process (S3101), first, at least the output of each switch of the first starting port switch 208a, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the out switch 208f is read, and the first starting port 64a, the presence or absence of winnings in the first normal winning opening 63a and the second normal winning opening 63b and the presence or absence of balls guided to the ball ejection path are determined, and detection information (winning detection information) is stored (S3201 ). Note that the determination of one ball winning a prize and one ball guided to the ball ejection path is performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the respective switches 208a, 208c, 208d, and 208f.

Next, it is determined whether or not the out switch 208f is on (S3201), and if it is determined that the out switch 208f is on and there is a ball guided to the ball ejection path (S3201: Yes), the total out 1 is added to the number counter 203j (S3203). As a result, the total number of outs, which is the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path (that is, the number of balls hit), is counted by the total number of outs counter 203j.

After the processing in S3203 or in the processing in S3201, if it is determined that the out switch 208f is not on and there are no balls guided to the ball ejection path (S3201: No), then the gaming state is determined to be a jackpot. Instead, it is determined whether the state is a low probability state and not a time saving state, that is, whether the gaming state is a normal state (S3204). Then, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a jackpot, a low probability state, and a time saving state, that is, the gaming state is normal (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is executed.

That is, in the process of S3205, based on the winning detection information saved in the process of S3201, the winning opening 64a, the first normal winning opening 63a, and the second normal winning opening 63b is determined to have won. If there is a winning hole, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole (that is, the number defined by the prize ball number table 202e) is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out during normal times, excluding jackpots, high probability (variable probability) times, and short time times, is counted by the low probability payout number counter 203k.

After the processing in S3205 or in the processing in S3204, if it is determined that the gaming state is a jackpot, high probability (variable probability), or short time, that is, the gaming state is not normal (S3204: No), then a real-time base value is calculated using the above equation (1), and the calculated real-time base value is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3206). Through this process, the base value is measured in real time.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the total number of out items counter 203j is 60,000, that is, whether the total number of out items has reached 60,000 (S3207). As a result, if the total number of outs has not reached 60,000 (S3207: No), the process of S3208 to S3210 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3211. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 60,000 (S3207: Yes), the processes of S3208 to S3210 are executed, and the process moves to the process of S3211.

In the process of S3208, first, the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time is shifted to the base value data 203o from the time before the last time, the base value data 203m from the previous time are shifted to the base value data 203n from the time before the last time, and then the real time base value data 203l is shifted from the base value data 203l from the time before the last time. It is shifted to base value data 203m (S3208). As a result, the real-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 is held as the previous base value, and thereafter that base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous base value. In addition, the base values that have been displayed as the previous base value and the base value of the time before the previous time are displayed on the base display device 401 as the base value of the time before the previous time and the base value of the time before the previous time.

Note that each base value may be stored in a FIFO (First In First Out) ring buffer. In this case, the address (ring buffer pointer) for storing the real-time base value may be updated in the process of S3208. However, if the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer, and once the ring buffer pointer is corrupted by some influence such as noise, there is a risk that the base value will not be correctly stored in the RAM 203 or displayed. be. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the area of the RAM 203 that stores the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time is fixed, and each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, By shifting data between them, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problem that may occur when the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer.

Furthermore, in the process of S3208, these shift processes are executed with one LDIR instruction. The LDIR command enables block transfer of data by simply setting the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred, the start address (DE) of the transfer destination, and the number of transfer bytes (BC). That is, data is transferred from (HL) to (DE), 1 is added to both (HL) and (DE), and 1 is subtracted from (BC). Then, repeat this until (BC) becomes 0. Therefore, the base value data 203o from the time before the previous time is stored at the address (AA) (AA is one address of the RAM 203), the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time is stored at the address (AA+1), and the base value data 203m from the previous time are stored at the address (AA+2). ), store the real-time base value data 203l at address (AA+3), set the start address (HL) of the data you want to transfer to (AA), set the transfer destination address to (AA+1), By setting the number of transfer bytes to 3 bytes and executing one LDIR instruction, the shift processing in S3208 can be easily achieved.

In the subsequent process of S3209, the base value and valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l are initialized to 0 (S3209). As a result, new base values are measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, but until the total number of outs reaches 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is Retained as 0. While the total number of outs is small, the real-time base value measured is greatly affected by the content of the game at that time, so even if it is displayed, it will be a meaningless base value, and there is a risk that it will have a negative impact on the determination of cheating. be. Therefore, when the total number of outs is between 0 and 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the real-time base value is displayed in the identification segment. While "bL." indicating the value is lit, "--" is lit in the ratio segment. This can indicate that a valid real-time base value is not currently obtained because the total number of outs is small.

In the subsequent process of S3210, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0 (S3210). As a result, the total number of outs is again counted by the total number of outs until the total number of outs reaches 60,000.

In the process of S3211, it is determined whether the value of the total number of out items counter 203j is 300, that is, whether the total number of out items has reached 300 (S3211). As a result, if the total number of outs has not reached 300 (S3211: No), the process of S3212 to S3215 is skipped, and the base value calculation process is ended. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 300 (S3211: Yes), the base value calculation process ends after executing the processes of S3212 to S3215.

In the process of S3212, it is determined whether the new startup flag 203p is on (S3212). As a result, if the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period because the power was turned on while operating the RAM erase switch. . Then, as a result of the process in S3211, the total number of outs has reached 300, so it is time to end the new start-up period, so the new start-up flag 203p is set to OFF (S3213). Then, the display type counter 203q is initialized to zero (S3214). As a result, from now on, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-previous base value, and the two-previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, switching every five seconds.

If it is determined that the new start-up flag 203p is off after the process of S3214 or by the process of S3212 (S3212: No), then 1 is set to the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l. Ru. As a result, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment is While "bL." indicating the real-time base value is lit, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as the valid base value in the ratio segment.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, details of the above-mentioned base value display process (S3103), which is a process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 and is executed at 1-second intervals, will be explained. I will explain about it. FIGS. 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the base value calculation process (S3103).

First, referring to FIG. 43, when the base value calculation process (S3103) is started, it is determined whether the new startup flag 203p is on (S3301). If the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3301: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period because the power was turned on while operating the RAM erase switch. Therefore, the base display device control circuit 402 causes the identification segment of the base display device 401 to display "88." blinking (or lit) and the ratio segment to display the base value of the real-time base value data 203l blinking (or lit). A control signal is transmitted to (S3302). Then, the base value display process ends.

As described above, when a new pachinko machine 10 is launched, balls may be manually put into each winning slot and prize balls may be paid out during a shipping inspection to check the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time differs greatly from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the display on the base display device 401 is made to flash (or turn on) "88." in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed on the base display device 401. To indicate that the displayed base value is not a regular base value (valid base value) by displaying it in a special display mode different from the normal base value display by flashing (or lighting) on the ratio segment. Can be done. Moreover, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

On the other hand, if the new startup flag 203p is off as a result of the process in S3302 (S3301: No), then it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the display type counter 203q was updated or initialized (S3303). As a result, if 5 seconds have elapsed (S3303: Yes), the display type counter 203q is updated (S3304), and the process moves to S3305 shown in FIG. On the other hand, as a result of the process in S3303, if 5 seconds have not elapsed (S3303: No), the process in S3304 is skipped and the process moves to the process in S3305 shown in FIG. 44.

In updating the display type counter 203q in S3304, if the display type counter 203q is other than 3, 1 is added to the display type counter 203q. Further, when the display type counter 203q is 3, the display type counter 203q is initialized to 0. By updating the display type counter 203q every 5 seconds, the types of base values displayed on the base display device 401 can be changed to real-time base value, previous base value, base value two days before last, base value two days before last, and real-time base value. , previous base value, ... are switched every 5 seconds.

Referring to FIG. 44, in the process of S3305, the value of the display type counter 203q is determined (S3305). If the display type counter 203q is 0 (S3305: "0"), it is the period in which the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 (S3306), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3306: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is displayed as “bL. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to display the base value of the real-time base value data 203l on the ratio segment (S3307). As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured for a total number of outs of 300 or more, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1, indicating that the base value is valid. is set to Therefore, the real-time base value measured as a valid base value can be displayed and shown on the base display device 401.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3306, if the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 0 (S3306: No), "bL." is lit and displayed in the identification segment of the base display device 401, and "bL." is displayed in the ratio segment. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to display "--" (S3308).

As mentioned above, if the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured when the total number of outs is less than 300, the base value is not valid and the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l is The flag is set to 0. This can indicate that a valid real-time base value is not currently obtained because the total number of outs is small.

Further, as a result of the processing in S3305, if the display type counter 203q is 1 (S3305: “1”), this is the period in which the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 1 (S3309), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3309: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is displayed as “b1. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to display the base value of the previous base value data 203m in the ratio segment (S3310). Thereby, when a valid base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m, the valid previous base value can be displayed on the base display device 401 to be shown.

In addition, when the total number of out items reaches 60,000 and the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l that is the shift target is "1", and the previous data after the shift is The valid data flag of the base value data 203m also becomes "1". Therefore, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401 after the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the previous base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed on the base display device 401. The base value will be displayed in the ratio segment as a valid base value.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3309, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 0 (S3309: No), "b1." is displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the ratio segment is A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 to display "--" (S3311). As a result, if a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, it can be indicated by "--" displayed in the ratio segment that no valid previous base value has been obtained.

As a result of the processing in S3305, if the display type counter 203q is 2 (S3305: "2"), this is the period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before the previous time. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203n from the previous time is 1 (S3312), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3312: Yes), "b2. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to light up and display the base value of the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time in the ratio segment (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the base value data 203n, the effective base value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

In addition, when shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data 203n from the time before last, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch), After all the initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed (this applies when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time), the valid data flag of the base value data 203n after the shift becomes "1". Therefore, from now on, when displaying the base value from the previous time on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time will be displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3312, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time is 0 (S3312: No), "b2." is displayed in the identification segment of the base display device 401 by lighting, and the ratio segment is A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 to display "--" (S3313). As a result, if a valid base value is not obtained as the base value for the time before the previous time, it can be indicated by "--" displayed in the ratio segment that a valid base value for the time before the time before the previous time has not been obtained.

As a result of the processing in S3305, if the display type counter 203q is 3 (S3305: "3"), this is the period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203o two days before last is 1 (S3315), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3315: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "b3." is displayed in an illuminated manner, and the base value of the base value data 203o from the time before the previous one is displayed in the ratio segment (S3316). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the base value data 203o, the valid base value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

In addition, when shifting the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time to the base value data 203o from the time before the previous time, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n from the time before the previous time is "1" (while operating the RAM all erase switch, After being turned on and all the initialization of the RAM 203 is executed, the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time), the valid data flag of the base value data 203o two times before after the shift is "1". ”. Therefore, from now on, when displaying the base value from the time before the previous time on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o from the time before the previous time will be displayed in the ratio segment as the valid base value. Become.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3315, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203o from the time before the previous one is 0 (S3315: No), while displaying "b2." in the identification segment of the base display device 401, A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to display "--" in the ratio segment (S3317). As a result, if a valid base value is not obtained as the base value for the time before the previous one, "--" will be displayed in the ratio segment to indicate that a valid base value for the time before the previous time has not been obtained. can be shown.

When any one of S3307, S3308, S3310, S3311, S3313, S3314, S3316, and S3371 is completed, the base value display process is ended as shown in FIG. 43.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the base display device 401 displays a real-time base value (hereinafter "real-time base value") that is measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 the previous time (most recently), and the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 one time before the previous time (the time before the previous one). The two-previous base value measured at the time of the previous two times and the two-previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 pieces one time before the two previous times (two times before the previous one) are calculated every predetermined period. The display will be switched to . In addition to the real-time base value, by displaying multiple past base values (previous base value, base value the day before last, base value the day before last), it becomes possible to more accurately judge whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. Furthermore, the timing of the fraudulent act can be predicted to some extent.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. is lit for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). Thereby, it can be confirmed whether all segments can be lit normally, and it can be easily determined whether the display on the base display device 401 is performed normally.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is suitable for new pachinko machines 10, such as when starting up a completely new pachinko machine 10 in a manufacturing factory, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a used machine. When starting up, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. . When starting up a new pachinko machine 10, balls may be manually inserted into each winning slot and prize balls may be paid out during a shipping inspection to check the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time differs greatly from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when starting up a new pachinko machine 10, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is not the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. Moreover, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

In addition, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments, effects similar to those obtained by the configuration can be achieved.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 58. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments, the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are set in advance by the main controller 110, and the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are set by the hall personnel etc. It was made impossible to change the winning probability of the two symbols. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be set in multiple stages (in this embodiment, set values "1" to "6") by the hall personnel etc. It is configured so that it can be changed to 6 stages). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when changing the set value of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol (hereinafter referred to as "probability set value") (hereinafter referred to as "setting change mode"), When confirming the probability setting value (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation mode"), the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured such that the history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as "error history") can be displayed on the base display device 401.

The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments. The explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a base display device 401 is disposed on the main board constituting the main control device 110, and as shown in FIG. It is assembled so that the display screen of the device 401 can be seen. On the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in normal times, while the probability setting value is displayed in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. The base display device 401 is also configured to be able to display error history.

Further, on the main board constituting the main controller 110, there are a setting key 501 used for changing or checking the set probability setting value, and a base display device 401. An error display button 502 is provided for use in displaying error history. The setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are provided to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel etc. without opening the board box 100.

Here, the setting key 501 will be explained with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46(a) is a front view of the setting key 501 when the setting key 501 is in the off state, and FIG. 46(b) is a front view of the setting key 501 when the setting key 501 is in the on state. FIG. The setting key 501 can be set between two positions, the off side indicated by "OFF" and the on side indicated by "ON", by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable. The setting key 501 is in the OFF state when it is located on the OFF side, and is in the ON state when it is located on the warm side.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine The start-up mode of the machine 10 is determined. Note that the door open switch is a switch that detects that the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened).

FIG. 47 shows the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10, and the RAM erase switch 122, setting key 501, and door release switch ( (not shown).

The pachinko machine 10 has four start-up modes: a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than these RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode, and is used when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or the data stored in the RAM 203 is corrupted. This mode is for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power was cut off by executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 except for the above.

Then, if the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 kept in the OFF state, the Pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. Further, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 in the off state to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on the condition that the door release switch is turned on. . Further, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode on the condition that the door opening switch is on.

In this way, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the hall personnel etc. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select either the RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode that is not related to the probability setting value, or the normal mode.

On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened and the setting key 501 is turned on, the hall personnel etc. can turn on the RAM erase switch 122. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is started up, a setting change mode related to the probability setting value or a setting confirmation mode can be selected as the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a startup mode unrelated to the probability setting value and a startup mode related to the probability setting value can be selected. When setting the start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the start-up mode related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

Here, when the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol in the game are changed. There is a possibility that the player will not be able to exhibit the prescribed gaming performance. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 changes the probability setting value in the setting change mode, the data stored in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). On the other hand, since the setting confirmation mode is a startup mode that only confirms the probability setting value, the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (not cleared) so that the gaming state before the power is turned off can be inherited and the game can be continued. .

Therefore, in this embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM is cleared while the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened and the setting key 501 is turned on. Turn on the switch 122 to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10, and if you want to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the inner frame 12 should be unlocked and opened before setting. The pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the key 501 turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode related to probability setting values, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. When starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode or setting change mode in which data stored in the RAM 203 is cleared, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing (turning on) the RAM erase switch 122. In other words, if those involved in the hall understand the meaning of each startup mode, they can easily understand what operations are required on the Pachinko machine 10 for the startup mode that will be launched from now on.

Further, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, a special key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value and searching for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability and/or a high winning probability, or from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability. Furthermore, since the RAM erase switch 122 is provided in a position that is normally not easily touched by the player, it is also possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability.

In addition, there are only two switches that must be operated at the same time even when starting up in the setting operation mode, and the operation can be performed with both hands, resulting in good operability. As described above, the hall personnel etc. can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on/off the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

In addition, in this embodiment, when starting up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the door opening switch is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is opened. The condition is that.

This is because in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, it is necessary for hall personnel etc. to visually check the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. This is because 12 must be open. Therefore, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is in the on state, the setting key 501 is turned on without starting up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. Similarly to the off state, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode. As a result, even though the setting key 501 is in the on state and the inner frame 12 is closed, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the game is started in the pachinko machine 10. You can prevent it from starting. Furthermore, in order to open the inner frame 12, a special key managed by the hall is required. Therefore, a player can open the inner box 12 without permission, check the probability setting value, and search for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability and/or a high winning probability, or arbitrarily change the probability setting value to a high probability. You can refrain from doing things.

Note that when starting up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary that the door opening switch is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is open, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. You don't have to. In other words, when the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode regardless of whether the door release switch is turned on or not. You can also launch it with Furthermore, if the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, the pachinko machine 10 will be in the setting confirmation mode regardless of whether the door release switch is turned on or not. You can launch it.

Now, this pachinko machine 10 has a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode for changing or checking the probability setting value as one of the start-up modes, but in this embodiment, the probability setting value is changed and confirmed. This setting confirmation mode allows confirmation of the probability setting value only when the pachinko machine 10 is started up (when the power is turned on), and the probability setting value cannot be confirmed while the game is in progress. This is due to the following reason.

That is, the display of the base value by the base display device 401, the display related to the ratio of accessories, the ratio of accessories, etc., and the display of values representing gaming performance, gaming status, etc., make it possible to detect fraudulent activities at an early stage. Therefore, in principle, it must be displayed during the game. Therefore, at least the probability setting value cannot be displayed while the player is playing the game.

If the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed at times other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, even when the player is playing a game. For example, it is possible to stop the game. However, although the main control device 110 can stop the variable time by stopping the game, there is a risk that the variable performance will continue to be performed on the third symbol display device 81. There is a possibility that a mismatch may occur between the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to display the probability setting value even when the pachinko machine 10 is being started. Although it is possible to continue playing the game and check the probability setting value on the base display device 401, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 in order to check the display on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the player to continue playing the game.

It is also conceivable that after the setting key 501 is turned on, the probability setting value may be displayed on the base display device 401 after waiting for all variable effects including jackpots and reserved portions to be completed. However, many of the variable effects have long variable times, and some of them last for about 5 minutes. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is set to be long when the gaming state is normal, and it takes a long time until all the reservations are cleared, so it is difficult to wait until the probability setting value is displayed.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, if the user wants to change or confirm the probability setting value, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off, the setting key 501 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Thereby, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401 in a state where no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, and the probability setting value can be reliably changed or confirmed by the person concerned with the hall. In addition, by turning off the power to the pachinko machine 10, the state before the power is turned off is backed up to the RAM 203, and the startup process is performed without clearing the backed up state. Even if the set value is confirmed, the game can be resumed from the state before the power was turned off.

In addition, by limiting the possibility of changing or checking the probability setting value to when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to prevent players from arbitrarily checking or changing the probability setting value during normal play.

FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing the roles of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 in the setting change mode. Further, FIG. 48(b) is a diagram showing the role of the setting key 501 in the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated. Further, when the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is determined as the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10.

In this embodiment, "1" to "6" can be set as the probability setting value, and for each probability setting value ("1" to "6"), the jackpot random value and/or the second The winning random number value of the symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol at the probability setting value are determined by the number of jackpot random numbers and/or second symbol winning random numbers determined for each probability setting value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), the lower the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol. Alternatively, a jackpot random number value and/or a winning random number value for the second symbol are determined for each probability setting value so that the probability of winning the second symbol is high.

The jackpot random number and/or the second symbol's winning random number are fixed, and the range of random numbers generated to perform the jackpot lottery and/or for each probability setting value ("1" to "6") is fixed. Alternatively, the range of random numbers to be generated for performing the winning lottery for the second symbol may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol at the probability setting value are determined by the range of the jackpot random number and/or the range of the second symbol's winning random number determined for each probability setting value.

In the setting change mode, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is incremented by one. However, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is “6”, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated to “1”. Ru. That is, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 loops while being incremented by 1 in the range of "1" to "6".

Then, in the setting change mode, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is determined as the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10. After the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 thereafter controls the game using the determined probability setting value, and displays the base value on the base display device 401.

In the setting confirmation mode, when the setting key 501 is turned off as shown in FIG. 48(b), the setting confirmation mode is ended and the base value is displayed instead of the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 Display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the display contents of the probability setting values displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and FIG. 49(a) is one example.

In the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. Also, among the 7 segment displays 401c and 401d that constitute the ratio segment of the base display device 401, all segments of the left 7 segment display 401c are turned off, and only the right 7 segment display 401d is used. Displays the probability setting value (1 to 6).

As described in the fifth embodiment, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes characters (bL., b1., etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed on the ratio segment. ), whereas in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), all identification segments are turned off in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. As a result, the display states can be clearly differentiated between when displaying the base value and when displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401. It is possible to understand whether the information being displayed is a base value or a probability setting value. Further, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and the 7-segment display on the left side All segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, so even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, you will see that all segments of the 7-segment display 401c to the left of the ratio segment are turned off. This makes it possible for hall personnel and the like to clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value.

FIG. 49(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 49(b), in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, only the middle horizontal bar segment lights up in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment of the base display device 401, Turn off other segments. That is, "--" is displayed in the identification segment. Furthermore, among the seven segment displays 401c and 401d forming the ratio segments of the base display device 401, in the left seven segment display 401c, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit, and the other segments are turned off. In other words, "-" is also displayed in the segment. Then, the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment.

This also allows the display state of the identification segment to be clearly differentiated between when displaying the base value and when displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401, so that at first glance, the base display device 401 It is possible to make the user understand whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. In addition, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and "-" is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, you can check the display on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment and know that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value. This can be clearly understood by hall personnel.

FIG. 49(c-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(c-2) is a schematic diagram showing the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the content. In this example, the display contents are also changed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, the identification segment turns off all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment, as in FIG. 49(a). On the other hand, the ratio segment displays "H" indicating the setting change mode or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode on the left 7-segment display 401c of the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d that constitute the ratio segment. , the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

This also allows the display state of the identification segment to be clearly differentiated between when displaying the base value and when displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401, so that at first glance, the base display device 401 It is possible to make the user understand whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value.

Further, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2), in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to set the probability. On the left 7-segment display 401c, "H" is displayed in the setting change mode, and "C" is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, "H" or "C", which is different from the number, is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment, and the base display device 401 It is possible to make it clear to hall personnel, etc. that the information displayed is the probability setting value.

In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it is clearly shown whether the current mode is setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. be able to.

FIG. 49(d-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(d-2) is a schematic diagram showing the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the content. In this example as well, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, similar to FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2). Specifically, in the identification segment, in the seven segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit, and the other segments are turned off. That is, "--" is displayed in the identification segment. On the other hand, for the ratio segment, the 7 segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment are set in the setting change mode on the left 7 segment display 401c, as in FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2). "H" indicating the mode or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed, and the probability setting value (1 to 6) is displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

This also allows the display state of the identification segment to be clearly differentiated between when displaying the base value and when displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401. It is possible to make the user understand whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Furthermore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the base display device 401 will display "H" or "C", which is different from the number, on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible to make hall personnel etc. clearly understand that the displayed information is a probability setting value. In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it is clearly indicated whether the current mode is setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. be able to.

FIG. 49(e-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(e-2) is a schematic diagram showing the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the content. In this example as well, the display content is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but the difference between the display content and the identification segment is that the display content is changed in the identification segment. This is different from the example and the examples shown in FIGS. 49(d-1) and (d-2). Specifically, in the seven segment displays 401a and 401b forming the identification segment, "SH." is displayed in the setting change mode, and "SC." is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left are turned off, and only the 7-segment display 401d on the right is used to display the probability setting values (1 to 6).

As described above, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment displays characters (bL., b1., etc.) for identifying the type of base value displayed on the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the setting change mode, "SH." indicating the setting change mode is displayed, and in the setting confirmation mode, "SC." indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed. . In this way, the display content displayed on the identification segment is different between when the base value is displayed and when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are displayed, so that the two can be clearly differentiated. Therefore, it is possible to understand at a glance whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Furthermore, by displaying different display contents on the identification segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, while in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment display on the right side of the ratio segment 401d is used to display the probability setting value, and all segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off, so even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the left 7-segment indicator 401c Seeing that all the segments on the segment display 401c are off, it is made clear to the hall personnel that the information displayed on the base display 401 is at least a probability setting value rather than a base value. You can make them understand.

Returning to FIG. 45, the explanation will be continued. The error display button 502 is a button for displaying the error history on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 is capable of displaying the error history, which is the history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10. This error history display is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is pressed. That is, the base value continues to be displayed on the base display device 401 unless the error display button 502 is pressed.

Fraud in which the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to an impact or a magnet is brought close to it to change the direction in which the balls flow, causing the balls to enter various winning slots to intentionally obtain prize balls or cause a jackpot lottery to take place. In some cases, a fraudulent act may be performed, such as intentionally causing a ball to pass through the through gate 67 to draw a winning lottery with a normal symbol. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to detect an impact or the approach of a magnet, and if these are detected, the game is stopped as a serious error. At this time, the base display device 401 does not display the error history but continues to display the base value.

If the configuration is such that when a serious error is detected, the error type is displayed on the base display device 401, a person who commits a fraudulent act so that the base value etc. is changed will be able to display the error type on the base display device 401. In order to hide the base value displayed on the machine, a serious error is caused by intentionally giving a shock to the pachinko machine 10 or bringing a magnet close to it, causing the base display device 401 to display the error type, and the base value is not displayed. It is conceivable that it could be made to do so.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, even if a serious error is detected, by continuing to display the base value on the base display device 401, a person who commits a fraudulent act that changes the base value etc. It is possible to make it impossible to hide the display of the base value after a fraudulent act, and fraudulent acts with respect to the base value can be surely discovered.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is pressed. The displayed error history allows those involved in the hall to understand what kind of error occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When the pressing operation of the error display button 502 is released, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 again.

Note that the error history may display only the error type that occurred closest in time. Furthermore, the error types may be displayed for up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) starting from the error, including the error that occurred closest in time. When displaying error types for a maximum of a plurality of times, the base display device 401 displays them for a predetermined period of time starting from the error type whose occurrence time is closest to the current time. In addition, if the error display button 502 is pressed when no error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 (or no error record remains), the error display button 502 is pressed while the button is pressed. A display indicating that there is no record may be displayed on the base display device 401, or the base value may continue to be displayed.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, while the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, but when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the error history is displayed. When the button 502 is pressed once, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. When the error display button 502 is pressed once while the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the base display device 401 is displayed. The base value may be configured to be redisplayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 will be described. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and FIG. 50(a) is one example.

In the example shown in FIG. 50(a), when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, all segments of the seven segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. In addition, among the 7 segment displays 401c and 401d that constitute the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that the error history is displayed is displayed on the left 7 segment display 401c, and the 7 segment display on the right The error type is displayed numerically using only the device 401d. For example, if there is an impact detection error, "1" is displayed as the error type, and if there is a magnet detection error, "2" is displayed as the error type.

As described in the fifth embodiment, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes characters (bL., b1., etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed on the ratio segment. ), whereas in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), all identification segments are turned off in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. As a result, the display states can be clearly differentiated between when displaying the base value and when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, so that it is possible to clearly differentiate the display states between when displaying the base value on the base display device 401 and when displaying the error history. It is possible to understand whether the information being used is a base value or an error history. Further, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 50(a), when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and the probability setting value is displayed on the left side. Since "E" indicating the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the information displayed on the base display 401 is the error history. This can be clearly understood by those involved in the hall.

Furthermore, even if the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(a), FIG. When displaying on the display device 401, "E" indicating error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so when displaying the probability setting value and error history on the base display device 401. The display state can be clearly differentiated depending on the case, and it is possible to understand at a glance whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. can.

On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(b), FIG. 49(d-1), (d-2), FIG. In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between displaying the probability setting value and displaying the error history, and it is possible to clearly differentiate the display on the identification segment between displaying the probability setting value and displaying the error history. It is possible to make the user understand whether the information being displayed is a probability setting value or an error history. In addition, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit. Also, it is possible to make hall personnel etc. clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history.

FIG. 50(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents when error history is displayed on the base display device 401. In the example shown in FIG. 50(b), when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment lights up in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment of the base display device 401. and turn off the other segments. That is, "--" is displayed in the identification segment. In addition, among the 7 segment displays 401c and 401d that constitute the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that the error history is displayed is displayed on the left 7 segment display 401c, and the 7 segment display on the right Using only the device 401d, the error type is displayed numerically as in FIG. 50(a).

With this, it is possible to clearly differentiate the display states between when displaying the base value and when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, so that the display state on the base display device 401 can be clearly differentiated at a glance. It is possible to understand whether the information being displayed is a base value or an error history. In addition, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the base history is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. "E" is displayed, so even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, you can check the information displayed on the base display device 401 by looking at the display on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible to make it clear to those involved in the hall that this is the probability setting value.

Furthermore, even if the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(b), FIG. When displaying on the display device 401, "E" indicating error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so when displaying the probability setting value and error history on the base display device 401. The display state can be clearly differentiated depending on the case, and it is possible to understand at a glance whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. can.

On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(a), FIG. 49(c-1), (c-2), FIG. In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between displaying the probability setting value and displaying the error history, and it is possible to clearly differentiate the display on the identification segment between displaying the probability setting value and displaying the error history. It is possible to make the user understand whether the information being displayed is a probability setting value or an error history. In addition, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit. Also, it is possible to make hall personnel etc. clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history.

FIG. 50 (c-1) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when displaying the error type that occurred closest in time as an error history, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display content when displaying the error type that occurred second closest in terms of time. In the examples shown in FIGS. 50(c-1) and (c-2), among the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment, the left 7-segment display 401a shows "E" indicating the error history display. is displayed, and on the right seven-segment display 401b, a numerical value indicating which error type the displayed error type relates to is displayed. In other words, when the identification segment is displayed as "E1.", it indicates that the error type of the error that occurred closest in time is displayed, and when the identification segment is displayed as "E2.", it indicates that the error type of the error that occurred closest in time is displayed. Indicates that the error type of the error that occurred next closest to the error type is displayed. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left are turned off, and only the 7-segment display 401d on the right is used to display the error type.

In this way, the display content displayed on the identification segment is different when displaying the base value, when displaying the probability setting value, and when displaying the error history, so that each clearly Can be differentiated. Therefore, it is possible to understand at a glance whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value, a probability setting value, or an error history. In addition, in the identification segment, by displaying a numerical value indicating how closely the displayed error type relates to an error that occurred in time, it is possible to It can clearly indicate whether the error is related to the error that occurred.

In addition, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, while when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the 7 segments on the right side of the ratio segment Only the display 401d is used to display the error type, and all segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off, so even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the left ratio segment By seeing that all segments of the 7-segment display 401c are turned off, it is possible to make hall personnel etc. clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not at least the base value. can. Then, due to circumstances such as the error display button 502 being pressed and not when the pachinko machine 10 is being started up, the system informs the hall personnel that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history. can be easily understood.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates that the base display device 401 is displaying the probability setting value in the setting change mode (hereinafter referred to as “setting change display”). A display mode showing that the probability setting value is displayed in the setting confirmation mode (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation display") will be explained.

First, FIG. 51(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. As described above in the description of the first embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 37a are provided, and depending on the lighting state of the plurality of LEDs 37a, a variable display is performed, a symbol according to the lottery result is displayed after the variable display, or a pending series is displayed. I will show you. Further, the LED 37a includes seven round number notification LEDs 37a1 (first round number notification LED to seventh round number notification LED) for notifying the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot when a jackpot occurs.

This pachinko machine 10 uses this round number notification LED 37a1 to light up the round number notification LED 37a1 in a lighting pattern different from that for notification of the maximum number of rounds, thereby indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Notify that the display is being performed.

FIG. 51(b) shows a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2, a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, and a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15 in the round number notification LED 37a1, and a lighting pattern during setting change. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern for notifying that a display is being performed and a lighting pattern for notifying that a setting confirmation display is being performed.

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2 is that the first round number notification LED is "off," the second round number notification LED is "off," and the third round number notification LED is "off." is "off", the 4th round number notification LED is "off", the 5th round number notification LED is "on", the 6th round number notification LED is "on", and the 7th round number notification LED is "on". .

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 to notify that the maximum number of rounds is 15 is that the first round number notification LED is "on," the second round number notification LED is "on," and the third round number notification LED is "on." is "on", the 4th round number notification LED is "on", the 5th round number notification LED is "off", the 6th round number notification LED is "off", and the 7th round number notification LED is "off". .

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 to notify that the setting is being changed is that the first round number notification LED is "on," the second round number notification LED is "off," and the third round number notification LED is "off." "On", the fourth round number notification LED is "on", the fifth round number notification LED is "on", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "on".

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the setting is being confirmed is that the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "off", and the third round number notification LED is "off". "On", the fourth round number notification LED is "off", the fifth round number notification LED is "on", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "on".

In addition, in this embodiment, the round number notification LED 37a1 is used to not only notify the maximum number of rounds at the time of a jackpot, but also to indicate that settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed using a lighting pattern that is different from the lighting pattern used for these notifications. Although we have described the case of notifying that the display is being performed, using an LED other than the round number notification LED 37a1, such as an LED to notify a jackpot symbol or an LED to notify a winning symbol, or by using the entire LED 37a, the original A lighting pattern that is not used for notification may be used to notify that the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed. Thereby, without changing the hardware configuration of the first symbol display device 37, it is possible to notify the setting change display or the setting confirmation display on the first symbol display device 37 only by controlling the software.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that the setting key 501 and error display button 502 are connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. The impact detection sensor 503 and magnetic sensor 504 are connected to the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is also different in that an error detection signal is output from the payout control device 111 to the main control device 110.

Setting key 501 outputs a signal to main controller 110 indicating whether it is in the off state or on state. The main controller 110 grasps the state of the setting key 501 during the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, and also outputs an output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The startup mode is determined based on the conditions shown in FIG. 47 by understanding the contents of the RAM erase signal SG2 and the signal output from the door open switch.

The error display button 502 outputs a signal indicating whether or not a pressing operation has been performed to the main controller 110. The main control device 110 determines whether or not the error display button 502 is pressed based on the signal output from the error display button 502, and causes the base display device 401 to display the error history while the button is pressed.

The impact detection sensor 503 is a sensor for detecting that an impact is applied to the pachinko machine 10. The magnetic sensor 504 is a sensor for detecting that a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10.

When the impact detection sensor 503 detects that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 detects that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 by a fraudster, and the downward direction of the balls has been changed illegally. The controller determines that a serious error has occurred and instructs the launch control device 112 to stop launching the ball, and also notifies the main controller 110 of the occurrence of the error. Outputs error detection signal.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 504 detects that a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 detects that the magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10 by a fraudster, and the downward direction of the ball is fraudulently changed. In order to determine that there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, and to instruct the launch control device 112 to stop launching the ball as a serious error has occurred, and to notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error. outputs an error detection signal.

When the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, it stops the progress of the game. Thereby, if there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, the game in the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped. In addition, the main control device 110 inputs the error type (impact detection error or magnet detection error) notified by the error detection signal received from the payout control device 111 into error data 203t of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53), which will be described later. ). When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. This outside work area 203y1 stores at least base value data 203r, accessory ratio data 203s, and error data 203t.

The base value data 203r is data necessary for calculating a base value and displaying the calculated base value on the base display device 401. For example, the total out number counter shown in FIG. 39(a) 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, base value data 203n the time before last, base value data 203o the time before last, new startup flag 203p, etc.

The accessory ratio data 203s is data necessary for calculating the accessory ratio and displaying the calculated accessory ratio on the base display device 401. For example, the first 1 counter 263a shown in FIG. , the beginning 2 counter 263b, the ordinary 1 counter 263c, the ordinary 2 counter 263d, the big prize opening counter 263e, the out counter 263f, the accessory ratio data 264a, the data corresponding to the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, or similar data. .

The error data 203t is data indicating the type of error that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When an error detection signal is received from the payout control device 111, the error type indicated by the error detection signal is stored as error data 203t. When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

Here, if the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is only the error type that occurred closest in time, only the latest error type is always stored in the error data 203t. Specifically, when the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, it overwrites the error data 203t with the error type indicated by the error detection signal. As a result, the base display device 401 always stores only the latest error type, and the error history displayed on the base display device 401 displays only the error type that occurred closest in time.

On the other hand, if the error history to be displayed on the base display device 401 is to display error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, 4 times) going back from the error, including the error that occurred closest in time, , the error data 203t stores a plurality of times of occurrence in order from the time closest to the current time.

For example, the error data 203t stores the error types that occurred closest in time so that the error types for four times are stored in order from the one whose occurrence time is closest to the current time. First error type data to be stored, second error type data to store the error type that occurred second closest in time, and third error type data to store the error type that occurred third closest in time. data, and fourth error type data that stores the error type that occurred fourth closest in terms of time. When the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, it shifts the third error type data to the fourth error type data, shifts the second error type data to the third error type data, and shifts the third error type data to the third error type data. The first error type data is shifted to the second error type data, and the error type indicated by the received error detection signal is stored as the first error type data. As a result, the error data 203t stores four error types in order from the time that occurred closest to the current time, and the base display device 401 stores the error types including the error that occurred closest in time. , error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, 4 times) are displayed going back from the error in question. Additionally, in this case, by assigning an address for each error type data so that each error type data can be shifted with one LDIR instruction, the shift process can be performed with only one LDIR instruction. .

In addition, in the case where the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is to display error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, 4 times) going back from the error, including the error that occurred closest in time, , the error data 203t may be configured as a FIFO (First In First Out) ring buffer to store the error types for a plurality of times. In this case, when the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, it may update the address (ring buffer pointer) that stores the error type.

Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode, at least the base value data 203r, accessory ratio data 203s, and error data 203t are retained without being deleted. do. As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t cannot be erased, so these cannot be displayed on the base display device 401. Can be done. Therefore, even if the fraudster turns on the RAM erasure switch 122 in an attempt to conceal the fraud, it is possible to prevent the evidence from being hidden.

Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode and the probability setting value is changed, the data in the RAM 203 is also erased, but the base value data 203r and error data 203t are erased. Leave it as it is without changing it. Thereby, even if the fraudster changes the probability setting value in an attempt to conceal the fraud, it is possible to prevent the evidence from being hidden. On the other hand, the accessory ratio data 203s is erased during data erasure of the RAM 203, which is performed after changing the probability setting value. This is because when the probability setting value is changed, the accessory ratio will also change, so if the data 203s for accessory ratio based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the ratio will be changed based on the probability setting value after the change. This is because the ratio cannot be calculated correctly. On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, the base value data 203r is retained to retain past base values and information necessary to calculate the base value. By setting this information, it is possible to make it possible to discover fraudulent acts committed in the past without concealing them.

In this way, when erasing the data in the RAM 203 after changing the probability setting value, some of the data related to the display on the base display device 401 is retained without being erased, and the remaining data is By deleting the data, data can be retained or deleted according to the actual situation of each data.

In addition, the outside work area 203y1 is divided into an area to be erased by erasing data in the RAM 203 after changing the probability setting value, and an area to be retained without erasing, and the ratio of accessories to the area to be erased. The base value data 203r and the error data 203t may be stored in an area where the data 203s is stored and retained without being deleted. As a result, the data including the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased can be easily erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after changing the probability setting value. The data including the base value data 203r and the error data 203t stored in the area to be retained without any modification can be reliably retained by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after changing the probability setting value. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set to the stack pointer.

Next, internal function register setting processing is executed (S4002). In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) that performs the main control of the game is executed using timer interrupts that occur every 4 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "4 millisecond timer interrupt"), and the Base display control processing (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content displayed on the display device 401 is executed in response to a timer interrupt (hereinafter referred to as "2 millisecond timer interrupt") that occurs every 2 milliseconds. In the process of S4002, for example, these 4 millisecond timer interrupts and 2 millisecond timer interrupts are permitted. In addition, when generating random number values necessary for performing a jackpot lottery or a winning lottery with a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main controller 110, in the process of S4002, the range of random number values to be generated ( maximum value).

In particular, by enabling the 2 ms timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, a 2 ms timer interrupt will occur every 2 ms and the base display control process will be executed, so during this startup process, Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

Note that in the process of S4002, it is not necessarily necessary to permit a 4-millisecond timer interrupt or to set the range (maximum value) of random numbers. In the process of S4002, if the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not enabled and/or the random value range (maximum value) is not set, the other startup processes described below that are executed at the stage of transition from startup processing to main processing. In the raising process (S4013), the 4 millisecond timer interrupt which was not performed in the process of S4002 may be permitted and/or the range (maximum value) of the random number value may be set.

Next, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4003), and if it is turned on (S4003: Yes), the setting key 501 is turned on and the door release switch is turned on. (S4004). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, so as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to setting change mode, and setting change processing is executed (S4005).

Here, details of the setting change processing (S4005) will be explained with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4005). The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and finalizing a change in the probability setting value from a person related to the hall or the like.

In this setting change process (S4005), first, the start of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4101). With this setting to start displaying the probability setting value, display of the probability setting value is started on the base display device 401 under control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is one of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may always be fixed to a specific value. That is, when the start-up mode becomes the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may always start displaying at a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "3" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. The probability setting value may be "4", or may be "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. Thereby, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off, the hall personnel etc. can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the start-up mode becomes the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. Thereby, the hall personnel etc. can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off.

In addition, when the startup mode changes to the setting change mode, the base display device 401 displays the probability setting value as "3" if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is 3 or more. If the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is less than 3, the display will start with the probability setting that was set before the power was turned off. good. For example, if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, such as "5" or "6", there may be many cases where it is desired to reduce the probability setting value a little (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it was set before the power was turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by 1 each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and when the probability setting value is "6" and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability setting value is updated as "6". 1”. Therefore, for example, if you want to change the probability setting value from "6" to "5", you have to turn on the RAM erase switch 122 repeatedly and cycle through the probability setting values almost once. On the other hand, if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting to display the probability setting value as "3", the probability setting value can be set while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Values can be updated.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" (S4102), and if it is not within the predetermined range, that is, it is an abnormal probability setting value (S4102). :No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S4103), and the process moves to S4104. This initial value may be "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or it may be "3" or "4" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Alternatively, it may be "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" as a result of the process in S4102 (S4102: Yes), the process in S4103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4104. .

In the process of S4104, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S4104). In the process of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge detection), it is determined that the setting key 501 has become the off state. As will be described later, this is because if the pachinko machine 10 is started up without the RAM erase switch 122 being turned on, the probability setting value is corrupted and falls within the normal range (range of "1" to "6"). If not, this setting change process is executed, but the setting key 501 is normally in the off state at this time. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the probability setting value is broken and falls within the normal range (“1”). Even if this setting change processing is executed assuming that the probability is not within the range of The value is fixed and the setting change process ends. Therefore, the hall personnel etc. cannot change the probability setting value. On the other hand, in the process of S4104, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, and it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state, the hall If the person concerned does not operate the setting key 501 from the off state to the on state and then back to the off state, an affirmative determination will not be made in the process of S4104. Changes are possible.

Note that if the pachinko machine 10 is started up without the RAM erase switch 122 being turned on, even if the probability setting value is corrupted and is not within the normal range (range of "1" to "6"), the setting When the change process is not executed (for example, when prompting a hall official to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode), the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is turned off. By detecting that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state.

As a result of the processing in S4104, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4104: No), then it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4105: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105: Yes), the probability setting value is updated (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. As mentioned above, when updating the probability setting value, which is the process of S4106, if the previous probability setting value is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is updated. If the value is "6", this is done by returning the probability setting value to "1". The probability setting value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop process of S4102→S4103→S4104: No→S4105 (and S4106)→S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the on state by the process of S4104 (S4104: Yes). Then, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the on state through the process of S4104 (S4104: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is set as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. (S4107). Then, the end of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process is ended. Through the processing in S4108, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is terminated by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by setting the end of the display of the probability setting value. Base display device 401 starts displaying the base value.

Returning to FIG. 54, the explanation of the startup process will be continued. When the setting change processing in S4005 is completed, a setting change RAM clearing process is then executed (S4006). In this setting change RAM clearing process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding probability setting values stored in the work area 203x1) and accessory ratio data 203s The base value data 203r and error data 203t are retained without being deleted. By deleting the data used to control the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the work area 203x1), a new game can be started using the newly set probability setting value. Can be done.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the probability setting value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes, so if the accessory ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the probability setting value after the change will be changed. It becomes impossible to correctly calculate the ratio of accessories based on . In the setting change RAM clearing process, by erasing the accessory ratio data 203s, it is possible to correctly calculate the accessory ratio based on the changed probability setting value.

On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, so in the setting change RAM clearing process, the base value data 203r is retained and used to calculate the past base value and base value. By retaining the necessary information, it is possible to discover fraudulent acts that have occurred in the past without concealing them. In addition, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the wrongdoer who caused the error starts up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history can be saved. It is possible to suppress concealment of fraudulent acts because the information cannot be erased.

After the processing in S4006, other start-up processing is executed (S4013), and the process shifts to main processing.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off or the door opening switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off, the startup mode is set to RAM clear mode and normal RAM clear processing is executed (S4007). Furthermore, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on, if the door open switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. Normal RAM clear processing is executed as RAM clear mode instead of change mode (S4007). This prevents the pachinko machine 10 from being powered on, starting up in the settings change mode, and not starting a game in the pachinko machine 10 even though the setting key 501 is in the on state and the inner frame 12 is closed. can.

In the normal RAM clearing process (S4007), among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used to control the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the work area 203x1) is erased (cleared). , base value data 203r, accessory ratio data 203s, and error data 203t are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by erasing the data used to control the game (predetermined data other than the probability setting value stored in the inner working area 203x1).

On the other hand, by retaining the base value data 203r, accessory ratio data 203s, and error data 203t without erasing them, the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on and the data in the RAM 203 is erased. These can be displayed on the base display device 401 even if they are displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, even if a fraudster turns on the RAM erasure switch 122 in an attempt to conceal the fraud, the fraud can be discovered from the base value, accessory ratio, error history, etc. displayed on the base display device 401. .

After the processing in S4007, other start-up processing is executed (S4013), and the process shifts to main processing.

As a result of the processing in S4003, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off (S4003: No), then it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008), and the memory If not (S4008: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, so in this case as well, proceed to S4007 and execute the normal RAM clear process (S4007). .

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated, and it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value was saved at the time of power-off. It is determined whether or not it matches the RAM determination value (S4009). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. In this embodiment, the probability settings stored in the RAM 203 are also used to calculate the checksum value.

If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S4009: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data in the RAM 203 has been destroyed. In this case, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is within a normal range (range of "1" to "6") (S4010). If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4010: Yes), the process moves to S4007 and normal RAM clear processing is executed. Needless to say, the probability setting value continues to be held without being erased in the normal RAM clearing process or the setting change RAM clearing process.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the normal range, for example, "7" (S4010: No), the process moves to S4005, and the setting change process shown in FIG. 55 is executed. Have the relevant parties set the probability settings again. At this time, a display prompting the user to change the probability setting value may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a notification sound or voice may be outputted from the audio output device 226 to notify the user of the change. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. Thereby, it is possible to notify the hall personnel etc. that it is necessary to set the probability setting value again.

As a result of the processing in S4009, if the calculated RAM determination value is normal (S4009: Yes), then it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state and the door open switch is in the on state (S4011). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, so as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to setting confirmation mode, and setting confirmation processing is executed (S4012).

Here, details of the setting confirmation process (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (S4012). The setting confirmation process (S4012) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401.

In this setting confirmation process (S4012), first, the start of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4201). With this setting to start displaying the probability setting value, display of the probability setting value is started on the base display device 401 under control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is one of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2).

Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202). In the process of S4202, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has entered the off state. Note that it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing in S4202, if the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S4202: No), S4202 is repeatedly executed and the process waits until the setting key 501 is in the OFF state. During this time, the probability setting value continues to be displayed on the base display device 401. Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202: Yes), the end of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4203), and the setting confirmation process is ended. Through the processing in S4203, the display of the probability setting value is ended on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by setting the end of displaying the probability setting value. Base display device 401 starts displaying the base value.

Note that this setting confirmation process (S4012) is executed after it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. This is based on the idea that if the RAM judgment value is abnormal, the RAM clearing process should be executed before checking the probability setting value. However, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process may be executed before it is determined whether the RAM judgment value (checksum) is normal or not. .

Returning to FIG. 54, the explanation of the startup process will be continued. When the setting confirmation process in S4012 is completed, other start-up processes are executed (S4013), and the process moves to the main process.

If a negative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is off, or the door opening switch is off. If the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off, as shown in FIG. After executing the upgrade process, move to the main process. Furthermore, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, if the door open switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The mode is set to normal mode instead of the confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process in S4012 is skipped, and other startup processes are executed in S4013, and then the process proceeds to the main process. This prevents the pachinko machine 10 from being powered on, starting up in the settings confirmation mode, and not starting a game in the pachinko machine 10 even though the setting key 501 is in the on state and the inner frame 12 is closed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the base display control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, this base display control process is a process for controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401, and is executed in response to a 2 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds.

In the base display control process, first, various setting processes are executed to cause the base display device control circuit 402 to perform display control of the base display device 401 (S4301). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting value is being changed in the setting change mode (S4302), and if it is determined that the setting is being changed (S4302: Yes), the probability setting value being changed is changed. The included setting change segment data is set as segment data (S4303), the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the present base display control process ends. As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 in any of the display modes shown in FIGS. Ru.

As a result of the processing in S4302, if it is determined that the settings are not being changed (S4302: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting of the probability setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation mode (S4304). As a result, if it is determined that the setting is being confirmed (S4304: Yes), the setting confirmation segment data including the probability setting value that is being confirmed is set as segment data (S4305), and the segment data is used in the base display device control circuit. 402 (S4309), and this base display control processing ends. As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 in any of the display modes shown in FIGS. Ru.

As a result of the process in S4304, if it is determined that the settings are not being confirmed (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the error history is being displayed based on the fact that the error display button 502 is being pressed ( S4306). As a result, if it is determined that the error history is being displayed (S4306: Yes), the error history segment data including the error type is set as segment data (S4307), and the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402. (S4309), and this base display control processing ends. As a result, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. 50(a), (b), (c-1), and (c-2).

As a result of the processing in S4306, if it is determined that the error history is not being displayed (S4306: No), the segment data for normal games including the base value or the ratio of accessories is set as segment data (S4308), and the segment data is displayed as the base. The information is output to the device control circuit 402 (S4309), and this base display control processing ends. As a result, in normal times, the base value or accessory ratio is displayed on the base display device 401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that performs the main control of the game, and is executed in response to a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within a normal range ("1" to "6") (S4401). By determining whether the probability setting value is within the normal range every time the timer interrupt processing is executed, even if the probability setting value is corrupted for some reason, it can be detected early. can do.

As a result of the processing in S4401, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4401: Yes), normal game processing that performs the main control of the game is executed (S4402), and then the calculation of the accessory ratio and the base A role ratio process (base process) for managing information regarding the role object ratio and base value, such as calculation of values, is executed (S4403), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

In the gaming process (S4402), for example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment are executed. That is, the main control of the game includes the jackpot lottery, the setting of the variable display, the opening/closing control of the big prize opening (large opening opening) 65a at the time of a jackpot, the winning lottery of the second symbol display device 83, etc. . Note that while the MPU 201 executes the process of S4402, the MPU 201 uses the internal use area 203x (the internal work area 203x1 and the internal stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203. On the other hand, the MPU 201 uses the outside area 203y (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S4403.

At this time, in the process of S4403, as explained in the third embodiment, from the game process that mainly controls the game using the area within the usage area 203x, to the ratio of accessories using the area outside the usage area 203y, and the base When moving to processing related to values, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in processing related to the role ratio are individually saved to the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201 are individually saved to the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and After executing the process related to the base process, when moving (returning) from the process related to the proportion of accessories using the area 203y outside the usage area to the game process that performs the main control of the game using the area 203x inside the usage area, The registers 200 saved to the work area 203y1 may be individually restored.

In addition, as described in the fourth embodiment, while executing the process using the area 203x within the usage area, a CALL instruction may be used to execute the process related to the accessory ratio or base value using the area 203y outside the usage area. At the reading stage, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio or base value may be individually cleared to 0, and the process for executing the processing related to the accessory ratio or base value may be read by a CALL instruction. . Then, at the stage of finishing the process using the outside area 203y read out by the CALL instruction and returning to the process using the inside area 203x, the registers 200 used in the process regarding the accessory ratio are individually set. It is also possible to clear it to 0 and then return to hand ratio processing (base processing).

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S4401, if the probability setting value is not within the predetermined range (S4401: No), the process does not proceed to the game process (S4402), and a notification command is set (S4404). It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In response to this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a notification sound or voice from the audio output device 226 urging the hall personnel to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value. Or, it outputs a command to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a message prompting a person related to the hall to be called. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, the person involved in the hall restarts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and performs a process of changing the probability setting value.

Further, following the process of S4404, a ball launch stop instruction is issued to the payout control device 111 (S4405). This stops the ball from firing. After the process in S4405, the timer interrupt process ends. Then, while the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4401: No), the game process (S4402) is not executed even if the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 milliseconds, so the game cannot be played. completely stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any kind of disadvantage from occurring to the player due to the game being continuously played with an abnormal probability setting value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or turned on, startup is performed regardless of the probability setting value. mode and a startup mode related to the probability settings. When setting the start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the start-up mode related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. As a result, once those involved in the hall understand the meaning of each startup mode, they can easily understand what operations are required for the pachinko machine 10 in the startup mode that will be launched from now on. .

In addition, the above-described effects can be obtained by the configuration mentioned in the description of the sixth embodiment. Further, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122, and it is detected that the setting key 501 is turned off. The case in which the probability setting value is determined when the In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the setting change switch (not shown). , the probability setting value is determined by turning on the RAM erase switch 122.

Here, the setting change switch is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated during the setting change mode, and similarly to the error display button 502, the setting change switch is a switch that is operated from the main board through the hole provided in the board box 100. It is provided in a more protruding manner, and can be operated by hall personnel or the like without opening the board box 100. The setting change switch normally outputs an OFF signal, and outputs an ON signal when it is fully pressed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the following explanation of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to sixth embodiments. The explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 during the start-up process (see FIG. 54) according to the seventh embodiment. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and accepts changes to probability setting values from hall personnel etc. and confirms them. This is a process for

In the setting change processing according to the seventh embodiment, first, the processing of S4101 to S4103 similar to that of the sixth embodiment is executed, and then it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4111: No), then it is determined whether the setting change switch is turned on (S4112).

As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is not turned on (S4112: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is turned on (S4112: Yes), the process of the sixth embodiment is performed. The probability setting value is updated in the same manner as in S4106 (see FIG. 55) (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. The probability setting value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop process of S4102→S4103→S4111: No→S4112 (and S4106)→S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by the process of S4111 (S4111: Yes). Then, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4111 (S4111: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is set as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. (S4107). Once the probability setting value is determined, the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared) as described above in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, by having the hall personnel etc. turn on the RAM erasure switch 122 and confirming the probability setting value, it is possible to make the hall personnel etc. strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased thereafter.

After the process in S4107, it is then determined whether the setting key 501 is turned on (S4113). In the process of S4113, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state, and the setting key 501 may be determined to be in the off state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the switch is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state as a result of the process in S4113 (S4113: No), the process in S4113 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the process in S4113 (S4113: Yes), the end of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process is performed. end. Through the processing in S4108, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is terminated by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by setting the end of the display of the probability setting value. Base display device 401 starts displaying the base value.

As explained above, the above-described effects can be obtained by the configuration mentioned in the description of the seventh embodiment. Further, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments, the same effects as those obtained by the configuration can be achieved.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66. In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, it is possible to update the probability setting value, and when it is started up in the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to check the probability setting value. explained. Also, regarding the case where the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined from normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode depending on the operating state of the RAM erase switch 122 and setting key 501 when the power is turned on. explained.

Here, if the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the problem is what mode should be used when the power is turned on again. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment solves this problem. Further, in the eighth embodiment, an abnormality in the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM abnormality"), the fact that a setting change process has been performed, and the fact that a setting confirmation process has been performed are transmitted to the hall via the external output terminal 503. Output to computer 600. Through the hall computer 600, hall personnel can grasp the RAM abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, the fact that setting change processing or setting confirmation has been performed, etc.

The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the sixth and eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to seventh embodiments. The explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment in that an external output terminal 503 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. The external output terminal 503 is configured to be connectable to the hall computer 600. The external output terminal 503 is provided to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and by connecting a wiring connector (not shown) connected to the hall computer 600 to the external output terminal 503, Signals and data output from the main controller 110 are relayed to the hall computer 600.

FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the work area 203x1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Among these, the work area 203x1 includes probability setting value data 203x11, probability setting value data for change 203c12, setting changing flag 203x13, setting checking flag 203x14, RAM error flag 203x15, and RAM erase switch flag 203x16. At least stored.

The probability setting value data 203x11 is data indicating the probability setting value set (confirmed) in the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment as well, similarly to the sixth and seventh embodiments, "1" to "6" can be set as the probability setting value, and each probability setting value ("1" to "6") In contrast, a jackpot random number value and/or a second symbol winning random number value are stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol at the probability setting value are determined by the number of jackpot random numbers and/or second symbol winning random numbers determined for each probability setting value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), the lower the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol. Alternatively, a jackpot random number value and/or a winning random number value for the second symbol are determined for each probability setting value so that the probability of winning the second symbol is high.

In the setting change process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value determined by the hall personnel etc. is set in the probability setting value data 203x11. is stored in The pachinko machine 10 sets the jackpot random number and/or the second symbol winning random number corresponding to the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 based on the ROM 202, and selects the jackpot lottery or the second symbol winning lottery. Execute.

The jackpot random number and/or the second symbol's winning random number are fixed, and the range of random numbers generated to perform the jackpot lottery and/or for each probability setting value ("1" to "6") is fixed. Alternatively, the range of random numbers to be generated for performing the winning lottery for the second symbol may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol at the probability setting value are determined by the range of the jackpot random number and/or the range of the second symbol's winning random number determined for each probability setting value. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 selects the range of random numbers to be generated to perform the jackpot lottery corresponding to the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 and/or the range of random numbers to be generated to perform the winning lottery of the second symbol. A range is set, and random numbers for performing a jackpot lottery and/or random numbers for performing a winning lottery for the second symbol are generated.

The update probability setting value data 203x12 is the probability that is updated by the hall personnel etc. before the probability setting value is determined in the setting change process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. This is data indicating the setting value. In other words, the probability setting value data 203x11 described above is data indicating the confirmed probability setting value, whereas the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated by a person related to the hall or the like before the setting change process. This data indicates the probability setting value.

Specifically, when execution of the setting change process is started, first, probability setting value data 203x11 is saved as update probability setting value data 203x12. That is, the previous probability setting value is set in the update probability setting value data 203x12, and the hall personnel etc. are made to update the probability setting value starting from the previous probability setting value. Then, each time the RAM erase switch 122, which also serves as a switch for updating the probability setting value, is turned on, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is added by 1, and the update probability setting value data 203x12 is "6". When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated to "1". Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is saved as the probability setting value data 203x11, and the probability setting value updated by the hall personnel etc. will be used in future games. It is determined as a probability setting value.

Here, in the setting change process, the probability setting value is not updated using the probability setting value data 203x11, but the probability setting value is updated using the update probability setting value data 203x12 for the following reason. . In other words, if the probability setting value data 203x11 is used to update the probability setting value, if the power is cut off due to a power outage etc. during the setting change process, the probability setting value that was used for the game until then will be erased by the update. It will be done. Therefore, even if you want to turn on the power again, start up the pachinko machine 10, and change the probability setting values from scratch, you will not be able to do so because the probability setting values used for the previous game will be gone. It disappears. In this case, the setting change process can be restarted from the probability setting value that was saved in the probability setting value data 203x11 before the power was turned off, that is, the probability setting value that was in the process of being changed, but if the probability setting value that has not been confirmed is saved. There is a risk of giving an illusion to hall personnel.

Furthermore, depending on the relationship between the timing when the hall personnel etc. turned on the RAM erasing switch 122 and the timing when the power was turned off, an event may occur in which the probability setting value data 203x11 is not updated even though the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on. obtain. In that case, there will be a discrepancy between the probability setting values that the pachinko machine 10 has saved and the probability setting values that the parlor personnel thought have been updated, so there is a risk that the parlor personnel may feel distrustful.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when updating the probability setting value in the setting change process, the probability setting value is updated using the update probability setting value data 203x12. 203x11 can retain the probability settings that have been used so far. As a result, even if the power is cut off during the setting change process, in the setting change process that is executed again, the probability setting value used in the previous game that remains as probability setting value data 203x11 will be updated. By saving the probability setting value data as 203x12, it is possible to update the probability setting value from scratch again. Therefore, those involved in the hall can re-update the probability settings with peace of mind.

The setting changing flag 203x13 is a flag indicating whether or not setting changing processing is being executed. The setting changing flag 203x13 indicates that the setting changing process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting changing process is not being executed when it is off. The setting changing flag 203x13 is normally set to off. Then, when execution of the setting change process is started, the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is set to ON. When the probability setting value updated in the setting change process is finalized and the execution of the setting change process ends, the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is turned off.

Now, if the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is on in the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on, then the setting change process was in progress when the power was turned off last time. In other words, the power was turned off while the probability setting value was being updated by the setting change process. Therefore, in this case, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62, a startup mode when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining startup modes that are set in response to each startup operation when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change or setting confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during a setting change, a startup operation is performed to start up in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on with the setting key 501 in the OFF state and the RAM erase switch 122 in the OFF state. When a start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up not in a normal mode but in a setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch).

After the power was cut off while changing settings, a startup operation was performed to start up in RAM clear mode, that is, a startup operation was performed in which the setting key 501 was turned off, the RAM erase switch 122 was turned on, and the power was turned on. In this case, instead of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in a setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch).

After the power is turned off during a setting change, a start-up operation is performed to start up in the setting change mode, that is, turn on the setting key 501, turn on the RAM erase switch 122, and turn on the power. If so, start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode according to the startup operation. In this case as well, the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch).

After the power is turned off during a setting change, a start-up operation is performed to start up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, a start-up operation is performed in which the setting key 501 is turned on and the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. In this case, instead of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in a setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch).

In this way, in the startup mode when the power is turned on after being turned off while changing settings, the startup operation is not only a startup operation for starting up in settings change mode, but also other startup operations. Even if it is an upward operation, the setting change mode is set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning. As a result, if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, it is possible to have the hall personnel etc. change the probability setting value from scratch when the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, it is possible to have the hall personnel etc. reliably change the probability setting value and confirm the change. Therefore, even if the power is cut off while changing the settings, the pachinko hall personnel can reliably update and confirm the probability settings when the power is turned back on, and they can feel at ease. Changes to the probability settings relative to 10 can be made.

In addition, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch), instead of continuing from the probability setting value that was being updated at the time when the power was turned off during the setting change, and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability setting value can be updated from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the previous games. Therefore, those involved in the hall can re-update the probability settings with peace of mind.

Returning to FIG. 61, the explanation will be continued. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is a flag indicating whether or not a setting confirmation process is being executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as the startup mode. be. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 indicates that the setting confirmation process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting confirmation process is not being executed when it is off. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is normally set to off. Then, when the execution of the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to on, and when the execution of the setting confirmation process is finished, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned off.

Now, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on in the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on, then the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off. In other words, this indicates that the power was turned off during confirmation of the probability setting value in the setting confirmation process. Therefore, in this case, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

Here, referring again to FIG. 62, a startup mode when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting confirmation will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the startup operation is performed to start up in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on with the setting key 501 in the OFF state and the RAM erase switch 122 in the OFF state. When a start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up not in a normal mode but in a setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch). Thereby, even if a person involved in the hall or the like starts up the system in the normal mode after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with peace of mind because the hall personnel can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during setting confirmation.

After the power was cut off while checking the settings, a startup operation was performed to start up in RAM clear mode, that is, the startup operation was performed by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 in the OFF state and turning on the power. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation by a person involved in the hall. Turning on the RAM erase switch 122 indicates that the hall personnel, etc., at least clearly wish to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, the start-up process can be performed in accordance with the wishes of the hall personnel.

If the power is cut off during setting confirmation, and then a start-up operation is performed to start up in setting change mode, that is, by turning on the power with the setting key 501 in the ON state and the RAM erase switch 122 in the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 will start up in setting change mode as per the start-up operation. In this case too, turning on the setting key 501 and the RAM erase switch 122 clearly indicates the intention of the hall staff or the like to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, the start-up process can be carried out in accordance with the intentions of the hall staff or the like.

After the power is turned off during a setting change, a start-up operation is performed to start up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, a start-up operation is performed in which the setting key 501 is turned on and the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as described in the startup operation. In this case as well, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on clearly indicates that the hall personnel etc. wish to confirm the probability setting value again. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch), the start-up process can be performed according to the wishes of the hall personnel.

Returning to FIG. 61, the explanation will be continued. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is a flag for indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, such as data stored in the RAM 203 being destroyed. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 indicates that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203 when it is on, and indicates that there is no abnormality in the RAM 203 when it is off.

The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is normally set to off. During the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on, the RAM 203 checks to see if there is power-off occurrence information that should have been saved at the time of the previous power outage in the RAM 203. If the judgment value (checksum) is not normal or the probability setting value is not within the normal range ("1" to "6"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203 and the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is set to on.

When the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on, it notifies the RAM abnormality and prompts it to restart in the setting change mode, and also notifies the hall computer 600 of this via the external output terminal 503. The MPU 201 of the control device 110 is put into an infinite loop state. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted by the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode to ensure that the probability setting value is reset, and the RAM 203 is cleared, allowing the pachinko machine 10 to operate normally. It can be made to do so.

The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is a flag indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In this embodiment, the RAM erase switch 122 is used to determine the startup mode when starting up the pachinko machine 10, and also to change the probability setting value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. It is also used when updating. That is, the probability setting value is updated every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

At this time, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on, and the probability setting value is updated. The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is used to determine whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state. That is, if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on. After making this determination, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is saved in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

Here, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set once after the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, before determining whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state. "On". This is because when it is first determined whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state, the RAM erase switch 122 is still activated as a startup operation to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. 122 may remain on, but if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off at this time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, so There is a risk that it may be mistakenly determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on to update the probability setting value, and the probability setting value may be updated. As a result, the hall personnel etc. feel distrustful because the probability setting value has been updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on to update the probability setting value.

On the other hand, after the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to " By setting this to "on", even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a startup operation to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the time of this first judgment, it will be set as a probability setting. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being updated because it is erroneously determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on to update the value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S4201). For example, permission to access the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set to the stack pointer.

Next, internal function register setting processing is executed (S4202). In this embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the base display control process (see FIG. 57) that controls the display content displayed on the base display device 401 uses a 2 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds. Execute as an opportunity. In the process of S4202, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In addition, when generating random number values necessary for performing a jackpot lottery or a winning lottery with a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main controller 110, in the process of S4202, the range of random number values to be generated ( maximum value). Furthermore, in the process of S4202, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. Further, in the process of S4202, the main control device 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals with the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 by serial communication.

In particular, by enabling the 2 ms timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, a 2 ms timer interrupt will occur every 2 ms and the base display control process will be executed, so during this startup process, Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

Note that it is not necessary to set the range (maximum value) of random numbers in the process of S4202. If the random value range (maximum value) is not set in the process of S4202, in the other startup processing (S4221) described later that is executed at the stage of transition from startup processing to main processing, The range (maximum value) of random numbers may be set, which was not done in the process of S4202.

Next, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4203). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4203: Yes), it means that the processing at the time of the previous power-off has been completed normally, so next, calculate the RAM judgment value, It is determined whether the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was shut off (S4204). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

As a result of the processing in S4204, if it is determined that the calculated RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off (S4204: Yes), the RAM judgment value is normal and at least it can be used for calculating the RAM judgment value. Since it can be determined that the data (information) that was stored is being held normally, it is then determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4205). Here, determining whether the probability setting value is within the normal range is to This is because it may be broken and outside the normal range. The process in S4205 is performed to reliably detect such an abnormality in the probability setting value.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4205: Yes), then it is determined whether the setting changing flag 203x13 is on (S4206). If the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206: Yes), this means that the setting change process was in progress when the power was turned off last time. Indicates that the connection has been disconnected. Therefore, in this case, the process moves to S4213 and the setting change process is executed (S4213).

As a result, when the power is turned on after being turned off while changing settings, the startup mode is not limited to the startup operation for starting up in settings change mode, but also the startup operation for other startups. Even if it is an operation, a setting change mode can be set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, the person involved in the hall can always change the probability setting value from scratch when the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, it is possible to have the hall personnel etc. reliably change the probability setting value and confirm the change. Therefore, even if the power is cut off while changing the settings, the pachinko hall personnel can reliably update and confirm the probability settings when the power is turned back on, and they can feel at ease. Changes to the probability settings relative to 10 can be made.

In addition, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch), it is possible to restart the update of the probability setting value from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) that was used in the previous game, rather than continuing from the probability setting value being updated at the time the power was turned off during the setting change and resuming the update of the probability setting value. This allows hall staff and others to restart the update of the probability setting value with peace of mind. Details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

On the other hand, if the setting changing flag 203x13 is on as a result of the process in S4206 (S4206: No), this means that the setting changing process was not in progress when the power was turned off last time. As a process for confirming the start-up operation performed by a person concerned when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4207). Note that in the process of S4207, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process described later is not executed, so the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read in the switch state reading process of the timer interrupt process. Rather than making a decision based on what has been read, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205.

As a result of the processing in S4207, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off (S4207: No), then in order to further confirm the startup operation, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state ( S4208). Note that in this embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined only whether or not the setting key 501 is in the on state, but similarly to the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the setting key 501 is in the on state and the door is open It may also be determined whether the switch is on.

As a result of the processing in S4208, if the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4208: N0), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, so the hall personnel etc. can start up in the normal mode. It means that it was manipulated. Then, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209: Yes), it means that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, that is, the probability setting value is confirmed by the setting confirmation process. Indicates that the power has been cut off. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (S4210). Through the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. This allows you to check the probability settings.

In this way, even if a person involved in the hall performs a startup operation to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode, instead of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the normal mode, but the setting confirmation process ( Start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode for starting over (from scratch). Thereby, even if a person involved in the hall or the like starts up the system in the normal mode after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with peace of mind because the hall personnel can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during setting confirmation. Note that details of the setting confirmation process will be explained with reference to FIG. 65.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is off as a result of the process in S4209 (S4209: No), this means that the setting confirmation process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. . Further, the process of S4209 is executed when it is determined in the process of S4206 that the setting changing flag 203x13 is off (S4206: No), that is, the setting changing process was executed when the power was last turned off. This may even be the case when it is not currently running.

Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode was set to the normal mode indicated by the hall personnel etc. in the start-up operation, the setting confirmation process of S4210 and the process of S4211 described later were skipped, and other start-up processes were executed. After that (S4214), the process moves to main processing. Note that as other start-up processing, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In this embodiment, as in the sixth or seventh embodiment, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) that performs the main control of the game is executed using a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds as a trigger. . By allowing 4 millisecond timer interrupt in the process of S4214, timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds.

In addition, in the main processing of this embodiment, only the updating processing of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the updating processing of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S702 and S703 in FIG. 17) are executed during the loop. Execute infinite loop processing. Power outage monitoring process executed in the main process in the first embodiment etc. (processing to monitor whether there is information on the occurrence of power outage and execute processing related to power outage when there is information on the occurrence of power outage, FIG. 17 The processes of S701 and S704 to S707) are executed in the timer interrupt process in this embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process in S4208 (S4208: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the on state. means that the startup operation was performed in setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4208 is executed when it is determined that the setting changing flag 203x13 is off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, the setting change process was performed when the power was turned off last time. is not currently running. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was cut off last time, the pachinko machine 10 is started up and operated in the setting confirmation mode by the hall personnel. In order to start up, the process moves to S4210 and a setting confirmation process is executed (S4210). Through the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. This allows you to check the probability settings. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

After finishing the setting confirmation process (S4210), external output process is executed (S4211). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed or that the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, those involved in the hall can understand that the setting confirmation process has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 and that the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, if a probability setting value is displayed fraudulently, it can be quickly detected. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process moves to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4207, which is the process for confirming the start-up operation performed by the hall personnel etc. when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, S4207: Yes) In order to further confirm the start-up operation, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4212). Note that in this embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined only whether or not the setting key 501 is in the on state, but similarly to the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the setting key 501 is in the on state and the door is open It may also be determined whether the switch is on.

As a result of the processing in S4212, if the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4212: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is in the on state, so the hall personnel etc. can stand in the setting change mode. It means that it was raised. When a startup operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on or not, that is, whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off. Regardless, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode.

Therefore, if the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process in S4212 (S4212: Yes), a setting change process is executed (S4213). Through the setting change process, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person related to the hall, the probability setting value is updated, and when the setting key 501 is turned off. , the updated probability setting value is determined as the probability setting value to be used for future games, and RAM clearing processing is performed. Thereby, after changing the probability setting value, it is possible to start a new gaming machine with the changed probability setting value. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

Here, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on means that the hall personnel etc., clearly indicate a desire to change the probability settings. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the start-up process can be performed in accordance with the intention of the hall personnel.

When the setting change process (S4213) is finished, external output process is executed (S4214). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or that the probability setting value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the hall personnel etc. can understand that the setting change process has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value has been changed. Therefore, if the probability setting value is changed illegally, it can be detected quickly. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process moves to the main process.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the process in S4212 (S4212: No), then it is determined whether the RAM is abnormal by referring to whether the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on or not. (S4215). Here, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on in the process of S4207 (S4207: Yes), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state in the process of S4212 (S4212: No), and the process of S4215 is When executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the process of S4215 (S4215: No).

In this case, in the process of S4206, it is determined that the setting change flag 203x13 is off (S4206: No), so even if the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. be. Therefore, the process in S4207 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4207: Yes), the process in S4212 determines that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4212: No), and the process in S4215 determines that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that this is not the case (S4215: No), it means that the hall personnel etc. performed the start-up operation in RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not in progress when the power was cut off last time. As shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time. Therefore, RAM clear processing is executed (S4216).

In this RAM clearing process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the work area 203x1) is erased (cleared). Accessory ratio data 203s, base value data 203r, and error data 203t (see FIG. 53) stored in the outside work area 203y1 are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by erasing the data used to control the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the work area 203x1). Furthermore, even if the RAM clearing process is executed, the probability setting value data 203x11 is retained, so the game can be continued with the probability setting value determined before the RAM clearing process is executed.

Here, as mentioned above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, if there is no RAM error and the startup operation is performed to start up in RAM clear mode. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode as per the start-up operation by the person involved in the hall. Turning on the RAM erase switch 122 indicates that the hall personnel, etc., at least clearly wish to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, the start-up process can be performed in accordance with the wishes of the hall personnel.

When the RAM clearing process in S4216 is finished, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process moves to main processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4203: No), the process of S4204 determines that the calculated RAM judgment value is the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM judgment value is abnormal (S4204: No), or if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range by the process of S4205 (S4205: No). If applicable, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on (S4217), and then the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in order to confirm the start-up operation by the hall personnel etc. It is determined whether or not (S4218). Note that in the process of S4218, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205, similarly to the process of S4207.

As a result of the process in S4218, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4218: Yes), the process moves to the process in S4212 described above, and it is further determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the on state. A judgment is made (S4212). As a result, if the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4212: Yes), it means that the hall personnel etc. have performed a start-up operation in the setting change mode. In this case (S4212: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode according to the start-up operation by the hall personnel etc., the process moves to S4213 and executes the above-mentioned setting change process.

Here, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be reset and the RAM can be cleared. Therefore, a new game can be started with the newly set normal probability setting value. Note that by clearing the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned off. Therefore, from now on, the main control device 110 can control the game without executing processing related to the RAM abnormality.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the process in S4218 (S4218: No), or even if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the process in S4218, the process in S4212 As a result of the processing, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S4218: Yes, S4212: No), hall personnel etc. can switch to normal mode, RAM clear mode, or setting confirmation mode while the RAM is abnormal. This means that a startup operation was performed in one of the startup modes.

In this case, the process moves to the process of S4215 described above, and if it is determined in the process of S4215 that the RAM is abnormal, it is always determined (S4215: Yes), and the process moves to the process of S4219. In the process of S4219, RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4219). In this RAM abnormality setting process, processing for notifying about RAM abnormality is executed. For example, an audio lamp may be configured so that a notification prompting the user to turn off the power and start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is provided by audio output from the audio output device 226 and/or display on the third symbol display device 81. A command is sent to the control device 113.

Then, it executes an external output process to notify the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503 that the RAM is abnormal (S4220), executes other startup processes (S4221), and shifts to the main process. do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified of the RAM abnormality, those involved in the hall can reliably grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred even if they are not aware of the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

Although the details will be described later, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on due to the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, the timer interrupt processing will not execute the main control related to the game except for the random number update processing and power outage monitoring processing. shall be. That is, after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 shifts to the main processing, the main control regarding the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt processing, so the MPU 201 enters an infinite loop state. Then, through the RAM abnormality setting process in S4219 and the external output process in S4220, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode after the hall personnel etc. understand the RAM abnormality, and the probability setting value is reliably set. By resetting and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to operate normally.

In this way, in order to resolve the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the hall personnel etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. In order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, to resolve the RAM abnormality, the hall (store manager) who manages the dedicated key must intervene. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the RAM abnormality from being resolved without the hall side being aware of the RAM abnormality.

Next, details of the setting change process (S4213), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 63), will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4213). The setting change process (S4213) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and finalizing a change in the probability setting value from a person related to the hall or the like.

In this setting change process, first, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4301). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, the occurrence of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt triggers the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described below. Details will be described later, but during this timer interrupt process, a power outage monitoring process is executed, and if the power is cut off during the setting change process, the power outage monitoring process is configured to hold the state at that time in RAM 203 and wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off.

Next, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set to ON (S4302), and initial settings required at the start of setting changing are performed (S4303). In the process of S4303, for example, an initial value is set in the RAM area used in this setting change process. Note that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 may be cleared (set to OFF) in accordance with the execution of the setting change process at the time of a RAM abnormality, or may be performed by the RAM clearing process (S4313) described later. good. As described above, in the event of a RAM abnormality, the pachinko machine 10 is prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode to the personnel involved in the hall. When the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is reset and the RAM 203 is cleared, allowing the pachinko machine 10 to operate normally. Therefore, by clearing (setting off) the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 with execution of the setting change process, it can be shown that the RAM abnormality has been resolved.

Next, probability setting value data 203x11 indicating the probability setting values that have been used so far is read and saved as update probability setting value data 203x12 (S4303). The probability setting value is updated not using the probability setting value data 203x11 but using the probability setting value data for update 203x12. This update probability setting value data 203x12 is displayed on the base display device 401. The display mode at this time may be any one of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

Next, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to ON (S4305). Note that the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 may be set to ON during the processing of S4303. The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 may be set to ON any time between when the setting change processing is executed and when the processing of S4309 described below (processing for determining whether the RAM erase switch 122 is ON) is executed for the first time.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4306), and if it is not within the normal range, that is, abnormal. If it is the probability setting value (S4306: No), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is changed to the initial value (S4307), and the process moves to S4308. This initial value may be "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or it may be "3" or "4" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Alternatively, it may be "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. As a result, even if the probability setting value data 203x11 is destroyed due to a RAM abnormality or the update probability setting value data 203x12 is destroyed during updating of the probability setting value, the update probability setting value data 203x12 By saving the probability setting value in the normal range as , it is possible to update the probability setting value in the normal range.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S4306, if it is determined that the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the range of "1" to "6" (S4306: Yes), the process in S4307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4308.

In the process of S4308, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S4308). In the process of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has become the off state.

This means that, as described above, if the power is cut off while the setting change process is being executed, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode or RAM clear mode, which is started by a startup operation with the setting key 501 in the off state, This is because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch). In the process of S4308, if it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off based only on the fact that the level of the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine can be turned off by startup operation in normal mode or RAM clear mode. 10 and starts execution of the setting change process as described above, since the setting key 501 is in the off state from the beginning, an affirmative judgment is made immediately in the process of S4308, and the probability setting value cannot be updated. , a problem arises in that the probability setting value is fixed, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S4308, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has turned to the off state. By making this determination, it is possible to avoid determining that the setting key 501 is in the off state unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the setting change process is being executed, and the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the normal mode or RAM clear mode start-up operation and the setting change process is executed, the setting key 501 must be turned on once. Since the probability setting value can be determined only after the probability setting value is set to the off state and the probability setting value cannot be updated, it is possible to avoid the problem that the probability setting value is fixed without being able to update the probability setting value.

As a result of the processing in S4308, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4308: No), it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4309). In the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on, and the probability setting value is updated.

As described above, the RAM erase switch 122 is used to determine the startup mode when starting up the pachinko machine 10, and also to update the probability setting value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. It is also used when That is, the probability setting value is updated every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Therefore, as a result of the process in S4309, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4309: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated (S4310), and the process returns to S4306. Specifically, in the process of S4010, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated by adding 1, and when the update probability setting value data 203x12 is "6", the update probability setting value data 203x12 is added to "1". Update to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on as a result of the process in S4309 (S4309: No), the process in S4310 is skipped and the process returns to S4306.

In this manner, in the process of S4309, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state. Specifically, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicates the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 for probability setting, and the output of the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 read in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 66), which will be described later. With reference to , if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. After making this determination, in the process of S4309, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is saved in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

Here, as described above, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is once set to "on" by the process of S4305 and the like after execution of the setting change process is started and before the process of S4309 is performed for the first time. This is because at the stage of initially executing the process of S4309, the RAM erase switch 122 may still be turned on as a startup operation to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode; If the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, so this is used as the ON operation of the RAM erase switch 122 for updating the probability setting value. There is a risk that the probability setting value may be updated because the probability setting value is incorrectly determined to have occurred. As a result, the hall personnel etc. feel distrustful because the probability setting value has been updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on to update the probability setting value.

In contrast, by setting the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 to "on" once after the execution of the setting change process has started and before the process of S4309 is first performed, the pachinko machine can Even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a startup operation to start up the 10 in setting change mode, it may be mistakenly assumed that the RAM erase switch 122 was turned on to update the probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being updated.

The loop processing from S4306 to S4310 continues to be executed until it is determined by the processing at S4308 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4308: Yes). If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the on state through the process of S4308 (S4308: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is saved as the probability setting value data 203x11 (S4311). As a result, the probability setting value updated by the person concerned with the hall or the like is determined as the probability setting value to be used in future games.

Next, 4 millisecond timer interrupts are prohibited (S4312), and execution of timer interrupt processing is stopped. Then, RAM clear processing is executed (S4313), and the setting change processing is ended.

In the process of S4313, among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), and The accessory ratio data 203s stored in the external work area 203y1 is deleted, while the base value data 203r and error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by erasing the data used to control the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the work area 203x1). Furthermore, since the probability setting value data 203x11 is retained, the game can be played with the determined probability setting value.

Further, by this RAM clearing process, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set to OFF. Therefore, if the power is not turned off while the setting change process is being executed, the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is set to OFF, but if the power is turned off while the setting change process is being executed, the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is set to ON. It will remain as . Therefore, in the start-up process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting changing flag 203x13 is on, it can be determined that the setting changing process was being executed when the power was cut off last time.

In addition, when the probability setting value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes, so if the accessory ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the accessory ratio based on the probability setting value after the change The ratio cannot be calculated correctly. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by erasing the accessory ratio data 203s, it is possible to correctly calculate the accessory ratio based on the changed probability setting value.

On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, so in the setting change RAM clearing process, the base value data 203r is retained and used to calculate the past base value and base value. By retaining the necessary information, it is possible to discover fraudulent acts that have occurred in the past without concealing them. In addition, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the wrongdoer who caused the error starts up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history can be saved. It is possible to suppress concealment of fraudulent acts because the information cannot be erased.

Note that when the setting change process is finished, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is finished, and the display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the setting confirmation process (S4210), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 63), will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (S4215). The setting confirmation process (S4215) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the currently set probability setting value on the base display device 401.

In this setting confirmation process, first, similar to the process in S4301 of the setting change process, a 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4401). By permitting the 4-millisecond timer interrupt, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66), which will be described later, is executed using the occurrence of the 4-millisecond timer interrupt as a trigger. Although the details will be described later, the power failure monitoring process is executed during this timer interrupt process, and if the power is cut off while the setting change process is being executed, the power failure monitoring process retains the state at that time in the RAM 203. It is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely turned off.

Next, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON (S4402), and, for example, as shown in any of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2) When the base display device 401 starts displaying the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 in the display mode, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has become the off state.

As mentioned above, if the power is cut off while the setting confirmation process is being executed, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode that starts up by the startup operation with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 This is because the setting confirmation process is configured to be executed from the beginning (from scratch). In the process of S4403, if it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off based only on the fact that the level of the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is started up by a startup operation in the normal mode. When execution of the setting confirmation process is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is in the OFF state from the beginning, an affirmative judgment is immediately made in the process of S4403, and the confirmation of the probability setting value ends in an instant. A problem arises.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (detecting an edge), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state. By making this determination, it is possible to avoid determining that the setting key 501 is in the off state unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the setting confirmation process is being executed, and the pachinko machine 10 is started up using the normal mode startup operation and the setting confirmation process is executed, the setting key 501 should be turned on once and then Since the confirmation of the probability setting value can be completed only by turning it into the off state, it is possible to avoid the problem that the confirmation of the probability setting value ends in an instant.

As a result of the processing in S4403, if the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S4403: No), S4403 is repeatedly executed and the process waits until the setting key 501 is in the OFF state. During this time, the probability setting value continues to be displayed on the base display device 401. Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is finished, and when the display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started, the setting is being confirmed. The flag 203x14 is cleared to OFF (S4404). As a result, if the power is not turned off while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to off, but if the power is turned off while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to off. It remains on. Therefore, in the start-up process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, it can be determined that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was cut off last time.

Then, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4405), the execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped, and the setting confirmation process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that performs the main control of the game, and is executed in response to a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a random number update process used for the jackpot lottery and the second symbol winning lottery is executed (S4501), and then a power outage monitoring process is executed (S4502). The power outage monitoring process monitors whether or not there is information on the occurrence of a power outage, and executes processing related to power outage when there is information on the occurrence of a power outage (processing corresponding to S701, S704 to S707 in FIG. 17). ).

Next, referring to the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is off and no RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 to S4515 is executed as normal game processing.

That is, a test firing test information setting process for setting test firing test information is executed (S4504), and then the payout control device 111 connected to the input/output port 205, the audio lamp control device 113, the solenoid 209, and the base display device control circuit 402 , port output processing to output the output signal set in the previous timer interrupt processing to the first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, second symbol holding lamp 84, external output terminal 503, etc. Execute (S4505).

Next, the states of various sensors, switches 208, etc. are read (S4506). The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is also read through the process of S4506. Next, subtraction processing of various timers used to control the game is executed (S4507), and then, based on the error signal from the payout control device 111, processing is executed to detect fraudulent acts due to impact, magnets, etc. S4508).

Next, a firing control process is executed to control the firing of balls by the ball firing unit 112a (S4509), and then a put-out command is sent to the put-out control device 111 to notify the number of balls put out by the put-out control device 111. (S4510), and then performs a payout command transmission process to instruct the payout control device 111 to pay out a ball (S4511).

Next, the special symbol/special electric control process regarding the variable display of the first symbol (third symbol, special symbol) and jackpot is executed (S4512), and then the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the regular symbol/special symbol regarding the hit are executed. General power control processing is executed (S4513). Then, display LED data setting processing for the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, etc. is executed (S4514), and output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. External signal setting processing is executed to set an external signal to be used (S4515), and the timer interrupt processing is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4503, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: Yes), the processing in S4504 to S4515, which is normal game processing, is skipped. , and then ends the timer interrupt processing.

In this way, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on as a result of detecting the occurrence of a RAM abnormality in the start-up process of FIG. control is not executed. As a result, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 enters into an infinite loop state since the main control regarding the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt processing after moving to the main processing. Then, through the RAM abnormality setting process in S4219 of the startup process and the external output process in S4220, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode after having the hall staff understand the RAM abnormality, and the probability setting By reliably resetting the value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to operate normally.

In this way, in order to resolve the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the hall personnel etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. In order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, to resolve the RAM abnormality, the hall (store manager) who manages the dedicated key must intervene. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the RAM abnormality from being resolved without the hall side being aware of the RAM abnormality.

On the other hand, in the timer interrupt process, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, the random number update process and the power outage monitoring process are executed. By executing the random number update process, it is possible to continue generating random numbers while the power is on. Furthermore, by executing the power failure monitoring process, even if a RAM abnormality occurs, the occurrence of a power outage can be monitored, and when a power outage occurs, a corresponding process can be reliably executed. In particular, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in a situation where a RAM abnormality is detected, the setting change process is executed in the start-up process. If the power is turned off while this setting change process is being executed, the setting change flag 203x13 will remain turned on and will be retained in the RAM 203, so the next time you start up the pachinko machine 10, No matter what kind of startup operation was performed, the setting change process can be restarted from the beginning.

As explained above, the above-described effects can be obtained by the configuration mentioned in the description of the eighth embodiment. Further, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments, the same effects as those obtained by the configuration can be achieved.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a setting key 501 is provided on the front side of the main control device 110 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10), The jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed to a plurality of levels (for example, six levels from set values "1" to "6").

This setting key 501 is provided so as to be exposed toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, and when the lock of the inner frame 12 is released by a hall official or the like. When the inner frame 12 is rotated relative to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is exposed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 as the inner frame 12 rotates. With this configuration, when a person involved in the hall wishes to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, by rotating the inner frame 12, it becomes possible to immediately insert the key for changing the settings into the setting key 501. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the settings of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed quickly.

In addition, the hall is equipped with an island facility with a built-in automatic ball supply device, etc. in a closed predetermined space, and by attaching the outer frame of a pachinko machine to both long sides of the island facility, the island facility It is configured so that multiple pachinko machines can be installed in it. Then, outside the hall's business hours, the hall personnel, etc., unlock the inner frame and/or front frame and outer frame of each pachinko machine installed on the island equipment, and lock the outer frame (island equipment). In contrast, the inner frame and/or front frame are opened to perform setting change work and maintenance work for each pachinko machine.

However, since the setting key 501 is configured to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, for example, in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is installed on the long side of 1 of the island equipment in the hall, the pachinko machine 10 is If the inner frame of another pachinko machine installed on the other long side (i.e., the back side of the pachinko machine 10) that is not the long side where the If the setting key 501 is exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to directly operate the setting key 501. As a result, even if the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is not opened, the pachinko machine on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, so that the setting key 501 of the pachinko machine 10 can be directly operated. If the setting key 501 is manipulated in an unauthorized manner, the setting contents may be changed, causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. In addition, for example, fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the main control device 110 due to cutting of the sealing unit 100c connecting the box base 100a and box cover 100b of the board box 100 may occur, causing unexpected disadvantage to the hall. There is a risk of causing

Here, like a slot machine, it is possible to consider a structure in which the entire back side of the pachinko machine 10 is covered with a housing structure to prevent unauthorized acts on the setting keys 501 of the main controller 110 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. , Pachinko machines and other gaming machines differ from slot machines in that balls need to be replenished from above the island equipment, and out-of-ball balls need to be ejected. If it is covered with a structure, a complicated structure for supplying and discharging the balls will be required, and there is a risk that manufacturing costs will increase due to the housing structure and the supply and discharge structure.

In addition, in island equipment, when considering the wiring connection with the card sanding device placed adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and the connection wiring with the power supply, the back structure of the pachinko machine 10, especially the back side of the pachinko machine 10. It is desirable that the structure on the left side be configured to be open to some extent and to be easily connected by wiring to the above-mentioned devices and the like.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, a protective cover member 140 that covers the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 is closed to the outer frame 11. In this situation, the protective cover member 140 prevents the setting key 501 from being exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 can be prevented from being directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized manipulation of the setting key 501.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the sealing unit 100c provided on the left side as viewed from the back of the base box 100 housing the main control device 110 (the right side as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10) is covered with a protective cover member 140, and the sealing unit 100c is configured to be inaccessible to direct contact, making it difficult to commit fraud such as cutting the sealing unit 100c to replace the main control device 110, and preventing disadvantages to the hall due to fraudulent acts.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eighth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to eighth embodiments. The illustration and explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 67, the back structure of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is that the outer frame 11 is made up of a combination of wooden boards and aluminum boards, and that the outer frame The point is that a protective cover member 140 is attached to 11. The other configurations are the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment.

The outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment has an upper plate 11a made of a wooden plate as its upper side, a lower plate 11b also made of a wooden plate as its lower side, and is more rigid than the wooden plate. It is formed into a plate shape with four fixed sides, with the left side plate 11c made of a plate material made of aluminum having a high temperature as the left side, and the right side plate 11d made of a plate material made of aluminum also made as the right side.

By configuring the left side plate 11c and right side plate 11d of this outer frame 11 with aluminum plates, even when the left side plate 11c and right side plate 11d are formed thinner than conventional wooden plates, the outer frame Since the rigidity of the entire pachinko machine 11 can be maintained, a horizontal design space for the pachinko machine 10 can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

The left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed in a U-shape in cross section when viewed from above, and have a side surface located on the side surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a side surface on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 facing toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10. It is comprised of a front part that extends from the front side, and a rear part that extends inward from the pachinko machine 10 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 at the side part.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 can be attached to the outer frame 11 (that is, the pachinko machine 10) by driving nails into the island equipment (not shown) from the inner wall sides of the upper plate 11a and lower plate 11b of the outer frame 11. is configured to be attached and fixed to the island equipment.

The protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 with fixing screws 11g (see FIG. 69), which will be described later, and is connected to a setting key 501 of the main controller 110 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72), which will be described later. They are configured to cover together.

Note that the base display device 401 and error display button 502 of the main control device 110 are not covered by the protective cover member 140 and are exposed toward the back side of the Pachinko machine 10. This is because the base display device 401 and error display button 502 are not used to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, but are used to display the status of the pachinko machine 10, making it difficult for fraudulent acts to occur. Therefore, there is little need to cover it with the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 can be formed with the minimum necessary size, and the manufacturing cost required for the protective cover member 140 can be reduced.

Here, details of the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68(a) is a left front perspective view of the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment seen from the left front, and FIG. 68(b) is a left front perspective view of the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment seen from the right rear. FIG.

The protective cover member 140 is entirely formed of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate resin), and includes a cover attachment portion 150 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, and a cover attachment portion 150 that is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. An upright portion 160 extending toward the back (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10, and a right direction when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10 from the tip side of the upright portion 160 (i.e., the back side (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10). (That is, the cover part 170 is formed to extend in the left direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.)

The cover mounting portion 150 includes a mounting surface 151 that makes surface contact with a part of the inner wall surface of the side surface of the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, and an upper mounting hole 152 and a lower mounting hole 153 formed in the mounting surface 151. , and a curved portion 154 formed in a shape that abuts along the inner wall shape of the right side plate 11d.

The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are formed in the mounting surface 151 so as to accommodate fixing screws 11g (see FIG. 69), which will be described later. The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are located at positions where they can be attached to the cover upper mounting hole 11e and cover lower mounting hole 11f (see FIG. 69), which will be described later, respectively, which are formed in the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. It is provided.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, a manner of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 will be described. FIG. 69 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 (excluding the front frame 14) in the ninth embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 70 is a left front perspective view for explaining the method of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 71 is a front view of the outer frame 11 and the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, the front frame 14 is shown removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 69, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are shown removed from the outer frame 11 in FIGS. 70 and 71. The illustrated state is shown, and the description thereof is also omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 69, a cover upper mounting hole, which is a through hole for attaching the protective cover member 140, is located slightly below the central portion of the side surface of the right side plate 11d that constitutes the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10. 11e and a lower cover mounting hole 11f are formed, and a fixing screw 11g is screwed into each hole.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70, the upper cover mounting hole 11e and the lower cover mounting hole 11f are formed at positions corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152 and lower mounting hole 153 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Specifically, an upper cover attachment hole 11e is formed at a position corresponding to the upper attachment hole 152, and a lower cover attachment hole 11f is formed at a position corresponding to the lower attachment hole 153. Then, with the (outside) mounting surface 151 and curved part 154 of the protective cover member 140 in contact with the inner wall side of the side surface and rear surface of the right side plate 11d, the outside of the right side plate 11d (the right rear side in FIG. ) by screwing each fixing screw 11g into the cover upper mounting hole 11e and upper mounting hole 152 and into the cover lower mounting hole 11f and lower mounting hole 153, each fixing screw 11g fixes the outer frame 11 ( A protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d).

Here, the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 is formed in a shape that comes into contact with the inner wall shape of the side surface and rear surface of the right side plate 11d. Further, the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d is made of aluminum. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner walls of the side and rear surfaces of the right side plate 11d are in contact with the curved portion 154, and the right side plate 11d and the protective cover member 140 are in contact with each other. This results in a state where no gap (space) is created. As a result, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screws 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover upper mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting To prevent the protective cover member 140 from being attached or detached from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by configuring the fixing screws 11g inserted in the hole 153 and the lower cover attachment hole 11f so that they cannot be directly operated. Can be done.

In addition, a card sanding device (not shown) is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 on an island facility, and normally, no gap is created between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. It is composed of Therefore, by configuring the fixing screw 11g so that it cannot be directly operated from the right side of the Pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being attached or removed from the side of the Pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, by making it difficult to remove the protective cover member 140 from the back side or side side of the pachinko machine 10 and covering the setting key 501 with the protective cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed, the setting key 501 can be directly accessed. It can be made impossible to operate.

Further, the curved portion 154 is formed into a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of the resin material that constitutes the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the protective cover member 140 is configured to bend slightly in the left-right direction of the Pachinko machine 10 due to the curved portion 154. With this configuration, even if, for example, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 69) comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 due to the force of the closing, and a shock is applied. The protective cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged by bending the curved portion 154 due to elastic force and absorbing the impact.

Now, returning to FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b) again, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 will be described. In addition to the cover attachment part 150, the protective cover member 140 is provided with an upright part 160 extending from the cover attachment part 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the tip side of the upright part 160 (i.e., A cover portion 170 is formed to extend in a cantilever shape from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 toward the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The upright portion 160 is provided with an upright cover wall 161, an upright upper cover portion 162, an upright lower cover portion 163, an upright inner rib 164, and an upright outer rib 165. Further, the cover portion 170 is provided with a cover plate 171, a cover side protrusion 172, a key cover portion 173, and a cover outer rib 174.

From here, the configuration of the upright portion 160 will be explained in detail. The upright cover wall 161 is formed to extend continuously from the curved portion 154 of the cover attachment portion 150 toward the rear side of the Pachinko machine 10. The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side surface of the main controller 110 when viewed from the front (the left side surface when viewed from the rear), and the main controller 110 is provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both shown in FIG. 72), which will be described later. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the right side when viewed from the front (the left side when viewed from the rear) of 110.

The upright upper cover section 162 includes an upper inner cover section 162a and an upper outer cover section 162b. This upper inner cover part 162a extends horizontally from the entire upper part of the upright cover wall 161 and a part of the upper part of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the Pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is disposed). It is set up. Further, the upper outer cover portion 162b is formed to extend horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is not disposed).

In this way, by forming the upright upper cover part 162 so that the upper inner cover part 162a and the upper outer cover part 162b are flush with each other, the upper right side of the main controller 110 when viewed from the front (the upper left side when viewed from the rear) is It is possible to prevent unauthorized acts from the upper right side when viewed from the front (upper left side when viewed from the back) of the main control device 110, which is covered and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72, both of which will be described later). Further, the upper outer cover portion 162b allows the wire to be removed when the wire travels upward from the outside of the upright cover wall 161 when, for example, a fraudulent act is committed using a wire from the left side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. By colliding with the upper outer cover portion 162b, it is possible to prevent the wire from entering.

The upright lower cover part 163 is composed of a lower inner cover part 163a (see FIG. 68(a)) and a lower outer cover part 163b (see FIG. 68(b)). This lower inner cover part 163a extends horizontally from the entire lower part of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower part of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is disposed). It is formed. Further, the lower outer cover portion 163b is formed to extend horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is not disposed).

Further, the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to have a larger area than the upper inner cover portion 162a. This is because the installation position of the main controller 110 is closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 67), and the main controller 110 is accessed from the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 than from the upper side. Because it is easy to do so, those who commit fraud against the main control device 110 often do so by inserting a wire or the like from the bottom side of the back of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the area of the lower inner cover part 163a is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover part 163a protects the main controller 110 from the main controller 110 at the lower right side when viewed from the front (lower left side when viewed from the rear). The configuration is such that the gap between the control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 is minimized.

In this way, by forming the upright lower cover part 163 so that the lower inner cover part 163a and the lower outer cover part 163b are flush with each other, the lower right side of the main controller 110 when viewed from the front (lower left side when viewed from the rear) is It is possible to prevent unauthorized acts from the lower right side when viewed from the front (lower left side when viewed from the rear) of the main control device 110, which is covered and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72, both of which will be described later). In addition, the lower outer cover portion 163b allows the wire to move downward from the outside of the upright cover wall 161 in the event of a fraudulent act using a wire, for example. By colliding with each other, it is possible to prevent the wire from entering.

The upright inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68(a)) is formed in the middle part of the upright cover wall 161 inside the pachinko machine 10 in the shape of a rib whose protrusion amount gradually increases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. There is. This upright inner rib 164 functions as a reinforcing rib for the upright cover wall 161, and prevents the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged. The degree of reinforcement of the upright cover wall 161 is increased by gradually increasing the amount of protrusion of the upright inner rib 164 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 within a range that does not contact the device 110).

The upright outer rib 165 (see FIG. 68(b)) is formed in the middle portion of the upright cover wall 161 outside the pachinko machine 10 in the shape of a rib whose protrusion amount gradually decreases toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. It is formed at a position that pairs with the above-mentioned upright inner rib 164 on the inside/outside. The upright outer rib 165, like the upright inner rib 164, functions as a reinforcing rib for the upright cover wall 161, and prevents the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged.

Further, the upright outer rib 165 is formed to have the same protrusion amount as the above-mentioned upper outer cover part 162b and lower outer cover part 163b. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed, the structure is such that the upright outer rib 165 does not get caught on the island equipment or otherwise become an obstacle when installing the pachinko machine 10.

From here, the configuration of the cover section 170 will be explained in detail. The cover plate 171 has a plate surface that extends from the above-mentioned upright part 160 (the upright cover wall 161, the upright upper cover part 162, the upright lower cover part 163, and the upright inner rib 164) in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Each direction is extended to a position that is above the setting section 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main control device 110 and below the base display device 401 (error display button 502).

On the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of this cover plate 171 (i.e., the side facing the main controller 110; the same applies hereinafter), at a position corresponding to a setting section 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main controller 110, which will be described later. A cover-side protrusion 172 is formed in a square shape to protrude toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a portion of the cover plate 171 surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172 is configured as a key cover portion 173.

This cover side protrusion 172 is formed to enter a space formed by a setting part side wall 100e of a setting part 100d and a case side protrusion 100g, which will be described later, and protrudes enough to come into contact with a setting part bottom surface 100f. is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71, the protective cover member 140 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 is installed so that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 of the cover part 170, which will be described later, faces the front side of the pachinko machine 10. be done. The cover plate 171 also includes a setting section 100d (see FIG. 74, which will be described later) provided in the board box 100 of the main controller 110. A cover-side protrusion 172 formed in a rectangular shape protruding from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at a position corresponding to ``110''), and a key surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172. A cover portion 173 is provided. Therefore, the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the setting portion 100d of the main controller 110 are configured to face each other.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the configuration of the setting section 100d in the main controller 110 of the ninth embodiment, the cover side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140, and the key cover section 173 will be described. 72 is a front view of the board box 100 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 73 is a sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line AA in FIG. 67, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the main controller 110 and the protective cover member 140 in region B of FIG. For convenience of explanation, parts not related to the present invention are not shown in FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 shows a state in which the front frame 14 is removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Explanation will also be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 72, the main controller 110 of the ninth embodiment is housed in a board box 100 that is a combination of a box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and a box cover 100b. A setting key 501 is provided on the main board constituting the control device 110, which is used when changing the set probability setting value or confirming the set probability setting value.

The box cover 100b is provided with a setting section 100d at a position corresponding to the setting key 501. It is recessed by the amount of protrusion 172 and is formed in a size that accommodates the entire cover side protrusion 172. A setting section side wall 100e, a setting section bottom surface 100f, and a case side protrusion 100g are provided as parts constituting the setting section 100d.

The setting section side wall 100e is formed to extend from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100b toward the main board side (not shown), and as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the extension length of the setting section side wall 100e is The depth (the amount of depression of the setting portion 100d) is formed to be equal to the amount of protrusion of the cover side protrusion 172.

The setting part bottom surface 100f is formed to extend from the setting part side wall 100e, has a keyhole (not shown) that exposes the keyhole part of the setting key 501, and is formed so as to close the part other than the keyhole. . With this configuration, the setting key 501 can be operated while the main controller 110 is housed in the closed space formed by the box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and the box cover 100b.

The case side protrusion 100g is formed to protrude from the bottom surface 100f of the setting part toward the protective cover member 140 side (back side of the pachinko machine 10) so as to have the same protrusion amount as the cover side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140. ing. Further, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 is formed to be accommodated in a space formed by the setting section side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover side protrusion 172 fills the space formed by the setting part side wall 100e and the case side protrusion 100g. The case-side protrusion 100g is in contact with the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, and the cover-side protrusion 172 is in contact with the setting part bottom surface 100f of the setting part 100d. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the part where the setting key 501 is disposed is sealed by the key cover part 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the case side protrusion 100g of the setting part 100d, and the cover By making it difficult to access the setting section 100d by the side protrusion 172, the security of the setting key 501 is increased, and there is no room for a wire or the like to enter, so that unauthorized acts against the setting key 501 can be prevented.

Further, the case side protrusion 100g of the main controller 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 are in contact with the setting part bottom surface 100f of the main controller 110 and the cover side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Therefore, if the setting change key is left inserted into the setting key 501, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked with respect to the outer frame 11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent hall personnel from forgetting to collect keys for changing settings.

Returning to FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b), the explanation will be continued. On the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 (that is, the side not facing the main controller 110), cover outer ribs 174 are formed in the shape of square and cross ribs. This cover outer rib 174 functions as a reinforcing rib for the cover plate 171 and prevents the cover plate 171 from being damaged.

Furthermore, due to the cover outer rib 174, when a fraudulent act is carried out using a wire from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wire is transmitted upward or downward to the cover plate 171, the wire can be removed from the cover. By colliding with the outer ribs 174, it is possible to prevent the wire from entering.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the state of the pachinko machine 10 during the work of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a left front perspective view showing the inner frame 12 and front frame 14 developed (opened) with respect to the outer frame 11 to which the protective cover member 140 is attached in the ninth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, portions not related to the present invention are omitted or simplified in FIG. 75, and their explanation will also be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are unlocked for the outer frame 11 by a person related to the hall outside business hours of the hall, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 change from the state shown in FIG. 67. The frame 14 rotates relative to the outer frame 11, and the back side of the inner frame 12 is exposed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the protective cover member 140 remains fixed to the outer frame 11, and the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 is operated to rotate the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. As the pachinko machine 10 moves, it is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and can be immediately operated by the hall personnel.

Therefore, the hall personnel can immediately change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 by simply unlocking and rotating the inner frame 12, without having to perform complicated operations such as removing the protective cover member 140. . Furthermore, the settings can be changed while viewing the base display device 401, and the settings can be changed easily.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 that covers the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 prevents the setting key 501 from being exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, when the inner frame 12 is unlocked and settings are changed, the back side of the inner frame 12 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with the protective cover member 140 remaining on the outer frame 11. configured to do so.

By configuring it in this way, when the inner frame 12 is closed off relative to the outer frame 11, the simple configuration of the protective cover member 140 makes it possible to prevent the setting key 501 from being directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as tampering with the setting key 501. In addition, since the security performance of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without using a cabinet structure like that of a slot machine, it is possible to suppress increases in the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10 that would be caused by using a cabinet structure, etc.

Furthermore, in a situation where the inner frame 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 installed on the back side of the inner frame 12 is pressed as the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 rotate. It is exposed at the front side of the machine 10 and can be immediately operated by hall personnel. Therefore, the hall personnel can change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 without having to perform complicated operations such as removing the protective cover member 140. Furthermore, the settings can be changed while viewing the base display device 401, and the settings can be changed easily.

Further, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover side protrusion 172 is configured to enter the space formed by the setting part side wall 100e and the case side protrusion 100g, and the case When the side protrusion 100g comes into contact with the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, the cover side protrusion 172 is configured to come into contact with the setting part bottom surface 100f of the setting part 100d. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the part where the setting key 501 is disposed is sealed by the key cover part 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the case side protrusion 100g of the setting part 100d, and the cover By making it difficult to access the setting section 100d by the side protrusion 172, the security of the setting key 501 is increased, and there is no room for a wire or the like to enter, so that unauthorized acts against the setting key 501 can be prevented.

Further, the case side protrusion 100g of the main controller 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 are in contact with the setting part bottom surface 100f of the main controller 110 and the cover side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Therefore, if the key for changing the settings is left inserted into the setting key 501, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked with respect to the outer frame 11, so the settings by the hall personnel cannot be changed. It is possible to prevent forgetting to collect the change key.

Further, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the right side plate 11d and the curved portion 154 are in contact with each other, and no gap (space) is created between the right side plate 11d and the protective cover member 140. state. As a result, when the inner frame 12 is closed to the outer frame 11, the fixing screws 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover upper mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting To prevent the protective cover member 140 from being attached or detached from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by configuring the fixing screws 11g inserted in the hole 153 and the lower cover attachment hole 11f so that they cannot be directly operated. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a card sanding device is installed adjacent to the island equipment, and is normally configured so that there is no gap between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. . Therefore, by configuring the fixing screw 11g so that it cannot be directly operated from the right side of the Pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being attached or removed from the side of the Pachinko machine 10.

Further, the curved portion 154 is formed into a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of the resin material that constitutes the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the protective cover member 140 is configured to bend slightly in the left-right direction of the Pachinko machine 10 due to the curved portion 154. With this configuration, for example, when the inner frame 12 is closed, even if the main control device 110 comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 due to the force of the closing, and a shock is applied, the curved portion 154 is elastic. By bending due to force and absorbing the impact, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being damaged.

Furthermore, the upper outer cover part 162b, the lower outer cover part 163b, and the cover outer rib 174 allow the wire to stand up on the cover wall 161 or the cover plate 174 if, for example, a fraudulent act is performed using a wire from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. When the wire propagates upward or downward from the outside, the wire collides with the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, or the cover outer rib 174, thereby preventing the wire from entering.

Further, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover portion 163a allows the main control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 to be connected at the lower right side in the front view (lower left side in the back view). It is constructed to minimize gaps. With this configuration, the lower right side in the front view (lower left side in the back view) of the main controller 110 is covered, and the lower right side in the front view (lower left side in the back view) of the main controller 110 in which the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are provided is covered. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the lower left side).

As explained above, the above-described effects can be obtained by the configuration mentioned in the description of the ninth embodiment. Further, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eighth embodiments, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. In the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door opening switch 208g that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 (in the tenth embodiment, the inner frame The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the state of the open switch 208g1 (described below with reference to the open switch 208g1).

That is, when the power is turned on, the detection mode of the setting key 501 and the RAM erase switch 122 is detected, and the detection mode of the door open switch 208g is detected, and the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to these detection results. It was configured to be changed.

However, when determining the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the door open switch 208g, if the door open switch 208g cannot detect the ON state (that is, the opening of the inner frame 12) due to a malfunction or the like, It becomes impossible to start the start-up mode (that is, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) that is set based on the detection of the open switch 208g. Therefore, due to the erroneous detection of the door open switch 208g, settings changes, etc., which are important game elements of the pachinko machine 10, cannot be performed, and there is a possibility that the pachinko parlor will not be able to carry out its intended business model.

In addition, in the startup processing when powering up, a process to detect the door open switch 208g is required, which makes the control required at powering up complicated, and increases the processing load on the main controller 110. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, while employing the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the inner frame release switch 208g1, which is the door release switch 208g, is Regardless of the detection result, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 prevents unauthorized acts on the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and at the same time prevents the inner frame release switch 208g1 from being activated when the inner frame 12 is opened. Regardless of reliability, settings can be changed, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 and to reliably carry out the business model envisioned by the pachinko parlor.

Furthermore, in the start-up process when powering up the power, the process of detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not required, so the process for the detection process is not executed, which reduces the processing load on the main controller 110. Can be done.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to ninth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to ninth embodiments. The illustration and explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76, each startup mode when the power of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 76 shows the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, and the RAM erase switch 122 and setting key 501 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on for startup in the startup mode for each startup mode. It is a figure showing each information of.

Similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment includes four modes: normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than these RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode, and is used when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or the data stored in the RAM 203 is corrupted. This mode is for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power was cut off by executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 except for the above.

Then, if the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 kept in the OFF state, the Pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. Further, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 in the off state to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of the detection result of the door open switch 208 (i.e., even if the door opening switch 208 is detected to be on). Even if the pachinko machine 10 is detected to be off), the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode. Furthermore, if the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, regardless of the detection result of the inner frame release switch 208g1 (that is, even if it is detected to be on), Even if the pachinko machine 10 is off detection), the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode.

In this way, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the hall personnel etc. can turn on the RAM erase switch. Depending on whether or not 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether to set the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the RAM clear mode, which is a startup mode that is not related to the probability setting value, or the normal mode.

On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the hall personnel etc. can turn on the RAM erase switch 122. Depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or not, it is possible to select whether the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is a setting change mode related to the probability setting value or a setting confirmation mode.

That is, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame release switch 208g1, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, there is a startup mode that is unrelated to the probability setting value and a startup mode that is not related to the probability setting value. You can choose from several startup modes. When setting the start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the start-up mode related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured so that settings can be changed or confirmed regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is opened. Although there is a concern about fraudulent activity due to unauthorized operation of the setting key 501, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment employs the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 prevents direct contact with the setting key 501 and sealing unit 100c from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to change settings without performing processing such as detecting the opening of the inner frame 12, and to prevent fraudulent acts when the inner frame 12 is closed.

In other words, the provision of the protective cover member 140 means that the inner frame 12 is open when the setting key 501 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the inner frame 12 is open even without detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 during the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 77, an inner frame release switch 208g1 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the tenth embodiment. This inner frame release switch 208g1 is for detecting whether or not the inner frame 12 is opened to the outer frame 11, and is a protruding piece (not shown) that protrudes from the upper rear side of the inner frame 12. , an elastic body (not shown) such as a spring that applies elastic force to the protruding piece, and a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the protruding piece. The protruding piece of the inner frame open switch 208g1 is pressed against the upper part of the outer frame 11 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and is recessed into the inner frame 12 because the force exerted by the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the elastic body. On the other hand, when the special key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in the first direction (for example, clockwise), the inner frame 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the elastic force of the elastic body The projecting piece is configured to project toward the outer frame 11 side. When the detection sensor detects the protrusion of the protruding piece, it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, and an inner frame opening signal is output.

The detection result of the inner frame open switch 208g1 (that is, the presence or absence of the inner frame open signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via the input/output port 205. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not determined to be on and does not output an inner frame open signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is determined to be on when the inner frame 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and outputs an inner frame open signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 specifies that the inner frame 12 is in the open state when the inner frame open signal is input from the inner frame open switch 208g1, and specifies that the inner frame 12 is in the open state when the inner frame open signal is not input. Identify the state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process of the tenth embodiment, first, an initial value setting process is performed upon power-on (S4401). For example, permission to access the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set to the stack pointer.

Next, internal function register setting processing is executed (S4402). In the tenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the base display control process (see FIG. 57) that controls the display content displayed on the base display device 401 is triggered by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds. Execute. In the process of S4402, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In addition, when generating random number values necessary for performing a jackpot lottery or a winning lottery with a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main controller 110, in the process of S4402, the range of random number values to be generated ( maximum value). Furthermore, in the process of S4402, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. Further, in the process of S4402, the main control device 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals with the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 by serial communication.

In particular, by allowing a 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt occurs every 2 milliseconds and the base display control process is executed, so that during this startup process, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

Note that it is not necessary to set the range (maximum value) of random numbers in the process of S4402. If the random value range (maximum value) is not set in the process of S4402, in (S4421) of other startup processing to be described later that is executed at the stage of transition from startup processing to main processing, The range (maximum value) of random numbers may be set, which was not done in the process of S4402.

Next, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4403). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4403: Yes), it means that the processing at the time of the previous power-off was completed normally, so next, calculate the RAM judgment value, It is determined whether the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was shut off (S4404). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. In the tenth embodiment, a case will be described in which the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

As a result of the processing in S4404, if it is determined that the calculated RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off (S4404: Yes), the RAM judgment value is normal and at least it can be used for calculating the RAM judgment value. Since it can be determined that the data (information) that was stored is being held normally, it is then determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4405). Here, determining whether the probability setting value is within the normal range is to This is because it may be broken and outside the normal range. The process in S4405 is performed to reliably detect such an abnormality in the probability setting value.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4405: Yes), then it is determined whether the setting changing flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4406). If the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4406: Yes), this means that the setting change process was in progress when the power was turned off last time. Indicates that the connection has been disconnected. Therefore, in this case, the process moves to S4413, and a setting change process is executed (S4413).

As a result, when the power is turned on after being turned off while changing settings, the startup mode is not limited to the startup operation for starting up in settings change mode, but also the startup operation for other startups. Even if it is an operation, a setting change mode can be set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, the person involved in the hall can always change the probability setting value from scratch when the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, it is possible to have the hall personnel etc. reliably change the probability setting value and confirm the change. Therefore, even if the power is cut off while changing the settings, the pachinko hall personnel can reliably update and confirm the probability settings when the power is turned back on, and they can feel at ease. Changes to the probability settings relative to 10 can be made.

In addition, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch), instead of continuing from the probability setting value that was being updated at the time when the power was turned off during the setting change, and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability setting value can be updated from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the previous game. Therefore, those involved in the hall can re-update the probability settings with peace of mind.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S4406, if the setting changing flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4406: No), it means that the setting changing process was not being executed when the power was cut off last time. Therefore, next, as a process for confirming the start-up operation performed by the pachinko machine 10 by a person involved in the hall, etc., it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4407). In addition, in the processing of S4407, since 4 millisecond timer interrupts are not permitted and timer interrupt processing is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read in the switch state reading processing of the timer interrupt processing. Rather than making a judgment using a physical device, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205.

As a result of the processing in S4407, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off (S4407: No), then in order to further confirm the startup operation, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state ( S4408). In the tenth embodiment, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is not detected in S4408. Therefore, in the process at power-on, the process of detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not necessary, and the process for the detection process is not executed, so the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced. .

As a result of the processing in S4408, if the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4408: N0), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, so the hall personnel etc. can start up in the normal mode. It means that it was manipulated. Then, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4409). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4409: Yes), it means that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, that is, the probability setting value is confirmed by the setting confirmation process. Indicates that the power has been cut off. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (S4410). Through the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. This allows you to check the probability settings.

In this way, even if a person involved in the hall performs a startup operation to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode, instead of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the normal mode, but the setting confirmation process ( Start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode for starting over (from scratch). Thereby, even if a person involved in the hall or the like starts up the system in the normal mode after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with peace of mind because the hall personnel can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during setting confirmation.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S4409, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4409: No), the setting confirmation process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. It means something. Further, the process of S4409 is executed when it is determined in the process of S4406 that the setting changing flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4406: No), that is, when the power was turned off last time. This may also be the case when the setting change process was not in progress.

Therefore, in this case, the startup mode was set to the normal mode indicated by the hall personnel etc. in the startup operation, the setting confirmation process of S4410 and the process of S4411 described later were skipped, and other startup processes were executed. After that (S4414), the process moves to main processing. Note that as other start-up processing, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the tenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) that performs the main control of the game is executed using a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds as a trigger. By allowing 4 millisecond timer interrupt in the process of S4414, timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process in S4408 (S4408: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the on state, so hall personnel, etc. means that the startup operation was performed in setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4408 is executed when it is determined in the process of S4406 that the setting changing flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4406: No), that is, the power was turned off last time. This is the case when the setting change process is not in progress. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was cut off last time, the pachinko machine 10 is started up and operated in the setting confirmation mode by the hall personnel. In order to start up, the process moves to S4410 and a setting confirmation process is executed (S4410). Through the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. This allows you to check the probability settings.

After finishing the setting confirmation process (S4410), external output process is executed (S4411). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed or that the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, those involved in the hall can understand that the setting confirmation process has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 and that the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, if a probability setting value is displayed fraudulently, it can be quickly detected. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4421), and the process moves to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4407, which is the process for confirming the start-up operation performed by the hall personnel etc. when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, S4407: Yes) In order to further confirm the start-up operation, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4412). In the tenth embodiment, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is not detected in S4412. Therefore, in the process at power-on, the process of detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not necessary, and the process for the detection process is not executed, so the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced. .

As a result of the processing in S4412, if the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4412: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is in the on state, so the hall personnel etc. can stand in the setting change mode. It means that it was raised. When the startup operation is performed in the settings change mode, as shown in Figure 62, regardless of whether the settings confirmation flag 203x14 (see Figure 61) is on or not, the settings confirmation process is executed when the power was last turned off. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode regardless of whether it is being executed or not.

Therefore, if the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process in S4412 (S4412: Yes), a setting change process is executed (S4413). Through the setting change process, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person related to the hall, the probability setting value is updated, and when the setting key 501 is turned off. , the updated probability setting value is determined as the probability setting value to be used for future games, and RAM clearing processing is performed. Thereby, after changing the probability setting value, it is possible to start a new gaming machine with the changed probability setting value.

Here, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on means that the hall personnel etc., clearly indicate a desire to change the probability settings. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the start-up process can be performed in accordance with the intention of the hall personnel.

When the setting change process (S4413) is finished, external output process is executed (S4414). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or that the probability setting value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the hall personnel etc. can understand that the setting change process has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value has been changed. Therefore, if the probability setting value is changed illegally, it can be detected quickly. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4421), and the process moves to the main process.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the process in S4412 (S4412: No), then it is checked whether the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is on or not, and whether the RAM is abnormal. It is determined whether or not (S4415). Here, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on in the process of S4407 (S4407: Yes), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state in the process of S4412 (S4412: No), and the process of S4415 is When executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the process of S4415 (S4415: No).

In this case, in the process of S4406, it is determined that the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4406: No), so the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off. This is the case if it is not. Therefore, the process in S4407 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4407: Yes), the process in S4412 determines that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4412: No), and the process in S4415 determines that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that this is not the case (S4415: No), this means that the hall personnel etc. performed the start-up operation in RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not in progress when the power was cut off last time. A pachinko machine 10 is started up in RAM clear mode regardless of whether setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was cut off last time. Therefore, RAM clear processing is executed (S4416).

In this RAM clearing process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, predetermined data used for controlling the game (excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 (see FIG. 61) stored in the work area 203x1 (see FIG. 61)) data), while erasing (clearing) the accessory ratio data 203s, base value data 203r, and error data 203t (both see FIG. 53) stored in the outside work area 203y1 (see FIG. 53). Retain without erasing. A new game can be started by erasing the data used to control the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the work area 203x1). Furthermore, even if the RAM clearing process is executed, the probability setting value data 203x11 is retained, so the game can be continued with the probability setting value determined before the RAM clearing process is executed.

Here, as mentioned above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, if there is no RAM error and the startup operation is performed to start up in RAM clear mode. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode as per the start-up operation by the person involved in the hall. Turning on the RAM erase switch 122 indicates that the hall personnel, etc., at least clearly wish to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, the start-up process can be performed in accordance with the wishes of the hall personnel.

When the RAM clearing process in S4416 is finished, other start-up processes are executed (S4421), and the process shifts to main processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4403: No), the process of S4404 determines that the calculated RAM judgment value is the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM judgment value is abnormal (S4404: No), or if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range by the process of S4405 (S4405: No). If any of the above applies, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see Figure 61) is turned on (S4417), and then the hall staff can confirm the start-up operation. , it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4418). Note that in the process of S4418, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205, similarly to the process of S4407.

As a result of the processing in S4418, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4418: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4412, and it is further determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the on state. A judgment is made (S4412). As a result, if the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4412: Yes), it means that the hall personnel etc. have performed a start-up operation in the setting change mode. In this case (S4412: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode according to the start-up operation by the hall personnel, etc., the process moves to S4413 and executes the above-mentioned setting change process.

Here, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be reset and the RAM can be cleared. Therefore, a new game can be started with the newly set normal probability setting value. Note that by clearing the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned off. Therefore, from now on, the main control device 110 can control the game without executing processing related to the RAM abnormality.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the process in S4418 (S4418: No), or even if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the process in S4418, the process in S4412 As a result of the process, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4418: Yes or S4412: No), the hall personnel etc. can switch to normal mode, RAM clear mode, and setting when the RAM is abnormal. This means that a startup operation was performed in one of the startup modes of confirmation mode.

In this case, the process moves to the process of S4415 described above, and if it is determined in the process of S4415 that the RAM is abnormal, it is always determined (S4415: Yes), and the process moves to the process of S4419. In the process of S4419, RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4419). In this RAM abnormality setting process, processing for notifying about RAM abnormality is executed. For example, an audio lamp may be configured such that an audio output from the audio output device 226 and/or a display on the third symbol display device 81 will notify the user to once turn off the power and start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. A command is sent to the control device 113.

Then, it executes an external output process to notify the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503 that the RAM is abnormal (S4420), executes other start-up processes (S4421), and shifts to the main process. do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified of the RAM abnormality, those involved in the hall can surely grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred even if they are not aware of the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, while employing the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the door opening switch 208g is Regardless of the detection result of the frame opening switch 208g1, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501. With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 prevents unauthorized acts on the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and at the same time prevents the inner frame release switch 208g1 from being activated when the inner frame 12 is opened. Regardless of reliability, settings can be changed, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 and to reliably carry out the business model envisioned by the pachinko parlor.

Furthermore, in the start-up process when powering up the power, the process of detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not required, so the process for the detection process is not executed, which reduces the processing load on the main controller 110. Can be done.

As explained above, the above-described effects can be obtained by the configuration mentioned in the description of the tenth embodiment. Further, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to ninth embodiments, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. In the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 had decided on the launch mode.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, a front frame release switch 208g2 is provided to detect the opening of the front frame 14, and when the inner frame release switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12 (that is, on-detection), In addition, when the front frame opening switch 208g2 detects that the front frame 14 is closed (that is, detected as off), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated. On the other hand, even when the inner frame release switch 208g1 detects that the inner frame 12 is closed (that is, off-detected), or even when the inner frame release switch 208g1 detects that the inner frame 12 is opened, the front When the frame opening switch 208g2 detects that the front frame 14 is opened (that is, it is turned on), the configuration is such that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not started, but the normal mode is started.

Conventionally, if the pachinko machine 10 is easily moved to a state where the settings can be changed or confirmed, it is impossible to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized setting changes or setting confirmations, so it is difficult to avoid setting change mode or setting confirmation mode as much as possible. It is desirable to implement multi-step security measures for the pachinko machine 10 to prevent this migration.

On the other hand, when hall personnel perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened from the outer frame 11, and the maintenance work is carried out by the hall personnel who have the authority to change and confirm settings. This is generally done by an employee of the hall who does not have the authority to change or confirm settings, rather than the person in charge.

If an employee of the hall who does not have the authority to change settings or confirm settings enters the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode during maintenance work, the employee may end up communicating with an external unauthorized person. , there is a risk that information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is configured so that settings cannot be changed or confirmed during maintenance work when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. The security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved by configuring the pachinko machine 10 so that it is difficult for employees who are not present to change the settings.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to tenth embodiments. The illustration and explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, each startup mode when the power of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 79 shows the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, and the RAM erase switch 122 and setting key 501 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on for startup in the startup mode for each startup mode. , and information on each of the inner frame release switch 208g1 and the front frame release switch 208g2.

The start-up modes of the pachinko machine 10 of the 11th embodiment are prepared in four modes, namely, normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the 10th embodiment. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the probability setting value that has been set. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the probability setting value that has been set.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than these RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode, and is used when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or the data stored in the RAM 203 is corrupted. This mode is for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power was cut off by executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 except for the above.

Then, if you turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the detection mode of the inner frame release switch 208g1 and the front frame release switch 208g2 will be changed. Regardless, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in normal mode. Furthermore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 in the off state to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in RAM clear mode.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, even when the setting key 501 is turned on, the normal mode may be set based on the detection mode of the inner frame release switch 208g1 or the front frame release switch 208g2. be.

Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, even if the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 are both on, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is not on, or the front frame release switch 208g2 is off. If not, that is, if the inner frame release switch 208g1 is off, or even if the inner frame release switch 208g1 is on, but the front frame release switch 208g2 is on, the normal mode starts instead of the setting change mode. It is configured as follows.

Furthermore, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is not on, or the front frame release switch 208g2 is not on. If it is not off, that is, if the inner frame release switch 208g1 is off, or even if the inner frame release switch 208g1 is on, but the front frame release switch 208g2 is on, the mode is not the setting confirmation mode but the normal mode. is configured to stand up.

Conventionally, when parlor personnel perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened from the outer frame 11, and the settings are not changed or confirmed by the person in charge of the parlor. This is generally done by hall employees who do not have the authority to check settings. That is, during maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on, and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on.

If an employee of the hall who does not have the authority to change settings or confirm settings enters the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode during maintenance work, the employee may end up communicating with an unauthorized person outside the company. , there is a risk that information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, during maintenance work when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, i.e., when both the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 are on, it is configured so that settings cannot be changed or checked. By configuring it in this way, it is difficult for employees who do not have the authority to change settings, etc. to change or check settings, thereby improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off. Under certain conditions, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode. Furthermore, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is on and the front frame release switch 208g2 is off. Under this condition, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode.

In this way, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the person involved in the pachinko hall etc. turns the setting key 501 off and then turns on the RAM erase switch 122 depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select either the RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode that is not related to the probability setting value, or the normal mode.

On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on with the condition that only the inner frame release switch 208g1 is turned on, the hall personnel etc. can turn on the RAM erase switch 122. Depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or not, it is possible to select whether the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is a setting change mode related to the probability setting value or a setting confirmation mode.

That is, first, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a startup mode unrelated to the probability setting value and a startup mode related to the probability setting value can be selected. When setting the start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame release switch 208g1 and the front frame release switch 208g2, depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, While it is possible to select whether the startup mode is RAM clear mode or normal mode, when setting the startup mode related to the probability setting value, the RAM Depending on whether or not the erase switch 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 80, the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the eleventh embodiment is connected to a front frame open switch 208g2 as a door open switch 208g in addition to an inner frame open switch 208g1. This front frame release switch 208g2 is for detecting whether or not the front frame 14 is opened to the inner frame 12, and is a front protruding piece (not shown) that protrudes from the upper rear side of the front frame 14. ), a front elastic body (not shown) that applies elastic force such as a spring to the front protrusion, and a front detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the front protrusion. The front protruding piece of the front frame release switch 208g2 is pressed against the upper part of the inner frame 12 when the front frame 14 is closed, and the force exerted by the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the front elastic body, so the front protruding piece sinks into the front frame 14. On the other hand, when a special key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in a second direction different from the first direction (for example, counterclockwise), the front frame 14 is released from the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened. When opened, the front protruding piece is configured to protrude toward the inner frame 12 due to the elastic force of the front elastic body. When the front detection sensor detects the protrusion of the front protrusion piece, it is determined that the front frame release switch 208g2 is on, and a front frame release signal is output.

The detection result of the front frame opening switch 208g2 (that is, the presence or absence of the front frame opening signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via the input/output port 205. In this case, when the front frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 12, the front frame open switch 208g2 is not determined to be on and does not output a front frame open signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, the front frame release switch 208g2 is determined to be on when the front frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 12, and outputs a front frame release signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 specifies that the front frame 14 is in the open state when the front frame open signal is input from the front frame open switch 208g2, and specifies that the front frame 14 is in the open state when the front frame open signal is not input. Identify the state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

Regarding the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment, the difference from the start-up process of the tenth embodiment is that when the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is The setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed on the condition that the front frame release switch 208g2 is on and the front frame release switch 208g2 is off, and the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on. In some cases, the setting change process (S4413) is executed on the condition that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off, and the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 are off. In the confirmation process for the front frame release switch 208g2, if the inner frame release switch 208g1 is not on, or if the inner frame release switch 208g1 is on but the front frame release switch 208g2 is not off (that is, if it is on). , start up in normal mode without starting up in setting confirmation mode or setting change mode.

In the startup process of the 11th embodiment, in the determination of the setting key 501 in S4408, it is determined that the setting key 501 is not on (S4408: No), and the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is not on. If it is determined that there is not (SS4409: No), the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on with both the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 in the off state, so the process moves to S4421 to start up in the normal mode. .

On the other hand, in the process of S4408, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4408: Yes), or even if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off (S4408: No). ), if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned on (S4409: Yes), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on and the setting key 501 is turned on. Since it has been turned on, the process moves to S4451 to check whether the setting confirmation process (S4410) can be executed, that is, whether maintenance work is not being performed.

In the process of S4451, it is determined whether the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the inner frame release switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state, then the front frame release switch 208g2 is turned on. It is determined whether it is off (S4452). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the front frame release switch 208g2 is off (S4452: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the person in charge of the hall who has the authority to confirm the settings It is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on, and the process moves to S4410, where a setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4451, if it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4451: No), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the outer frame 11 is Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed, the process moves to S4421, and the normal Start up in mode.

Further, in the process of S4452, if it is determined that the front frame release switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4452: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state and the front frame 14 is in the open state. If so, there is a high probability that the pachinko machine 10 is undergoing maintenance work, so the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed, the process moves to S4421, and the normal mode is started.

Next, in the process of S4406, if it is determined that the setting changing flag 203x13 is on (S4406: Yes), or if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on in the process of S4412, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key 501 in the ON state, it is determined whether the setting change process (S4413) can be executed, that is, whether maintenance work is not being performed. The process moves to S4453 in order to confirm whether or not this is the case.

In the process of S4453, similarly to the process of S4451, it is determined whether the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the inner frame release switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state, then the front frame release switch 208g2 is turned on. It is determined whether it is off (S4454). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the front frame release switch 208g2 is off (S4454: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the person in charge of the hall who has the authority to confirm the settings It is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on, and the process moves to S4413, where a setting change process (S4413) is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4453, if it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4453: No), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the outer frame 11 is Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting change process (S4413) is not executed, the process moves to S4421, and the normal Start up in mode.

Further, in the process of S4454, if it is determined that the front frame release switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4454: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state and the front frame 14 is in the open state. If so, there is a high probability that the pachinko machine 10 is undergoing maintenance work, so the setting change process (S4413) is not executed, and the process moves to S4421 to start up in the normal mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, only the inner frame 12 is open to the outer frame 11, that is, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is on and the front frame In a situation where the open switch 208g2 is off, settings can be changed or confirmed, while during maintenance work when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, the inner frame open switch is turned off. When both the front frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 are on, the configuration is such that settings cannot be changed or confirmed. Therefore, during maintenance work when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, the pachinko machine 10 is configured not to start up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode but in the normal mode when the power is turned on. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 by making it difficult for employees who do not have the authority to change the settings to change or confirm the settings.

As explained above, the effects explained above can be obtained by the configuration mentioned in the description of the eleventh embodiment. Further, by using the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments, the same effects as those obtained by the configuration can be achieved.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 covers the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 and the seal unit 100c, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the outer frame 11. The setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are configured so that they cannot be directly operated.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is extended to the left side in the front view (i.e., the right side in the back view) up to the part that covers the connector attachment part 100h of the main controller 110, and the It is formed to extend downward in front view to a portion that covers the sealing portion 111a of the control device 111. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and sealing unit 100c of the main controller 110, the connector attachment portion 100h of the main controller 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111 are configured to be covered by the protective cover member 140. .

With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 and the sealing unit 100c, the connectors used for communicating control signals to the respective controllers 111, 113, etc. It is possible to prevent direct operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to parts related to game specifications, such as the landing area 100h and the sealed part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of prize balls and rental balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eleventh embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. The illustration and explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 82 shows a state in which the front frame 14 is removed from the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 83 shows a state in which the inner frame 12 and front frame 14 are removed from the outer frame 11. are shown in the figure, and their description is omitted.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is that the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 is connected to the connector attachment part 100h of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. The sealing part 111a covers the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the upright cover wall 161 and the upright lower cover part 163 of the protective cover member 140 cover the right side of the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 in front view (the left side in back view). ), and the positions of the lower cover mounting hole 11f of the right side plate 11d and the lower mounting hole 153 of the cover mounting portion 150 are provided slightly lower than in the ninth embodiment. The other configurations are the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the upright cover wall 161 of the protective cover member 140 of the twelfth embodiment is continuous from the curved part 154 of the cover attachment part 150, which is formed longer downward than in the ninth embodiment. It is formed to extend toward the rear side of the machine 10 (see FIG. 83). The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side surface of the main control device 110 in the front view (the left side surface in the back view) and the right side surface of the dispensing control device 111 in the front view (the left side surface in the back view). Therefore, the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 are provided directly from the right side in front view (left side in back view) of the pachinko machine 10. Since this part cannot be touched, fraudulent acts from the right side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front can be prevented.

The upright lower cover part (not shown) of the twelfth embodiment is composed of a lower inner cover part (not shown) and a lower outer cover part (not shown). This lower inner cover part extends horizontally from the entire lower part of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower part of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction in which the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 are disposed). It is formed to extend in the direction. Further, the lower outer cover portion is formed to extend horizontally from the entire lower part of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 are not disposed). There is.

Similar to the ninth embodiment, this lower inner cover part (not shown) is formed to have a larger area than the upper inner cover part (not shown). This is because the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, especially the payout control device 111, are located closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10, and the main control device 110 is closer to the bottom side of the pachinko machine 10 than from the top side. Since it is easy to access the device 110 or the payout control device 111, a person who commits fraudulent acts against the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111 often inserts a wire or the like into the pachinko machine 10 from the bottom side of the back side. cheating by doing so. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the area of the lower inner cover section is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover section 163a controls the dispensing control at the lower right side of the dispensing control device 111 when viewed from the front (lower left side when viewed from the rear). The structure is such that the gap between the device 111 and the protective cover member 140 is minimized.

In this way, by forming the lower inner cover part (not shown), the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111, especially the lower right side in front view (lower left side in back view) of the dispensing control device 111 are covered, It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the lower right side in the front view (lower left side in the back view) of the payout control device 111 provided with the sealing part 111a or the main control device 110 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c. .

Next, the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is constructed from the upright portion 160 (the upright cover wall 161, the upright upper cover portion 162, the upright lower cover portion 163, and the upright inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68)) of the cover plate 171. The plate surfaces face the front and back directions of the pachinko machine 10, and are formed to cover the setting section 100d of the main control device 110 and extend to a position covering the connector attachment section 100h of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 82). Further, the plate surface of the cover plate 171 covers the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115. In this way, by covering the devices 501, 100c, 122, and 111a that may affect the game specifications with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Note that the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed so as not to cover the base display device 401 and the error display button 502. Note that since the cover plate 171 is transparent, the visibility of its back surface etc. is not reduced, so from the viewpoint of security of the main control device 110 as a whole, the base display device 401 and/or the error display button 502 may be covered. .

Cover outer ribs 174 formed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 are formed in a protruding manner at a portion corresponding to the setting key 501 and a portion corresponding to the RAM erase switch 122. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to make holes or the like in the cover plate 171, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

Note that the upper side protrusion (not shown) of the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed to protrude in a rib shape in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower side protrusion (not shown) of the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 is formed to protrude in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10. (2) may be formed to protrude in the direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 in the shape of a rib. By configuring the lower side of the upper side protrusion and the upper side of the lower side protrusion to contact each other, even when the protective cover member 140 is attached to the outer frame 11, the upper side of the protective cover member 140 can be attached to the outer frame 11. The back pack 92 attached to the inner frame 12 can be closed without interference between the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper surface of the lower protrusion and the lower surface of the upper protrusion. This eliminates the gap between the back pack 92 and the protective cover member 140, making it impossible to contact the main control device 110 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 using a wire or the like. Therefore, fraud from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented. In addition, the back pack 92 is attached to the inner frame 12 in the form of a fixed beam at both ends, with one end and the other end of the back pack 92 fixed to the inner frame 12, respectively, so that it is not attached to the outer frame 11 in a cantilevered manner. Even if an impact is applied to the protective cover member 140 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the rigidity of the protective cover member 140 is compensated by the back pack 92 attached to the inner frame 12 in the form of a beam fixed at both ends. can do. Therefore, even if an impact or the like is applied from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the protective cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is provided to extend to the left side in the front view (i.e., to the right side in the rear view) up to a portion that covers the connector attachment portion 100h of the main controller 110. At the same time, it is formed to extend downward in front view to a portion that covers the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and sealing unit 100c of the main controller 110, the connector attachment portion 100h of the main controller 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111 are configured to be covered by the protective cover member 140. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 and the sealing unit 100c, the connectors used for communicating control signals to the respective controllers 111, 113, etc. It is possible to prevent direct operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to parts related to game specifications, such as the landing area 100h and the sealed part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of prize balls and rental balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration using one member.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred. For example, each embodiment can improve its performance by adding one or more parts of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment, or by replacing one or more parts of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values listed in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is of course possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300 has been explained. In addition to the object ratio and continuous role object ratio, information indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as the base value, the number of balls sucked in per 100 balls hit (= 100 - base value), jackpot and It is also possible to calculate the average number of out items, record it, and output it to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 2>
In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a counter is provided in the first reading memory 263 to count the number of winning balls for each winning hole. , the number of balls paid out due to winnings may be counted. In the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, the bonus is calculated based on the number of balls paid out by winning for each winning opening, which is counted by the first reading memory 263. The object ratio and the continuous accessory object ratio may be calculated and accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is the timing to calculate the accessory ratio, the winning prize for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263, The number of balls paid out may be accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. In this case, when the number of winning balls for 0.5 seconds for each winning opening is stored in the buffer 262, the CPU 261 responds to the number of winning balls for each winning opening. The number of balls paid out due to winnings in that 0.5 seconds is calculated by multiplying the number of prize balls in the winning opening, and the calculated number of balls paid out is calculated by the number of balls paid out in the winning hole in the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding it to the counter of the winning opening. Furthermore, when it is detected that a prize has been won in one winning opening, the MPU 201 writes information indicating the winning opening in which the winning has occurred to the buffer 262. When the information indicating the winning opening is written, the number of balls paid out by winning a prize in the winning opening is added to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, so that for each winning opening, The number of balls paid out due to winnings may be counted. In addition, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out by winning a prize in the winning hole for each winning hole every 0.5 seconds (or every predetermined time), and stores the number in the buffer 262. , when the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the CPU 261 calculates, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out by winning in that winning opening in 0.5 seconds, which is written in the buffer 262, for each winning opening. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding it to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the reading memory 263. In addition, when it is detected that there is a winning in one winning opening, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out due to the winning in the area corresponding to the winning opening in the buffer 262. , in the CPU 261, when writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the number of balls paid out written in the buffer 262 is stored in the counter of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning hole in which the number of balls paid out is stored. By adding up the number of balls, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning hole. In this way, even if the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 is configured to count the number of balls paid out as a result of winning for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out as a result of winning for each winning opening is counted. Since the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated from the number of balls played, fraud can be discovered by analyzing the calculated accessory ratio and consecutive accessory ratio. Note that when the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out due to winning in the buffer 262, it is not necessary to transmit the prize ball number table 202e to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the number of balls paid out in the buffer 262 is stored. The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated from the number of balls paid out by winning a prize in each winning opening stored in the winning opening. Further, in order to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, the number of balls paid out by winning, which is counted for each winning hole, may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. . In this case, the inspection device 300 can calculate the round ratio and the continuous role object ratio without transmitting the contents of the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the case where the accessory ratio data 264a and the continuous accessory ratio data 264b are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described, but only the accessory ratio data 264a is recorded. Alternatively, only the continuous accessory ratio data 264b may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. You may also do so. The inspection device 300 can analyze fraud by analyzing the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 4>
In each of the above embodiments, the first reading memory 263 is configured with a volatile memory, but the first reading memory 263 is configured with a non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, FeRAM, MRAM, ReRAM, etc.). may be done. Further, the configuration may be such that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first reading memory 263 even while the power is turned off. In this case, initialization of the first reading memory 263 may not be executed in the process of S711 (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Thereby, each of the counters 263a to 263f and each of the data 263g to 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 can be continued to be held even while the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, even if the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is not executed, the most recent second reading memory 264 is saved before the power is turned off. Calculate the ratio of prizes, etc. without leaking the winnings in each winning slot between the timing (trigger) when recording was performed and the time when the power was judged to be cut off, and calculate the total number of winnings in the second reading. It can be recorded in memory 264. Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may be unnecessary.

<Modification 5>
In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process is executed and the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is output. In addition, information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) to be recorded in the second reading memory 264, This is information that is not used for calculation, or information that is not recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection device 300, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to perform analysis using the latest information.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as information recorded in the second reading memory 264. However, by also transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection device 300, although it is short-term information, the total number of balls that entered each winning slot, the ratio of prizes and the consecutive prizes. Raw information before calculating the ratio can be grasped by the inspection device 300. Therefore, analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

In addition, as a modification of the first embodiment, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as information recorded in the second reading memory 264. If the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thereby, the inspection device 300 uses the prize ball number table 202e to calculate the latest accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio from the total number of winning balls for each winning opening transmitted from the first reading memory 263. and can be analyzed. In addition, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated here are based on winnings in each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since they are calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but they can be used as reference values in the analysis of the inspection device 300. .

Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and the calculated accessory The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. Thereby, the inspection device 300 can easily analyze fraud using the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio output from the accessory ratio management chip 207. In this case, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis using information related to the latest winnings. In this case as well, the prize ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a more in-depth analysis while referring to the prize pitch number table 202e.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a volatile first reading memory 263 and a nonvolatile second reading memory 264, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is The information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading memory 263 while accumulating until the indicated timing (trigger) is reached. Based on the information stored in 263, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the ratios are accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 by the time the timing comes. The case where various types of information are recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, a nonvolatile memory is provided with at least a first reading area that plays the role of the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area that plays the role of the second reading memory 264. The information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is accumulated and temporarily stored in the first reading area until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. and when the timing comes, calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area and record it in the second reading area, or Various information that has been accumulated and stored in the first reading area until the timing is reached may be recorded in the second reading area. This makes it possible to reduce the number of memory parts, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning hole within 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball ejection path. The number of balls counted for each winning opening, the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path, and information regarding the game status at that time are stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. At the same time, each time the settings are made in the buffer 262, information regarding the number of winning balls for each winning hole set in the buffer 262, the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path, and the gaming state is displayed. The case where the information is accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, a winning of the first starting port 64a is detected based on the output of the first starting port switch 208a during a timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches. In this case, the first buffer 262a is turned on, and when a winning in the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, the second starting buffer 262b is turned on, and the first normal winning port switch 208c is turned on. When a winning in the first normal winning hole 63a is detected by the output, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when a winning in the second normal winning hole 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning hole switch 208d. The normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on, and when a winning in the big winning hole 65a is detected by the output of the big winning hole switch 208e, the big winning hole buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball is guided to the ball ejection path by the out switch 208f. When a ball is detected, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding jackpot buffer 262g, open buffer 262h, and error buffer 262i are turned on depending on the gaming state at that time, and an interrupt signal is sent. It may also be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, in the setting information reception process executed in response to the interrupt signal, the accessory ratio management chip 207 increments the first 1 counter 263a by 1 if the first 1 buffer 262a is turned on, and increments the first 2 buffer 262b by 1. If it is turned on, the first 2 counter 263b is counted up by 1, if the ordinary 1 buffer 262c is turned on, the ordinary 1 counter 263c is incremented by 1, and if the ordinary 2 buffer 262d is turned on, the ordinary 2 counter 263c is incremented by 1. The counter 263d is counted up by 1, and when the big winning slot buffer 262e is on, the big winning slot counter 263e is counted up by 1, and when the out buffer 262f is on, the out counter 263f is counted up by 1. When the jackpot buffer 262g is on, the jackpot information is added to the jackpot data 263g along with the time at that time and stored, and when the opening buffer 262h is on, the door is opened in the opening data 263h. If the error buffer 262i is on, the error information is added and stored together with the current time in the error data 263i, and the settings are If the time at which the information reception process is executed is late at night, the out-of-hours information may be added and stored in the out-of-hours data 263j together with the time at that time. As a result, there is no need for the MPU 201 to count the number of balls that have entered each winning slot or the number of balls that have been guided to the ball ejection path within 0.5 seconds, increasing the processing load of the MPU 201. can be suppressed. Therefore, much of the processing power of the MPU 201 can be allocated to the main control of the game that the MPU 201 should originally perform.

<Modification 8>
In addition, in this case, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the big winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f are controlled by the accessory ratio management. It may also be input directly to the chip 207. And, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the big winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. From each output, the presence or absence of winnings in the first starting port 64a, second starting port 64b, first normal winning port 63a, second normal winning port 63b, and large winning port 65a, and the ball guided to the ball ejection path. If there is a prize, the counters 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening are incremented by one, and the ball is guided to the ball ejection path. In this case, the out counter 263f may be incremented by one. Thereby, when there is a prize in the winning hole or when a ball is guided to the ball ejection path, the situation can be immediately reflected on the accessory ratio management chip 207. In addition, the door open switch 208g is directly input to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and based on the output of the door open switch 208g, the accessory ratio management chip 207 determines whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. When the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the door opening information is added to the opening data 263h and stored together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. A management chip 207 may also be configured. Thereby, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected on the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 9>
In each of the embodiments described above, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the number of balls that have won a prize in each prize opening until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is calculated by the first The counters 263a to 264e of the reading memory 263 count, and the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263 counts the number of balls ejected to the ball ejection path by the time the timing (trigger) occurs. As described above, the first reading memory 263 includes the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, and the big prize opening buffer 262e, which are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. , each value of the out buffer 262f (i.e., the number of balls for each winning hole that entered a prize within 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path during 0.5 seconds) is as follows. The information may be stored sequentially together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are determined from each value stored in the first reading memory 263. Calculate and record it in the second reading memory 264, or calculate for each winning ball the total number of balls that have entered each prize opening by that timing, and calculate the total number of balls that have won a prize in each prize opening by that timing, and also calculate the total number of balls that have won a prize in each prize opening by that timing, and calculate the total number of balls that have won a prize in each prize opening by that timing, and calculate the total number of balls that have won a prize in each prize opening by that timing The total number of balls may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed based on the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio. can do. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, each winning opening that won a prize within 0.5 seconds. the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path during each 0.5 seconds, and the time corresponding to the number of balls (that is, the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path during 0.5 seconds). The information may also be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the time when it was stored in H.263. As a result, information such as how many balls entered which winning slot and at what time every 0.5 seconds, and how many balls entered each slot at which time every 0.5 seconds. The inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the ball was guided to the ball ejection path (that is, whether it was ejected into the game area). Therefore, analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

In addition, as a modification of the first embodiment, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as information recorded in the second reading memory 264. If the configuration is such that the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the number of winning balls for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263, and then Using the prize ball number table 202e, the latest accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed. In addition, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated here are based on winnings in each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since they are calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but they can be used as reference values in the analysis of the inspection device 300. .

<Modification 10>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 contains the number of balls for each winning slot that won within 0.5 seconds, the number of balls that were guided to the ball ejection path during 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls that entered the winning slot during 0.5 seconds. When storing the time associated with the number of balls (that is, the time when the number of balls was stored in the first reading memory 263), it is indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. The information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 when the timing (trigger) is reached. Then, the inspection device 300 records the number of balls for each winning slot that won within 0.5 seconds, which are recorded in this second reading memory 264, and the number of balls that entered the ball ejection path during 0.5 seconds. The number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of balls are transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. You can also do this. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning hole for each predetermined section from the number of balls that hit each winning hole every 0.5 seconds, and then creates a prize ball number table. 202e is used to calculate the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio for each predetermined section, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be analyzed from changes in the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio. In addition, if there is a change in the ratio of role objects and the ratio of continuous role objects that are suspected of fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 records the number of balls for each winning slot that won within 0.5 seconds, and 0. Detailed information related to the game has been entered, such as the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path within 5 seconds and the time associated with those numbers, so based on this information, The causes of changes in the object ratio and continuous role object ratio can be investigated in detail.

<Modification 11>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the big prize opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. Each value of 262f (i.e., the number of balls entered in each winning slot during 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball ejection path during 0.5 seconds) is indicated by the RTC 266. The information may be directly recorded in the 2-reading memory 264 in sequence along with the current time. In this case, the information regarding the gaming state that is set in the jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds is also stored in the second reading memory 264 along with the time indicated by the RTC 266. Alternatively, if the settings from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 are made during the late night hours, the out-of-hours information may be recorded in the gaming state data 264d along with the time indicated by the RTC 266. It may also be possible to record it in This makes it possible to eliminate the need for the first reading memory 263, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 12>
In addition, in the MPU 201, in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches, when a winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a. turns on the first 1 buffer 262a, and when a winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, turns on the first 2 buffer 262b, and by the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. When a winning in the first normal winning hole 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when a winning in the second normal winning hole 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning hole switch 208d, the normal 2 buffer is turned on. When the buffer 262d is turned on and a winning in the big winning hole 65a is detected by the output of the big winning hole switch 208e, the big winning hole buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball guided to the ball ejection path is turned on by the out switch 208f. If the out buffer 262f is configured to be turned on when detected, the first reading memory 263 stores the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, and the first buffer set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. 262c, normal 2 buffer 262d, large winning opening buffer 262e, and out buffer 262f values (i.e., information indicating whether or not there was a winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening, and information indicating whether or not there was a winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening, and the ball guided to the ball ejection path for 2 milliseconds. information indicating the presence or absence of a ball) may be sequentially stored together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory are determined based on each value stored in the first reading memory 263. Calculate the ratio and record it in the second reading memory 264, or calculate for each winning ball the total number of balls that have entered each prize opening by that timing, and eject them to the ball ejection path by that timing. The total number of balls played may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed based on the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio. can do. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening is checked. information indicating the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball ejection path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first reading memory 263). It may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time). As a result, information such as which winning slot and at what time a prize was won in an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at what time the ball was guided to the ball ejection path in an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds (i.e. It becomes possible for the inspection device 300 to grasp detailed information such as whether the shot was fired into the area or not. Therefore, analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

<Modification 13>
In addition, in the MPU 201, in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches, when a winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a. turns on the first 1 buffer 262a, and when a winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, turns on the first 2 buffer 262b, and by the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. When a winning in the first normal winning hole 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when a winning in the second normal winning hole 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning hole switch 208d, the normal 2 buffer is turned on. When the buffer 262d is turned on and a winning in the big winning hole 65a is detected by the output of the big winning hole switch 208e, the big winning hole buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball guided to the ball ejection path is turned on by the out switch 208f. If the out buffer 262f is configured to be turned on when detected, if there is a turned on buffer in the first reading memory 263 among the buffers 262a to 262e corresponding to each winning opening, The information indicating the winning hole where the prize was won, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, the information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball ejection path, the time and the time indicated by the RTC 266. They may also be stored sequentially. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory are determined based on each information stored in the first reading memory 263. Calculate the ratio and record it in the second reading memory 264, or calculate for each winning ball the total number of balls that have entered each prize opening by that timing, and eject them to the ball ejection path by that timing. The total number of balls played may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed based on the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio. can do. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening is checked. information indicating the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball ejection path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first reading memory 263). It may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time). As a result, the inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as which winning hole and at what time the ball was won, and at what time the ball was guided to the ejection path (that is, whether it was fired into the gaming area). It becomes like this. Therefore, analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

In addition, as a modification of the first embodiment, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as information recorded in the second reading memory 264. If the configuration is such that the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the information transmitted from the first reading memory 263 every 2 milliseconds indicating the presence or absence of winning balls in each winning opening. Using the prize ball number table 202e, the latest accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed. In addition, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated here are based on winnings in each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since they are calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but they can be used as reference values in the analysis of the inspection device 300. .

<Modification 14>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 contains information indicating the presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds in each winning hole, information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball ejection path for 2 milliseconds, and corresponding information. When storing the attached time (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first reading memory 263), the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b and When this happens, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 stores information recorded in the second reading memory 264 indicating the presence or absence of winnings in each winning slot for 2 milliseconds, and the presence or absence of balls guided to the ball ejection path for 2 milliseconds. It is also possible to transmit the information indicating the information and the time associated with the information, and also transmit the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of winning balls in each winning opening every 2 milliseconds, and then calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening. By calculating the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio in each predetermined section using the number table 202e, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraudulent activity from changes in the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio. In addition, if there is a change in the ratio of role objects and the ratio of continuous role objects that are suspected of fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 will contain information indicating whether or not there was a win for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening, and information indicating whether or not there was a prize for 2 milliseconds in each winning hole. Detailed information related to the game, such as information indicating the presence or absence of balls guided to the ejection path and the time associated with that information, is input, so based on this information, the ratio of role objects and the successive role are determined. The causes of changes in the ratio of objects can be investigated in detail.

<Modification 15>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 contains information indicating the prize opening where the prize was won, information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball ejection path, and the times associated with these pieces of information (that is, When the information is stored in the first reading memory 263), when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the first The information stored in the reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 stores the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 indicating the winning opening where the prize was won, the information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball ejection path, and the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. The time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning hole for each predetermined section from the information indicating the winning holes in which winnings occurred, and then uses the prize ball number table 202e to calculate the total number of winning balls for each winning hole. By calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in a predetermined section, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be analyzed from changes in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. In addition, if there is a change in the ratio of role objects and the ratio of continuous role objects that are suspected of fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 contains information indicating the winning hole where a prize was won and the ball guided to the ball ejection path. Since detailed information related to the game is input, such as information indicating that the change occurred and the time associated with that information, based on this information, it is possible to determine the cause of changes in the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects. You can search in detail.

<Modification 16>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the big prize opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f are set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. (i.e., information indicating the presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds in each winning hole, and information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball ejection path for 2 milliseconds) at the time indicated by the RTC 266. In addition, the information may be directly recorded in the second reading memory 264 in sequence. In this case, the information regarding the gaming state that is set every 2 milliseconds in the jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i is also stored as the gaming state data in the second reading memory 264 along with the time indicated by the RTC 266. 264d. Also, if the settings from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 are made during late night hours, the out-of-hours information may be recorded in the gaming state data 264d along with the time indicated by the RTC 266. It may also be recorded. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for the first reading memory 263, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 17>
In each of the embodiments described above, areas in which information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d) In the second embodiment, the checksum value is calculated in the area where the number of balls fired, the gaming status data 264d, and the winning counter data 264e are recorded, and is stored in the second reading memory 264. When transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the checksum value may also be transmitted. When the inspection device 300 receives the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, it calculates a checksum value from the received information and compares it with the checksum value transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207. , if they match, it may be determined that the received information is correct information and the analysis may be performed. This can prevent the inspection device 300 from performing analysis based on incorrect information.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and based on the interrupt signal, the CPU 261 executes the inspection result output process to manage the accessory ratio. Although a case has been described in which the information recorded in the chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300, the information is not necessarily limited to this, and information recorded on the chip 207 may be output based on a command sent from the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. , the information recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection device 300. As a result, if the inspection device 300 becomes ready to receive information transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 and then sends a command to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the inspection device 300 can receive the information transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207. Information transmitted from the physical ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above embodiments, when the CPU 261 is executing the accessory ratio calculation process (first embodiment) or the winning information storage process (second embodiment), the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and the inspection terminal 207a is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. When an interrupt signal occurs, while the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is being executed, the execution of the inspection result output process corresponding to the interrupt signal is put on standby, and the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information is saved. After the storage process is completed, the execution of the test result output may be started. As a result, the inspection result output process is executed during the execution of the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, and incorrect information is sent to the inspection device 300 because it is in the middle of being written to the second reading memory 264. It is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

<Modification 20>
In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which winning information, etc. is transmitted in one direction from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the main control device 110. You may obtain the information and perform some processing based on that information. For example, if the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 stops or if some error occurs in the processing in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the information is sent from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. Based on the information, the MPU 201 notifies you of this by displaying on the first symbol display device 37, lighting/flashing the lamp, outputting sound, displaying on the third symbol display device 81, etc. May be controlled. This allows the hall personnel to know about the abnormality in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and to take some kind of countermeasure. In addition, the MPU 201 uses information indicating that the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 has stopped or information indicating that some error has occurred in the processing in the accessory ratio management chip 207 to The accessory ratio management chip 207 may also be reset. Thereby, the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be automatically resolved and the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

<Modification 21>
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko The MPU 201 may control the machine 10 to make the first predetermined notification. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201, and the consecutive accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. , the MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to issue a second predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is calculated as appropriate from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, and it is sent to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 may perform the above comparison and notification based on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. As the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Further, as a first predetermined notification and a second predetermined notification, a command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 to turn on or blink a predetermined lamp in a predetermined manner or to output a predetermined sound. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 to display a predetermined symbol or character on the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command, the voice lamp control device 113 may cause the display control device to display a predetermined symbol or character. Further commands may be sent to 114. Further, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the hall computer 600 provided in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed is informed via a relay board (not shown) that the accessory ratio is the first predetermined notification. Alternatively, information indicating that the continuous accessory ratio is higher than a second predetermined ratio may be transmitted. By these notifications, the pachinko machine 10 can directly notify the pachinko machine 10 of an abnormality in the winning combination ratio or continuous winning combination ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to easily discover a pachinko machine 10 in which there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed on the pachinko machine 10. Additionally, such notification can help deter fraudulent acts.

<Modification 22>
In each of the above embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 determines whether the calculated accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio, and The determination result may be output to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may control to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the above judgment result received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, the accessory ratio management chip 207 itself may execute control to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the above determination result. For example, the LEDs that make these notifications are connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 drives and controls these LEDs when making the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification. You may. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first symbol display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or to display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. Further, a command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification is directly transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 receives the command. Based on this, it may be controlled to turn on or blink a predetermined lamp, output a predetermined sound, or perform a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 directly sends information to the hall computer 600 indicating that the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, or that the consecutive accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. Information indicating that the price is high may be transmitted. This also allows the pachinko machine 10 to directly notify the pachinko machine 10 of an abnormality in the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 to those involved in the hall. Therefore, it is possible to easily discover a pachinko machine 10 in which there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed on the pachinko machine 10. Additionally, such notification can help deter fraudulent acts.

<Modification 23>
In the second embodiment, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it also sends the prize balls set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. The case where the information of the number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, triggered by the output of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, or based on a control signal from the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e is sent to the MPU 201. It may be configured such that the accessory ratio management chip 207 transmits the prize ball number table 202e transmitted by the MPU 201 in response to the request to the inspection device 300. In addition, the inspection device 300 directly outputs a signal requesting the MPU 201 to transmit the prize pitch number table 202e, and upon receiving the request signal, the MPU 201 directly transmits the prize pitch number table 202e to the inspection device 300. You may also do so. In addition, the specification is such that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on after the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, and the prize ball number table 202e is sent to the inspection device 300 during the startup process executed by the MPU 201. You may also do so. Thereby, the accessory ratio management chip 207 can eliminate the need for the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and can reduce the number of registers.

<Modification 24>
Further, the main control device 110 may not transmit the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300, and the number of prize balls to the inspection device 300 may be manually input. As a result, the main control device 110 does not need to perform control to transmit the prize ball number table 202e, so it is possible to suppress the program of the MPU 201 and the program of the accessory ratio management chip 207 from becoming complicated.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the prize ball number table 202e is not sent to the inspection device 300, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the prize ball number table 202e is not sent to the inspection device 300. good. Thereby, the inspection device 300 can analyze whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity due to changes in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, while also referring to the prize ball number table 202e.

<Modification 26>
In each of the above embodiments, an output register (buffer) may be provided between the second reading memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a to temporarily store information transmitted from the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300. good. As a result, even if the reading speed of the information read from the second reading memory 264 and the transmission speed for transmitting the information to the accessory ratio management chip 207 are different, the second reading memory 264 can read the information through the output register. Information can be easily transmitted from the 2-reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 27>
In each of the above embodiments, when it is detected that the power is turned off, information regarding the ratio of accessories etc. is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. explained. In contrast, by configuring the first reading memory 263 as a nonvolatile memory or by supplying a backup voltage to the first reading memory 263, the first reading memory 263 can be saved even when the power is turned off. It is also possible to configure this so that when power is supplied, information regarding the ratio of accessories and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. With this also, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio without omission for the number of prize balls paid out after being recorded in the second reading memory 264 and before the power is turned off. . Further, since recording is performed in the second reading memory 264 when the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the power is completely cut off in the middle of recording in the second reading memory 264.

<Modification 28>
In each of the embodiments described above, when it is detected that the power is turned off, the information regarding the accessory ratio, etc. is automatically transferred to the second reading memory 263 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 under the control of the CPU 261. The case of recording to the reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, the timing (trigger) for recording information regarding the ratio of accessories etc. to the second reading memory 264 is set to "power off" or It may also be possible to specify "power supply". If the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power off", when it is detected that the power is turned off, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, If the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", the first reading memory 264 records information regarding the ratio of accessories, etc. Based on the information stored in the memory 263, information regarding the ratio of accessories and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, in accordance with the setting of the trigger information data 202f in the MPU 201, the power is cut off from recording information regarding the ratio of accessories, etc. in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. It can be performed when power is supplied. Note that if "power supply" can be specified as the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 may be configured as a non-volatile memory, or a backup voltage may be supplied to the first reading memory 263. The reading memory 263 may be configured to be able to store data even when the power is turned off.

<Modification 29>
In each of the embodiments described above, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, the timing (trigger) for recording information regarding the ratio of accessories etc. ”, “time”, and “gaming time” are specified. On the other hand, the "power supply time" may be defined in the trigger information data 202f. When information indicating "power supply time" is specified in the trigger information data 202f, information indicating a "predetermined time" which is the timing for recording information regarding the accessory ratio etc. in the second reading memory 264 is also specified. You can. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating a "power supply time" and information indicating 4 hours as a "predetermined time," the accessory ratio management chip 207 may set the following information in the trigger setting area 265b. At the stage when the trigger information data 202f is set, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is acquired, the obtained time is stored in the memory as the "power supply time measurement start time", and thereafter, the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the time indicated by the RTC 266 are stored. It is determined whether 4 hours have passed since power was supplied from the difference with the "power supply time measurement start time", and when 4 hours have passed, the accessory ratio management chip 207 stores it in the first reading memory 263. Based on the information obtained, information regarding the ratio of accessories and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the time when the recording was performed is acquired from the RTC 266 and stored in the memory as a new "power supply time measurement start time", and then the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the "power supply time measurement start time" are It may be determined whether four hours have elapsed based on the difference from the "start time". By specifying the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio based on the power supply time, even in situations where there are not many games played on the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to ensure that the role It is possible to calculate the object ratio and the continuous role object ratio. Therefore, using the reliably calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to reliably analyze the presence or absence of fraudulent activity.

<Modification 30>
In the second embodiment, information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 indicates the total number of winning balls in each winning opening at each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. A case has been described in which the information is sent to the inspection device 300 together with the prize pitch number table 202e. On the other hand, when transmitting information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole at each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f to the inspection device 300, based on the information at each timing. Then, the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio at each timing may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, instead of the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole stored in the second reading memory 264, the proportion of the role object and the continuous role are determined based on that information. The object ratio may be calculated, and the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This eliminates the need for the inspection device 300 to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. In addition, when calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio with the inspection device 300, there is a risk that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated based on a prize ball number table that has been set fraudulently or incorrectly. However, if the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no fear that the prize ball number table 202e will be tampered with, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio can be calculated accurately.

<Modification 31>
In addition, not limited to the second embodiment, the second reading memory 264 does not store information indicating the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, and the information necessary to calculate at least one of these is not stored in the second reading memory 264. If the information is stored in the second reading memory 264, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information stored in the second reading memory 264 when transmitting to the inspection device 300. The calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, or in place of that information. This eliminates the need for the inspection device 300 to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. In addition, when calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio with the inspection device 300, there is a risk that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated based on a prize ball number table that has been set fraudulently or incorrectly. However, if the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no fear that the prize ball number table 202e will be tampered with, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio can be calculated accurately. In addition, if the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, the inspection device 300 can calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. If it is determined that there is something suspicious about the subject, the cause can be investigated based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. In addition, in the inspection device 300, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio output from the accessory ratio management chip 207 are calculated. By determining whether or not they match, it becomes possible to determine whether some kind of fraudulent activity is occurring.

<Modification 32>
In each of the above embodiments, an out switch 208f is provided to detect the ball guided to the ball ejection path, and by counting the number of times a ball is detected by the out switch 208f, the number of balls ejected into the game area is determined. Although the case of counting balls has been described, various methods may be used to count the number of balls shot into the game area. For example, an out port switch is provided that detects balls that have passed through the out port 66, and the number of balls that have passed through the out port 66 detected by the out port switch and the first starting point detected by the first starting port switch 208a are determined. The number of balls that passed through the opening 64a, the number of balls that passed through the second starting port 64b detected by the second starting port switch 208b, and the first normal winning port 63a detected by the first normal winning port switch 208c. The number of balls that passed through, the number of balls that passed through the second normal winning port 63b detected by the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the number of balls that passed through the large winning port 65a detected by the large winning port switch 208e. The number of balls fired into the game area may be calculated by summing the number of balls. Also, there is a supply ball detection switch that detects balls supplied to the ball firing unit 112a, and a foul ball that detects balls that are fired by the ball firing unit 112a and are ejected from the ball guide path as foul balls without reaching the game area. A detection switch is provided, and the counter counts up by one each time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch, and counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. You may count the number of In addition, instead of the supplied ball detection switch, a fired ball detection switch is provided to detect a ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, and each time a ball is detected by the fired ball detection switch, the count is increased by 1, and a foul ball is detected. The number of balls fired into the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the switch. In addition, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects the ball guided from the ball guide path to the game area. The balls fired into the game area may be counted by providing a counter that increments by one each time a ball is detected by the switch.

<Modification 33>
In each of the above embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, and based on software executed by the CPU 261, information regarding the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the inspection device The case of transmitting to 300 has been explained. On the other hand, part or all of the functions of the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. By configuring with wired logic, information regarding the ratio of accessories can be managed at high speed.

<Modification 34>
In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110, and the information regarding the accessory ratio is recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 records information regarding the ratio of accessories in the non-volatile memory, and the MPU 201 transmits the information recorded in the non-volatile memory to the inspection device 300. It may be controlled to do so. As a result, the MPU 201 itself uses the information regarding the winning of balls in each winning opening detected by the MPU 201 and the balls guided to the ball ejection path to another chip, and the information regarding the ratio of accessories. Since it can be managed, it is less susceptible to the influence of noise, and it is possible to manage information regarding the ratio of accessories more accurately.

<Modification 35>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main controller 110, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the main controller 110 may be connected. In this case, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be housed in the same board box 100 as the main controller 110, or may be housed in a board box different from the board box 100 in which the main controller 110 is housed. good. When storing the accessory ratio management chip 207 in a board box separate from the main controller 110, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a board box dedicated to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or other control devices may be used. The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in any one of the board boxes 101 to 104 in which devices and the like are stored.

<Modification 36>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the payout control device 111. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information regarding the accessory ratio based on the signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main control device 110 sends the payout control device 111 information regarding winnings for each winning hole (for example, information on balls that have won during a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning hole. information indicating the number) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. In addition, in the prize ball command sent from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, in addition to the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out), it is also possible to specify which winning hole the prize ball is associated with. Based on the prize ball command, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the buffer 262 in the area corresponding to the winning hole where the prize was won, and the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the buffer 262. By adding the number of prize balls that have been won to the counter of the corresponding winning hole provided in the first reading memory 263, the counter can calculate the number of balls paid out by winning into the corresponding winning hole for each winning hole. You may count the number. Furthermore, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. With these, information regarding the accessory ratio can be recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In these cases, the information on the prize ball number table 202e and the information on the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main controller 110 by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. The command may be transmitted from the command to the payout control device 111. Thereby, using this information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the payout control device 111 can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

<Modification 37>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 113, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information regarding the accessory ratio based on the signal from the audio lamp control device 113 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main control device 110 sends the audio lamp control device 113 information about winnings for each winning hole (for example, balls that won a prize within a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning hole). ) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. These also allow the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the audio lamp control device 113 to record information regarding the accessory ratio and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In addition, by managing the accessory ratio with the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the audio lamp control device 113, the calculated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, etc. can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Commands may also be sent to the control device 114. By displaying on the third symbol display device 81, hall personnel can easily discover a pachinko machine 10 with an incorrect proportion of objects or consecutive objects, and a cheater can be restrained from committing a wrongful act. can. In addition, when the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the audio lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent activity is suspected), a predetermined value is sent from the audio output device 226. In order for the audio lamp control device 113 to output a notification sound, to make the lamp display device 227 turn on and blink in a predetermined manner, and to display a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81, A command may also be sent to the display control device 114. Thereby, the hall personnel can easily discover the pachinko machine 10 suspected of cheating, and can also restrain the cheater from committing a fraudulent act. In these cases, in the main controller 110, the information in the prize ball number table 202e and the information in the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main controller 110 by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 as a command. Thereby, using this information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 side can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

<Modification 38>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information regarding the accessory ratio based on the signal from the display control device 114 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main control device 110 sends information regarding winnings for each winning hole to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 (for example, a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning hole). Information indicating the number of winning balls during the period) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. These also allow the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 to record information regarding the accessory ratio and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In addition, by managing the accessory ratio with the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, display control is performed to display the calculated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, etc. on the third symbol display device 81. Device 114 may also perform this. By displaying on the third symbol display device 81, hall personnel can easily discover a pachinko machine 10 with an incorrect proportion of objects or consecutive objects, and a cheater can be restrained from committing a wrongful act. can. In addition, when the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent activity is suspected), a predetermined display is displayed in the third symbol. The display control device 114 may perform control for displaying on the display device 81. Thereby, the hall personnel can easily discover the pachinko machine 10 suspected of cheating, and can also restrain the cheater from committing a fraudulent act. In these cases, in the main controller 110, the information in the prize ball number table 202e and the information in the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main controller 110 by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. The command may be sent from 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, using this information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 side can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

<Modification 39>
In each of the embodiments described above, the main control device 110 is mounted on a substrate, or connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the accessory ratio management chip 207, or mounted on the accessory ratio management chip 207. A display device with a plurality of 7-segment displays is provided on a board on which a control device that realizes the function is installed, and the display device has a display device that displays information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio, and continuous accessory ratio. Information or information indicating gaming performance (for example, base value, etc.) may be displayed. The display device may be configured with a liquid crystal display, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, etc. having a predetermined number of pixels instead of the 7-segment display. The display device is on a board on which the main control device 110 is provided, or is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or is equipped with the accessory ratio management chip 207, or has the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Instead of being provided on the board on which the control device that realizes Alternatively, it may be connected to a board provided with a control device that realizes the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The display device may be assembled so that the display screen of the display device can be seen when looking at the back side of the pachinko machine 10, or the display screen of the display device can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It may be assembled like this.

<Modification 40>
The information regarding the ratio of bonuses and the ratio of continuous bonuses displayed on the display device may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning for each winning opening, or information indicating the total number of balls paid out for each winning opening. The total number of balls paid out by winning a prize, the total number of balls paid out by winning a prize in the prize opening where the accessory is activated (in the present embodiment, the second starting opening 64b and the grand prize opening 65a), The information may also be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning in a winning hole (in this embodiment, the big winning hole 65a) in which objects operate continuously. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired into the game area (number of fired balls) may be included in the information regarding the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device. The display device is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, etc., each having a predetermined number of pixels in place of a 7-segment display, and displays a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, or a character ratio. Information related to the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed.

<Modification 41>
Information related to the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, or information indicating game performance displayed on the display device is recorded in the most recent second reading memory 264. It may be the information itself recorded in the second reading memory 264 at the timing (trigger), or the information generated from that information. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording is performed in a plurality of second reading memories 264 including the most recent one, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 or the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 at each timing. Information generated from the information may be displayed on the display device as information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, information related to the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating gaming performance. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording is performed in a plurality of second reading memories 264 including the most recent one, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 or all the timings (trigger) recorded in the second reading memory 264 ), calculate the average value of the information related to the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, information related to the role object ratio or continuous role object ratio, or information indicating gaming performance, and display the average value on the display device. You can. Furthermore, not only the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 but also the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is reflected, and the ratio of the accessory, the ratio of consecutive characters, the ratio of characters, and the ratio of consecutive characters are changed. Related information or information indicating gaming performance may be generated and displayed on the display device.

As a result, by looking at the display device, it is possible that fraudulent acts have been committed based on information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating gaming performance. can be judged. Note that this display device may display any of the following at the same time: the role object ratio, the continuous role object, the information related to the role object ratio or the continuous role object ratio, and the information indicating the game performance, or may display them one by one. You may let them. Further, any of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the information indicating the gaming performance may be displayed alternately at predetermined time intervals. If the images are displayed alternately, information indicating what is being displayed may also be displayed. In addition, if the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, or other information displayed on the display device exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, if the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the continuous accessory ratio (exceeds 60%), the displayed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and other information may be displayed in a different color from normal, or may be displayed blinking. Further, in the display device, a predetermined period of time (for example, a predetermined time such as 30 seconds may be used after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, or a period of time until startup processing is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110). Information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating gaming performance (which may be a period until the end of a predetermined process such as a period) may be displayed. This allows hall personnel to check the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, as well as information related to the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio. This makes it easy to confirm whether any wrongdoing has occurred. In addition, in the display device, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, information related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the game performance is displayed. Information may also be displayed. This allows hall personnel to easily confirm whether any fraudulent activity has occurred by checking the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. . In addition, when it is determined that the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off, information related to the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, or information indicating game performance is displayed on the display device. The display may be for a predetermined period of time (for example, a predetermined period of time such as 10 seconds), or a period of time until the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 finishes processing related to power-off (for example, until the processing of S705 is finished). , or may be a period until the end of a predetermined process). In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off, the information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating gaming performance is displayed on the display device. , power from a backup power source, a secondary battery, a large capacity capacitor, etc. may be used. Further, the display device may be housed in a substrate box. This can prevent actions such as displaying an incorrect value on the display device.

<Modification 42>
In addition, a button is provided on the display device to display information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating gaming performance, and when the button is operated. In this case, the display device may display information related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the gaming performance. As a result, only when you have confirmed the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and other information, by operating the button, you can receive information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio, and continuous accessory ratio. Alternatively, since information indicating gaming performance can be displayed on the display device, it is possible to suppress power consumption in the display device from being wasted. In addition, the button operation is valid only when the game is not being executed in the pachinko machine 10, and the display device displays information related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio. Alternatively, information indicating gaming performance may be displayed. It is determined that the game is not being played in the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the ball guided to the ball ejection path is not detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined period of time or more, or when the operation handle 51 is rotated. If not, if the ball firing unit 112a has determined that the ball firing is not executed, or if the ball guided to the game area is not detected, it may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a cheater from attempting to commit some kind of fraud by viewing the information displayed on the display device while playing a game.

<Modification 43>
Further, the operation of the button may be made effective only when the button is operated in combination with another button. As a result, a fraudster who does not know the valid combination of button operations can display information related to the character ratio, continuous character ratio, character ratio, continuous character ratio, or information indicating gaming performance. It can be made so that it cannot be easily displayed on the device. In addition, while operating a button for displaying information related to the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, role object ratio or continuous role object ratio, or information indicating game performance on the display device, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Only in the case where the player has inserted the winning combination, the display device may display information related to the accessory ratio, the consecutive accessory ratio, the accessory ratio or the consecutive accessory ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance. As a result, when a hall official turns on the power to the pachinko machine 10, by operating the button at the same time, it is possible to change By checking the information related to the property ratio or the information indicating the gaming performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether any fraudulent activity occurred during business hours the previous day or outside business hours at night. In addition, while operating the button for displaying information related to the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, or information indicating game performance on the display device, the power source of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Only in the case of disconnecting, the display device may display information related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a person involved in the hall can operate the button at the same time to change the character ratio, continuous character ratio, character ratio, or continuous character displayed on the display device. By checking the information related to the property ratio or the information indicating the gaming performance, it is possible to easily check whether there was any fraudulent activity before today's business or during today's business. The display of the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, information related to the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, or information indicating game performance on the display device by operating the button will end based on the passage of a predetermined period of time. Alternatively, the process may end when the button is operated again. In addition, only during the period when the button is continuously operated, information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance is displayed. Good too.

<Modification 44>
In addition, if the button is operated and the display device displays information related to the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, role object ratio or continuous role object ratio, or information indicating gaming performance, the pachinko machine The game mode No. 10 may be set as a check mode, and the main control of the game by the main control device 110 may be temporarily stopped. As a result, as the game progresses, information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance displayed on the display device changes. , it can be suppressed that it becomes difficult to confirm the ratio of the accessory. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the check mode and temporarily stops the main control of the game, and the main control device 110 causes the audio lamp control device 113 (and display control device 114) to A command may be sent to notify the transition to check mode. Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive a command notifying the transition to the check mode, for example, a predetermined image (for example, a black screen) corresponding to the check mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ), the fluctuating performance being executed can continue to fluctuate at high speed during the check mode period, the audio output from the audio output device 226 can also be a predetermined sound that corresponds to the check mode, and the audio that corresponds to high-speed fluctuations. It may also be controlled to output. Thereby, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the check mode. In addition, the main controller 110 cancels the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 and at the stage of restarting the main control of the game, the main controller 110 instructs the audio lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114) that the check mode is set as the game mode. A command may be sent to notify the cancellation. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can return the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 to those before the transition to the check mode. Can be done.

<Modification 45>
In addition, in the modified example described so far, when a button is operated, the display device provided on the board of the main control device 110 etc. displays the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, role object ratio, and continuous role object ratio. The case where related information or information indicating gaming performance is displayed has been described, but in addition to or in place of this, when a button operation is performed, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. The lamp display device 227 or the like may display information related to the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, role object ratio or continuous role object ratio, or information indicating game performance, or may display audio output. The device 226 may output some kind of notification sound indicating the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the gaming performance. In this case as well, the above-mentioned modifications may be applied as appropriate in relation to button operations.

<Modification 46>
Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information related to the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Information related to the accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 when a button operation is performed. In this case as well, the above-mentioned modifications may be applied as appropriate in relation to button operations.

<Modification 47>
In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, but based on the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207, the main controller 110 etc., various information such as the ratio of the character object and the ratio of the continuous character object are displayed, and the character object ratio and the continuous character object ratio are displayed on the display device provided on the board such as Displaying information regarding the object ratio, continuous role object ratio, or information indicating game performance, or outputting some notification sound regarding the role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, and game performance from the audio output device 226, When configured to perform some kind of notification, the transmission to the inspection device 300 does not necessarily have to be performed.

<Modification 48>
In each of the embodiments described above, a large capacity capacitor 267 or a secondary battery is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power outage or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 In the above, a case has been described in which the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to execute processing associated with a power-off. On the other hand, instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery, a backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Thereby, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 can be retained even while the power is turned off. Furthermore, if a fraudster attempts to set fraudulent information in the buffer 262 during late night hours, the after-hours information is stored in the after-hours data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and then at a predetermined timing, the second reading memory The out-of-hours information can be recorded in the gaming state data 264d of the memory 264.

<Modification 49>
In the above embodiment, in the process of S724 (see FIG. 19), when the MPU 201 determines whether or not the transmission of the interrupt signal after setting the buffer 262 was performed in the late night time zone, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is , the time threshold used for determining whether the time is between 0:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. may be set by the MPU 201. For example, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores late-night time zone determination time data that defines the threshold value of the time, and in the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e The late night time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the late night time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265 together with the trigger information data 202f. Then, in the process of S724, it may be determined whether or not the MPU 201 has transmitted the interrupt signal after setting the buffer 262 during the time period indicated by the late night time period determination time data. Thereby, the determination of the late night time zone can be variably set by the ROM 202.

<Modification 50>
In each of the above embodiments, when power is turned on to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the power-on information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, and a predetermined Depending on the timing, the power-on information may be recorded in the gaming state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. Further, when the power is turned on to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the gaming state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. As a result, information regarding the time when the power was turned on is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, if there is a possibility of fraudulent activity due to a change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the cause can be investigated from multiple angles, including the time when the power was turned on.

<Modification 51>
Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cut-off information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. At a predetermined timing, the power-off information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 may be configured with a nonvolatile memory or may be supplied with a backup voltage. Further, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cut-off information may be directly recorded in the gaming state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 does not necessarily need to be configured with a nonvolatile memory or be supplied with a backup voltage. Accordingly, information regarding the time when the power was turned off is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, if there is a possibility of fraudulent activity due to a change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the cause can be investigated from multiple angles, including the time when the power was cut off.

<Modification 52>
In the above embodiment, when the power supplied to the main control device 110 is cut off and the processes in S704 to S707 are executed in the main process of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 17), after the process in S704 is executed, the process in S705 Before the process is executed, the same process as the process of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 11 may be executed. That is, in the process when the power is turned off, after inhibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing (S704), the values of the first 1 counter 203d, first 2 counter 203e, ordinary 1 counter 203f, ordinary 2 counter 203g, and big prize opening counter 203h of the RAM 203 are is set as winning information, the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information, together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and an interrupt signal is sent to the accessory ratio management chip 207. You may. As a result, the number of balls that entered each winning slot and the balls that were guided to the ball ejection path immediately before the power was cut off, and the balls that were not counted in the accessory ratio management chip 207, are The accessory ratio management chip 207 can be used to count the number before the item is counted. Therefore, the number of balls won into each prize opening and the balls guided to the ball ejection path immediately before the power is turned off can be recorded without omission in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 53>
In each of the above embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is "playing time", the ball guided to the ball ejection path is detected by the out switch 208f. Although a case has been described in which the gaming time is calculated by counting the amount of time played, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an out port switch that detects a ball passing through the out port 66 is provided, and the out port switch, the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, and the second normal winning port When the passage of a ball to each winning hole or out hole is detected by either the switch 208d or the big winning hole switch 208e, the playing time is calculated by counting the detected time. Good too. Further, the playing time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which it is determined that the player is touching the operating handle 51 based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the operating handle 51. The gaming time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the player rotates the operating handle 51, or by accumulating the time during which the player touches the operating handle 51 and rotates the operating handle 51. The playing time may also be calculated. Alternatively, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the ball firing unit 112a is driven by the firing control device 112 and firing balls. In addition, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch counts the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide path to the game area continues to be detected. By doing so, the playing time may be calculated.

<Modification 54>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are set in advance by the main controller 110, and the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol cannot be changed by hall personnel. However, instead of this, the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol may be configured to be changed to a plurality of levels (for example, six levels) by a person involved in the hall or the like. As a result, on the pachinko hall side, the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be varied for each machine among pachinko machines of the same model, giving players the pleasure of selecting a machine. .

<Modification 55>
The jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed, for example, as follows. First, for each of multiple stages (hereinafter described as 6 stages (levels 1 to 6)) in which the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be changed, the jackpot random number value and Or the winning random number value of the second symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and/or the second symbol winning probability at that level is determined by the number of jackpot random numbers and/or second symbol winning random numbers determined for each level.

<Modification 56>
The main board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol. The keyhole may be normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, or may be exposed by opening the back pack 92. Alternatively, an opening for a keyhole may be provided in the back pack 92, and the keyhole may be exposed through the opening. The keyhole is configured so that it can be rotated between two positions, ``probability setting off'' side and ``probability setting on'' side, using a special key. On the other hand, the dedicated key can be inserted and removed. When the keyhole is set to the "probability setting on" position using the dedicated key, the pachinko machine 10 can change the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol. Note that while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, the keyhole is rotated from the "probability setting off" position to the "probability setting on" position using a special key, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to start up in a probability setting mode in which the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed. Thereby, the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be safely changed at the same time as the pachinko machine 10 in the hall is activated. In addition, if the keyhole is turned from the "probability setting off" position to the "probability setting on" position using a special key while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is on, the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol will change. The winning probability may not be changed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from fraudulently changing the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol during business operations.

<Modification 57>
The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a push-down probability setting button on the main board for changing the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol. Like the keyhole, this probability setting button is normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, an opening for the probability setting button may be provided in the back pack 92, and the probability setting button may be exposed from the opening. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the previous jackpot probability and/or the level (stage) of the second symbol's winning probability is displayed on, for example, a display device provided on the main board. When the probability setting button is pressed, the level of the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol increases by one level, and this level is displayed on the display device. Further, if the level before the probability setting button is pressed is "6", when the probability setting button is pressed, the level "1" is displayed on the display device. Note that when the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level displayed on the display device is a predetermined level (instead of the previous jackpot probability and/or second symbol winning probability level). For example, it may be level "1").

<Modification 58>
If the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the jackpot probability and/or the level of the second symbol winning probability that you want to set is displayed on the display device, the jackpot value of the level displayed on the display device or the second symbol winning probability level is displayed on the display device. The winning value of the symbol is set, and the pachinko machine 10 is started. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 operates with the jackpot probability of the set level and/or the probability of winning the second symbol. In addition, when the jackpot probability and/or the level of the second symbol's winning probability that you want to set is displayed, and the keyhole into which the special key is inserted is turned to the "probability setting off" position, the display will be displayed. The jackpot value of the level displayed on the device or the win value of the second symbol may be set and the pachinko machine 10 may be started. This also causes the pachinko machine 10 to operate with the jackpot probability of the set level and/or the probability of winning the second symbol.

<Modification 59>
Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a display device for displaying the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the pachinko machine 10 can set the probability. When activated in this mode, the set jackpot probability and/or the level of the second symbol's winning probability may be displayed on the display device. Thereby, by suppressing an increase in the number of display devices installed in the pachinko machine 10, an increase in cost can be reduced. Further, by using the display device as a display device and suppressing an increase in the number of parts, the arrangement (layout) of each part can be easily performed.

<Modification 60>
Now, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be changed, the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio will naturally change in accordance with the change. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether changes in the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are due to changes in the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol, or due to some kind of fraud. There is a risk that you will not understand.

Therefore, when the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be erased. . As a result, it is possible to eliminate the influence of a change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio due to a change in the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. You can. As a result, it can be ascertained at the inspection stage that the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been erased due to a change in the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol, and it can be determined whether or not there was any fraud. It can be used as a reference for making decisions. In this case, the date and time when the change was made may also be stored. Further, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol have been changed may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information about the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not fraud has occurred.

<Modification 61>
On the other hand, even if the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 will remain saved. You may also do so. Thereby, before the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to analyze whether or not there has been fraud. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. You can. Thereby, it can be easily determined whether the effect of changing the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is due to a change in the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol have been changed may include the date and time when the change was made. Further, the information may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information about the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the causes of changes in the ratio of accessory items and the ratio of continuous accessory items.

<Modification 62>
Furthermore, even if the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 will remain saved. In this case, the display device installed to display the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, or information related to the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio, shows the jackpot probability and/or the winning of the second symbol. After the probability is changed, based on the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and/or the first reading memory 263, the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, or accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio is changed. Related information may also be displayed. Therefore, regarding the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, or information related to the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio displayed on this display device, the change in the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol may change. Therefore, the influence of changes in the proportion of accessories and the ratio of continuous ornaments can be eliminated, and fraudulent acts after the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning of the second symbol are changed can be easily discovered. Further, in this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol has been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the date and time when the change was made. Based on this information, after the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol has been changed, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 can be easily determined, and based on that, the proportion of the accessory and the successive accessory can be determined. Information related to the ratio, the accessory ratio, or the continuous accessory ratio can be displayed.

<Modification 63>
Furthermore, even if the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 will remain saved. In this case, the information may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 by dividing it into levels (stages) of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol. Thereby, for each level of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol, the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio when that level is set are determined from the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. be able to. Therefore, the analysis clearly switches between changes in the ratio of accessories and consecutive accessories due to changes in the jackpot probability and/or winning probability of the second symbol, and changes in the ratio of accessories and consecutive accessories due to fraudulent acts. can.

<Modification 64>
When the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol is changed, only one or more pieces of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 immediately before may be saved, and the others may be deleted. Further, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may remain saved. Alternatively, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 may be deleted, and only the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be kept. As a result, while it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the effects of the jackpot probability and/or the successive jackpot ratio before the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are changed on analysis and display, the jackpot probability and/or Before the winning probability of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to analyze whether there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol has been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information may be output to the connected inspection device 300. good. As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the influence of changes in the ratio of accessory objects and the ratio of continuous accessory objects is due to changes in the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol, and also to record the change in the second reading memory 264. At the inspection stage, it can be ascertained that some of the information, etc. has been deleted due to changes in the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol, and this can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there was fraud. can. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol have been changed may be stored together with the date and time when the change was made. Further, the information may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information about the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the causes of changes in the ratio of accessory items and the ratio of continuous accessory items.

<Modification 65>
In each of the embodiments described above, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 cannot be erased from the outside, thereby preventing a fraudster from erasing evidence of fraud. . On the other hand, there is also a second-hand market for pachinko machines, and machines are often sold from one store to another and installed at other stores. In this case, even if a fraudulent act was committed at the previous store and the ratio of accessories etc. has changed, if that information remains in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, the current There was a risk that suspicions would arise that fraudulent activity had occurred at other stores. Therefore, in preparation for such a case, when selling from one store to another store, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 may be deleted, or the information to be resold may be deleted. It may also be possible to record it in the second reading memory 264. By erasing the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, it is possible to prevent the record of fraud committed at the previous store from being carried over to the next store. can. Furthermore, by recording information to be resold in the second reading memory 264, it is possible to clearly distinguish between information related to the ratio of accessories at the previous store and information related to the ratio of accessories and the like at the next store. In addition to being able to perform analysis, it is also possible to discover fraudulent acts committed at the previous store based on information related to the ratio of accessories and the like at the previous store.

<Modification 66>
Deletion of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and second reading memory 264 and recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 are limited to some limited companies such as manufacturers of pachinko machines 10. It is best to limit it to As a result, it is possible to prevent records of fraudulent acts from being easily erased or falsified. Further, erasing of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and second reading memory 264, and recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be performed by the following method. . For example, by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a and inputting a dedicated command from the inspection device 300 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the information is recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264. A program for erasing stored information or recording information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. By making this command a special command that is secret to all but a few people, it is possible to prevent fraudsters from easily erasing records of fraudulent acts or deceiving them. Also, only when a hole such as a keyhole is provided in the main board and a key, etc. that fits into the hole is inserted, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 can be erased or resold. A program for recording information on the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, only those who have a key etc. that fits the hole can erase information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and second reading memory 264, or transfer information to be resold to the second reading memory 264. Since records can be made, it is possible to prevent fraudsters from easily erasing or falsifying records of fraudulent acts. In addition, a switch is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is housed, and only when the switch is operated, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 can be erased or resold. A program may be executed to record the information to be read into the second reading memory 264. As a result, the switch cannot be operated unless the board box 100 is opened, and information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and second reading memory 264 can be erased, and information to be resold can be stored in the second reading memory 264. Cannot record. As described above, in the board box 100, the box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner (connected by a caulking structure), and the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover includes a A seal is affixed. Therefore, since the fraudster cannot easily open the board box, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from easily erasing the record of the fraud or deception. Furthermore, if the board box is opened and the switch is operated, evidence of the opening remains, making it easy to determine that fraudulent activity has occurred.

<Modification 67>
In the third to seventh embodiments described above, processing related to the ratio of accessories and base values was exemplified as processing that uses the area 203y outside the usage area in the RAM 203, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control of the game Various treatments may be used except for. For example, it may be a process for determining fraudulent activity. In the process of determining this fraudulent activity, for example, it is determined whether the magnet approaches or vibrates, or whether there is an unnatural ball entering the winning opening (ball entering the winning opening 65a is detected even though the winning opening 65a is closed). , processing may be performed to notify the user in the event of fraudulent activity. Furthermore, the processing that uses the out-of-use area 203y may include a plurality of processes with different functions (purposes) (for example, "processing related to accessory ratio" and "processing determining fraudulent activity").

<Modification 68>
In the third to seventh embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the contents of the register 200 are saved to the work area 203y1 outside the area 203y outside the used area using the load (LD) instruction. Alternatively, the same effect can be obtained by using a store (ST) command to save the data to the work area 203y1 outside the area 203y outside the use area.

<Modification 69>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments described above, in addition to the real-time base value, the base display device displays three base values (previous base value, base value the day before last, base value the day before last) counted at each predetermined period in the past. 401 has been described, at least two base values counted for each predetermined period in the past (for example, the previous base value and the base value the day before last) may be displayed together with the real-time base value. , four or more base values counted every predetermined period in the past may be displayed together with the real-time base value.

<Modification 70>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments described above, a case has been described in which each base value measured in a plurality of periods and a base value being measured in real time are displayed on the base display device 401, but instead of the base value, Or, in addition to the base value, information related to the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio, and/or other information indicating gaming performance, measured over multiple periods. and what is measured in real time may be displayed on a display device.

<Modification 71>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the MPU 201 executes base value processing (FIG. 41) and displays various base values on the base display device 401. A chip is provided, or a management chip for managing the base value is provided separately from the main controller 110, and the management chip executes processing equivalent to base value processing, and calculates the real-time base value while calculating the real-time base value. , the base value of the previous time, the base value of the time before last, and the base value of the time before last may be displayed on the base display device 401. In this case, the management chip may directly control the display of the base display device 401, or the management chip may control the display of the base display device 401 by the MPU 201 via the MPU 201. Also, the base display device 401 may be directly connected to the management chip.

<Modification 72>
Further, the various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, base value data 203l to 203o, and flag 203p shown in FIG. 39(a) may be stored in the RAM in the management chip. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 201 sends a signal notifying the management chip to that effect during the startup process, and the management chip receives the signal. , various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, base value data 203l to 203o, flag 203p, etc. may be initialized.

<Modification 73>
Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the management chip may control the base display device 401 to fully light up all segments of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d. In this case, the control may be performed immediately after the management chip starts up when the power is turned on, or the MPU 201 sends an initialization signal to the management chip during the startup process when the power is turned on. may be transmitted, and the control may be executed during the process that the management chip executes upon receiving the initialization signal.

<Modification 74>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments described above, when displaying the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base before the previous time on the base display device 401, if there is no valid base value as the base value, the comparison segment We have explained the case where "--" is displayed to indicate that there is no valid base value. On the other hand, if there is no valid base value as the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, or the base value the time before the previous time, only the real-time base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, it can be shown that there is no valid base value among the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, and the base value the time before the time before the last time. Further, it is possible to prevent the previous base value, the base value from the time before the previous time, and the base value from the time from the time before the previous time that do not have a valid base value from continuing to be displayed in vain. On the other hand, in this case, the real-time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "--" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the previous base value. This also makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value among the previous base value, the base value the time before the previous time, and the base value the time before the time before the last time. Furthermore, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the previous base value, it can be suggested that the previous base value and the like will also be displayed on the base display device 401 after a valid base value is obtained.

<Modification 75>
In addition, if there is a valid base value as the previous base value and there is no valid base value as the base value before the previous time or the base value before the time before the previous time, only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401. You may. In addition, if there is a valid base value for the previous base value or the base value from the time before the previous time, but there is no valid base value as the base value from the time before the last time, only the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the base value from the time before the previous time will be displayed on the base display device. 401 may be displayed. This makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for the base value that is not displayed. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent items that do not have valid base values from continuing to be displayed in vain.

<Modification 76>
On the other hand, if there is a valid base value as the previous base value and there is no valid base value as the base value before the previous time or the base value before the time before the previous time, the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the base value before the time before the previous time are displayed on the base display device. 401, and "--" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the base value two times before. In addition, if there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the base value before the previous time, but there is no valid base value as the base value for the time before the previous time, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value for the time before the previous time, and the base value for the time before the previous time will be added. The base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "--" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the base value two days before the previous one. This also makes it possible to indicate a type of base value for which there is no valid base value. Furthermore, by displaying one base value of a type that does not have a valid base value, it can be suggested that the base value of that type will be displayed on the base display device 401 after a valid base value is obtained.

<Modification 77>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are set to a predetermined value immediately after the power is turned on. Although a case has been described in which the lights are turned on for a period of time (5 seconds in this embodiment), instead of lighting, all segments may be made to blink for a predetermined period of time. By blinking all segments, it is possible to check not only whether all segments can be turned on normally, but also whether all segments can be turned off normally, and whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is performed normally. Easy to judge.

<Modification 78>
In addition, when starting up a new pachinko machine 10 at a manufacturing factory, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a second-hand machine, for example, if the RAM is completely After the power is turned on while the erase switch is operated, until the total number of outputs reaches 300, all segments (dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed. ) may be turned on or blinking for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is performed normally at least when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. Moreover, while the lighting is performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started up state.

<Modification 79>
Furthermore, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment). 5 seconds)) It may be turned on or blinked.

<Modification 80>
In the fifth embodiment, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment) immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. In this section, we have explained the case where the control to turn on (or blink for 5 seconds) is executed at a predetermined point (S3007) in the start-up process (see Figure 40). It may be performed at any location within. For example, the control may be executed first after execution of the startup process is started, or the control may be executed after the initial setting (S601). Further, the control may be executed after setting the interrupt permission (S613). Further, the control may be executed at a place other than the start-up process. For example, in the main process (see FIG. 17) that is executed after the start-up process ends, the control may be executed before the loop process (S701 to S703) is executed. Also, in the timer interrupt processing, for example, in the base value processing (see Figure 41), which is one of the processing of the timer interrupt processing, this timer interrupt processing or base value processing is executed for the first time after the power is turned on. The control may be executed by determining whether the control has been executed for the first time after the power is turned on. That is, once the power is turned on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on (or blinked) for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). If possible, this control may be performed at any timing.

<Modification 81>
In the fifth embodiment, when starting up a new pachinko machine 10 at a manufacturing factory, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a used machine, etc. , until the total number of outputs reaches 300, every time the power is turned on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed for a predetermined period (main display). In the embodiment, the display on the base display device 401 is made to blink (or light) "88." in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment. We have described the case where the display is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, in which the base value is displayed blinking (or lit).In this case, each time the power is turned on, the Lighting up all segments (including dot segments) of the displays 401a to 401d for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) may not be executed. In this case, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in a special display mode, so it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not the regular base value. Moreover, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

<Modification 82>
Further, in the fifth embodiment or the modified example, as a special display mode displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, "88." flashes (or lights up) in the identification segment. In addition, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed blinking (or lighting) on the ratio segment. may be displayed on the base display device 401 in a different manner. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, the identification segment is switched and displayed at 5-second intervals between "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." while blinking. The display on the base display device 401 may be performed by lighting up "--" in the comparison segment. Thereby, while this display is being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state. Further, in this embodiment, while "bL." is displayed blinking, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed in the ratio segment by lighting or blinking. This allows the real-time base value at that time to be shown for reference.

<Modification 83>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments described above, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value The number of stages that can be changed is not limited to six stages, but may be changed to any stage.

<Modification 84>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are changed by changing the probability setting value, but when the pachinko machine 10 includes a so-called small win, , instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol winning probability, the small winning probability may be changed. Here, a small hit is a type of loss, and when a ball enters the large winning hole 65a opened by a small hit and the ball is paid out, the number of balls that are paid out is also calculated in the base value. used for. In other words, when the probability of winning a small win is changed, the base value also changes, so if the base value data 203r based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the base value based on the probability setting value after the change cannot be calculated correctly. Therefore, in this case, the base value data 203r may also be erased when data in the RAM 203 is erased when the probability setting value is changed after startup in the setting change mode. . Thereby, the base value based on the changed probability setting value can be calculated correctly.

<Modification 85>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments above, a case has been described in which it is checked every time the timer interrupt process is executed whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6"). However, this confirmation may be performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth to twelfth embodiments. In addition, this check can be performed every time a variable effect is started, every predetermined time (for example, every hour, or every time the internal clock reaches 00 minutes), or whenever a predetermined opportunity occurs. You can also do this.

<Modification 86>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, it is checked whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6") during the timer interrupt processing, and the probability setting value is within the normal range. If the probability setting value is not within , a setting change process may be executed to force a hall related person or the like to change the probability setting value. In this case, a notification sound may be output to prompt a change in the probability setting value, or a notification may be made on the third symbol display device 81 to call a person related to the hall. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. Thereby, the probability setting value can be reset within a normal range by a person related to the hall or the like.

<Modification 87>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is checked whether the RAM judgment value is normal during the start-up process, and the RAM judgment value is confirmed to be normal. If not, further check whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, execute the setting change process and have the hall personnel etc. change the probability setting value. I explained the case. Instead of executing this setting change process, the audio output device 226 or the third symbol display device 81 sends a notification urging the hall personnel etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value. and/or notifies the hall computer 600 from an external terminal (not shown) provided on the main controller 110 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, and enters an infinite loop. You can do it like this. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted by the hall personnel and the like to change the probability setting value.

<Modification 88>
In addition, if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the startup process, a specific probability setting value (for example, ``1'') from the range of ``1'' to ``6'' is set as the probability. It may be forcibly set as a value. Note that if it is determined during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing) that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering some kind of disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol during the game.

<Modification 89>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM judgment value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM judgment value is normal or not (S4009 in FIG. 54), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the forced Execute the setting change process to have the parlor personnel change the probability setting value, prompt the parlor personnel etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, or change the probability setting value to normal. A specific probability setting value within a range may be forcibly set.

<Modification 90>
In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value.

<Modification 91>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed immediately after the power is turned on. Although the case where the light is turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) has been described, in the sixth to twelfth embodiments as well, each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the light is displayed on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. All segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be turned on or blinked for a predetermined period. However, even when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Turning on or blinking for a predetermined period of time may be a nuisance. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may not be lit or blinked. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are lit or blinking after the setting change process or setting committee confirmation process is executed. may also be executed. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are turned on or blinking for a predetermined period, and a predetermined The lighting or blinking may be terminated when an operation is performed.

<Modification 92>
In the fifth to twelfth embodiments, the base display device 401 is configured by an identification segment made up of two 7-segment displays 401a and 401b, and a ratio segment made up of two 7-segment displays 401c and 401d. Although the case has been described in which the identification segment is configured with one or two or more 7-segment indicators, the ratio segment may be configured with two or more 7-segment indicators.

<Modification 93>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, using the round number notification LED, the jackpot pattern notification LED, the winning pattern notification LED, etc. prepared in the first pattern display device 37, or the entire LED 37a, The case has been described in which a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification is used to notify that the setting change display or setting confirmation display is being performed on the base display device 401, but the first symbol display device 37, using the round number notification LED, the jackpot symbol notification LED, the winning pattern notification LED, etc., or by using the entire LED 37a with a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification, The base display device 401 may notify that the error history is being displayed.

<Modification 94>
In addition, one LED is provided in the first symbol display device 37 to notify that the setting change display and setting confirmation display are being performed on the base display device 401, and for example, by lighting the LED, , to notify that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting change in progress, and by blinking the LED, to notify that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting confirmation in progress. You can. Further, the first symbol display device 37 includes an LED to notify that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting change in progress, and the base display device 401 is displaying a setting confirmation in progress. A total of two LEDs are provided, including an LED for notifying the user, and by lighting the respective LEDs, it is possible to notify that the base display device 401 is displaying settings being changed or settings being confirmed. You may also do so. In addition, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with an LED for notifying that the error history is being displayed on the base display device 401, and by lighting the LED, the base display device 401 displays the error history. It may be possible to notify that the history display is being performed.

<Modification 95>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when displaying the probability setting value or error history on the base display device 401, all segments of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b of the identification segment are turned off, or "--" or displaying fixed characters on each of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b in a display mode different from the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 has been explained, but the probability setting When displaying the value or error history on the base display device 401, the identification segment may be displayed in any display mode as long as it is different from the display mode when the base display device 401 displays the base value. For example, a predetermined segment of each of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b may be displayed blinking, or each segment of each of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b may be displayed by lighting and blinking in order or at random. Further, in the identification segment, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display states between when the base display device 401 displays the base value and when displaying the probability setting value or error history.

<Modification 96>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when displaying the probability setting value or error history on the base display device 401, all segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment are turned off or "-" is displayed. In the above description, when displaying the probability setting value or the error history on the base display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment will display the base display device 401. The base value may be displayed in any display mode as long as it is different from the case where the base value is displayed. For example, a predetermined segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be displayed blinking, or each segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be displayed sequentially or randomly. Further, in the 7-segment display 401c, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. This also allows the display states of the base display device 401 to be clearly differentiated between when the base value or error history is displayed and when the probability setting value is displayed.

<Modification 97>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the example shown in FIG. 50 is exemplified as the display mode when error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. The case where the display mode is different from that has been explained. On the other hand, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the display mode may be similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 49(a) or (b). In this case, the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. The probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 when a person involved in the hall or the like starts up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 when a person related to the hall or the like presses the error display button 502. In other words, even if the display format when displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is the same as the display format when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, hall personnel etc. Based on the operation performed, it can be determined whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history.

<Modification 98>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 or by turning on the setting change switch. Although the case has been described in which the setting key 501 is used, this may be performed. Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the on state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction from the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is biased to return to its original position. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also allows the probability setting value to be easily changed.

<Modification 99>
Further, in the sixth and twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122. However, in the seventh embodiment A setting change switch similar to the above may be provided, and the probability setting value may be updated by turning on the setting change switch. This allows the roles of the RAM erase switch and the setting change switch to be clearly separated, so that the operator can clearly understand the role of each switch.

<Modification 100>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is changed by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 122. Although a case has been described in which the settings are confirmed, this may be done by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated, for example, during the setting change mode, and similarly to the error display button 502, the main board The board box 100 may be provided in a more protruding manner so that it can be operated by a hall official or the like without opening the board box 100. This also allows the probability setting value to be determined easily.

<Modification 101>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments described above, when a person involved in the hall performs a startup operation in any of the startup modes of the normal mode, RAM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode while the RAM is abnormal, the main controller 110 In the process of S4215 of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201, it is always determined that the RAM is abnormal (S4215: Yes), and the process moves to the process of S4219, and the notification by the RAM abnormality setting process and ( A case has been described in which an infinite loop state occurs after executing S4219) and output to the hall computer 600 (S4220). On the other hand, in this case, after the notification by the RAM abnormality setting process (S4219) and the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220) are executed, the process may proceed to S4213 and the setting change process may be executed. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to operate normally by reliably resetting the probability setting value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15. Further, in this case, since the setting change process is automatically executed, there is no need to restart the pachinko machine 10, which saves the time and effort of those involved in the hall.

<Modification 102>
In the processing of S4313 of the setting change processing in the eighth to twelfth embodiments, among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for game control (excluding probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the work area 203x1) While erasing (clearing) the predetermined data) and erasing the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the outside work area 203y1, the base value data 203r and error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are Although we have explained the case of retaining the data without erasing it, similar to the processing in S4216 of the start-up process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for game control (within the work area 203x1) While erasing (clearing) the predetermined data (excluding the probability setting value data 203x11), the function ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t stored in the outside work area 203y1 (Fig. 53 ) may be retained without being deleted. In other words, the RAM clear after the setting change process and the RAM clear executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode may be the same process.

<Modification 103>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments described above, in the startup mode when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change, the startup operation is only a startup operation for starting in the setting change mode. The case where the setting change mode is set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning even if it is not a startup operation but some other startup operation has been described. On the other hand, only if the startup operation when the power is turned on after being turned off while changing the settings is a startup operation to start up in settings change mode, the settings change process can be started from the beginning. When the power is turned on after being started as a setting change mode where the settings are changed and the power is turned off while changing the settings, the start-up operation will be performed in other start-up modes (normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting confirmation mode). If the startup operation corresponds to , the MPU 201 may be placed in an infinite loop state. In this case, a notification is sent to the hall personnel etc. urging them to turn off the power and restart it in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. You may also do so. Thereby, it is possible to induce the hall personnel etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and re-set the probability setting value reliably.

<Modification 104>
In addition, if the startup operation when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change is a startup operation to start up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (i.e., if the setting key 501 is set to on), start up as a setting change mode that restarts the setting change process from the beginning, and the start-up operation when the power is turned on after being turned off while changing the settings is If the startup operation corresponds to other startup modes (normal mode, RAM clear mode) (that is, if the setting key 501 is in the OFF state), the MPU 201 is placed in an infinite loop state. Good too. In this case, a notification is sent to the hall personnel etc. urging them to turn off the power and restart it in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. You may also do so. As a result, it is possible to instruct the hall personnel etc. to turn on the setting key 501 and restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, thereby reliably resetting the probability setting value. . On the other hand, when the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the setting key 501 is in the on state, and hall personnel are ready to smoothly update and confirm the probability setting value. There is. Therefore, in this case, by starting up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be reliably determined.

<Modification 105>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during a setting change, a startup operation is performed to start up the normal mode, that is, the power is turned off while the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. The case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch) instead of starting up in the normal mode when the start-up operation is performed to turn on the pachinko machine 10 has been described. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the process of being updated before the power was turned off last time. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode by ignoring the setting change process that was executed before the power was turned off, or by erasing the probability setting value that is being updated.

<Modification 106>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments described above, after the power is turned off during a setting change, the startup operation is performed to start up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 in the OFF state. Regarding the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in a setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch) instead of starting up in RAM clear mode when the power is turned on. explained. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the process of being updated before the power was turned off last time. Also, wait until the setting key 501 turns on, wait until the setting key 501 turns on, then wait for the setting key 501 to turn off, and then stand up in normal mode. You may also clear the RAM. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the RAM clear mode by ignoring the setting change process that was being executed before the power was turned off, or by erasing the probability setting value that is being updated. After that, wait until the setting key 501 turns on, wait until the setting key 501 turns on, wait for the setting key 501 to turn off, and when the setting key 501 turns off, you are ready to play the game. You may make it so that By inserting a process that waits until the setting key 501 turns on, and then waits for the setting key 501 to turn off, the setting change mode that was being executed when the power was last turned off can be changed. It is possible to give a feeling to those involved in the hall as if the release has been released.

<Modification 107>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments described above, after the power is turned off during a setting change, the startup operation is performed to start up in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. If you perform the startup operation of turning on the power using When the setting key 501 is turned on, the computer may wait for the setting key 501 to turn off, and when the setting key 501 turns off, the computer may be started up in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to give hall personnel and the like the feeling that the setting change mode that was being executed at the time of the previous power-off has been released.

<Modification 108>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments described above, after the power is turned off during a setting change, the startup operation is performed to start up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. Regarding the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch) instead of starting up in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on without changing the startup operation. As described above, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the process of being updated before the power was turned off last time. In this case, after the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation process may be executed successively, or the setting confirmation process may be ignored. Alternatively, the system may be started up in the setting confirmation mode, ignoring the setting change process that was executed before the power was turned off, or erasing the probability setting value that is in the process of being updated.

<Modification 109>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, a startup operation is performed to start up the normal mode, that is, the power is turned off while the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. We have explained the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch) instead of starting up in the normal mode when a startup operation is performed to input the . , the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode, ignoring the setting confirmation process that was being executed before the power was turned off.

<Modification 110>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments described above, after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the startup operation is performed to start up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 in the OFF state. When performing the startup operation of turning on the power, we explained the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in RAM clear mode, as per the startup operation performed by hall personnel, but instead of starting up in RAM clear mode, it is necessary to The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in a setting confirmation mode in which the confirmation process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch). In this case, wait until the setting key 501 turns on, wait until the setting key 501 turns on, then wait for the setting key 501 to turn off, and when the setting key 501 turns off, the RAM will not be cleared. You may start it up immediately, or you may clear the RAM.

<Modification 111>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments described above, after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the startup operation is performed to start up in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Even if you perform the start-up operation of turning on the power with You can. Further, after starting up in the settings confirmation mode, the transition to the settings change mode may be triggered by a predetermined operation.

<Modification 112>
In the eleventh embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, at least the inner frame 12 must be opened, and the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 must be opened. The startup mode was set depending on the detection mode. On the other hand, the hall may be configured to be able to select whether opening the inner frame 12 is a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

The island equipment of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed includes "Ryojima" where the pachinko machine 10 can be installed on both sides of the island equipment, "Kabeshima" where the pachinko machine 10 can be installed only on one side of the island equipment, There are various island facilities, such as "pillar islands" that are constructed by surrounding the pillars of a hall with "wall islands", or "single islands" where one or two pachinko machines 10 can be installed. Depending on the island equipment, settings may be changed or confirmed with the inner frame 12 locked. Therefore, depending on the business type of the hall (island equipment), the inner frame 12 may not necessarily be opened to change or confirm the settings, but the settings may be changed or confirmed on the condition that the door release switch 208g is opened. In the case of such a configuration, the inner frame 12 must be opened first, and the work becomes complicated.

Therefore, if a dip switch or the like is provided in a part that cannot be operated by employees (for example, inside the main control unit 110), opening of the inner frame 12 is required as a condition when starting up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. It may be configured such that the manager of the hall or the like can decide whether or not to accept the offer. By configuring in this way, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved while considering the work efficiency according to the environment of each hall.

<Modification 113>
In the eleventh embodiment, the front frame 14 may be configured to be unable to be closed by an employee during maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened. Specifically, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, the front frame 14 cannot be closed to the inner frame 12 unless a special key is inserted by the hall manager or the like. Configure. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent an employee who does not have the authority to change settings, etc. from closing the front frame 14 without permission during maintenance work, and to make it impossible to change or confirm the settings. , the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 114>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper surface of the lower side protrusion 92a of the back pack 92 was configured to abut the upper side protrusion 171a of the protective cover member 140 and the lower side. On the other hand, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a may be configured to engage with the upper side protrusion 171a and the lower side surface. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the engagement is easily disengaged, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the upper surface of the lower protrusion 92a, the upper protrusion 171a, and the lower surface are engaged. suitable. With this configuration, there is no problem during maintenance work on the inner frame 12, and the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 115>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 in a cantilevered manner. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached in the form of a support beam at both ends extending from the right side plate 11d to the left side plate 11c. With this configuration, the security performance of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration while increasing the rigidity of the protective cover member 140. In addition, depending on the protective cover member 140, since it does not cover the upper or lower back surface of the pachinko machine 10, it does not interfere with the replenishment and ejection of balls. It becomes possible to install the .

<Modification 116>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover side protrusion 172 is fixedly formed at a predetermined position on the cover plate 171. On the other hand, the cover side protrusion 172 may be configured to be separable from and attachable to the cover plate 171, and the position of the cover side protrusion 172 within the cover plate 171 may be configured to be changeable and adjustable. Conventionally, a general pachinko machine 10 is configured to allow the game board 13 to be replaced. Here, if the game board 13 attached to the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the position of the setting section 100d of the main control device 110 attached to the replaced game board 13 may also be changed. be. In such a case, the inner frame 12 may not be able to be closed because the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 does not fit into the setting portion 100d of the main controller 110. On the other hand, by configuring the cover side protrusion 172 to be separable and attachable from the cover plate 171, when the game board 13 is replaced and the position of the setting section 100d of the main controller 110 is changed. However, since it is possible to fit the cover side protrusion 172 into the setting part 100d, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 is improved, and the cover side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 and the main controller 110 are The inner frame 12 can be locked without interfering with the setting section 100d, and the conventional distribution form of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from occurring.

<Modification 117>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the protective cover member 140 was attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached to the left side plate 11c, the upper plate 11a, or the lower plate 11b in a cantilevered manner. In this case as well, it is preferable to attach the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 from the inner wall surface of each of the plates 11a to 11c.

<Modification 118>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached so that the attachment surface 151 of the cover attachment portion 150 is in contact with the inner wall surface of the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. Alternatively, the mounting surface 151 may be attached to the outer wall surface of the right side plate 11d, or the cover attachment portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 may be fitted (inserted) into the inside of the right side plate 11d. .

<Modification 119>
In the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is configured to cover the setting key 501 and sealing unit 100c of the main controller 110, and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may cover all of the control devices 110, 111, or may cover other control devices (for example, It may be configured to cover part or all of the launch control device 112 and power supply device 115). By covering many control devices with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration.

<Modification 120>
In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that settings can be changed or confirmed only in a situation where the inner frame 12 is open to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. However, in other situations (for example, when the inner frame 12 is not open, or when the front frame 14 is also open even if the inner frame 12 is open), settings cannot be changed or confirmed. It was composed. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed or confirmed even if the inner frame 12 is not open but the front frame 14 is open.

<Modification 121>
In each of the embodiments described above, the RAM erase switch 122 is mounted on the power supply device 115. On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 may be configured to be installed in the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111.

<Modification 122>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper surface of the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 was configured to abut the upper side protrusion and the lower side of the protective cover member 140. On the other hand, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is configured to engage with the upper protrusion and lower surface of the protective cover member 140, and the engagement is released when the cylinder lock 20 is operated. You may.

<Modification 123>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper surface of the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 was configured to abut the upper side protrusion and the lower side of the protective cover member 140. On the other hand, the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 may be configured to abut or engage with the outermost surface of the main control device 110 or the dispensing control device 111.

<Modification 124>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover side protrusion 172 is formed into a wall shape surrounding the setting key 501 in the setting section 100d. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be formed of a protrusion that fits into the entire setting portion 100d.

<Modification 125>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper surface of the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 was configured to abut the upper side protrusion and the lower side of the protective cover member 140. On the other hand, the back pack 92 is extended to the portion of the payout control device 111, and the payout control device 111 is mounted on the back side of the back pack 92. A part of the extended back pack 92 may be located in the space between the inner frame 12 and the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, even if an attempt is made to open the back pack 92 to the back side of the Pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is locked, the protective cover member 140 interferes with the opening. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is locked, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the audio lamp control device 113 and the like disposed inside the pachinko machine 10 of the back pack 92.

<Modification 126>
In the ninth to twelfth embodiments described above, the protective cover member 140 was composed of one member. On the other hand, two or more protective cover members may be attached to the outer frame 11 to cover part or all of the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 127>
In each of the embodiments described above, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed using the setting key 501. On the other hand, by using the setting key 501, you can change the number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won in one winning hole (for example, change from 3 balls to 5 balls), or drive a movable accessory that assists in winning a prize in the winning hole. The time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or the components that affect the flow of the ball (for example, the stage or croon on which the ball can roll). Settings related to the degree of advantage for the player can be changed in multiple stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), the tilt mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), etc. may be configured.

<Modification 128>
In each of the embodiments described above, the keyhole of the setting key 501 was configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the horizontal direction (leftward or rightward direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You can.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. Commands may also be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Alternatively, the display control device may be connected to the audio lamp control device, and the display control device may be configured to transmit commands for instructing output of each audio and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By incorporating these into one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the variation start flag is always set to ON when a stop type command is received, but when a variation pattern command is received When a stop type command is received after a change occurs, the fluctuation start flag may be set to on. Thereby, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation performance in a case where a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Further, the variation start flag may be set to on at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. In this case, in the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, based on the fact that the fluctuation start flag is turned on, a display is displayed that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by the fluctuation pattern command. Alternatively, a variation pattern command may be generated and sent to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 can cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable production based on this display variation pattern command without waiting for the audio lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can be done. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when the stop type command is received, It may also be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variable performance that is caused to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 236 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process ends. However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that one frame of images is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is sent every time one frame of images is displayed. By sending , you can keep the time interval accurate without having to clock it.

In the embodiment described above, the demonstration effect may be one in which a third symbol consisting of a main symbol to which numbers "0" to "9" are not attached is stopped and displayed. Further, a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Furthermore, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third symbol or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the embodiment described above, the continuous notice performance may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. A continuous notice performance may be executed by displaying a fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable performance executed on the display device 81. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, a continuous preview performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with accessories that operate according to various performances, and operating the accessories in a predetermined manner together with the variable performances. Furthermore, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous notice performance may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous preview performance may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or accessories are operated in a predetermined manner. The player can be given a sense of anticipation of a jackpot by playing the game, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting up or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually continues playing the game by watching the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the symbols are displayed by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , a continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, and a different effect than usual is performed for the player. This can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice performances can be easily performed continuously by simple controls such as displaying symbols on the fourth symbol display device, operating accessories, outputting audio from the audio output device 226, or lighting/blinking the illumination sections 29 to 33. A preview performance can be performed.

Furthermore, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that when starting a winning prize, By having the main control device 110 perform the correctness judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the lottery process. When performing a preview effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required of the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, the display of symbols for continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbols for continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined manner, and the sound from the audio output device 226. A continuous preview performance may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and controlling each in conjunction with each other. Thereby, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous preview effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , or a combination thereof), we have prepared multiple continuous preview performance modes that are selected according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous preview performance (15R definite strange jackpot, 2R definite strange jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, miss). Good too.

Furthermore, when a continuous notice performance is performed, an image for a continuous notice performance different from the fluctuating performance may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the continuous notice performance may be displayed when the fluctuating performance ends. This may be done by displaying a so-called "chance eye" which is a combination of predetermined symbols as the displayed stop symbols. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines that a continuous notice command has been received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and , other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to OFF. In the command judgment process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed among other command processes, so the chance is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Set as a pattern. Therefore, the chance number can be displayed as confirmed when the variation is stopped. In the third symbol display device 81, if chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variable performance, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she will finally get a jackpot.

In the embodiment described above, when there is a winning (starting prize) to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the main control device 110 adds "1" to the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control device 113. We have explained the case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer due to the starting prize is included as is and sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball count command to be notified to the pending ball count command. The types of counters included in the pitch count command may be part of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. In addition, when the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the values of each of these counters is included in the held ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a command other than the held pitch count command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Another command may be a dedicated command that notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in conjunction with a start-up winning, or a command that sends other information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command by voice. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may include the values of each counter acquired in conjunction with the winning start. As another command, when notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter to be notified is specified in the fluctuating performance corresponding to which number of holds. Information indicating whether this is the case may also be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 stores each of the commands included in the command in one of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to the number of suspensions, based on the information regarding the number of suspensions included in the command. Counter values can be stored.

In the embodiment described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for the number of held pitches, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the command for the number of held pitches may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending pitches (or a command in which the value of each counter is indicated) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss Determine part or all of the outlier type, etc. in the case of , and use these determination results in place of the value of each counter indicated by the command, or in combination with part or all of the value of the counter, It may also be stored in the RAM 223.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of reserved balls is counted by the main controller 110 using one reserved ball counter 203a, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has entered. The case of counting was explained. On the other hand, the retained ball number counter for the first starting port corresponding to the first starting port 64a, the held ball number counter for the second starting port corresponding to the second starting port 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The number of balls reserved due to starting winnings to the first starting port 64a and the number of balls pending starting winnings to the second starting port 64b may be separately counted.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the maximum number of balls that can be held is set to "4" regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won. The maximum number of reserved balls that can be held due to starting winnings to the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held due to starting winnings to the second starting port 64b are determined and managed separately. Good too. For example, the maximum number of balls that can be held in response to a winning start to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the maximum number of balls that can be held in response to a starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "4". Assuming that, at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls held due to a winning start to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the number of held balls held due to a starting winning to the second starting port 64b. In the situation where is "2", even if there is a starting prize in the first starting hole 64a, that starting prize will not be suspended, but if there is a starting prize in the second starting hole 64b, it will be suspended. You can. This allows the player to recognize the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b as separate entities, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, for example, a variable performance based on a winning start at the second starting port 64b may be performed with priority over a variable performance based on a winning start at the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, a variable performance based on a winning start at the first starting port 64a may be performed with priority over a variable performance based on a winning start at the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the starting opening where the variable performance is performed with priority.

In the above embodiment, a case will be explained in which two starting ports, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b, are provided on the game board 13 as starting ports for starting a jackpot lottery when a ball enters. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or three or more. In addition, when there are two or more starting holes, a corresponding number of held balls counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting hole, and for each starting hole, the number of held balls held as a result of winning in the corresponding starting hole is displayed. The number may be counted. Further, for each starting port, the maximum number of balls that can be held in response to a winning start to the corresponding starting port may be set.

In addition, when there are two or more starting holes, the number of held balls command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 to notify that the ball is held due to winning in the starting hole includes the following: It may also include information indicating whether the reservation was made due to winning in the starting slot. Furthermore, the variation pattern command that the main control device 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting the variation may also include information indicating which starting opening the variation effect was held on hold for. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a held ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a held ball number command is received, a held ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the held ball number command is set. When the number of held balls is set to , and a variable pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting hole by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the starting hole indicated in the variable pattern command by 1.

In addition, when multiple starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with winning (start winning) at each starting hole may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired in association with the starting winning may include information indicating which starting hole the counter value was acquired in association with the starting winning. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command sent by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when starting the fluctuation may also include information indicating which starting hole the fluctuation performance is associated with. Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area may be prepared for each starting hole, and each counter value sent from the main control device 110 in association with the starting winning at the corresponding starting hole may be stored in the corresponding look-ahead information storage area. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the starting hole in which the start winning that triggered the execution of the fluctuation performance indicated by the fluctuation pattern command was detected. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the variable performance on hold for each start port can also be stored in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, in cases where the probability of a jackpot, the allocation probability of the jackpot type, the allocation probability of the miss type, etc. differ depending on the start port where the start is won, the look-ahead process can correctly determine whether or not each variable performance will be a jackpot, the jackpot type if a jackpot, and the miss type if a miss, based on which start port the start is won. Also, in cases where a variable performance based on a start port winning is performed in priority to a variable performance based on a start port winning in another start port, the look-ahead process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the variable performance based on a start port winning in one, and the number of pending variable performances that will be a jackpot in the near future can be correctly determined.

In addition, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the audio lamp control device 113 provides a continuous notice when receiving the value of each counter acquired based on the starting prize to the starting port from the main control device 110 by command. When it is decided to start the performance, a continuous preview performance may be executed over all the variable performances (pending balls) that are on hold at that time, regardless of the starting opening where the starting prize has been won. In addition, in a pachinko machine that has multiple starting holes and performs a variable effect for a winning in one starting hole with priority over a variable effect for winning in any other starting hole, The start of the continuous notice performance may be determined only from the pre-read result of the counter value obtained in response to winnings in the starting opening where the variable performance is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of continuous notice performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to winning in the starting slot with low priority, and the continuous notice performance is not started for this variable performance. If a continuous preview performance is started for a fluctuating performance that corresponds to a prize winning in a starting slot with a low priority, and if the fluctuating performance is continuously suspended in a starting slot with a high priority, the continuous preview performance will take a long time to finish. There is a possibility that a situation may arise where this is not possible. On the other hand, in this modified example, it is not determined whether or not the execution of a continuous preview performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to winning in a starting slot with low priority, and the continuous preview performance is not determined for this variable performance. Since the process is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 26). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG.
(see S305 in FIG. 13), the value (N) of the number of reserved pitches counter 203a of the main controller 110 is subtracted in accordance with the setting of the fluctuation pattern command by the fluctuation start process (S307) (see S305 in FIG. 13). A held pitch count command is set to be sent from the control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and the held pitch number command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio ramp control device 113 together with the transmission of the fluctuation pattern command. It may also be transmitted. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of held balls held in the main control device 110. Note that in this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the reserved pitch number counter 203a after subtraction may be included in the variation pattern command. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 may extract the number of held balls (N) included in the variable pattern command when receiving the variable pattern command, and set it to the number of held balls stored in the RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, the winning balls to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passing through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is four times. The number of times is not limited to three, or may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Furthermore, for winnings in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of balls to be held may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of balls to be held in each starting port is "4". ” may be any number other than ”. Further, the maximum number of balls held at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, is displayed numerically or in four divided areas in a part of the third symbol display device 81. The display may be made in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) for the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light-emitting member allows the number of reserved balls to be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). It may be configured to notify the number.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but also in the horizontal direction. The display may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when executing a variation effect, a case has been described in which a high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to such an extent that the player cannot see them; however, instead of displaying this high-speed variation, All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they are not visible, or each of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine from the above embodiment. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

In a slot machine, the accessory ratio is the ratio of the number of game media paid out as a bonus (accessory object) to the total number of gaming media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period. Therefore, the number of gaming media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and the number of game media paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main controller, The control device that executes the function determines the number of winning combinations (symbols aligned on the active line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations during the bonus game period, and the number of winning combinations established during the AT period. The number of winning combinations may be counted to manage the ratio of winning combinations and the ratio of consecutive winning combinations.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbol definitively, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as gaming value in a gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown. In addition, each of the various inventive concepts shown below adds part or more of the configuration of other inventive concepts to the inventive concept, or adds some or more of the configurations of other inventive concepts. The concept of the invention may be modified by exchanging parts or the like.

(Assignment 1)
Gaming machines shown below A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, and O1 were made to solve the following problems.

That is, conventionally, when a game medium is ejected by a firing means into a game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided, and the game medium enters any of the winning holes, a predetermined amount is set for the winning hole. There is a gaming machine that pays out a number of gaming media to a player. Furthermore, some winning openings are provided with accessories, and the operation of the accessories influences the winning of game media (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

Now, some fraudsters fraudulently operate the prize-winning hole in which the prize-winning hole is set up, or induce gaming media to enter the prize-winning hole. There are people who try to increase the number of prizes won in the given prize openings. However, measures to detect such fraudulent acts are insufficient.

The present technical idea has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably detect fraudulent activities.

(Means and effects 1)
<Group A>
a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game;
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for causing
A gaming machine A1 comprising: output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine A1, the game medium is ejected by the ejection means to a game area where a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on a game are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Ru. The output means outputs a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means. As a result, based on the output signal, the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out due to winnings in the winning opening, due to the first winning opening (i.e., the activation of the accessory) It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the role.

In gaming machine A1,
If the entered prize detection means detects that the game medium ejected by the entered prize detection means and the ejected means has entered any of the winning slots, payment is made based on the winning slot in which the gaming medium has entered the winning slot. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be dispensed and notifying the payout means to the payout means, and main control means for performing main control of the game,
A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the winning detecting means detects that the gaming medium ejected by the winning detecting means and the firing means enters any winning opening, the payout is made based on the winning opening in which the gaming medium has won. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means, and the main control means that performs the main control of the game; a storage means for cumulatively storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the winning slot; a storage control means for cumulatively storing the information in the storage means; Output means for outputting at least a signal based on information accumulated and stored in the storage means is provided. As a result, the winning detecting means detects a winning in the winning opening, the number of gaming media paid out is set based on the detection, and the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means is adjusted based on the set number of paying out. The storage of information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning slot, and the output of signals based on the information stored in the storage means are all controlled by the main control. It can be done within the means. Therefore, even if a fraudster outputs fraudulent information from the output means and tries to prevent the discovery of fraudulent acts based on the role ratio, since the above configuration is completed in the main control means, the fraudulent information will not be detected. It is difficult to input. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the detection of fraudulent acts based on the accessory ratio from being obstructed due to the output of fraudulent information by a fraudster.

In gaming machine A2,
The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the main control means is housed in a board box in which a box space and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the main control means is housed in a board box in which the box space and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner, an unauthorized person can transmit fraudulent information to the output means. Even if an attempt is made to prevent the discovery of fraudulent acts based on the role material ratio by outputting the following information, it will be difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of fraudulent acts based on the accessory ratio from being hindered due to the output of fraudulent information by a fraudulent person.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A3,
External device connection means connectable to an external device;
comprising external device connection detection means for detecting that the external device is connected to the external device connection means;
The output means, triggered by the connection of the external device being detected by the external device connection detection means, outputs information to the external device based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by outputting a signal.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connecting means, it is detected by the external device connecting means, and upon this detection, a signal is sent to the external device based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. is output by the output means. As a result, by simply connecting the external device to the external device connection means of the gaming machine, payouts will be made to the external device based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winnings in the first winning slot. Since the gaming machine outputs a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media played, there is an effect that fraud based on the ratio of accessory items can be quickly and easily detected.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means includes at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. is output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal outputted from the output means does not have information regarding the number of gaming media that will be paid out when there is a prize for each winning slot in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine There is an effect that the ratio of the accessory can be easily analyzed based on the signal output from the.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A5,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, controls the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means. A game characterized in that information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first prize opening to the number of game media paid out by the storage means is stored. Machine A6.

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to avoid missing out on winnings from the winning openings and to reflect this in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected and the winnings are placed in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done.

In gaming machine A6,
A gaming machine A7, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored cumulatively in the storage means and a signal based on information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information regarding the latest prize winnings in the winning openings stored in the second storage means, which are not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output, so information including the latest prize winning status can be used to detect fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to determine whether it is present or not.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7,
The first winning hole includes a second winning hole having an accessory that continuously operates based on the game,
The storage control means stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Accumulate and store in a storage means,
The output means is configured to calculate the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening relative to the number of game media paid out by the payout means cumulatively stored in the storage means. information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the second winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means; A gaming machine A8 characterized by outputting the following.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first winning hole provided in the gaming area includes the second winning hole having the accessory that operates continuously based on the game, and the second winning hole has a role that operates continuously based on the game. , information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the second winning opening is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. and information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means, cumulatively stored in the storage means; , and information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the second winning hole to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. As a result, those who receive the signal output from the output means can determine the ratio of the number of game media paid out due to winnings to the winning openings due to the first winning opening (i.e., the activation of the accessory). It is possible to analyze not only the accessory ratio that is, but also the continuous accessory ratio that is the ratio of the second prize opening (i.e., the operation of the accessory when the accessory operates continuously), and the ratio of the accessory and This has the effect that fraud can be detected more accurately based on the continuous role ratio.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8,
If the entered prize detection means detects that the game medium ejected by the entered prize detection means and the ejected means has entered any of the winning slots, payment is made based on the winning slot in which the gaming medium has entered the winning slot. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be dispensed and notifying the payout means to the payout means, and main control means for performing main control of the game,
The main control means has a calculation means for performing calculations for main control of the game,
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that at least the entered prize detection means, the payout number setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by execution of calculations by the calculation means.

According to gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the winning detecting means detects that the gaming medium ejected by the winning detecting means and the firing means enters any winning opening, the payout is made based on the winning opening in which the gaming medium has won. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means, and the main control means for performing main control of the game includes a calculation unit for performing calculations for performing the main control of the game. Means are provided. At least, the payout is made based on the winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means, which is cumulatively stored in the winning detecting means, the payout number setting means, and the storage means. The generation of information related to the ratio of the number of game media played and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by execution of calculation by the calculation means. As a result, the winning detecting means detects winnings in the winning opening, the number of gaming media paid out is set based on the detection, and the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means is adjusted based on the set number of paying out. Storing information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in one winning opening into the storage means by the storage control means, and outputting a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, All can be performed by the arithmetic unit of the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudster attempts to prevent the discovery of fraud based on the accessory ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, it will be difficult to input the fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the discovery of fraudulent acts based on the accessory ratio due to the output of fraudulent information by a fraudster.

<Group B>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A8,
Equipped with main control means for main control of the game,
The main control means includes a calculation means for performing calculations for performing main control of the game,
If the entered prize detection means detects that the game medium ejected by the entered prize detection means and the ejected means has entered any of the winning slots, payment is made based on the winning slot in which the gaming medium has entered the winning slot. The payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be dispensed and notifying the payout means is realized by the execution of calculation by the calculation means,
A game machine B1 characterized in that the storage control means and the output means are provided in a microchip separate from the presentation means.

According to gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the main control means that performs the main control of the game is provided with calculation means that executes calculations for performing the control, and the winning detection means and the game medium ejected by the ejection means are either a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning hole in which the game medium has won, and notifying the payout means when the winning detection means detects that the game medium has entered a winning hole; , is realized by the execution of the calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, storage control that causes the storage means to accumulate and store information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the first prize opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided in a microchip separate from the calculation means. As a result, by simply installing another microchip, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be adjusted to the first winning slot without significantly rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means. This has the advantage that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings. In addition, the calculation means is configured to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in the game, and it is possible to use most of the processing power of the calculation means for the main control of the game.

In gaming machine B1,
The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the microchip is provided in the main control means.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the microchip provided with the storage control means, the output means, and the presentation means is provided in the main control means. Thereby, based on the set number of payouts, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means The storage of the information in the storage means and the output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means are performed within the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudster attempts to prevent the detection of fraud based on the role ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, the above configuration is completed in the main control means, so the fraud cannot be prevented. It is difficult to enter information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the detection of fraudulent acts based on the accessory ratio from being obstructed due to the output of fraudulent information by a fraudster.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
A game machine B3 characterized in that the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a board box in which a box space and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the main control means and the microchip are housed in a board box in which the box cover and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner. Even if an attempt is made to prevent the discovery of fraudulent acts based on the role ratio by outputting fraudulent information, it will be difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent detection of fraudulent acts based on the accessory ratio from being obstructed due to the output of fraudulent information by a fraudster.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The main control means is
Each winning hole includes a payout information storage means for storing information regarding the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole;
The calculation means executes a start-up process when the main control means is powered on,
The start-up process includes, based on the memory of the payout information storage means, information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole, for each winning hole, based on the memory of the payout information storage means. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it includes processing for transmitting data to the microchip.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, information regarding the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole is stored in the payout information storage means. In the calculation means, a start-up process is executed when the power is turned on to the main control means, and in the start-up process, the corresponding winning hole is set for each winning hole based on the memory of the payout information storage means. Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning is transmitted to the microchip. As a result, even if the microchip does not have to store in advance information indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out in response to winnings from each winning slot, which differs depending on the model of the gaming machine, the microchip can control the main control when the power is turned on. Based on the information transmitted from the means, calculate the accessory ratio, or output a signal based on the information, and calculate the accessory ratio for the thing receiving the signal output from the output means. This has the effect of allowing calculations to be made.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
A game machine B5 characterized in that the microchip is provided with a second calculation means for performing calculations for realizing the storage control means and the output means.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the microchip is provided with a second calculating means, which calculates the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. The storage control means for cumulatively storing related information in the storage means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means are realized by the calculations of the second calculation means. . This has the effect that by changing the calculation command (program) of the second presentation means, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the functions and specifications of the storage control means, output means, etc.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
A gaming machine B6, wherein the microchip realizes the storage control means and the output means using wired logic.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the microchip stores information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means, by the wired logic. A storage control means for storing the information cumulatively in the storage means, and an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means are realized. As a result, processing such as storing or outputting information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means to the storage means This has the advantage that it can be performed at high speed.

<Group C>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6,
A gaming machine C1, wherein the storage means is configured to be able to retain stored information even when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6, the following effects are produced. That is, the information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out unit, which is stored in the storage means, is as follows: It is retained even when the power is turned off. As a result, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the game media paid out based on the winnings in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means over a long period of time. Information related to the ratio of numbers can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, those who receive the signal outputted from the output means can analyze the ratio of accessories of the gaming machine over a long period of time, so there is an effect that past fraudulent activities can also be discovered.

In the gaming machine C1,
a second storage means that cannot hold information while the power supply is cut off;
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that, when the judgment means determines that the specified trigger has occurred, the memory control means stores in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a winning entry into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, based on information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second memory means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The second storage means cannot hold information while the power is turned off. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to prevent winnings from being missed from the winning openings and to reflect them in the information stored in the second storage means. . Then, each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all the winnings are reflected and the winnings are placed in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done. In addition, storage means are configured to be able to retain stored information even when the power is turned off, and generally require a large amount of power to write, take a long time to write, and are not durable. Although there may be a limit on the number of times of writing from the viewpoint of performance, by configuring as described above, the number of times of writing to the storage means can be reduced, and the above-mentioned problem of the storage means can be suppressed from becoming apparent.

In gaming machine C2,
A gaming machine C3, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored cumulatively in the storage means and a signal based on information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information regarding the latest prize winnings in the winning openings stored in the second storage means, which are not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output, so information including the latest prize winning status can be used to detect fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to determine whether it is present or not.

<Group D>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
The storage control means stores the above information as information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that information indicating winnings detected by winning detecting means is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage control means stores information in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. , information indicating winning holes in which winnings have been detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored. A signal based on this information is then output. The person who receives the signal output from the output means determines the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means and the number of winnings in the first winning hole based on the information indicating the winning hole where the winning was detected. The number of game media paid out can be calculated, and the ratio of accessories can be analyzed from these numbers. If a suspicious change is recognized in the ratio of accessories, the cause can be deeply investigated based on information indicating the winning opening where a winning was detected. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of accessories.

In the gaming machine D1,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means causes the payout means to pay out information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media dispensed is stored in the storage means in an accumulated manner. A gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determining means that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the information regarding winnings detected by the winning detecting means stored in the second storage means is calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to prevent winnings from being missed from the winning openings and to reflect them in the information stored in the second storage means. . Then, each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, the information stored in the second storage means that reflects all the winnings is based on the winnings in the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done.

In gaming machine D2,
A gaming machine D3, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored cumulatively in the storage means and a signal based on information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information related to the latest prize winnings in the winning openings stored in the second storage means, which are not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output, so information including the latest prize winning status can be used to detect fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to determine whether it is present or not.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means includes at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. is output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal output from the output means does not have information regarding the number of gaming media that will be paid out when there is a prize for each winning slot in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine This has the effect of being able to calculate and analyze the ratio of prizes from the information regarding winnings output from the system.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
Based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means, the number of game media paid out based on the winnings in the first winning opening is calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Equipped with a ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of numbers,
A gaming machine D5, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means is determined. , calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means is outputted by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This eliminates the need for those who receive the signal output by the output means to calculate the ratio (accessory ratio), which has the effect of facilitating analysis of fraudulent acts. In addition, if an attempt is made to calculate the ratio of accessories after receiving the signal output by the output means, if a prize is won in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening that has been set fraudulently or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D5, since the accessory ratio is calculated and outputted by the ratio calculation means, there is an effect that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated accurately.

In the gaming machine D5,
The output means outputs, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means. A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it outputs a signal indicating a signal.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the signal indicating the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detecting means, cumulatively stored in the storage means, and the first signal with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means calculated by the ratio calculating means. A signal indicating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the winning opening is outputted by the output means. With this, if there is something suspicious in the ratio (accessory ratio) output from the output means, the cause can be investigated from the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detecting means, which is also output. It has the effect of being able to.

<Group E>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
When it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the first Ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the winning opening,
The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the storage control means causes the storage means to accumulate and store information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determining means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of winnings in the first prize opening is determined based on the information stored in the second storage means, based on the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on this is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Information indicating this calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, this calculated ratio (accessory ratio) is output, so those who receive the signal output by the output means no longer need to calculate the ratio (accessory ratio), and can analyze fraudulent acts. This has the effect of making it easier. In addition, if an attempt is made to calculate the accessory ratio by receiving a signal output from an output means, or if a winning is made to the corresponding winning opening for each winning opening that has been set fraudulently or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio will be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, but since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio can be calculated accurately. This has the effect of being able to calculate ratios. Further, since the information indicating the ratio of the accessory is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E1,
A gaming machine E2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored cumulatively in the storage means and a signal based on information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information related to the latest prize winnings in the winning openings stored in the second storage means, which are not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output, so information including the latest prize winning status can be used to detect fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to determine whether it is present or not. In addition, while the information stored in the storage means is the ratio of accessories, the information stored in the second storage means is information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means, so the information regarding the winnings is used. This has the effect of allowing deeper analysis of the causes of situations suspected of fraudulent activity.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means includes at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. is output by As a result, if there is a situation where fraudulent activity is suspected by analyzing the ratio of accessories, the number of gaming media that will be paid out by the payout means will be used as a reference for each winning opening when there is a winning in the corresponding winning opening. This has the effect of allowing you to find out the cause of the situation.

<Group F>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the entered prize detection means, the number of gaming media that have entered each winning slot from the time a predetermined opportunity comes to pass until the next predetermined opportunity comes is counted for each winning slot, and the number is counted for each winning slot. a second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of won game media in the second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means stores the information stored in the second storage means in relation to the number of game media paid out by the payout means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred. , a gaming machine F1 characterized in that information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of gaming media that have entered each winning opening from the time a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs is counted for each winning opening by the second storage control means. Information indicating the number of winning gaming media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When the determining means determines that a predetermined opportunity has been reached, the information indicating the winning game media stored in the second storage means and counted for each winning opening is paid out by the paying out means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning hole to the number of game media played is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first of all, the winnings detected by the winning detecting means are counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening, so that the winnings in the winning openings are not missed, and the information stored in the second storage means is It can be reflected. Each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, information indicating the number of winning gaming media for each winning opening, which is stored in the second storage means and reflecting all winnings, is displayed as the gaming media paid out by the paying out means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of winnings can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done. In addition, since the storage means stores the total number of gaming media for each winning opening after a predetermined opportunity passes until the next predetermined opportunity passes, the storage capacity required for the storage means is reduced. It has the effect of suppressing the increase. Furthermore, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have entered each winning slot from the time a predetermined opportunity occurs to the time the next predetermined opportunity occurs. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in storage capacity.

In gaming machine F1,
The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored cumulatively in the storage means and a signal based on information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning gaming media for each winning opening, including winnings in the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. This has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity, including the latest winning status.

In gaming machine F1 or F2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means includes at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. is output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal output from the output means does not have information regarding the number of gaming media that will be paid out when there is a prize for each winning slot in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine This has the effect of being able to calculate and analyze the ratio of prizes from the information regarding winnings output from the system.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F3,
Based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means, the number of game media paid out based on the winnings in the first winning opening is calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Equipped with a ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of numbers,
The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means is determined. , calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means is outputted by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This eliminates the need for those who receive the signal output from the output means to calculate the ratio (accessory ratio), thereby facilitating the analysis of fraudulent acts. In addition, if the person who receives the signal output from the output means attempts to calculate the ratio of accessories, or if a prize is won in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole that has been set fraudulently or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since the accessory ratio is calculated and outputted by the ratio calculation means, there is an effect that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated accurately.

In gaming machine F4,
The output means outputs, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means. A gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it outputs a signal indicating a signal.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the information cumulatively stored in the storage means includes a signal indicating the number of game media that have entered each winning hole from the time a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs. , a signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, which is calculated by the ratio calculation means; is output by As a result, if there is a suspicious point in the ratio (accessory ratio) outputted from the output means, it is also output from the time when a predetermined opportunity has passed until the next predetermined opportunity has passed. , there is an effect that the cause can be found from the number of game media for each winning hole that has won a prize in each winning hole.

<G group>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the entered prize detection means, the number of gaming media that have entered each winning slot from the time a predetermined opportunity comes to pass until the next predetermined opportunity comes is counted for each winning slot, and the number is counted for each winning slot. a second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of won game media in the second storage means;
a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
When it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the first Ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the winning opening,
A gaming machine G1, wherein the storage control means causes the storage means to accumulate and store information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of gaming media that have entered each winning opening from the time a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs is counted for each winning opening by the second storage control means. Information indicating the number of winning gaming media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When the determining means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of winnings in the first prize opening is determined based on the information stored in the second storage means, with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on this is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Information indicating this calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, this calculated ratio (accessory ratio) is output, so those who receive the signal output by the output means no longer need to calculate the ratio (accessory ratio), and can analyze fraudulent acts. This has the effect of making it easier. In addition, if the person who receives the signal output from the output means attempts to calculate the ratio of accessories, or if a prize is won in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole that has been set fraudulently or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio will be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, but since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio can be calculated accurately. This has the effect of being able to calculate the ratio. Further, since the information indicating the ratio of the accessory is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed. Furthermore, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have entered each winning slot from the time a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in storage capacity.

In gaming machine G1,
A gaming machine G2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored cumulatively in the storage means and a signal based on information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning gaming media for each winning opening, including winnings in the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. This has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity, including the latest winning status. In addition, while the information stored in the storage means is the prize ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is for each winning opening after a predetermined opportunity arrives and before the next predetermined opportunity arrives. Since this information indicates the number of winning game media, the use of this information has the effect of allowing deeper analysis of the cause of a situation where fraudulent activity is suspected.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means includes at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. is output by As a result, those who receive the signal output from the output means can analyze the ratio of accessories and if there is a situation where fraudulent activity is suspected, if there is a win in the corresponding winning hole in each winning hole. This has the effect that the cause of the situation can be found by referring to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

<Group H>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3,
a second storage control means that causes a second storage means to store information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means from the time a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, controls the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means. A game characterized in that information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first prize opening to the number of game media paid out by the storage means is stored. Machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. . That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means from the time a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to avoid missing out on winnings from the winning openings and to reflect this in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected and the winnings are placed in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done. In addition, since the second storage means stores only information related to winnings detected by the winning detection means after a predetermined opportunity occurs and until the next predetermined opportunity occurs, the storage capacity of the second storage means can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to keep it small.

In the gaming machine H1,
A gaming machine H2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored cumulatively in the storage means and a signal based on information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information related to the latest prize winnings in the winning openings stored in the second storage means, which are not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output, so information including the latest prize winning status can be used to detect fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to determine whether it is present or not.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the second storage means is configured to be able to retain stored information even when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information about winnings stored in the second storage means and detected by the winning detecting means after a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs is retained even when the power is turned off. As a result, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of winning information stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, and to improve the reliability of the output signal. It has the effect of increasing

<Group I>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
A power-off detection means for detecting that the power is cut off,
The storage control means stores information in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has occurred and when the power cutoff detection means detects that the power is turned off. The game media paid out based on the winnings in the first winning opening relative to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that information relating to the ratio of numbers is stored in a storage means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, the following It has the effect of That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Furthermore, even if the power cutoff detection means detects that the power is turned off, the payout means will pay out the winnings based on the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detecting means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media won is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to avoid missing out on winnings from the winning openings and to reflect this in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, all winnings are reflected and paid out every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, and even if the power is cut off before the predetermined opportunity occurs. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning hole to the number of gaming media paid out by the storage means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the winning information stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the memory in the storage means, and the game media paid out by the payout means can be prevented from being lost. This has the effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of winnings.

In the gaming machine I1,
Equipped with a power supply means capable of supplying power for at least a predetermined period even after the power is cut off,
A gaming machine I2, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to at least the storage control means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the storage control means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period even after the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power cutoff detection means detects that the power is turned off, the storage control means uses the electric power to store information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. To surely store information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in a first winning hole to the number of gaming media paid out by a paying out means in a storage means based on the above information. It has the effect of being able to.

In gaming machine I2,
The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the power supply means supplies the power to the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the power supply means supplies power to not only the storage control means but also the second storage means for at least a predetermined period even after the power is turned off. From this, before the situation stored in the second storage means is erased, the winnings are reliably paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. There is an effect that information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media that have been won can be stored in the storage means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The second storage means is configured to be able to retain stored information even when the power is turned off,
The storage control means stores the winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means when power is supplied and when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred. storage means for storing information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. A game machine I4 is characterized in that the game machine I4 stores data in the game machine I4.

According to gaming machine I4, the effects produced by any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3 In addition, it has the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even when the power is turned off. Then, when power is supplied and when it is determined by the determination means that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the payout means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the storage control means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. . As a result, by first storing the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to avoid missing out on winnings from the winning openings and to reflect this in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means, reflecting all winnings, each time power is supplied and every time a predetermined opportunity occurs. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the winnings in the first winning opening can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the winning information stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the memory in the storage means is surely reflected in the information stored in the storage means after power is supplied. This makes it possible to prevent the information stored in the second storage means from being lost. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the first winning hole to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect. Furthermore, if the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means when it is detected that the power is cut off, the power is If the power supply is cut off, there is a possibility that information cannot be stored in the storage means reflecting all the information stored in the second storage means, or that strange information may be stored in the storage means. is supplied, the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, which has the effect of suppressing the occurrence of such problems.

<Group J>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, controls the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means. information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes the fact that the number of game media ejected into the gaming area reaches a predetermined number.

According to gaming machine J1, the effects produced by any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4. In addition, it has the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to prevent winnings from being missed from the winning openings and to reflect them in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected and the winnings are placed in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done. Furthermore, the predetermined trigger includes the fact that the number of game media fired into the gaming area reaches a predetermined number, so the number of game media paid out by the payout means when the predetermined game media are fired is It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of winnings (accessories ratio). Therefore, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio at the stage when many game media are won in various winning slots and paid out, so it is possible to calculate the average accessory ratio. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate short-term fluctuations in the ratio of accessories during a normal game, and therefore it is possible to more easily analyze fraudulent acts by those who have received the signal output by the output means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, controls the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means. information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the current time has reached a predetermined time.

According to gaming machine J2, any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 In addition to the following effects: That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to avoid missing out on winnings from the winning openings and to reflect this in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected and the winnings are placed in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done. In addition, since the predetermined trigger includes the fact that the current time has reached the predetermined time, even in a situation where no game is played, the payout is reliably made by the payout means when the predetermined time arrives. It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media (accessories ratio). Therefore, this reliably calculated auxiliary object ratio has the effect that the receiver of the signal output from the output means can be reliably analyzed to see if there is any fraudulent activity.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, controls the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means. information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the cumulative playing time has reached a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J3, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2 In addition to the effects produced by this, the following effects are produced. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to avoid missing out on winnings from the winning openings and to reflect this in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected and the winnings are placed in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done. Further, the predetermined trigger includes the fact that the cumulative time during which the game was played has reached the predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means (accessory object ratio) is essentially the It is calculated after conducting a test firing test for 10 hours. Information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means, when the gaming time reaches a predetermined time. By storing it in the storage means as , it is possible to calculate the ratio of accessories close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that the signal outputted from the output means can be analyzed using an accessory ratio close to the original definition.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, controls the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means. information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the cumulative time during which power has been supplied has reached a second predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J4, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3 In addition to the effects produced by this, the following effects are produced.

That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to avoid missing out on winnings from the winning openings and to reflect this in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected and the winnings are placed in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done. In addition, the predetermined trigger includes the fact that the cumulative time when power is supplied reaches the second predetermined time, so even in a situation where there is not much gaming, the time when power is supplied is the second predetermined time. 2, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means (accessory ratio ) can be calculated. Therefore, this reliably calculated auxiliary object ratio has the effect that the receiver of the signal output from the output means can be reliably analyzed to see if there is any fraudulent activity.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4,
Equipped with main control means for main control of the game,
The main control means includes a calculation means for performing calculations for performing main control of the game,
If the entered prize detection means detects that the game medium ejected by the entered prize detection means and the ejected means has entered any of the winning slots, payment is made based on the winning slot in which the gaming medium has entered the winning slot. The payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be dispensed and notifying the payout means is realized by the execution of calculation by the calculation means,
The storage control means and the output means are provided in a microchip separate from the production means,
The microchip is
a second storage control means for storing information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detecting means in a second storage means;
comprising a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has arrived;
The storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, controls the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the entered prize detection means stored in the second storage means. information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the storage means,
The main control means is
comprising a predetermined trigger information storage means for storing information indicating the predetermined trigger;
The calculation means executes a start-up process when the main control means is powered on,
A gaming machine J5, wherein the start-up processing includes processing for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

According to the gaming machine J5, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4 In addition to the effects produced by this, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control means that performs the main control of the game is provided with calculation means that executes calculations for performing the control, and the winning detection means and the game medium ejected by the ejection means are either a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning hole in which the game medium has won, and notifying the payout means when the winning detection means detects that the game medium has entered a winning hole; , is realized by the execution of the calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, storage control that causes the storage means to accumulate and store information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to the first prize opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided in a microchip separate from the calculation means. As a result, by simply installing another microchip, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be adjusted to the first winning slot without significantly rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means. This has the advantage that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings.

In addition, the calculation means is configured to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in the game, and it is possible to use most of the processing power of the calculation means for the main control of the game. Further, in the microchip, the second storage control means temporarily stores information regarding winnings detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on information regarding winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to avoid missing out on winnings from the winning openings and to reflect this in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected and the winnings are placed in the first winning slot for the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means. There is an effect that it can be done.

On the other hand, in the main control means, the predetermined trigger is stored in a predetermined trigger information storage means. The calculation means executes a start-up process when the power is turned on to the main control means, and in the start-up process, a predetermined trigger is set based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. information is sent to the microchip. Here, information regarding the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first prize opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (accessory object ratio) is stored as Because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information about ratios, instead of using a microchip to fix the trigger for storing information, we take into account the jackpot probability and variable rate of probability in gaming machines. It is preferable that the Therefore, by having the main control means store the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage means and transmitting information indicating the predetermined trigger to the microchip each time the power is turned on, the microchip can play the game. The ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means at a predetermined opportunity that matches the jackpot probability and probability variation ratio of the machine ( This has the effect that information regarding the ratio of accessories can be stored in the storage means.

<Group K>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5,
comprising a third storage control means for accumulating information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine and storing it in a third storage means;
A gaming machine K1, wherein the output means outputs information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means.

According to the gaming machine K1, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5 In addition to the effects produced by this, there are the following effects. That is, the third storage control means accumulates information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and stores it in the third storage means. Information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is outputted by the output means. This has the effect that, in a situation where fraudulent activity is suspected, the receiver of the signal output from the output means can analyze the gaming status of the gaming machine and find the cause.

In the gaming machine K1,
comprising a door frame that covers the front of the gaming area;
A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is open.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, there are the following effects. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the state in which the door frame covering the front of the gaming area is open, the one that receives the signal output from the outputting means This has the effect of being able to determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed based on the occurrence of the state in which the door frame is open.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
A gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error state of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there are the following effects. In other words, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the gaming machine, the receiver of the signal outputted from the outputting means can understand the occurrence situation of the error state of the gaming machine. This has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraud has been committed.

In any of gaming machines K1 to K3,
The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the gaming status of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning status in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, there is the following effect. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, the player receiving the signal output from the outputting means This has the effect of being able to determine whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed based on the occurrence of the winning state of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines K1 to K4,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which it has been detected by the entered prize detection means that a prize has been won in any of the winning slots within a predetermined time. The game machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, there is the following effect. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which it is detected by the entered prize detecting means that a prize has been won in any of the winning slots within a predetermined time. Therefore, those who receive the signal output from the output means can determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed, based on whether or not there is a winning situation outside of business hours, such as late at night. This has the effect of being able to determine whether

<L group>
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for drawing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous gaming value to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the gaming machine comprising:
a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game;
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium;
Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for
output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means;
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
A gaming machine L1 comprising: erasing means for erasing all of the information cumulatively stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the game machine L1, the game medium is ejected by the ejection means to a game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided, including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Ru. The output means outputs a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means. As a result, based on the output signal, the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out due to winning in the winning opening, due to the first winning opening (i.e., the activation of the accessory) It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the role. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means in the lottery performed by the lottery means that provides an opportunity to give an advantageous gaming value to the player, the information cumulatively stored in the storage means is erased by the erasing means. All will be deleted. Here, if the probability of winning changes, the ratio of the winning objects also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the ratio of accessories that can be analyzed based on the accumulated information will be It is unclear whether this is due to a change in the probability of winning or whether it is due to cheating. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased, so the effect of changing the ratio of accessories due to the change in the probability of winning This has the effect of eliminating the possibility that the information remains in the memory means.

In the gaming machine L1,
A gaming machine L2 characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means causes the storage means to store information indicating that the change has been made.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to a change in the probability of winning, and this can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there has been fraud. There is.

In gaming machine L2,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. A gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it is a gaming machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means along with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to a change in the probability of winning, and also to confirm that the change has been made (that is, the deletion has taken place). Since the date and time can also be ascertained, this has the effect of making it possible to more reliably determine whether or not fraud has occurred.

In gaming machine L2 or L3,
The storage control means stores, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made, together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change, in the storage means. A gaming machine L4 is characterized in that it allows players to

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L2 or L3, there is the following effect. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the changed probability of winning. be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to a change in the probability of winning, as well as the probability of winning after the change. This has the effect of making it possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud while also reducing the probability of winning later.

In any of gaming machines L2 to L4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. A game machine L5 is characterized in that it is a game machine that lets you play.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines L2 to L4, there is the following effect. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to a change in the probability of winning, as well as the probability of winning before the change. This has the effect of making it possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud while also reducing the probability of a previous hit.

<Group M>
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for drawing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous gaming value to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the gaming machine comprising:
a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game;
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for causing
output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means;
A changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
A gaming machine M1 characterized in that the information accumulated and stored in the storage means continues to be held even when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the game machine M1, the game medium is ejected by the ejection means to a game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided, including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Ru. The output means outputs a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means. As a result, based on the output signal, the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out due to winnings in the winning opening, due to the first winning opening (i.e., the activation of the accessory) It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the role. On the other hand, even if the probability of winning is changed by the changing means in the lottery performed by the lottery means that provides an opportunity to provide advantageous gaming value to the player, all information stored in the storage means is retained. continue. As a result, the ratio of accessories changes as the probability of winning changes, but it has the effect that it is possible to analyze whether or not fraud has occurred before the probability of winning changes.

In the gaming machine M1,
A gaming machine M2, wherein the storage control means causes the storage means to store information indicating that the probability has been changed when the probability has been changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. This has the effect that it can be grasped at the analysis stage that the ratio of accessories has changed due to a change in the probability of winning, and can be used as a reference for determining whether or not fraud has occurred.

In gaming machine M2,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it allows players to play games.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means along with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. be done. This allows you to easily understand the date and time when the probability of winning was changed, so if the ratio of accessories has changed since then, it can be analyzed that this may be due to a change in the probability of winning. Sometimes it has the effect of making it easier to judge.

In gaming machine M2 or M3,
The storage control means stores, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made, together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change, in the storage means. A gaming machine M4 characterized in that it allows players to play games.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M2 or M3, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the changed probability of winning. be done. This makes it possible to grasp the probability of winning after the change, so it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud while also keeping track of the probability of winning after the change.

In any of gaming machines M2 to M4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. A game machine M5 characterized in that it is a game machine that allows players to play games.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M2 to M4, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp the probability of winning before the change, which has the effect of making it possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud while also keeping track of the probability of winning before the change.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M5,
comprising display means for displaying information related to the ratio of accessories based on the information stored in the storage means,
M6 characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the display means displays information related to the accessory ratio based only on the information stored after the change.

According to gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines M1 to M5, there are the following effects. That is, the display means displays information related to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means. At this time, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information related to the accessory ratio is displayed based only on the information stored after the change. As a result, for the information related to the ratio of accessories displayed on this display means, it is possible to eliminate changes in the ratio of accessories due to changes in the probability of winning, and it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts after the probability of winning is changed. effective.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M6,
The gaming machine M7 is characterized in that the storage control means divides the information into each of the probabilities that can be set by the change by the changing means, and causes the storage means to accumulate and store the information.

According to gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines M1 to M6, there are the following effects. That is, the information stored in the storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means, divided into each probability of winning that can be set by the change by the change means. Thereby, for each probability of winning that can be set, it is possible to easily determine the accessory ratio when that probability is set from the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly switch and analyze the change in the ratio of accessories due to a change in the probability of winning and the change in the ratio of accessories due to cheating.

<Group N>
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for drawing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous gaming value to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the gaming machine comprising:
a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game;
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for causing
output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means;
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
It is characterized by comprising: erasing means for erasing all but the most recently stored part of the information cumulatively stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means. Gaming machine N1.

According to the game machine N1, the game medium is ejected by the ejection means to a game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided, including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on a game. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Ru. The output means outputs a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means. As a result, based on the output signal, the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out due to winnings in the winning opening, due to the first winning opening (i.e., the activation of the accessory) It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the role. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means in the lottery of the lottery means that provides an opportunity to give an advantageous gaming value to the player, the most recent of the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is changed. All but a part of the stored information is erased by the erasing means. Here, if the probability of winning changes, the ratio of the winning objects also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the ratio of accessories that can be analyzed based on the accumulated information will be It is unclear whether this is due to a change in the probability of winning or whether it is due to cheating. On the other hand, when the probability of winning changes, the information cumulatively stored in the storage means is erased except for the most recently stored part, so that the probability of winning changes. By using this method, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the influence of changes in the ratio of accessories from remaining in the memory means, while also making it possible to analyze whether there is a possibility that fraud was committed before the probability of winning was changed. This has the effect that it can be done.

In gaming machine N1,
A gaming machine N2 characterized in that the storage control means causes the storage means to store information indicating that the probability has been changed when the probability has been changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the proportion of accessories has changed due to a change in the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means can be changed due to a change in the probability of winning. This has the effect that it can be determined at the analysis stage that the data has been deleted, and can be used as a reference for determining whether or not fraud has occurred.

In gaming machine N2,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. A gaming machine N3 is characterized in that it allows players to

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means along with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the proportion of accessories has changed due to a change in the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means can be changed due to a change in the probability of winning. Since it is possible to know at the analysis stage that the data has been deleted, and also to know the date and time when the change was made (that is, when the deletion took place), it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not fraud has occurred. There is an effect.

In gaming machine N2 or N3,
The storage control means stores, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made, together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change, in the storage means. A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that it allows players to play games.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N2 or N3, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the changed probability of winning. be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the proportion of accessories has changed due to a change in the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means can be changed due to a change in the probability of winning. Since it is possible to know at the analysis stage that the item has been deleted, and also to know the probability of winning after the change, it is possible to determine whether or not fraud occurred more reliably while also checking the probability of winning after the change. The effect is that it can be done.

In any of gaming machines N2 to N4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. A gaming machine N5 is characterized in that it allows players to play games.

According to gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines N2 to N4, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the proportion of accessories has changed due to a change in the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means can be changed due to a change in the probability of winning. Since it is possible to know at the analysis stage that the item has been deleted, and also to know the probability of winning before the change, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there was fraud while also checking the probability of winning before the change. The effect is that it can be done.

<Group O>
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for drawing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous gaming value to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the gaming machine comprising:
a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game;
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for causing
output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means;
Display means for displaying information related to the ratio of accessories based on the information stored in the storage means;
mode switching means for switching to a mode that changes the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
means for causing the display means to display a value indicating the probability of winning that the user desires to change when the mode switching means switches to the mode to be changed;
The game is characterized by comprising a setting means for setting the winning probability displayed on the display means, which is desired to be changed, as the winning probability when the mode for changing the winning probability is completed. Game machine O1.

According to the game machine O1, the game medium is ejected by the ejection means to the game area where a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Ru. The output means outputs a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means. As a result, based on the output signal, the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out due to winnings in the winning opening, due to the first winning opening (i.e., the activation of the accessory) It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the role. In addition, since the display means displays information related to the ratio of accessories based on the information stored in the storage means, it is easy to determine whether or not fraudulent activity has been committed by looking at the display on the display means. It has the effect of being able to judge. On the other hand, when the mode switching means switches to a mode in which the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means is changed, a value indicating the desired probability of winning is displayed on the display means. Then, when the mode for changing the winning probability is completed, the changing probability of winning displayed on the display means is set as the probability of winning by the setting means. Thereby, the display means for displaying information related to the accessory ratio can also be used as a display means for displaying the probability of winning that you want to change when changing the probability of winning. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in the number of display means installed in the gaming machine.

(Assignment 2)
The gaming machines P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, and U2 shown below were made to solve the following problems.

That is, the RAM (Random Access Memory) used in the main control means for controlling the game is divided into a first storage area used for processing for main control of the game and a second storage area used for other processing. A gaming machine is known that is configured to protect information that is divided and used for main control of a game from being destroyed by other processing (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6154863).

On the other hand, there is a need for more appropriate protection of information used in processing for main control of gaming from other processing.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can suitably protect information used in the main control of gaming.

(Means and effects 2)
<Group P>
In a game machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the game,
The main control means is
arithmetic means for performing arithmetic operations;
multiple registers and
a first storage means for readably and writably storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage means that has a different storage area from the first storage means and stores second information in a readable and writable manner, which is used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process. and,
From the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means executes the second process using the first information stored in the second storage means. Saving means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction when proceeding to the step of executing the second process using the information;
From the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means. restoration means for restoring the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding registers when returning to the step of executing the first process using the information; A gaming machine P1 comprising:

According to the gaming machine P1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process that performs main control of the game is executed by the calculation means that performs the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and readable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. be remembered. From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When moving to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means to a predetermined area of the second storage means using a load instruction or a store instruction. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means starts using the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoring means. As a result, the information stored in this register, which is used in the processing that mainly controls the game, can be appropriately protected from other processing. In addition, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, the location where the contents are saved is fixed to a predetermined area, compared to the case where the contents are saved to the stack area. be able to. Therefore, by creating a program to use the second storage means while clearly avoiding the predetermined area where the contents of the registers are saved during the second process, the registers used in the first process can be saved. The contents can be reliably protected. Therefore, there is an effect that information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine P1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the calculation means,
A gaming machine P2, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means and a work area for storing information used based on calculations for the calculation means. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for the stack area and secure a large capacity for the work area.

In gaming machine P2,
The calculation means is
stack area specifying means for specifying a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, memory clearing for clearing all the information stored in at least the second storage means in which the stack area is provided. A gaming machine P3 comprising means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the memory clearing means. Here, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When proceeding to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means to the work area instead of the stack area. Therefore, by saving the information, it is possible to prevent information from being stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage means will be cleared. be.

In any of gaming machines P1 to P3,
A gaming machine P4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the calculation process executes the second process.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is at a stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when the calculation means moves to a stage where the second information stored in the second storage means is used to execute the second process. . Thereby, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before executing the second process, based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine P4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. .

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing starts from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the means moves to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the saving means saves the information to a predetermined area of the second storage means. This has the effect that only the minimum necessary registers can be saved to a predetermined area, and the contents can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process.

<Group Q>
In a game machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the game,
The main control means is
arithmetic means for performing arithmetic operations;
multiple registers and
a first storage means for readably and writably storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage means that has a different storage area from the first storage means and stores second information in a readable and writable manner, which is used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process. and,
From the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means executes the second process using the first information stored in the second storage means. Saving means for saving the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means when proceeding to the step of executing the second process using the information;
From the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means. restoration means for restoring the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding registers when returning to the step of executing the first process using the information; A gaming machine Q1 comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process that performs main control of the game is executed by the calculation means that performs the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and readable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. be remembered. From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When moving to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some of the plurality of registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means starts using the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoring means. As a result, the information stored in this register, which is used in the processing that mainly controls the game, can be appropriately protected from other processing. In addition, since only some registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be kept low. It is possible to increase the area in which information such as information is stored. Therefore, there is an effect that information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In gaming machine Q1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the calculation means,
The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the saving means saves the contents of some of the registers to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means and a work area for storing information used based on calculations for the calculation means. The contents of some of the registers saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for the stack area and secure a large capacity for the work area.

In gaming machine Q2,
The calculation means is
stack area specifying means for specifying a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, memory clearing for clearing all the information stored in at least the second storage means in which the stack area is provided. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the memory clearing means. Here, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When proceeding to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some registers are saved by the saving means to the work area instead of the stack area. Therefore, by saving the information, it is possible to prevent information from being stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage means will be cleared. be.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3,
A gaming machine Q4, wherein the some of the registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means include registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are achieved. That is, some registers, including registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing, are used when the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the calculation means moves from the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the saving means saves the data to a predetermined area of the second storage means. Evacuated. Thereby, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before executing the second process based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that some of the registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means are registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. Game machine Q5.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing are used as part of the registers when the arithmetic processing means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the calculation means moves from the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the saving means saves the data to a predetermined area of the second storage means. will be evacuated. This has the effect that only the minimum necessary registers can be saved to a predetermined area, and the contents can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process.

<R group>
In a game machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the game,
The main control means is
arithmetic means for performing arithmetic operations;
multiple registers and
a first storage means for readably and writably storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage means that has a different storage area from the first storage means and stores second information in a readable and writable manner, which is used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process. and,
From the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means executes the second process using the first information stored in the second storage means. Saving means for saving the contents of the registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means using individual instructions for each register when proceeding to the step of executing the second process using the information;
From the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means. restoration means for restoring the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding registers when returning to the step of executing the first process using the information; A gaming machine R1 comprising:

According to the gaming machine R1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process that performs main control of the game is executed by the calculation means that performs the calculation, the first information used to execute the first process is readable and readable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. be remembered. From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When moving to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means using individual instructions for each register. On the other hand, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means starts using the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoring means. As a result, the information stored in this register, which is used in the processing that mainly controls the game, can be appropriately protected from other processing. In addition, since each register is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means using an individual instruction, the saving is performed in order to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by other processing. Only the necessary registers can be individually designated and saved. Therefore, there is an effect that information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In gaming machine R1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the calculation means,
The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means and a work area for storing information used based on calculations for the calculation means. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for the stack area and secure a large capacity for the work area.

In gaming machine R2,
The calculation means is
stack area specifying means for specifying a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, memory clearing for clearing all the information stored in at least the second storage means in which the stack area is provided. A gaming machine R3 comprising means.

According to gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine R2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the memory clearing means. Here, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When proceeding to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved to a work area instead of the stack area by the saving means. Therefore, by saving the information, it is possible to prevent information from being stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage means will be cleared. be.

In any of gaming machines R1 to R3,
A gaming machine R4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the calculation process executes the second process.

According to gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines R1 to R3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is at the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when the calculation means moves to a stage where the second information stored in the second storage means is used to execute the second process. . Thereby, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before executing the second process based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine R4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. .

According to gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine R4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing starts from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the means moves to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the saving means saves the information to a predetermined area of the second storage means. This has the effect that only the minimum necessary registers can be saved to a predetermined area, and the contents can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process.

<S group>
In a game machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the game,
The main control means is
arithmetic means for performing arithmetic operations;
multiple registers and
a first storage means for readably and writably storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic means;
a second storage means that has a different storage area from the first storage means and stores second information in a readable and writable manner, which is used when the second processing regarding the accessory ratio is executed by the calculation means;
From the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means executes the second process using the first information stored in the second storage means. a saving means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of a second storage means when proceeding to the step of executing the second process using the information;
From the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means. restoration means for restoring the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding registers when returning to the step of executing the first process using the information; A game machine S1 comprising:

According to the gaming machine S1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process that performs main control of the game is executed by the calculation means that performs the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and readable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when the calculation means executes the second processing regarding the accessory ratio is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. . From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When moving to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means to a predetermined area of the second storage means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means starts using the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoring means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from the processing related to the accessory ratio, as well as the information used in the processing for controlling the main game. Therefore, there is an effect that information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine S1,
The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the saving means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means in response to a load instruction or a store instruction.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, there are the following effects. That is, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, the location where the contents are saved is fixed to a predetermined area, compared to the case where the contents are saved to the stack area. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine S1 or S2,
The gaming machine S3 is characterized in that the saving means saves the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S1 or S2, there are the following effects. That is, since only some registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be kept low, the memory capacity can be reduced, and other This has the effect of increasing the area for storing information, etc.

In any of gaming machines S1 to S3,
The gaming machine S4 is characterized in that the saving means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a separate command for each register.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, there is the following effect. That is, each register is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means using an individual instruction, so that the saving is done in order to ensure that the game process that performs the main control of the game is not affected by other processes. This has the advantage that only necessary registers can be individually specified and saved.

<T group>
In a game machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the game,
The main control means is
arithmetic means for performing arithmetic operations;
a first storage means for readably and writably storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage means that has a different storage area from the first storage means and stores second information in a readable and writable manner, which is used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process. and,
with a stack pointer and
The second process is executed by a program read at a predetermined position of the first process,
The main control means is
From the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine T1 comprising a stack pointer setting means for setting the stack pointer to a fixed value when returning to the step of executing the first process using information.

According to the gaming machine T1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process that performs main control of the game is executed by the calculation means that performs the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and readable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. be remembered. Here, the second process is executed by a program read out at a predetermined position of the first process. From the stage where the calculation means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means starts using the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the stack pointer is set to a fixed value by the stack pointer setting means. Since the second process is a program that is read out at a predetermined position in the first process, when execution of the second process starts, the number of stacked information in the first process is always constant. Therefore, by simply setting a fixed value based on the number of stacked information in the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, it will be executed again. In the first process, the stacked information can be reliably read. Therefore, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When moving to the stage of executing the second process, there is no need to save the value of the stack pointer pointing to the stack area provided in the first storage means used in the first process. Therefore, the increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine T1,
The calculation means executes a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer interrupt executed at a predetermined position of the loop process when a timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined time intervals is detected. This process includes the following:
A gaming machine T2 characterized in that the first process and the second process are processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a main process, a loop process executed within the main process, and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined position in the loop process when a timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals is detected. , executed by the arithmetic means. The first process and the second process are executed during the timer interrupt process. As a result, when execution of the second process is started by a program read at a predetermined position in the first process, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always a fixed number. Therefore, by simply setting a fixed value based on the fixed number in the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the first process is executed again. In this process, stacked information can be reliably read.

<Group U>
In a game machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the game,
The main control means is
arithmetic means for performing arithmetic operations;
multiple registers and
a first storage means for readably and writably storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage means that has a different storage area from the first storage means and stores second information in a readable and writable manner, which is used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process. and,
From the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means executes the second process using the first information stored in the second storage means. first fixed value storage means for storing a fixed value in a predetermined register when proceeding to the step of executing the second process using the information;
From the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: second fixed value storage means for storing the fixed value in the predetermined register when returning to the step of executing the first process using the information.

According to the gaming machine U1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process that performs main control of the game is executed by the calculation means that performs the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and readable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the calculation means executes a second process different from the first process is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. be remembered. From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When moving to the stage of executing the second process, the first fixed value storage means stores the fixed value in a predetermined register. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means starts using the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process, the second fixed value storage means stores the fixed value in the predetermined register in which the first fixed value storage means stored the fixed value. As a result, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When the calculation means moves to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, and from the stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means The contents of the register can be made the same at a glance when returning to the stage of executing the first process using the first information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first process that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the second process that is executed in between. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine U1,
A gaming machine U2 characterized in that the fixed value is 0.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine U1, the following effects are achieved. That is, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means starts using the second information stored in the second storage means. When transitioning to the step of executing the second process, and from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means When returning to the step of executing the first process using the first information stored in the means, 0 is stored as a fixed value in the predetermined register. This makes it possible to understand at a glance that this predetermined register has been cleared to 0.
(Assignment 3)
The following gaming machines V1 to V9, W1 to W7, and X1 to X6 were created to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, when a game medium is fired by a firing means into a game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided, and the game medium enters any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of prizes are awarded to the winning hole. There is a gaming machine in which gaming media is paid out to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

Now, some fraudsters make it difficult for game media to enter a predetermined winning slot, or conversely induce players to make it easier to win gaming media into a predetermined winning slot. However, measures to detect such fraudulent acts were insufficient.

The present technical idea has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably detect fraudulent activities.
(Means and effects 3)
<Group V>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each entry winning hole and detects winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
gaming performance information display means for displaying gaming performance information indicating the performance of games executed in the gaming machine;
A gaming machine V1 characterized by comprising a confirmation display means for displaying a confirmation display for a predetermined period to confirm whether normal display is possible on the gaming performance information display means.

According to the game machine V1, game media are ejected by the ejection means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. For the game performance display means, a confirmation display is performed for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether or not normal display is possible. From this confirmation display, it can be confirmed whether or not normal display is possible on the gaming performance display means, so it can be determined whether or not the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance display means is normal. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on the gaming performance information that is determined to be normal, which has the effect that fraudulent activity can be discovered in a suitable manner.

In gaming machine V1,
A gaming machine V2, wherein the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to display the confirmation display for a predetermined period when the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the power is turned on, the confirmation display means performs a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether normal display is possible on the game performance display means. As a result, it is possible to determine whether the display on the gaming performance display means is normal or not each time the power is turned on, and the effect is that it is possible to determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on the gaming performance information that is determined to be normal with greater accuracy. There is.

In gaming machine V1,
A gaming machine V3, wherein the confirmation display means causes the gaming performance information display means to display the confirmation display for a predetermined period when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the confirmation display means displays a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether or not normal display is possible on the gaming performance display means. be exposed. Thereby, by performing a predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means, it can be determined whether or not the display on the gaming performance display means is normal. Therefore, when making the judgment, the judgment can be made by performing a predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means, so that there is an effect that fraud can be detected in a suitable manner.

In gaming machine V1,
comprising a new start-up specifying means for specifying that the gaming machine is in a new start-up period,
A gaming machine V4, wherein the confirmation display means causes the gaming performance information display means to display the confirmation display for a predetermined period when the new start-up period is in progress.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the specifying means specifies that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the confirmation display is used to confirm whether normal display is possible on the gaming performance display means. It is carried out for a predetermined period by means. Thereby, at least when the gaming machine is in a new start-up period, it can be determined whether the display on the gaming performance display means is normal or not. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the shipment of gaming machines in which the display on the gaming performance display means cannot be performed normally.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V4,
The gaming machine V5 is characterized in that it includes a stopping means for stopping the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, during the predetermined period in which the confirmation display means causes the gaming performance information display means to perform the confirmation display, the game Since the progress is stopped by the stopping means, a confirmation display is made on the gaming performance display means, and while the gaming performance information is not displayed, the game progresses without being able to determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity. It has the effect of suppressing things.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V4,
A gaming machine V6 characterized in that the game continues to progress during the predetermined time.

According to the game machine V6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines V1 to V4, the game performance is also maintained during the predetermined period in which the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to display the confirmation display. Since the game continues to progress, the confirmation display is displayed on the game performance information display means, which has the effect of preventing the game from having to wait.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V6,
The gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment indicator,
The gaming machine V7 is characterized in that the confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit.

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines V1 to V6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment indicator. . The confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are lit. This has the effect that it can be confirmed whether all segments can be lit normally, and it can be easily determined whether or not the display on the gaming performance information display means is performed normally.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V6,
The gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing individual segments on each segment indicator,
The gaming machine V8 is characterized in that the confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are blinked.

According to gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines V1 to V6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment indicator. . The confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked. This has the effect that it can be confirmed whether all segments can be turned on and off normally, and it can be easily determined whether or not the display on the gaming performance information display means is performed normally.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means indicates that the number of gaming media fired into the gaming area is 100 and the gaming status is normal. A gaming machine V9 characterized in that the base value is the number of gaming media.

According to the gaming machine V9, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays a base value, which is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, when the number of gaming media fired into the gaming area is 100. be done. This has the effect that fraudulent acts can be detected in a suitable manner.

<W Group>
A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium discharged by the discharge means has won in any winning port, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium has won,
a game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine;
A new launch identification means for identifying that the gaming machine is in a new launch period;
A gaming machine W1 characterized by comprising a special display mode display means for displaying the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from normal display mode when the new launch identification means identifies that the period is a new launch period.

According to the game machine W1, game media are ejected by the ejection means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. On the other hand, when the new start-up specifying means specifies that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the special display mode display means displays the gaming performance information display means in a special display mode different from the normal display mode. be exposed. As a result, it can be shown that the game performance information display means displayed in the special display mode is currently in the new launch period, and it can be shown that there is no information that can be used to determine fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine W1,
The gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing individual segments on each segment indicator,
The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit or blinking.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment indicator. . The special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are lit or blinking. This has the effect that in the gaming performance information display means, all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit or blinking, thereby easily indicating that the new start-up period is currently in progress.

In the gaming machine W1 or W2,
The gaming performance information display means includes:
It is equipped with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments for each segment indicator,
Some of the segment display devices are used to display the gaming performance information, and other segment display devices are used to identify the types of the gaming performance information displayed on some of the segment display devices. It is used to display information,
The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the gaming performance information is displayed on or blinking on the other segment display device. .

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment indicator. . In addition, some segment displays are used to display gaming performance information, and other segment displays are used to provide identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information displayed on some segment displays. It is used to display. The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is displayed in other segment displays by lighting or blinking. As a result, if information different from the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is lit or blinking on the other segment display of the gaming performance information display means, it is indicated that the new startup period is currently in progress. This has the effect of being able to easily show the

In gaming machine W3,
The gaming machine W4 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which gaming performance information indicating gaming performance measured in real time is displayed in a lighting or blinking manner on some of the segment displays.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which gaming performance information indicating gaming performance measured in real time is displayed in a lighting or blinking manner on some segment displays. This has the effect that although it is not possible to measure the regular gaming performance of the gaming machine because it is in the new startup period, information indicating gaming performance measured in real time can be shown as a reference.

The gaming performance information display means includes:
It is equipped with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments for each segment indicator,
Some of the segment display devices are used to display the gaming performance information, and other segment display devices are used to identify the types of the gaming performance information displayed on some of the segment display devices. It is used to display information,
The gaming machine W5 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of the gaming performance information is displayed blinking on the other segment display.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment indicator. . In addition, some segment displays are used to display gaming performance information, and other segment displays are used to provide identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information displayed on some segment displays. It is used to display. The special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is displayed blinking on another segment display. As a result, when the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is displayed blinking on the other segment display of the gaming performance information display means, it is possible to easily indicate that the new startup period is currently in progress. There is an effect that it can be done.

In gaming machine W5,
The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the gaming performance information is displayed by lighting on some of the segment displays.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the gaming performance information is displayed by lighting on some segment displays. This has the effect of clearly indicating that the regular gaming performance of the gaming machine in question cannot be measured because it is in the new startup period.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means indicates that the number of gaming media fired into the gaming area is 100 and the gaming status is normal. A gaming machine W7 characterized in that the base value is the number of gaming media.

According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays a base value, which is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, when the number of gaming media fired into the gaming area is 100. be done. This has the effect that fraudulent acts can be detected in a suitable manner.

<Group X>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
a gaming performance information acquisition means for acquiring gaming performance information indicating the performance of games executed in the gaming machine for each predetermined period;
gaming performance information storage means for storing each gaming performance information acquired by the gaming performance acquisition means for a plurality of predetermined periods;
A gaming machine X1 comprising: gaming performance information display means for displaying gaming performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the gaming performance information storage means.

According to the game machine X1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. Here, for each predetermined period, gaming performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine during the predetermined period is acquired by the gaming performance information acquisition means, and each piece of gaming performance information is The performance information is stored in the performance information storage means. Then, the gaming performance information stored in the gaming performance information storage means and acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed on the gaming performance information display means. This shows gaming performance information over multiple predetermined periods, making it possible to more accurately judge whether or not there has been fraudulent activity, and also making it possible to predict to some extent when the fraudulent activity occurred. can. Therefore, there is an effect that fraud can be detected in a suitable manner.

In gaming machine X1,
The gaming performance acquisition means acquires gaming performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine in real time during the predetermined period,
The gaming performance information storage means stores the gaming performance information acquired in real time,
The gaming performance information display means displays the gaming performance information acquired in real time together with the gaming performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods, which is stored in the gaming performance information storage means. A game machine X2 featuring:

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine X1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game performance information that indicates the performance of the game executed on the game machine in real time during a predetermined period is acquired by the game performance acquisition means, and the game performance information acquired in real time is stored in the game performance information storage means. be remembered. Then, the gaming performance information acquired in real time is displayed on the gaming performance information display means together with the gaming performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the gaming performance information storage means. As a result, gaming performance information acquired in real time is also displayed, which has the effect of making it possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity.

In gaming machine X1,
The gaming performance information storage means includes:
a first storage area that stores gaming performance information for a previous predetermined period;
At least a second storage area for storing gaming performance information for a predetermined period before the previous time,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the gaming performance information is stored in the gaming machine during the predetermined period acquired by the gaming performance acquisition means. A gaming machine X3 characterized in that gaming performance information indicating performance of executed games is stored in the first storage area.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine X1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information storage means is provided with at least a first storage area that stores gaming performance information for the previous predetermined period, and a second storage area that stores gaming performance information for the previous predetermined period. . Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the gaming performance information executed in the gaming machine during the predetermined period acquired by the gaming performance acquisition means is shifted to the second storage area. Game performance information indicating game performance is stored in the first storage area. As a result, each time a predetermined period of time passes, newly acquired gaming performance information is stored in the gaming performance information storage means and displayed on the gaming performance information display means in place of the oldest acquired gaming performance information. Ru. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity based on new gaming performance information.

In gaming machine X2,
The gaming performance information storage means includes:
a 0th storage area that stores, by overwriting, the gaming performance information acquired in real time during the predetermined period by the gaming performance acquisition means;
a first storage area that stores gaming performance information for a previous predetermined period;
At least a second storage area for storing gaming performance information for a predetermined period before the previous time,
When the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the gaming performance information stored in the 0th storage area is shifted to the 11th storage area. Game machine X4 characterized by shifting.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine X2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information storage means includes a 0th storage area in which gaming performance information acquired in real time during a predetermined period by the gaming performance acquisition means is stored by overwriting, and a 0th storage area that stores gaming performance information in the previous predetermined period. At least a first storage area for storing gaming performance information for a predetermined period two times before the previous game is provided. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the gaming performance information stored in the 0th storage area is shifted to the first storage area. . As a result, each time a predetermined period of time passes, newly acquired gaming performance information is stored in the gaming performance information storage means and displayed on the gaming performance information display means in place of the oldest acquired gaming performance information. Ru. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity based on new gaming performance information. Further, the gaming performance information stored in the 0th storage area when the predetermined period has elapsed becomes the gaming performance information for the predetermined period. By simply shifting it to the first storage area, there is an effect that the gaming performance information for the previous predetermined period can be easily stored in the first storage area.

In gaming machine X3 or X4,
A gaming machine X5 characterized by comprising a shift processing means for executing a shift of gaming performance information between each storage area in the gaming performance information storage means using an LDIR command.

According to gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine X3 or X4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the shift processing means shifts the gaming performance information between the storage areas in the gaming performance information storage means in response to the LDIR command. This has the effect that shift processing can be easily executed with one command.

In any of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means indicates that the number of gaming media fired into the gaming area is 100 and the gaming status is normal. A gaming machine X6 characterized in that the base value is the number of gaming media.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays a base value, which is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, when the number of gaming media fired into the gaming area is 100. be done. This has the effect that fraudulent acts can be detected in a suitable manner.

(Assignment 4)
The gaming machines shown below are as follows: This was done to solve a problem.

Conventionally, when a game medium is fired by a firing means into a game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided, and the game medium enters any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of prizes are awarded to the winning hole. There is a gaming machine in which gaming media is paid out to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

There are people who commit fraudulent acts in such games. However, measures to curb such fraudulent acts were insufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably suppress fraudulent acts.

(Means and effects 4)
<A group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
comprising a gaming performance information display means capable of switching and displaying gaming performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine and information other than the gaming performance information;
The gaming performance information display means includes:
a first display means for displaying the gaming performance information or information other than the gaming performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means;
A gaming machine A1 comprising: means for hiding the display on the second display means when the information other than the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means.

According to the game machine A1, the game medium is ejected by the ejecting means to the game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably discovered from the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means. In addition, information other than gaming performance information is also displayed on the gaming performance information display means by switching the display. Here, gaming performance information or information other than gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means of the gaming performance information display means, and identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. be done. When information other than gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. This has the effect that by seeing that the display on the second display means is not displayed, it is possible to clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is information other than gaming performance information.

In gaming machine A1,
A predetermined determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player,
Changing means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
When the changing means changes the probability of the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the gaming performance information display means is switched to display the level of probability as information other than the gaming performance information. A gaming machine A2 characterized by comprising a display control means for causing the display to be displayed on the means.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined outcome is changed in a plurality of levels by a changing means. When the change means changes the probability of a predetermined result in a predetermined determination, the display control means switches the display of the gaming performance information display means, and the probability level is changed as information other than the gaming performance information. Is displayed. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. This has the effect that by seeing that the display on the second display means is hidden, it is possible to clearly understand the level of probability that the content displayed on the first display means will be changed by the changing means. There is.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
an error detection means for detecting an error;
error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
an error history display reception means for accepting a display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display accepting means, the gaming performance information displaying means is switched to display the history of the error type as information other than the gaming performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. A gaming machine A3 comprising: a display control means for causing the gaming performance information display means to display the information.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the error type history is accepted by the error history display reception means, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the error type history is stored in the error history storage means as information other than the gaming performance information. is displayed on the gaming performance information display means based on. When the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. This has the effect that by seeing that the display on the second display means is not displayed, it is possible to clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is the history of the error type.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A3,
The second display means is equipped with a segment display made up of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing individual segments on the segment display,
A4 gaming machine characterized in that the means for hiding the display of the second display means turns off all segments of the segment display.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second display means includes a segment display made up of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on the segment display. When information other than gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, all segments of the segment display of the second display means are turned off, and the display on the second display means is made non-display. This has the effect that it can be hidden with simple control.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine is
When displaying the non-gaming performance information on the first display means, some of the digits are used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed based on the gaming performance. A gaming machine A3 characterized by comprising means for displaying information in a display mode that is not displayed.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying information other than gaming performance on the first display means, some of the digits are used to indicate the gaming performance. external information is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display manner that is not displayed in the display of gaming performance information. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or information other than gaming performance based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. effective.

In gaming machine A5,
A gaming machine A6 characterized in that, when displaying the gaming performance information on the first display means, means for displaying the gaming performance information using all of the plurality of digits.

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying the gaming performance information on the first display means, the gaming performance information is displayed using all the plurality of digits. This has the effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying non-gaming performance information on the first display means, the non-gaming performance information is displayed using some of the digits, and the remaining digits are hidden. . As a result, since the remaining digits are hidden, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information. be.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information fixedly displays the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying non-gaming performance information on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display format. Ru. As a result, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display manner, thereby making it clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information. It has the effect of being able to make decisions.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying information other than gaming performance on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the digits, and the remaining digits are displayed blinking in a predetermined display mode. Ru. As a result, the remaining digits are displayed blinking in a predetermined display manner, thereby making it clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information. It has the effect of being able to make decisions.

<Group A>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
comprising a gaming performance information display means capable of switching and displaying gaming performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine and information other than the gaming performance information;
The gaming performance information display means includes:
a first display means for displaying the gaming performance information or information other than the gaming performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means,
The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine is
When displaying the non-gaming performance information on the first display means, some of the digits are used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed based on the gaming performance. A gaming machine (1) characterized by comprising means for displaying information in a display mode that is not displayed.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably discovered from the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means. In addition, information other than gaming performance information is also displayed on the gaming performance information display means by switching the display. Here, gaming performance information or information other than gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means of the gaming performance information display means, and identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. be done. The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying non-gaming performance information on the first display means, some of the digits are used to display non-gaming performance information. is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display manner that is not displayed in the display of gaming performance information. This has the effect that it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is.

In gaming machine A1,
A gaming machine (2) characterized in that, when displaying the gaming performance information on the first display means, means for displaying the gaming performance information using all of the plurality of digits.

According to gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying the gaming performance information on the first display means, the gaming performance information is displayed using all the plurality of digits. This has the effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
A predetermined determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player,
Changing means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
When the changing means changes the probability of the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the gaming performance information display means is switched to display the level of probability as information other than the gaming performance information. A game machine (3) characterized by comprising: display control means for causing the display to be displayed on the means.

According to gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined outcome is changed in a plurality of levels by a changing means. When the change means changes the probability of a predetermined result in a predetermined determination, the display control means switches the display of the gaming performance information display means, and the probability level is changed as information other than the gaming performance information. Is displayed. When displaying the probability level on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the digits, and the remaining digits are not displayed when the gaming performance information is displayed. This is done in a display mode that is not displayed. This has the effect that it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or a probability level based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. be.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A3,
an error detection means for detecting an error;
error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
an error history display reception means for accepting a display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display accepting means, the gaming performance information displaying means is switched to display the history of the error type as information other than the gaming performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. A gaming machine (4) comprising a display control means for causing the gaming performance information displaying means to display the information.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the error type history is accepted by the error history display reception means, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the error type history is stored in the error history storage means as information other than the gaming performance information. is displayed on the gaming performance information display means based on. When displaying the error type history on the first display means, the error type history is displayed using some of the digits, and the remaining digits are used to display gaming performance information. It is displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in . This has the effect that it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or error type history based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying non-gaming performance information on the first display means, the non-gaming performance information is displayed using some of the digits, and the remaining digits are hidden. . As a result, since the remaining digits are hidden, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information. be.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information fixedly displays the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying information other than gaming performance on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. Ru. As a result, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display manner, thereby making it clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information. It has the effect of being able to make decisions.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying information other than gaming performance on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the digits, and the remaining digits are displayed blinking in a predetermined display mode. Ru. As a result, the remaining digits are displayed blinking in a predetermined display manner, thereby making it clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information. It has the effect of being able to make decisions.

<Cormorant group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each entry winning hole and detects winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
comprising a gaming performance information display means capable of switching and displaying gaming performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine and information other than the gaming performance information,
The gaming performance information display means includes:
a first display means for displaying the gaming performance information or information other than the gaming performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means;
When the information other than the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means. Game machine C1 characterized by comprising means.

According to gaming machine C 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. Game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably discovered from the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means. In addition, information other than gaming performance information is also displayed on the gaming performance information display means by switching the display. Here, gaming performance information or information other than gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means of the gaming performance information display means, and identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. be done. When information other than gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display manner that would not be displayed when gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means. This has the effect that, by looking at the display on the second display means, it is possible to clearly understand whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or information other than gaming performance information.

In gaming machine U1,
A predetermined determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player,
Changing means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
When the changing means changes the probability of the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the gaming performance information display means is switched to display the level of probability as information other than the gaming performance information. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is equipped with a display control means for causing the display to be displayed on the means.

According to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined outcome is changed in a plurality of levels by a changing means. When the change means changes the probability of a predetermined result in a predetermined determination, the display control means switches the display of the gaming performance information display means, and the probability level is changed as information other than the gaming performance information. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display manner that would not be displayed when gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means. Accordingly, by looking at the display on the second display means, it is possible to clearly understand whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or the probability level to be changed by the changing means. effective.

In gaming machine C1 or C2,
an error detection means for detecting an error;
error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
an error history display reception means for accepting a display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display accepting means, the gaming performance information displaying means is switched to display the history of the error type as information other than the gaming performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it comprises a display control means for causing the gaming performance information displaying means to display the information.

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the error type history is accepted by the error history display reception means, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the error type history is stored in the error history storage means as information other than the gaming performance information. is displayed on the gaming performance information display means based on. When the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display manner that would not be displayed when the first display means displayed gaming performance information. This has the effect that, by looking at the display on the second display means, it is possible to clearly understand whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or a history of error types.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C3,
When the information other than the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the means fixedly displays the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying information other than gaming performance on the first display means, the display on the second display means is fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C3,
When the information other than the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the means blinks the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

According to gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when displaying information other than gaming performance on the first display means, the display on the second display means is displayed blinking in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information.

<E group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
gaming performance information indicating the performance of games executed in the gaming machine;
an error detection means for detecting an error;
error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
error history display reception means for accepting a display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display accepting means, the gaming performance information displaying means is switched to display the history of the error type based on the memory of the error history storage means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is equipped with a display control means for displaying.

According to the game machine E1, the game medium is ejected by the ejecting means to the game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. Game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably discovered from the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means. Furthermore, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Then, when the error history display receiving means accepts the display of the history of the error type, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the history of the error type is displayed as the gaming performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. displayed on the display means. This has the effect that the history of error types can also be displayed by one gaming performance information display means, and that fraudulent acts can be suitably discovered from the history of error types.

In gaming machine E1,
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the display control means continues to display the gaming performance information on the gaming performance information displaying means when an error is detected by the error detection means.

According to gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine E1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the display control means continues to display the gaming performance information on the gaming performance information display means. Therefore, even if a cheater intentionally causes some kind of error, the cheater can be reliably discovered from the gaming performance information that continues to be displayed on the gaming performance information display means.

In gaming machine E1 or E2,
The display control means switches the gaming performance information displaying means to display the gaming performance information on the gaming performance information displaying means when the error history display receiving means has finished accepting the display of the history. Game machine E 3 featuring:

According to gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the error history display reception means has finished accepting the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the gaming performance information is displayed on the gaming performance information display means again. Ru. As a result, even if the error type history is once displayed on the gaming performance information display means, the gaming performance information can be displayed again, so it is possible to reliably discover fraudulent activities from the gaming performance information. There is an effect that it can be done.

<O group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
a storage means for storing information regarding a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in the gaming machine;
output means for outputting information regarding gaming performance information based on the information stored in the storage means;
Changing means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
When the probability is changed by the changing means, among the information stored in the storage means, information related to gaming performance information affected by the probability is erased, and information related to gaming performance information not affected by the probability is deleted. A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it is equipped with a storage control means for holding information.

According to the game machine O 1, game media are ejected by the ejection means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. Information regarding a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and outputted by the output means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably discovered from the information regarding the gaming performance information outputted from the output means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined outcome is changed in a plurality of levels by a changing means. When the probability of a predetermined result in a predetermined determination is changed by the changing means, the storage control means erases information related to gaming performance information that is affected by the probability from among the information stored in the storage means. and information regarding gaming performance information that is not influenced by probability is retained. Therefore, since information regarding gaming performance information that is influenced by probability is stored in the storage means at a newly set probability, highly accurate gaming performance information can be output. On the other hand, information related to gaming performance information that is not affected by probability is retained in the storage means, so even if the cheater changes the probability in order to conceal the erasure of the fraudulent act, the information will not be retained in the storage means. This has the effect that fraudulent acts can be reliably discovered based on the gaming performance information obtained.

In game machine O1,
The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that information regarding gaming performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means.

According to the gaming machine O 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O 1, information regarding gaming performance information that is affected by probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means, so that the probability is changed by the changing means. In such a case, by erasing a predetermined area of the storage means all at once, it is possible to easily erase information related to gaming performance information that is affected by probability.

<Group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
a storage means for storing information regarding a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in the gaming machine;
output means for outputting information regarding gaming performance information based on the information stored in the storage means;
specific determination means for determining whether the determination is a specific result when the determination is not a predetermined result;
an opening means that does not give the predetermined gaming value and opens the normally closed winning opening for a predetermined time when the specific judgment means determines that the determination is the specific result;
Changing means for changing the probability of the specific result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
1. A gaming machine 1 comprising: storage control means for erasing information stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means into a gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. Information regarding a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of games executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and outputted by the output means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably discovered from the information regarding the gaming performance information outputted from the output means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. If the result is not a predetermined result, the specific determination means determines whether or not the determination is a specific result. When the specific judgment means determines that the judgment is a specific result, no predetermined game value is given, and one winning opening, which is normally closed, is opened by the opening means for a predetermined time. If a game medium wins in this opened winning hole, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. Further, the probability of a specific result in a predetermined determination is changed within a plurality of levels by the changing means. When the probability is changed by the changing means, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the storage control means. Therefore, since the information regarding the gaming performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, there is an effect that highly accurate gaming performance information can be output.

In gaming machine number 1,
A second gaming machine characterized in that the gaming performance information is a base value.

According to gaming machine No. 2, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machine No. 1, since the gaming performance information is a base value, the information regarding the base value is changed to the information regarding the gaming performance information based on the newly set probability. Since it is stored in the storage means, it has the effect of outputting a highly accurate base value.

<K group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Display means for displaying the level of probability,
A game machine (1) characterized in that the display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined outcome is changed in a plurality of levels by a changing means. The probability level is displayed on the display means. The display means displays the probability level only when the power is turned on. As a result, the probability level set in the gaming machine is not displayed unless the power is turned on, making it difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine, which makes it possible to appropriately suppress fraudulent activities. It has the effect of being able to.

In game machine Ki 1,
The gaming machine key 2 is characterized in that the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine key 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine key 1, the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, so unless the door of the gaming machine is opened and the back side of the gaming machine is exposed, , the probability level displayed on the display means cannot be confirmed. This has the effect of making it more difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine.

In game machine Ki 2,
comprising door open detection means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened;
The gaming machine key 3 is characterized in that the display of the probability level in the display means is performed on the condition that at least the opening of the door is detected by the door opening detection means when the power is turned on. .

According to the game machine key 3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine key 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the door opening detection means detects that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened. The display of the probability level on the display means is performed on the condition that the door opening is detected by at least the door opening detection means when the power is turned on. Since the door is normally unlocked using a key controlled by the hall, this has the effect of making it more difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine.

(Assignment 5)
The gaming machines shown below are 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 to Tsu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, and To2 were made to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, when a game medium is fired by a firing means into a game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided, and the game medium enters any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of prizes are awarded to the winning hole. There is a gaming machine in which gaming media is paid out to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

For such games, there is a desire to change the probability of winning. However, measures to change the probability of winning have not been sufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

(Means and effects 5)
<K group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
A storage means that stores information used to control the game and can retain the information even when the power is turned off;
Information deletion instruction means for instructing deletion of information stored in the storage means;
permission means for permitting change or confirmation of the probability level by being brought into a predetermined state;
A first method that enables the changing means to change the probability level when the power is turned on with the permission means in a predetermined state and the information deletion instruction means instructing to delete the information; a first mode start-up means for starting up the mode;
When the permission means is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on without an instruction to erase the information by the information erasure instruction means, the second mode is started up in which the probability level can be confirmed. If the 2-mode startup means and the permission means are not in a predetermined state and the power is turned on with the information deletion instructing means instructing to delete the information, the information stored in the storage means is a third mode starting means for starting in a third mode for erasing;
If the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the power is turned on without an instruction to erase the information from the information erasure instruction means, a fourth mode startup is performed in which the fourth mode is used for normal startup. A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it comprises an upper means.

According to the game machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined outcome is changed in a plurality of levels by a changing means. Further, the information used to control the game is stored in the storage means, and the information can be retained even when the power is turned off. Information erasure instructing means for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means, and permission means for permitting change of probability level or probability by being in a predetermined state are provided. Then, when the power is turned on with the permission means in a predetermined state and the information deletion instruction means instructing to erase information, the first mode start-up means causes the change means to change the probability level. It is launched in the first mode that enables. Further, when the permission means is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on without an instruction to erase information from the information erasure instruction means, the second mode start-up means enables confirmation of the probability level. It can be launched in 2 modes. Further, when the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the power is turned on with the information erasure instruction means instructing to erase the information, the third mode start-up means erases the information stored in the storage means. It is launched in the third mode of erasing. Further, when the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the power is turned on without an instruction to erase information from the information erasure instruction means, the fourth mode startup means performs a normal startup. It will be launched. This has the effect that by combining the operations of the information erasure instruction means and the permission means, the start-up mode can be set in an easy-to-understand manner, including a mode in which probability levels can be changed and confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
comprising door open detection means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened;
The first mode start-up means detects that the door is opened by the door open detection means, sets the permission means to a predetermined state, and instructs the information deletion instruction means to erase the information. startup in a first mode that allows the change means to change the probability level when the power is turned on in the state;
The second mode start-up means detects that the door is opened by the door open detection means, sets the permission means to a predetermined state, and the information deletion instruction means does not issue an instruction to delete the information. A game machine 2 characterized in that when the power is turned on in the state, the game machine starts up in a second mode that allows confirmation of the probability level.

(effect)
According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the door opening detection means detects that the door has been opened, the permission means is set to a predetermined state, and the power is turned on with the information deletion instruction means instructing to erase the information, the first The 1 mode starting means starts up in the first mode that allows the changing means to change the probability level. Further, when the door opening detection means detects that the door has been opened, the permission means is set to a predetermined state, and the information erasure instruction means turns on the power without an instruction to erase information, the second The mode starting means starts up in a second mode that makes it possible to check the probability level. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level since the probability level cannot be changed or confirmed unless the door is opened.

In gaming machine 1 or 2,
The gaming machine 3 is characterized in that the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state in which the permission means is rotated to a predetermined position by the key.

According to gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state in which the device is rotated to a predetermined position by the key. Therefore, when starting up in the first mode or when starting up in the second mode, it is necessary to rotate the permission means to a predetermined position using the key. Since the key is managed by the hall side, this has the effect of making it difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

<Group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation means for confirming whether the probability level is normal or not each time a predetermined timing arrives;
A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it comprises a processing execution means for executing a predetermined processing when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the game machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined outcome is changed in a plurality of levels by a changing means. In addition, whether or not the probability level is normal is checked each time a predetermined timing arrives by the confirmation means, and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the processing execution means executes the predetermined process. be done. As a result, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, it can be detected early and some kind of countermeasure can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
A game machine (2) characterized in that the predetermined timing is the elapse of a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine No. 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine No. 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is checked by the checking means every time a predetermined period of time elapses. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, it can be reliably discovered.

In gaming machine 1,
The gaming machine 3, wherein the predetermined timing is the start of dynamic display of identification information that is executed in response to the establishment of the starting condition.

According to gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the confirmation means confirms whether the probability level is normal or not each time the dynamic display of identification information is started. Therefore, even if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, this can be reliably discovered before the dynamic display of identification information starts.

In any of gaming machines (K1 to K3),
A game machine (4) characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

According to gaming machine No. 4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines No. 1 to No. 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a notification is made to the effect that the probability level is abnormal, which has the effect that the players and the hall side can immediately grasp the situation.

In any of gaming machines (K1 to K4),
The gaming machine 5 is characterized in that the predetermined processing includes processing for stopping a game.

According to gaming machine No. 5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines No. 1 to No. 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the game is stopped when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to playing the game with an abnormal probability level.

In any of gaming machines (K1 to K5),
A gaming machine (6) characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change the probability level.

According to gaming machine No. 6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines No. 1 to No. 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so that it is possible to return to the game at the normal probability level.

<Group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation means for confirming whether or not the probability level is normal during startup processing executed when the power is turned on;
A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it comprises a processing execution means for executing a predetermined processing when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the game machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the firing means has entered any of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are sent to the winning slot in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined outcome is changed in a plurality of levels by a changing means. During the start-up process that is executed when the power is turned on, the confirmation means checks whether the probability level is normal or not, and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, predetermined processing is performed. is executed by the processing execution means. As a result, if the probability level has been destroyed when the power is turned on, it can be reliably discovered and some kind of countermeasure can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
The gaming machine 2, wherein the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

According to gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a notification to the effect that the probability level is abnormal is given, which has the effect that the players and the hall side can immediately grasp the situation.

In gaming machine Co1 or Co2,
A game machine 3 characterized in that the predetermined process includes an infinite loop process.

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, an infinite loop is performed, so that the start-up process ends with the abnormal probability level remaining and it is possible to prevent the game from being played.

In any of gaming machines Co1 to Co3,
The gaming machine 4 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change the probability level.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so that the start-up process can be completed at a normal probability level.

In any of gaming machines Co1 to Co3,
The gaming machine 4 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for setting the probability level to one of normal levels.

According to gaming machine No. 5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines No. 1 to No. 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the probability level is confirmed to be abnormal, the probability level is set to one of the normal levels, so the effect is that the startup process can be completed at the normal probability level. be.

<Sa group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
startup means for executing processing by the change processing execution means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
The start-up means is configured to perform the start-up means, if the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A game machine server 1 characterized in that a process is executed by a change process execution means.

According to the game machine server 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, if the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the start-up means will execute the change process. Processing by the means is executed. As a result, if the process by the change processing execution means was in progress when the power was turned off last time, the probability level can be changed the next time the power is turned on. Changes can be made. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In gaming machine sa 1,
If the process by the change process execution unit is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the start-up means is configured to start the process even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A game machine server 2 characterized in that a process by a change process execution means is executed from the beginning.

According to the gaming machine server 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine server 1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, if the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the start-up means will not execute the change process. Processing by means is executed from the beginning. This allows the probability level to be reset from scratch, so there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with peace of mind.

<C group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
confirmation processing execution means for executing processing that enables confirmation of the set probability level;
On the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the change processing execution means executes the process, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied. startup means for executing processing by the confirmation processing execution means on the condition that a condition is met;
The start-up means determines that if the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. A gaming machine 1 characterized in that the change processing execution means executes the processing even when the change processing execution means is executed.

According to the game machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. This is executed by the startup means on the condition that a second predetermined condition different from the above conditions is met. If the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the raising means. As a result, if the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, even if the power is turned on after the second predetermined condition is met, the probability level will always be changed. Therefore, the probability level can be changed with peace of mind. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
The start-up means determines that if the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. The game machine server 2 is characterized in that, even if the change processing execution means is in the above state, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed from the beginning.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, if the process by the change processing execution means was in progress when the power was turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, The processing by the change processing execution means is executed from the beginning by the raising means. This allows the probability level to be reset from scratch, so there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with peace of mind.

<S group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and provides a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result, the gaming machine comprising:
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
first storage means for storing the original probability level when the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means;
A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it comprises a second storage means for storing a probability level changed by the processing by the change processing execution means.

According to the game machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. When the probability level is changed by the process by the change process execution means, the original probability level is stored in the first storage unit, and the probability level changed by the process by the change process execution unit is stored in the second storage unit. Ru. As a result, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level is changed using the second storage means. The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with peace of mind, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine 2, wherein the first storage means continues to store the original probability level even when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the original probability level stored in the first storage means continues to be maintained even when the power is turned off, so even if the power is turned off while the change processing execution means is executing the process, the power is The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the first storage means after the input. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with peace of mind, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

<Se group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
startup means for executing processing by the change processing execution means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
The start-up means is configured to set a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on, if the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. Even if the above holds true, the process by the change process execution means is executed,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state,
The second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in a second state different from the first state,
The change processing execution means includes a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means detects that the first operation means has changed from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine cell 1 characterized in that the changed probability level is determined when a change from the state to the second state is detected.

According to the gaming machine set 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Even if the change processing execution means executes the processing by the start-up means. As a result, if the processing by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the probability level is increased even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability. Further, the predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state, and the second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in a second state different from the first state. I'm here. The change processing execution means has a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means detects that the first operation means has been changed from the first state to the second state. When a change from to a second state is detected, a changed probability level is determined. Here, even if the change processing execution means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the change processing execution means determines that the first operation means is in the second state and the probability that the change is made is Rather than determining the level, a changed probability level is determined when the detection means detects a change in the first operating means from the first state to the second state. Therefore, even if the change processing execution means is executed due to the fulfillment of the second predetermined condition, the probability level can be reliably changed.

In game machine section 1,
A gaming machine 2, wherein the first operating means is a key.

According to the gaming machine SE 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine SE 1, since the first operating means is a key, the probability level can be easily changed by simply transitioning the key from the first state to the second state. This has the effect of making it possible to determine the

<So group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
startup means for executing processing by the change processing execution means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
The start-up means is configured to set a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on when the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. A gaming machine SO 1 is characterized in that, if the condition is established, an infinite loop state is established.

According to the game machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the determination is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, when the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, is considered to be an infinite loop. This makes it possible to change the probability level by instructing the user to turn on the power after meeting a predetermined condition, and by having the change processing execution means execute processing during startup processing. You can change the level. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In game machine 1,
2. The gaming machine 2, wherein the start-up means includes a notification means for instructing to turn on the power when the predetermined condition is met when the infinite loop state is to be established.

According to gaming machine SO2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine SO1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the start-up means puts the device into an infinite loop state, the notification means issues a notification to instruct to turn on the power when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This has the effect that it is possible to easily understand that it is only necessary to turn on the power after meeting a predetermined condition.

<T group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
confirmation processing execution means for executing processing that enables confirmation of the set probability level;
On the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the change processing execution means executes the process, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied. startup means for executing processing by the confirmation processing execution means on the condition that a condition is met;
The startup means are:
If the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, Execute the process by the change process execution means,
When the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, a third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition is set when the power is turned on. A gaming machine 1 characterized in that when a condition is satisfied, an infinite loop state is established.

According to the game machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. This is executed by the startup means on the condition that a second predetermined condition different from the above conditions is met. If the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the raising means. As a result, if the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, even if the power is turned on after the second predetermined condition is met, the probability level will always be changed. Therefore, the probability level can be changed with peace of mind. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability. Further, in a case where the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, a third predetermined condition that is different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on is set. If this is true, an infinite loop is established. As a result, the probability level can be changed by instructing the power to be turned on after meeting a predetermined condition, and having the change processing execution means execute processing during startup processing, so the probability level can be changed with confidence. You can change the level. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In the gaming machine Ta 1,
The start-up means is characterized by comprising a notification means for issuing a notification for instructing to turn on the power when the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the infinite loop state is entered. Game machine ta 2.

According to the gaming machine TA 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine TA 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the start-up means puts the device into an infinite loop state, the notification means issues a notification to instruct the power to be turned on when a predetermined condition or a second predetermined condition is satisfied. This has the effect that it is possible to easily understand that it is only necessary to turn on the power after the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Chi group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
startup means for executing processing by the change processing execution means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state,
The change processing execution means includes a detection means for detecting that the first operating means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the change processing execution means detects that the first operating means is changed from the second state to the first state. The probability level is changed when a change in is detected,
The gaming machine is
comprising a storage means for storing the previous state of the first operation means,
The detection means refers to the previous state of the first operating means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operating means at that time, and changes the first operating means from the second state to the first state. It detects whether or not it has changed to
The gaming machine CH1 is characterized in that the storage means stores a first state as a previous state of the first operation means from when the power is turned on until the first detection by the detection means is performed. .

According to the game machine Chi 1, game media are ejected by the ejection means to a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, the predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state. The change processing execution means has a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been changed from the second state to the first state, and the detection means detects that the first operation means has been changed from the second state to the first state. When a change from to the first state is detected, the level of probability is changed. On the other hand, the previous state of the first operating means is stored in the storage means, and the detection means refers to the previous state of the first operating means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operating means at that time. Then, it is detected whether the first operating means has been changed from the second state to the first state. Then, the first state is stored in the storage means as the previous state of the first operation means from when the power is turned on until the detection means performs the first detection. As a result, when the first operating means is set to the first state in order to satisfy a predetermined condition when the power is turned on, and the first operating means continues to be in the first state until the first detection is performed by the detecting means. However, since the first state is stored in the storage means as the previous state of the first operation means from the time the power is turned on until the first detection by the detection means, the first state In the detection performed by the detection means, it is possible to suppress the detection that the first operation means has changed from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the first operation means is set to the first state in order to satisfy a predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the probability level from being erroneously changed based on the first operation means, so that the probability level can be suitably changed. This has the effect of providing opportunities.

In gaming machine Chi 1,
The storage means stores information used to control the game, and is capable of retaining the information even when the power is turned off;
A gaming machine 2, wherein the first operation means instructs to erase information stored in the storage means when the first state is set.

According to gaming machine Chi 2, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machine Chi 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means stores information used to control the game and is capable of retaining the information even when the power is turned off, and the first operation means stores information in the storage means when the first state is set. This is an instruction to delete the information that has been deleted. As a result, the probability level can also be changed using the first operation means that instructs erasure of information stored in the storage means, so there is no need to provide a dedicated operation means for changing the probability level. There is an advantage that the probability level can also be changed by using the first operation means that instructs deletion of information stored in the first operation means.

<T group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each entry winning hole and detects winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and provides a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result, the gaming machine comprising:
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
startup means for executing processing by the change processing execution means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
A storage means for storing information used for controlling the game and capable of retaining the information even when the power is turned off,
When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means, the startup means enters into an infinite loop state,
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine 1 characterized in that the gaming machine 1 is provided with means for executing processing for monitoring power-off even in the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, the information used to control the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even when the power is turned off. Here, if the startup means determines that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means, an infinite loop state occurs. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game from being played at an abnormal probability level because the probability level changed before the power was turned off was not maintained correctly. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability. On the other hand, even when the device is in an infinite loop state, the process of monitoring power-off is executed. This has the effect that by correctly performing the process related to power-off, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from becoming any more erratic.

In gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine 2 characterized by comprising means for updating a random number used for the predetermined determination even in the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, even in an infinite loop state, the process of updating random numbers used for predetermined determinations is executed. This has the effect that the random number update process can be continued as long as the power continues to be turned on.

In gaming machine 1 or 2,
3. The gaming machine 3, wherein the start-up means includes notification means for issuing an instruction to turn on the power when the predetermined condition is met when the endless loop state is to be established.

According to gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine 2 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the start-up means causes the device to enter an infinite loop state, the notification means issues a notification for instructing to turn on the power when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This has the effect of making it possible to turn on the power when a predetermined condition is met.

<Te group>
A gaming area with multiple winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
startup means for executing processing by the change processing execution means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
The start-up means is characterized in that, when it is determined that the game is in a predetermined state, the start-up means is provided with a means for performing processing for non-execution of control related to the game and notifying an external device to that effect. Game machine Te1.

According to the game machine Te 1, game media are ejected by the ejection means into a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning opening is provided with winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the paying means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, if the start-up means determines that the game is in a predetermined state, a process is performed to disable control related to the game, and an external device is notified of this. As a result, since the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, it is possible to prevent a game from being played at an abnormal probability level. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability. On the other hand, since the external device is notified of this fact, there is an effect that the hall personnel etc. can take some kind of response thereto.

In gaming machine Te 1,
The predetermined state is a state in which a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is met when the power is turned on, when the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time. Game machine Te 2 characterized in that it is in a state where it is established.

According to gaming machine Te 2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine Te 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, In this case, a process is performed to disable the control related to the game, and the external device is notified of this. As a result, if the process by the change processing execution means was being executed when the power was turned off last time, and a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, This has the effect of being able to prompt the user to turn on the power when a predetermined condition is met.

In gaming machine Te1 or Te2,
A storage means for storing information used for controlling the game and capable of retaining the information even when the power is turned off,
The gaming machine Te3, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine Te3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Te1 or Te2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information used to control the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even when the power is turned off. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means, a process is performed to disable control related to the game, and an external device is notified of this fact. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means when the change processing execution means is executing the process when the power was cut off last time, some kind of countermeasure will be taken. It has the effect of being able to induce people to do so.

<G group>
A gaming area with a number of winning holes,
a firing means for firing gaming media into the gaming area;
a winning detection means that is provided for each of the entry winning holes and detects winning of the gaming medium in the corresponding winning hole;
When the entered prize detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games will be played for the winning hole in which the game medium has won. A dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and grants a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
confirmation processing execution means for executing processing that enables confirmation of the set probability level;
On the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the change processing execution means executes the process, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied. startup means for executing processing by the confirmation processing execution means on the condition that a condition is satisfied;
an interrupt processing means that performs a process of monitoring at least whether or not the power is turned off based on an interrupt that occurs at a predetermined time interval;
A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it comprises an interrupt permission means for permitting the interruption while the processing by the change processing execution means is executed and while the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is executed. .

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are ejected by the ejecting means to a gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes are provided. Each winning hole is provided with a winning detection means for detecting winning of game media. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium ejected by the ejecting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media are sent to the winning hole in which the game medium has won. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment based on the establishment of the starting condition, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, it awards a predetermined gaming value to the player. The probability of a predetermined result is changed within a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process execution means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. This is executed by the startup means on the condition that a second predetermined condition different from the above conditions is satisfied. Furthermore, the interrupt processing means performs a process of monitoring at least whether or not the power is turned off based on an interrupt that occurs at predetermined time intervals. Then, the interrupt is permitted by the interrupt permission means while the change processing execution means executes the process and while the confirmation process execution means executes the process. As a result, it is possible to monitor whether or not the power has been turned off while the change processing execution means executes the processing and while the confirmation processing execution means executes the processing, and if the power is turned off, the power is turned off. Such processing can be executed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, processing corresponding to the situation where the power is turned off is executed while the change processing execution means is executing the processing or while the confirmation processing execution means is executing the processing. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine 2 characterized in that it comprises an interrupt prohibition means for prohibiting the interruption when the processing by the change processing execution means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing execution means ends.

According to gaming machine To 2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine To 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the processing by the change processing execution means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing execution means ends, the interruption is prohibited by the interrupt prohibition means. Therefore, in the start-up means, it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of interrupt processing by the interrupt processing means.

<First group: Protective cover that covers the setting key when the inner frame is closed>
Conventionally, a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine is provided with a setting means capable of changing the content of the gaming value (such as the probability of winning and/or the type of winning, hereinafter referred to as the "setting content") to be awarded to a player depending on the game result, and the setting content of the gaming machine is configured to be changeable in multiple stages (for example, six stages of setting values from "1" to "6") based on the operation of the setting means by hall staff or the like.

This setting means is provided so as to be exposed toward the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support body, and when the opening/closing body is unlocked by a person related to the hall, the opening/closing body is supported. When the gaming machine is rotated relative to the player's body, the setting means is exposed toward the front of the gaming machine as the support rotates. With this configuration, when a person involved in the hall wishes to change the settings of the gaming machine, by rotating the opening/closing body, it becomes possible to immediately insert the key for changing the settings into the setting means. It is configured so that the settings of the gaming machine can be changed quickly.

In addition, the hall is equipped with an island facility with a built-in automatic ball supply device, etc. in a predetermined closed space, and by attaching gaming machine supports to both long sides of the island facility, the island facility It is configured so that multiple gaming machines can be installed in it. Then, outside the opening hours of the hall, the hall personnel, etc., unlock the opening/closing body and support of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment, and lock the opening/closing body to the support (island equipment). The facility is opened to the public to perform setting changes and maintenance work on each gaming machine.

However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the gaming machine, for example, when the gaming machine is installed on the long side of one of the island facilities in the hall, If the opening/closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side (i.e., the back side of the gaming machine) is opened for some reason (for example, due to fraudulent activity, etc.), the gaming machine in question This makes it possible to directly operate the setting means that is exposed on the back side of the machine. As a result, even if the opening/closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, and the setting means There is a risk that the settings may be changed due to unauthorized operation, resulting in unexpected disadvantages for the hall.

Here, it is possible to consider a structure such as a slot machine, in which the entire back side of the gaming machine is covered with a housing structure to prevent unauthorized acts from the back side of the gaming machine against the setting means of the control device, but pachinko machines etc. Unlike a slot machine, this gaming machine needs to supply game balls from above the island equipment, and also needs to eject out balls (out balls). Therefore, if the back side of the gaming machine is covered with a housing structure, a complicated structure for supplying and discharging game balls will be required, and manufacturing costs will increase due to the housing structure and the supplying and discharging structure. There is a risk that it will happen.

In addition, in island facilities, when considering the wiring connection to the card sanding device located adjacent to the left side of the gaming machine and the connection wiring to the power supply, the back structure of the gaming machine, especially the right side when viewed from the back of the gaming machine ( It is desirable that the structure on the left side in front view be configured to be open to some extent and to be easily connected by wiring to the above-mentioned devices and the like.

The first invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
A game body (for example, a game board 13) that is mounted on the opening/closing body and has a game area provided with a ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball can enter;
a firing means (for example, a ball firing unit 112a) that fires a game ball toward the gaming area;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203b) that acquires lottery information based on the fact that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball entry means;
determination means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307)) for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for imparting a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a specific determination result derived by the determining means. ,
comprising a setting means (for example, a setting key 501) that can change the probability that the specific judgment result by the judgment means is derived;
The support is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, it is difficult to operate the setting means, but when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the setting means can be operated. A gaming machine 10 characterized in that it is provided with a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) that protects the user.

According to gaming machine 10, the opening/closing body is supported by the support body so as to be openable and closable, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. A gaming area is formed in which the gaming body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the gaming body is provided with ball entry means into which a game ball can enter. Further, the game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball entering means. Then, the determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the determination result derived by the determination means, a predetermined gaming value is granted to the player by the game value granting means. be done. Here, the setting means is configured to be able to change the setting of the probability that the specific determination result by the determining means is derived. The protection means provided on the support makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is released from the support. The setting means is configured to be operable. As a result, when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the setting means can be easily operated, but when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body, the setting means is difficult to operate due to the protective means. It can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body.

In gaming machine 10,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means include:
Game machine 1 is characterized in that it is attached in a cantilevered manner to any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d).

According to gaming machine 1, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects of gaming machine 10. That is, a support body is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the protection means is attached to one of the plates in a cantilevered manner. Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means with a simple structure, and the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved at low cost.

Note that the term "cantilever beam shape" refers to a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed and is free.

In gaming machine 10 or 11,
A control means (for example, main control device 110) that controls the game,
A storage means (for example, a board box 100) for storing the control means,
The setting means includes:
provided in the control means,
The storage means is
a setting section (for example, setting section 100d) in which the setting means is located;
an exposed part that exposes a part of the setting means from the setting part toward the outside of the storage means (for example, a part where a keyhole of the setting key 501 in the setting part 100d is exposed);
a recessed part (for example, a setting part side wall 100e and a setting part bottom surface 100f) that recesses the exposed part from the outermost surface side of the storage means toward the control means side,
The protection means include:
Game machine 1 2, characterized in that it includes a protrusion (for example, a cover-side protrusion 172) that enters the recess when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support.

According to gaming machine 12, in addition to the effects of gaming machine 10 or 11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the control means controls the game, the storage means stores the control means, and the control means is provided with setting means. Here, the setting means is located in the setting part provided in the storage means, a part of the setting means is exposed from the setting part to the outside of the storage means by the exposed part, and the exposed part is exposed to the outside of the storage means by the recessed part. It is formed in a recessed position from the outermost surface side toward the control means side. When the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body, the protrusion provided on the protection means is configured to fit into the recess. As a result, when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body, the protrusion of the protection means enters the recess of the storage means, and the setting means exposed from the storage means is covered by the projection, allowing the opening/closing body to be opened/closed. It is possible to make it difficult to access the setting means from the back side of the game machine when the body is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means with a simple structure, and the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved at low cost.

In the game machine 12,
The protrusion is
A gaming machine 13 characterized in that it is formed so as to surround and close the setting means.

According to gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine 12, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protrusion surrounds and closes the setting means. As a result, when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body, the protrusion of the protection means enters the recess of the storage means, and the protrusion surrounds and closes the setting means exposed from the storage means. By covering the opening/closing body with a lid, it is possible to make it difficult to access the entire setting means from the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means with a simple structure, and the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved at low cost.

In gaming machine 12 or 13,
The recess is
a recessed side wall (for example, a setting side wall 100e) formed to be recessed from the outermost surface of the storage means;
a recess bottom surface (setting portion bottom surface 100f) extending from the recess side wall, forming the bottom surface of the recess, and having the exposed portion formed in a part thereof;
a recess side protrusion (for example, a case side protrusion 100g) that protrudes in a square shape from the bottom surface of the recess toward the protection means side so as to surround the exposed portion;
The protruding portion is
A game machine 1 4 characterized in that when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body, it enters a space formed by the side wall of the recess and the protrusion on the side of the recess.

According to gaming machine 14, in addition to the effects of gaming machine 12 or 13, the following effects are achieved. That is, the recess side wall of the recess is formed to be recessed from the outermost surface of the storage means, and the recess bottom of the recess extends from the recess side wall to form the bottom of the recess and an exposed portion is formed in a part thereof. Similarly, a concave side protrusion of the concave portion is protruded from the bottom surface of the concave portion toward the protection means side in a square shape so as to surround the exposed portion. When the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body, the protrusion is configured to fit into the space formed by the recess side wall and the recess side protrusion. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, the disposed portion of the setting means is blocked by the protrusion on the side of the recess of the storage means, making it difficult to access the setting means. The protrusion makes it difficult to access the setting means. With this configuration, the security of the setting means is improved, and there is no room for wires or the like to get into the setting means, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means.

In any of gaming machines 12 to 14,
The protection means include:
a mounting part (for example, cover mounting part 150) attached to the plate;
an upright portion (e.g., upright portion 160) extending from the mounting portion to the back side of the gaming machine;
a cover part (e.g., cover part 170) extending from the upright part toward the setting means and in which the protruding part is formed;
The standing portion is
Game machine 1 5, characterized in that it includes a flexible portion (for example, a curved portion 154) that can be bent based on the impact when an impact is applied to the protection means.

According to gaming machine 15, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines 12 to 14, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate body by the attachment part, the upright part is formed extending from the attachment part to the back side of the gaming machine, the cover part is formed extending from the upright part to the setting means side, and the cover part is formed to extend from the upright part to the setting means side. A protrusion is formed. The flexible portion provided in the upright portion is configured to be able to bend based on the impact when an impact is applied to the protection means. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, even if the storage means, etc. comes into contact with the protective means due to the force of closing, and a shock is applied, the flexible portion flexes and absorbs the impact, so that the protective means is protected. This has the effect of preventing damage.

In gaming machine 15,
The cover part is
Game machine 1 6 characterized in that it is provided with a rear protruding rib (for example, cover outer rib 174) that protrudes toward the back side of the game machine along at least the outer shape of the cover part.

According to gaming machine 1 6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine 1 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the rearward protruding rib of the cover portion protrudes toward the back side of the gaming machine at least along the outer shape of the cover portion. As a result, the rear protruding rib increases the rigidity of the cover part, and if a fraudulent act is performed using a wire from the back side of the gaming machine, the wire will be directed upward or downward from the back side of the cover part. This has the effect of preventing the wire from entering as the wire collides with the rear protruding rib when the wire is transmitted.

In gaming machine 16,
The rear protruding rib is
Game machine 17, characterized in that the setting means is provided on the back side of the game machine.

According to gaming machine 17, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine 16, the following effects are achieved. That is, a rearward protruding rib is provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means. By forming a rearward protruding rib on the cover portion at a position corresponding to the setting means, it is possible to make it difficult to drill holes in the cover portion, thereby improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine. The effect is that you can.

In gaming machines 15 to 17,
The standing portion is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a lateral protruding rib (for example, an upper outer cover portion 162b or a lower outer cover portion 163b) that protrudes to the side of the gaming machine at least along the outer shape of the upright portion. 8.

According to gaming machine 18, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines 15 to 17, the following effects are achieved. That is, the lateral protruding ribs of the upright portion protrude to the side of the game machine at least along the outer shape of the upright portion. As a result, the lateral protruding ribs increase the rigidity of the upright part, and in the event that a fraudulent act is carried out using a wire from the side of the gaming machine, the wire can be moved upward or downward from the side of the upright part. This has the effect of preventing the wire from entering as it collides with the side protruding ribs as it travels toward.

In gaming machines 15 to 18,
The control means includes:
Located below the center of the gaming machine,
The upright portion and the cover portion are
an upper inner cover part (for example, upper inner cover part 162a) extending from the upper part of the upright part and the cover part toward the inside of the gaming machine;
a lower inner cover part (for example, lower inner cover part 163a) extending from the lower part of the upright part and the cover part toward the inside of the gaming machine;
The lower inner cover portion is
Game machine 1 9 is characterized in that it is formed to have a larger area than the upper inner cover portion.

According to gaming machine 19, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines 15 to 18, the following effects are achieved. That is, the control means is disposed below the central part of the gaming machine, the upper inner cover part is formed to extend from the upright part and the upper part of the cover part toward the inside of the gaming machine, and the lower inner cover part is formed to extend toward the inside of the gaming machine. , are formed extending from the upper part of the upright part and the cover part toward the inside of the gaming machine. The area of the lower inner cover part is larger than the area of the upper inner cover part.

Conventionally, the control means is located below the central part of the gaming machine, so if a fraudulent act is committed, it is easier to access the control means from the lower side of the gaming machine than from the upper side. Therefore, those who commit fraud against the control means often do so by inserting a wire or the like from the bottom of the back of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent activities, the area of the lower inner cover section is formed to be wide, and the lower protective cover section allows the gap between the control means and the protection means to be minimized, and the back surface of the gaming machine is This has the effect of improving the security performance of the side.

In any of gaming machines 10 to 19,
The protection means include:
Game machine 1 10 is characterized in that it is made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to gaming machine 110, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines 10 to 19, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protective means is made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protective means, and it is possible to discover fraud or malfunctions with respect to the changing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Group 2: The cover that protects the control means cannot be removed from the back side>
Conventionally, a setting means for making various settings for the game is provided on the back side of a gaming machine, and when the opening/closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed, the player is prevented from touching the setting means. It is configured. On the other hand, the hall personnel open the opening/closing body outside the business hours of the hall and perform various maintenance work and setting work on the setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

However, in such a gaming machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a risk that fraudulent acts may be carried out against the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The second group of inventions was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
Setting means (for example, setting key 501) that is mounted on the opening and closing body and performs various settings for the game;
protection means (for example, protective cover member 140) for protecting the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means;
Difficult to remove means that makes it difficult or impossible to remove the protective means from the gaming machine (for example, with the mounting surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d, fixing screws are inserted from the outside of the right side plate 11d). 11g)), and a game machine 20.

According to the gaming machine 20, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, and various settings for the game can be set by the setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. It will be done. The protection means protects the setting means on the back side of the gaming machine. Here, the difficult to attach/detach means is configured to make it difficult or impossible to detach the protection device from the gaming machine. As a result, the protective means that protects the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means that performs various settings for the game is configured to be difficult or impossible to detach from the gaming machine by the difficult-to-attach means, and fraudulent acts against the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine can be prevented. This has the effect of being able to prevent.

In gaming machine 20,
The protection means include:
attached to the support;
The difficult to attach/detach means is
Game machine 2, characterized in that when the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be difficult or impossible to attach or detach from the support body.

According to gaming machine 2 1, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machine 2 0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the protective means is attached to the support and the opening/closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the difficult-to-detach means makes it difficult or impossible to attach or detach the protective means from the support.

Conventionally, in a hall where gaming machines are installed, an island facility with a built-in automatic supply device for game balls, etc. is installed in a predetermined closed space, and supports for the gaming machine are placed on both long sides of the island facility. By attaching this, it is possible to install multiple gaming machines on the island facility. Then, outside the opening hours of the hall, the hall personnel, etc., unlock the opening/closing body and support of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment, and lock the opening/closing body to the support (island equipment). The facility is opened to the public to perform setting changes and maintenance work on each gaming machine.

However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the gaming machine, for example, when the gaming machine is installed on the long side of one of the island facilities in the hall, If the opening/closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side (i.e., the back side of the gaming machine) is opened for some reason (for example, due to fraudulent activity, etc.), the gaming machine in question This makes it possible to directly operate the setting means that is exposed on the back side of the machine. As a result, even if the opening/closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, and the setting means There is a risk that the settings may be changed due to unauthorized operation, resulting in unexpected disadvantages for the hall.

Therefore, according to gaming machine 2, when the protection means is attached to the support and the opening/closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is difficult to attach or detach from the support by the difficult to detach means. Configured to be non-removable. As a result, even if the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine is illegally opened, the setting means provided on the back side of the gaming machine is protected by the protective means, and when the opening/closing body is locked, the protective means is removed from the gaming machine. By making it difficult or impossible to attach or detach from the back side of the machine, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts against the setting means.

In gaming machine 20 or 21,
The protection means include:
comprising a mounting part (for example, a mounting surface 151) attached to the plate,
The support is
Formed by combining a plurality of plates (for example, the upper plate 11a, the lower plate 11b, the left side plate 11c, and the right side plate 11d),
The plate body is
a side part located on the side of the gaming machine;
a front part extending toward the inside of the gaming machine on the front side of the gaming machine of the side part;
a rear part extending toward the inside of the gaming machine on the rear side of the gaming machine of the side part,
The mounting part is
Game machine 2, characterized in that it is attached to the inner wall side of the side part.

According to the gaming machine 22, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 20 or 21, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protective means is attached to the plate body by the mounting part of the protective means. In addition, a support is formed by combining multiple plates. The plate body is provided with a side part located on the side of the gaming machine, a front part formed on the front side of the side part toward the inside of the gaming machine, and a rear part formed on the rear side of the side part toward the inside of the gaming machine. The protective means is attached to the inner wall of the side part. As a result, by attaching the mounting part of the protective means to the inner wall of the part surrounded by the front part, side part, and rear part of the plate body, it is possible to make it difficult to access the mounting part of the protective means from the front or rear side of the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the protective means is difficult or impossible to attach and detach from the back side of the gaming machine, and fraudulent acts on the setting means can be prevented.

In gaming machine 2,
Part or all of the plate body is
Game machine 2 3 is characterized in that it is made of a metal material (for example, aluminum) that is harder than wood.

According to gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, part or all of the plate is made of a metal material that is harder than wood. As a result, by attaching the mounting part of the protection means to the inner wall of the area surrounded by the front part, side part, and rear part of the plate body made of a metal material higher in grade than wood, It is possible to make it difficult to access the mounting portion of the protection means from the rear side of the machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means by making it difficult or impossible to attach or detach the protection means from the back side of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine 2 or 2,
The lateral part is
A side insertion hole (for example, upper cover mounting hole 11e or lower cover mounting hole 11f) into which a fixing member (for example, fixing screw 11g) capable of fixing the protection means to the support body can be inserted,
The mounting part is
a mounting insertion hole (for example, upper mounting hole 152 or lower mounting hole 153) provided corresponding to the side insertion hole and into which the fixing member can be inserted;
The fixing member is
Game machine 2 4, characterized in that it is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from the outside of the game machine in the side part.

According to gaming machine 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects of gaming machine 2 or 2. That is, the fixing member capable of fixing the protection means to the support body is configured to be insertable into the side insertion hole provided in the side portion. Further, the fixing member is configured to be insertable through a mounting insertion hole provided in the mounting portion corresponding to the side insertion hole. Then, the fixing member is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from the outside of the game machine in the side part.

Conventionally, gaming machines are installed tightly against island equipment in a hall so that players cannot access the back side of the gaming machine from the front side of the gaming machine. Additionally, a card sanding device is installed on the side of the gaming machine installed on the island facility, into which a card containing the amount of money used for a game can be inserted, and this card sanding device also has a gap between the gaming machine and the gaming machine. It is arranged so that there is no

Therefore, by inserting the fixing member from the outside side of the gaming machine to fix the plate and the protection means, and installing the gaming machine on the island equipment in this state, a gap will be created in the area where the fixing member is installed. It is possible to avoid this. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible to access the fixing member that fixes the protection means to the gaming machine, so that the protection means cannot be attached or removed from the gaming machine, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved. There is an effect.

In any of gaming machines 2 to 24,
The protection means include:
an extending portion (for example, a curved portion 154) extending from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine;
The extension part is
Game machine 2 5, characterized in that it is formed in a shape that follows (contacts) the shape of the inner wall of the rear portion.

According to gaming machine 25, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines 2 to 24, the following effects are achieved. That is, the extending portion provided on the protection means extends from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine, and the shape of the extending portion is formed in a shape that follows (contacts) the shape of the inner wall of the rear portion. Ru. As a result, the attachment part of the protection means is covered by the rear part of the plate from the back side of the gaming machine, and the extension part is formed in a shape that follows (contacts) the inner wall shape of the rear part. It is possible to prevent a gap from occurring between the side part to which the fixing member is attached and the attachment part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the protection means from being attached or removed from the gaming machine, and there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 25,
The extension part is
Game machine 26, characterized in that it includes a bending part (for example, the curved part 154 is made of resin having elasticity) that can be elastically deformed when an impact is applied to the protection means.

According to gaming machine 2 6, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machine 2 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an impact is applied to the protection means, the flexible portion of the extension portion is configured to be elastically deformable. As a result, even if, for example, when the opening/closing body is closed, a part of the opening/closing body comes into contact with the protective means due to the force of closing, and a shock is applied, the flexible part bends due to the elastic force and absorbs the impact. This has the effect of preventing the protective means from being damaged.

In any of gaming machines 20 to 26,
A game body (for example, a game board 13) that is mounted on the opening/closing body and has a game area provided with a ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball can enter;
a firing means (for example, a ball firing unit 112a) that fires a game ball toward the gaming area;
A control means (for example, main control device 110) for controlling the game,
The control means includes:
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203b) that acquires lottery information based on the fact that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball entry means;
determination means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307)) for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
comprising a gaming value imparting means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for imparting a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the specific determination result derived by the determining means;
The setting means includes:
A gaming machine 27 characterized in that the probability that the specific judgment result by the judgment means is derived can be set and changed.

According to gaming machine 27, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machines 20 to 26, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter. Moreover, the game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and the game is controlled by the control means. Then, lottery information is acquired by a lottery information acquisition means provided in the control means based on the game ball fired by the firing means entering the ball entering means. Then, the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is determined by the determination means also provided in the control means, and based on the specific determination result derived by the determination means, the gaming value provided in the control means is determined. A predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player by the awarding means. Here, the setting means is configured to be able to change the setting of the probability that the specific determination result by the determining means is derived. As a result, the protective means that protects the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means that can change the probability of a specific judgment result and that affects the outcome of the game is configured to be difficult or impossible to detach from the gaming machine by the difficult-to-attach means. This has the effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine, such as unauthorized changes to the settings of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines 20 to 27,
The protection means include:
A game machine 28 characterized in that it is made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to gaming machine 28, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machines 20 to 27, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protective means is made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protective means, and it is possible to discover fraud or malfunctions with respect to the changing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Sougun: Settings can be changed and confirmed regardless of whether the inner frame is opened or not>
Conventionally, a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine stores the details of the gaming value (probability of winning and/or type of winning, etc.; hereinafter referred to as "setting contents") that is given to the player according to the gaming result. A setting means that can change the setting is provided, and the setting contents of the gaming machine are set in multiple stages (for example, six stages of setting values ``1'' to ``6'') based on the operation of the setting means by a person related to the hall etc. It is configured so that it can be changed.

In order to improve security performance in such gaming machines, if the opening/closing body equipped with the setting means is closed to the support, it is determined that settings cannot be made, and the opening/closing body is released from the support and the setting means is closed. When it is determined that the gaming machine can be operated from the front, the setting by the setting means is permitted. With this configuration, in a situation where the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support body, even if the setting means is fraudulently operated from the back side of the game machine, the settings of the game machine cannot be changed. It can be made unchangeable (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-024202)).

However, when determining whether or not to change the settings of the gaming machine based on the opening state of the opening/closing body, if the open detection means that detects the opening of the opening/closing body cannot detect the open state due to a failure etc., the opening/closing body may open. You will no longer be able to make configuration changes that would otherwise be possible based on the Therefore, due to erroneous detection by the opening detecting means of the opening/closing body, settings changes, etc., which are important game elements of the gaming machine, cannot be performed, and there is a possibility that the hall will not be able to carry out its intended business model.

The inventions of the above group have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
Opening/closing detection means (for example, inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting the open/closed state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support body;
a first operating means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in an open state; and,
changeability determining means (for example, S4412: Yes in start-up processing) for determining whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner; , comprising:
The changeability determining means includes:
irrespective of the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, when the first operation means is operated in the predetermined manner, changeable state transition means (for example, S4407 of startup processing: Yes) shifts to the changeable state; A gaming machine that is characterized by the following:

According to the gaming machine No. 0, the opening/closing body is supported by the support body so as to be openable and closable, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. Then, the open/close state of the open/close body relative to the support body is detected by the open/close detection means. Further, when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in an open state, the first operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner, the changeability determining means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed. Here, irrespective of the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner, the changeable state transition means provided in the changeability determining means shifts to the changeable state. That is, as a condition for transitioning to the changeable state, when a predetermined operation is performed on the first operating means without determining the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, the changeable state can be transitioned to the changeable state. Therefore, even if the open detection means that detects the opening of the opening/closing body is unable to detect the open state due to a malfunction or other reason, it is possible to change the settings, which are an important gaming element of the gaming machine, and the hall This has the effect of making it possible to reliably implement the business model that is currently in use.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
opening/closing detection means (for example, inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting the open/close state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support;
a first operating means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in an open state; and,
When the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, confirmation possibility determining means (for example, S4408 of startup processing: Yes ),
The confirmation determination means includes:
Regardless of the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, when the first operation means is operated in the predetermined manner, a confirmation possible transition means (for example, S4407 of startup processing: No) shifts to the advantageous degree confirmation possible state; A gaming machine No. 1 characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to gaming machine reference 1, the opening/closing body is supported by the support body so as to be openable and closable, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. Then, the open/close state of the open/close body relative to the support body is detected by the open/close detection means. Further, when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in an open state, the first operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the confirmation possibility determining means determines whether or not to shift to an advantage degree confirmation possible state in which the advantage degree for the player can be confirmed. Here, irrespective of the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the confirmation possibility transition means provided in the confirmation possibility determination means shifts to the advantage degree confirmation possible state. That is, as a condition for transitioning to the advantageous degree checkable state, it is possible to transition to the advantageous degree checkable state based on the operation on the first operating means without determining the detection result of the opening/closing detection means. Therefore, even if the open detection means that detects the opening of the opening/closing body cannot detect the open state due to a malfunction or the like, it is possible to check the setting status, which is an important gaming element of the gaming machine, and confirm that the setting has been completed. This has the effect of allowing you to reliably check the settings.

In gaming machine No. 0 or No. 1,
When the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in an open state, a second operating means (for example, a RAM erase switch 122) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine is provided. ),
The changeable state transition means or the confirmable state transition means,
A gaming machine 2 characterized in that when the second operating means is specially operated, the state shifts to the changeable state or the advantage confirmation state.

According to gaming machine No. 2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine No. 0 or No. 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in an open state, the second operating means is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the second operating means is specially operated, the changeable state transition means or the confirmation possible state transition means shifts to the changeable state or advantage confirmation possible state. In other words, the conditions for transitioning to the changeable state or advantage confirmation state are based on a predetermined operation on the first operating means and a special operation on the second operating means, without determining the detection result of the opening/closing detection means. The state can be changed or the advantage can be confirmed. Therefore, even if the open detection means that detects the opening of the opening/closing body cannot detect the open state due to a malfunction or the like, the settings can be changed or confirmed, which is an important gaming element of the gaming machine, and the hall This has the effect of ensuring that the business model envisioned by the company can be carried out reliably. In addition, in the control of shifting to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening/closing body is no longer necessary, and the control burden on the gaming machine that shifts to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state is reduced. This has the effect of allowing you to do so.

In any of the gaming machines No. 0 to No. 2,
a third operating means that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in an open state;
The third operating means is
When a specific operation is performed, the power of the gaming machine is changed from a state where the power is turned off to a state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The changeability determining means includes:
Game machine reference 3 characterized in that it is executed during startup processing that is executed when the power of the game machine is turned on.

According to gaming machine No. 3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines No. 0 to No. 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in an open state, the second operating means provided in the specific detection means is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine. be done. When the third operating means is operated in a specific manner, this corresponds to an operation for changing the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the start-up processing that is executed when the change is made, a determination is made by the changeability determining means.

Conventionally, when processing to detect the opening of an opening/closing body is performed when determining whether to transition to a changeable state in the start-up processing at power-on, the process for detecting the opening of the opening/closing body is , the control required at power-on becomes complicated, and there is a risk that the processing load on the gaming machine will increase.

Therefore, according to Game Machine Reference 3, when changing the settings of a game machine, the settings can be changed when the power of the game machine is turned on by operating the third operating means provided on the back side of the game machine. It is possible to determine whether or not to move to the state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and to make settings for the gaming machine.

In gaming machine series 3,
The confirmation determination means includes:
Game machine reference 4, characterized in that it is executed within the start-up process.

According to the gaming machine No. 4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine No. 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, similar to the changeability determination means, the determination by the confirmation possibility determination means is performed during the start-up process that is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

Conventionally, when a process is performed to detect the opening of an opening/closing body in the process of determining whether or not to transition to a state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed in the startup processing at the time of power up, the opening of the opening/closing body is detected. Due to the amount of processing, the control required at power-on becomes complicated, and there is a risk that the processing load on the gaming machine will increase.

Therefore, according to Game Machine Guide 4, when checking the settings of a game machine, when the power of the game machine is turned on in conjunction with the operation of the third operating means provided on the back side of the game machine, the advantage It is possible to determine whether or not to move to a confirmable state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to a state in which the advantage level can be confirmed, and to confirm the settings of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines 0 to 4,
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, the first operating means becomes difficult to operate, while when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the first operation means becomes difficult to operate. A gaming machine 5 characterized in that it includes a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) that enables the means to be operated.

According to gaming machine No. 5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines No. 0 to No. 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the first operating means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, while making it difficult to operate the first operating means when the opening/closing body is released from the support body. is configured to be operable. As a result, when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the first operation means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body, the first operation means can be operated by the protective means. This has the effect of making the means difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body. In addition, by configuring the protection means so that the first operating means cannot be operated when the opening/closing body is closed, even if the opening/closing detection means does not detect the opening of the opening/closing body, it is necessary that the opening/closing body is open. In this case, since the first operating means cannot be operated, it is not necessary to determine the detection result of the opening/closing detecting means as a condition for transitioning to the changeable state or the confirmable state. Therefore, in controlling the transition to the changeable state or the confirmation possible state, there is no need for processing to detect the opening of the opening/closing body, and the control burden on the gaming machine that transitions to the changeable state or the confirmation possible state can be reduced. effective.

In gaming machine reference 5,
The protection means include:
A gaming machine 6 characterized in that it is attached to the support.

According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device due to the protection means attached to the support body, the second operating means becomes difficult to operate, but when the opening/closing body is released from the support body. The second operating means is configured to be operable. As a result, when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the second operation means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body, the second operation means can be easily operated. This has the effect of making the means difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body.

In gaming machine No. 5 or No. 6,
The protection means include:
A gaming machine 7 characterized in that it is made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to gaming machine No. 7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine No. 5 or No. 6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protective means is made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protective means, and it is possible to discover fraud or malfunctions with respect to the changing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Shugun: Settings cannot be changed or confirmed if the front frame is open>
Conventionally, if a game machine is easily moved to a state where settings can be changed or confirmed, it is impossible to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized settings changes or confirmations. Alternatively, it is desirable to implement multi-step security measures for the gaming machine so that it does not shift to a confirmable state where the setting contents can be confirmed.

On the other hand, when hall personnel perform maintenance work on the gaming machine, both the opening and closing body and the decoration body are released from the support body (opening and closing body), and the maintenance work is carried out by the hall personnel who have the authority to change and confirm settings. This is generally done not by the person in charge but by an employee of the hall who does not have the authority to change or confirm settings (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-092371)).

If an employee of the hall who does not have the authority to change or confirm settings enters a state where changes can be made or confirmation is possible during maintenance work, the employee may end up communicating with an unauthorized person outside the company. , there is a risk that information on the setting status of the gaming machine may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

The invention of Shugu was made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a decorative body (for example, front frame 14) that is supported on the front side of the opening/closing body so as to be openable/closable with respect to the opening/closing body or the support body;
a first locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) that locks the support body and the opening/closing body;
a second locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the decorative body and the support body or the opening/closing body;
opening/closing detection means (for example, inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting the open/close state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support;
Decorative opening/closing detection means (for example, front frame release switch 208g2) for detecting the open/closed state of the decorative body with respect to the support body or the opening/closing body;
When the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the first locking unit and the opening/closing body is in an open state, first operating means (for example, a power switch) each operable from the front side of the gaming machine is activated. ) and a second operation means (for example, setting key 501),
changeability determining means (for example, , startup processing S4412: Yes),
The changeability determining means includes:
When the second operating means is operated in the specific manner, the opening/closing detecting means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decorative opening/closing detecting means does not detect opening/closing of the decorative body, the state shifts to the changeable state. A gaming machine 0 characterized in that it is provided with a change transition means (for example, S4453: Yes and S4454: Yes of startup processing).

According to the gaming machine 0, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the support body, and the decoration body is supported on the front side of the opening/closing body so as to be openable and closable with respect to the opening/closing body or the support body. The first locking means locks the opening/closing body and the support, and the second locking means locks the decorative body and the support or the opening/closing body. Here, the opening/closing detection means detects the open/closed state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support body, and the decorative opening/closing detection means detects the open/closed state of the decorative body with respect to the support body or the opening/closing body. Further, when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the first locking means and the opening/closing body is in an open state, the first operating means and the second operating means can be respectively operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Become. Then, when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operating means is operated in a specific manner, the changeability determining means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed. Ru. Here, when the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, the opening/closing detection means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decorative opening/closing detection means does not detect opening/closing of the decorative body, the modification provided in the changeability determination means is performed. The transition means transitions to a changeable state. That is, the conditions for shifting to the changeable state are a specific operation on the second operating means, detection of opening of the opening/closing body by the opening/closing detection means, and non-opening (i.e., closing) of the decorative body by the decoration opening/closing detection means. When the detection conditions are met, the state can be shifted to a changeable state. By configuring this so that settings cannot be changed during maintenance work when both the opening/closing body and decorative body are open, it is difficult for employees who do not have the authority to change the settings to change the settings. This has the effect of improving the security performance of the machine.

At game machine 0,
Confirmation possibility determining means for determining whether or not the advantage to the player is shifted to an advantage confirmation possible state when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner. (For example, S4408 of startup processing: Yes),
The confirmation determination means includes:
When the second operating means is operated in the specific manner, the opening/closing detecting means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decorative opening/closing detecting means does not detect opening/closing of the decorative body, the advantageous degree can be confirmed. A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it includes a confirmation transition means (for example, S4451: Yes and S4452: Yes of startup processing) for transitioning to.

According to gaming machine 1, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine 0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, whether or not the confirmation possibility determination means shifts to a confirmation possible state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be confirmed. is determined. Here, when the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, the opening/closing detection means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decorative opening/closing detection means does not detect opening/closing of the decorative body, the change provided in the confirmation possibility determination means is made. The transition means transitions to a state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed. In other words, the conditions for transitioning to the state where the advantage core is enabled are a specific operation on the second operating means, detection of opening of the opening/closing body by the opening/closing detection means, and non-opening of the decorative body by the decorative opening/closing detection means (i.e., When the conditions for the detection of (closed) are satisfied, the state can be shifted to a state where the degree of advantage can be confirmed. As a result, during maintenance work when both the opening/closing body and the decorative body are open, settings cannot be confirmed, thereby making it difficult for employees who do not have the authority to confirm settings, thereby making it difficult for employees who do not have the authority to confirm settings to This has the effect of improving the security performance of the machine.

In game machine 0 or 1,
a third operating means (for example, RAM erase switch 122) that becomes operable when the opening/closing body is opened;
an operation mode detection means for detecting the operation mode of the third operation means (for example, detecting whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off);
The changeability determining means includes:
When the operation mode detection means detects the first operation mode (for example, on) of the third operation means, determining whether to transition to the changeable state;
The confirmation determination means includes:
When the operation mode detection means detects a second operation mode (for example, off) of the third operation means that is different from the first operation mode, it is determined whether the state shifts to the advantageous degree confirmation state. A game machine 2 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 0 or 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the opening/closing body is opened, the third operating means becomes operable, and the operating state of the third operating means is detected by the operating state detecting means. Then, when the operation mode detection means detects the first operation mode of the third operation means, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to the changeable state, and the operation mode detection means detects the first operation mode of the third operation means. When detecting a second operation mode of the operation means that is different from the first operation mode, the confirmation possibility determining means determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous degree confirmation possible state. This has the effect that it is possible to shift to either the changeable state or the advantage confirmation state depending on the operation mode of the third operating means.

Note that the "second operation mode" may be any operation mode as long as it is different from the first operation mode. For example, if the first operation mode is pressed, the second operation mode may be: This applies to operating modes other than pressing, ie, non-pressing, contacting, pulling, and the like.

In any of the game machines 0 to 2,
The predetermined operation of the first operation means is:
This is an operation that changes the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
The changeability determining means includes:
A gaming machine 3 characterized in that it is executed during startup processing that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on.

According to gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines 0 to 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined operation of the first operating means corresponds to an operation that changes the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state in which the power is turned on, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, In the start-up processing that is executed, a determination is made by the changeability determining means. As a result, when changing the settings of the gaming machine, whether or not the gaming machine changes to a changeable state when the gaming machine is powered on by operating the first operating means provided on the back side of the gaming machine. can be determined. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state, and to make settings for the gaming machine.

In gaming machine 3,
The confirmation determination means includes:
A gaming machine 4 characterized in that it is executed within the start-up process.

According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, similar to the changeability determination means, the determination by the confirmation possibility determination means is performed during the start-up process that is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. As a result, when checking the settings of the gaming machine, when the gaming machine is powered on by operating the first operating means provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the state can be changed to a state where the advantage level can be confirmed. It can be determined whether or not. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to a state in which the advantage level can be confirmed, and to confirm the settings of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines 0 to 4,
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the first locking means, the second operation means becomes difficult to operate, while when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the second operation means becomes difficult to operate. 2. A gaming machine 5 characterized by comprising a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) that enables the operation of the second operating means.

According to the game machine 5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines 0 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the second operating means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the first locking means, while making it difficult to operate the second operating means when the opening/closing body is released from the support body. The operating means is configured to be operable. As a result, when the opening/closing body is released from the support body and the decorative body is closed by the opening/closing body or the support body, the opening/closing body is connected to the support body while configuring the second operating means to be easily operable. When the second operating means is locked, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, and the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body. There is.

In the gaming machine 5,
The protection means include:
A gaming machine 6 characterized in that it is attached to the support.

According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protective means attached to the support makes it difficult to operate the second operating means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means, while preventing the opening/closing body from being released from the support. The second operating means is configured to be operable when the user is present. As a result, when the opening/closing body is released from the support body and the decorative body is closed to the opening/closing body or the support body, the opening/closing body is connected to the support body while configuring the second operating means to be easily operable. When the second operating means is locked, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, and the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body. There is.

In gaming machine seats 5 to 6,
The protection means include:
A game machine console 7 characterized in that it is made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the game machine console 7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine console 5 or 6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protective means is made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protective means, and it is possible to discover fraud or malfunctions with respect to the changing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Gun: Covers that protect parts that affect game specifications>
Conventionally, a gaming machine consisting of a support and an opening/closing body has a large number of influencing means that influence the result of the game on the back side of the opening/closing body. While the opening/closing body is locked and the influencing means is configured to be inoperable by the player, the opening/closing body is opened during non-operating hours of the hall to perform maintenance work on the influencing means (for example, Patent Document 1 JP 2015-024202A)).

However, in such a gaming machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a risk that fraudulent acts may be carried out against the influencing means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Gogun was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraudulent acts against the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
an influencing means (for example, a setting key 501, a main control device 110, or a payout control device 111) that is mounted on the opening/closing body and influences the result of a game by a player;
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, it covers part or all of the influencing means, while when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, it covers the influencing means. A gaming machine 0 characterized in that it is equipped with a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) that enables operation.

According to game machine 5, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, and the influence means mounted on the opening/closing body prevents the player from playing the game. The results are affected. The protective means covers part or all of the influencing means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while the influencing means is operated when the opening/closing body is released from the support. is possible. This allows the influencing means to be easily operated when the opening/closing body is open from the support, while the protective means allows the influencing means to be partially operated when the opening/closing body is locked to the support. Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the entire device, thereby improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body.

Furthermore, "affecting the outcome of a game" does not mean, for example, influencing the result of a game by controlling the main aspects of the game, or influencing the result of a game by changing or determining the settings of the game. Examples include cases where it affects the payout of game value.

In game machine 5,
The influencing means is
A main control means (for example, main control device 110) that controls the game,
A payout control means (for example, a payout control means) that performs control in response to a payout instruction for game media outputted from the main control means based on the establishment of a predetermined prize condition (for example, a ball enters the first starting port 64a). device 111);
The protection means include:
A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it covers a part or all of the main control means and also covers a part or all of the payout control means.

According to game machine 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means provided as the influence means, and the game media is outputted from the main control means based on the establishment of a predetermined prize condition by the payout control means also provided as the influence means. Control is performed according to the payout instruction. Here, the protection means covers part or all of the main control means, and also covers part or all of the dispensing control means. As a result, when the opening/closing body is opened from the support, the main control means and the dispensing control means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, The protection means can make it difficult to operate part or all of the main control means and part or all of the dispensing control means. Therefore, the first member (protection means) has the effect of improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body.

In game machine 5,
The main control means is
A main control board (e.g., main board) equipped with a microchip (e.g., MPU 201) that executes processing related to the game;
a main storage means (for example, board box 100) for storing the main control board;
A main sealing means (for example, a sealing unit 100c) for sealing the main storage means so that it is difficult to open the main storage means,
The protection means include:
A gaming machine 2 characterized in that it covers at least the main sealing means.

According to game machine 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, a microchip for executing processing related to the game is mounted on a main control board provided in the main control means, and the main control board is stored in the main storage means. Then, the main storage means is sealed by the main sealing means so as to be difficult to open. Here, the protective means covers at least the main sealing means.

Conventionally, fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the main control board due to the main sealing means that seals the main storage means housing the main control board so that it is difficult to open have been carried out, causing unexpected disadvantage to the hall. There is a risk.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine 5, at least the main sealing means is covered by the protection means. This prevents fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the main control board by covering the main sealing means of the main storage means that houses the main control board equipped with a microchip that executes processing related to games with a protective means. However, when the opening/closing body is closed, the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In game machine 5 or 2,
The main control means is
A gaming value imparting means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) that imparts a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the gaming result;
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) that can change the setting of the probability that the game value given to the player is derived by the game value giving means,
The protection means include:
Game machine 5, characterized in that it covers at least the setting means.

According to game machine 5, in addition to the effects of game machine 5 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game value granting means grants a predetermined game value to the player, and the setting means allows the setting of the probability of the gaming value to be given to the player to be derived by the game value granting means to be changeable. At least the setting means is covered by the protection means. As a result, by covering the setting means that can change the probability of deriving the gaming value given to the player with a protective means, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to the setting contents, and when the opening/closing body is closed. This has the effect of improving the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine.

In any of game machines 5 to 3,
The main control means includes:
A wiring attachment part (for example, a connector attachment part 100h) to which wiring is attached for outputting control information to other control means including the payout control means,
The protection means include:
Game machine No. 4, characterized in that it covers at least the wiring attachment portion.

According to gaming machine 5, in any of gaming machines 5 to 3, the wiring for outputting control information to the other control means including the payout control means by the wiring attachment part of the main control means. is attached, and at least the wiring attachment portion is covered by the protective means. As a result, by covering the wiring attachment part where the wiring for exchanging control information between the main control means and other control means is attached with a protective means, fraudulent acts such as attaching an unauthorized board to the wiring are prevented. However, when the opening/closing body is closed, the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of game machines 5 to 4,
The main control means is
comprising a gaming performance information display means (for example, a base display device 401) that displays gaming performance information indicating the performance of games executed in the gaming machine,
The protection means include:
Game machine 5, characterized in that the game performance information display means is not covered.

According to game machine 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machines 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means provided in the main control means displays the gaming performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, and the protection means prevents the gaming performance information display means from being covered. configured. This has the effect that the game performance information can be checked at all times without being blocked by the protection means.

In any of game machines 5 to 5,
The payout control means is
A payout control board (for example, a payout board) equipped with a microchip (for example, MPU 211) that executes processing related to the payout operation of game media;
A payout storage means (for example, board box 101) that stores the payout control board;
A dispensing sealing means (for example, a sealing part 111a) for sealing the dispensing storage means so that it is difficult to open the dispensing storage means,
The protection means include:
A game machine 5, characterized in that it covers at least the payout sealing means.

According to game machine No. 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machines No. 1 to No. 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, a microchip for executing processing related to the payout operation of game media is mounted on a payout control board provided in the payout control means, and the payout control board is stored in the payout storage means. Then, the dispensing storage means is sealed so as to be difficult to open by the dispensing sealing means. Here, at least the dispensing sealing means is covered by the protective means.

In the past, fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the payout control board due to the breakage of the payout sealing means that seals the payout storage means that houses the payout control board so that it is difficult to open have been carried out, causing unexpected disadvantage to the hall. There is a risk.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine 5, at least the payout sealing means is covered by the protection means. As a result, by covering the payout sealing means of the payout storage means that houses the payout control board equipped with a microchip that executes processing related to the payout operation of game media with the protective means, it is possible to prevent unauthorized replacement of the payout control board. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent acts and improving the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is closed.

In any of game machines 5 to 6,
A storage means (for example, RAM 203) that stores game information regarding the game being executed;
Erasing means (for example, RAM erase switch 122) that erases the game information stored in the storage means when a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation when the power is turned on) is performed,
The protection means include:
Game machine 5, characterized in that it covers at least the erasing means.

According to game machine 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machines 5 to 6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means stores information regarding the game being executed, and by performing a predetermined operation on the erasing means, the game information stored in the storage means is erased. The erasing means is then covered by the protection means. As a result, by covering the erasing means capable of erasing gaming information with a protective means, fraudulent acts such as unauthorized erasure of gaming information can be prevented, and when the opening/closing body is closed, the back side of the gaming machine This has the effect of improving security performance.

In game machine 5,
The erasing means is
erasing information stored in the storage means when a first condition is met;
A gaming machine 5 characterized in that when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the probability that the gaming value is derived is updated.

According to game machine 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the erasing means deletes the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied, and updates the probability of deriving the gaming value when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Ru. As a result, the erasing means can erase the storage means under different conditions and the setting means can change the probability, and the effect is that various settings of the gaming machine can be made with fewer parts and manufacturing costs can be reduced. There is.

In any of game machines 5 to 8,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means include:
A game machine 9 is attached to one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d) in a cantilevered manner.

According to game machine 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machines 5 to 8, the following effects are achieved. That is, a support body is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the protection means is attached to one of the plates in a cantilevered manner. This has the effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the influencing means with a simple structure, and that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved at low cost.

Note that "cantilever-like" refers to a beam-like structure in which one end of the protective means is fixed and the other end is free and unfixed.

In any of game machines 5 to 9,
The protection means include:
A gaming machine 10 characterized in that it is made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to game machine 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machines 5 to 9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protective means is made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the influencing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protection means, and it is possible to discover fraud or malfunctions with respect to the influencing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Lock group: Connect the covers on the back side of the pachinko machine>
Conventionally, a plurality of control means for executing various game settings and processes are arranged on the back side of a gaming machine, and when closing an opening/closing body on which each control means is mounted, a player comes into contact with the control means. It is configured in such a way that it cannot be done. On the other hand, the hall personnel open the opening/closing body outside the business hours of the hall and perform various settings and maintenance work on the control means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

However, in such a gaming machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a risk that fraudulent acts may be carried out against the control means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Rikugun was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraudulent acts against the control means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
A first control means (for example, the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114) and a second control means (for example, the main control device 110 or the payout control device) are mounted on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body and control the game. a control device 111);
a first protection means (for example, a back pack 92) provided on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body and covering at least a part or all of the back side of the game machine of the first control means;
a second protection means (for example, a protective cover member 140) provided on the support body and covering at least a part or all of the back side of the gaming machine of the second control means;
A game machine land 0 characterized in that a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back surface of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine land 0, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the back side of the gaming machine of the opening/closing body. The first protection means mounted on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body covers at least a part or all of the back side of the game machine of the first control means. Further, the second protection means provided on the support body covers at least a part or all of the back side of the gaming machine of the second control means. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back surface of the gaming machine. This eliminates the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means that respectively cover the first control means and the second control means, and there is no room for wires etc. to enter the inside of the gaming machine from the back side of the gaming machine. This has the effect of improving the security performance on the back side of the machine. Furthermore, when the opening/closing body is released from the support by forming the first protection means provided on the opening/closing body so as to overlap the second protection means provided on the support in the direction of the back surface of the game machine. Even if the first protection means of the opening/closing body and the second protection means of the support body do not interfere with each other, the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine is improved without increasing unnecessary work such as maintenance work. The effect is that it can be done.

In game machine land 0,
The opening/closing body is
The first control means is installed above the second control means,
The first protection means includes:
a first protection portion that covers the back side of the gaming machine of the first control means;
a first protrusion (for example, a lower side protrusion) below the first protection part and protruding toward the back side of the gaming machine;
The second protection measure is
a second protection portion that covers part or all of the back side of the gaming machine of the second control means;
a second protrusion (for example, an upper side protrusion) that is above the first protection part and protrudes toward the front side of the gaming machine;
A game machine land 1 characterized in that the first protrusion is formed so as to overlap the second protrusion in the vertical direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine land 1, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine land 0, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the opening/closing body, the first control means is arranged above the second control means. Further, the first protection part provided on the first protection means covers the back side of the gaming machine of the first control means, and the first protruding part provided below the first protection part extends to the back side of the gaming machine. stand out. Furthermore, the second protection part provided on the first protection means covers the back side of the gaming machine of the second control means, and the second protruding part provided above the second protection part extends toward the front side of the gaming machine. stand out. The first protrusion is formed to overlap the second protrusion in the vertical direction of the gaming machine. As a result, the respective protrusions of the first protection means and the second protection means are formed so as to be folded over each other in the vertical direction, so that a gap between the first protection means and the second protection means can be eliminated. Therefore, the intrusion of wires and the like from the back side of the gaming machine can be effectively prevented, and the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In game machine land 0 or land 1,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The second protection means includes:
A game machine land 2 characterized in that it is attached in a cantilevered manner to any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d).

According to the game machine land 2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine land 0 or land 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a support body is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the second protection means is attached to one of the plates in a cantilevered manner. This has the effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the second control means with a simple structure, and that the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved at low cost.

Note that the term "cantilever beam shape" refers to a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed and is free.

In game machine land 2,
The first protection means includes:
A gaming machine land 3 characterized in that at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening/closing body in the form of a both-end fixed beam.

According to the game machine land 3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine land 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening/closing body in the form of a both-end fixed beam. As a result, even if an impact is applied from the back side of the game machine to the second protection means attached to the support body in the form of a cantilever, the first protection means attached to the opening/closing body in the form of a beam fixed at both ends By means of the means it is possible to compensate for the rigidity of the second protection means. Therefore, even if an impact or the like is applied from the back side of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the second protection means from being damaged.

In any of game machines Land 0 to Land 3,
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
A game body (for example, a game board 13) that is mounted on the opening/closing body and has a game area provided with a ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball can enter;
a firing means (for example, a ball firing unit 112a) that fires a game ball toward the gaming area;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203b) that acquires lottery information based on the fact that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball entry means;
determination means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307)) for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
A gaming value imparting means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) that imparts a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the specific determination result derived by the determining means;
a setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of changing the probability that the specific judgment result by the judgment means is derived;
The second protection means includes:
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, it is difficult to operate the setting means, but when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the setting means can be operated. Game machine land 4 characterized by the following.

According to game machine land 4, in addition to the effects provided by game machines land 0 to land 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. Then, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter. Further, the game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball entering means. Then, the determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the determination result derived by the determination means, a predetermined gaming value is granted to the player by the game value granting means. be done. Here, the setting means is configured to be able to change the setting of the probability that the specific determination result by the determining means is derived. The second protection means makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, while making it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is released from the support body. configured as possible. As a result, when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the setting means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body, the setting means can be operated by the second protection means. This has the effect of making it difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body.

In any of game machines Land 0 to Land 4,
It is characterized by comprising an engaging means that engages a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support body. Game machine land 5.

According to game machine land 5, in addition to the effects provided by game machines land 0 to land 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support body, a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means are engaged with each other by the engagement means. Thereby, the first protection means and the second protection means are engaged with each other when the opening/closing body is closed, thereby eliminating the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent wires and the like from entering from the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is closed, and the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In game machine land 5,
The locking device is
It is configured so that it can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine,
A game machine land 6 characterized in that it is provided with an engagement release means that releases the engagement of the first protection means and the second protection means by the engagement means when a predetermined operation is performed.

According to the game machine land 6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine land 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the locking device is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine, and when a predetermined operation is performed by an engagement release means provided on the locking device, the first protection means and the second protection means are engaged by the engagement means. is canceled. As a result, the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means can be released from the front side of the gaming machine, so even when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the engagement can be released from the front side of the gaming machine. By operating the release means in a predetermined manner to release the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means, there is an effect that the opening/closing body can be opened from the support body without any trouble.

In any of game machines Land 0 to Land 6,
The first protection means includes:
A gaming machine land 7 characterized in that it is supported in an openable/closable manner relative to the opening/closing body.

According to game machine land 7, in addition to the effects provided by game machines land 0 to land 6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first protection means is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the opening/closing body. As a result, a part of the first protection means overlaps a part of the second protection means toward the back of the game machine, so that the first protection means is prevented from being opened toward the back of the game machine when the opening/closing body is closed. The effect is that it can be done.

<Urushi group: 2 versions of Ichi group>
An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
A game body (for example, a game board 13) that is mounted on the opening/closing body and has a game area provided with a ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball can enter;
a firing means (for example, a ball firing unit 112a) that fires a game ball toward the gaming area;
A game value imparting means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) that imparts a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the fact that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball entry means; In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) that can change the setting of the gaming value given by the gaming value giving means,
The support is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, it is difficult to operate the setting means, but when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the setting means can be operated. A game machine lacquer 0 characterized in that it is provided with a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) that protects the player.

According to the gaming machine Urushi 0, the opening/closing body is supported by the support body so as to be openable and closable, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. A gaming area is formed in which the gaming body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the gaming body is provided with ball entry means into which a game ball can enter. Further, the game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and based on the fact that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball entering means, the game value imparting means awards the player a predetermined game. value is given. Here, the setting means is configured to be able to change the setting of the game value given by the game value giving means. The protection means provided on the support makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is released from the support. The setting means is configured to be operable. As a result, when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the setting means can be easily operated, but when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body, the setting means is difficult to operate due to the protective means. This has the effect of improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body.

<Hakugun: Upper version of Ichigun>
Conventionally, when a game medium is ejected by a firing means into a game area where a plurality of winning holes are provided, and the game medium enters any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of prizes are awarded to the winning hole. There are gaming machines that pay out gaming media to players.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that has a function that allows hall personnel to change the gaming settings such as the acquisition conditions and acquisition contents of the gaming value given to the player (for example, patent documents: Publication No. 2015-024202).

For such gaming machines, there is a risk that the game settings may be changed due to fraudulent activity, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent game settings from being changed due to fraudulent activity.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
A game body (for example, a game board 13) that is mounted on the opening/closing body and has a game area provided with a ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball can enter;
a firing means (for example, a ball firing unit 112a) that fires a game ball toward the gaming area;
A gaming value imparting means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for imparting a predetermined gaming value to a player when a game ball fired by the ejecting means enters the ball entering means. In gaming machines,
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) that can change the degree of advantage to the player in multiple stages,
The support is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, it is difficult to operate the setting means, but when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the setting means can be operated. A gaming machine 0 characterized in that it is provided with a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) that protects the user from the damage.

According to game machine 0, the opening/closing body is supported by the support body so as to be openable and closable, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. Then, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, when the game ball is fired toward the gaming area by the firing means and the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball entering means, the game value imparting means gives the player a predetermined game value. will be granted. Here, the setting means is configured such that the degree of advantage for the player can be set and changed in a plurality of levels. The protective means provided on the support makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is released from the support. The setting means is configured to be operable. As a result, when the opening/closing body is opened from the support body, the setting means can be easily operated, but when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body, the setting means is difficult to operate due to the protective means. It can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support body.

Note that the "degree of advantage for the player" refers to, for example, the jackpot probability of the first symbol, the selection probability of the jackpot symbol when the first symbol is a jackpot, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, probability fluctuation state) the probability of transition to , the number of prize balls if one enters the winning slot, the driving time or driving mode of the movable accessory that changes the downward flow mode of the game ball, the inclination mode of the member that affects the downward flow mode of the game ball, It may be any member or process that affects a situation advantageous to the player when playing a game, such as the tilting mode of the gaming machine itself.

<Kugun: Horizontal compatible version of 2nd group>
Conventionally, a setting means for making various settings for the game is provided on the back side of a gaming machine, and when the opening/closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed, the player is prevented from touching the setting means. It is configured. On the other hand, the hall personnel open the opening/closing body outside the business hours of the hall and perform various maintenance work and setting work on the setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

However, in such a gaming machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a risk that fraudulent acts may be carried out against the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Kugun was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
Setting means (for example, setting key 501) that is mounted on the opening/closing body and performs various settings for the game;
A protection means (for example, a protective cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the game machine is installed in a game parlor, the protection means is configured to be non-removable (for example, the fixing screws 11g are included from the outside of the right side plate 11d, and the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island equipment without any gaps). A gaming machine ku0 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine 0, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, and various settings for the game can be set by the setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. It will be done. The setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the gaming machine is installed in a gaming parlor, the protection means is configured to be non-removable. As a result, when the gaming machine is installed in a gaming parlor, the protective means that protects the setting means for making various settings for the game is configured to be difficult or non-removable from the gaming machine, thereby preventing fraudulent acts with respect to the setting means. This has the effect of allowing you to do so.

An opening/closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support body (for example, the outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support body;
Setting means (for example, setting key 501) that is mounted on the opening and closing body and performs various settings for the game;
A protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-removable (for example, when the mounting surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 is in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). , a fixing screw 11g is inserted from the outside of the right side plate 11d).

According to the gaming machine 1, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, and various settings for the game can be set by the setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. It will be done. The setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the support body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-removable. As a result, when the support body and the opening/closing body are locked, the protective means that protects the setting means for making various settings for the game is configured to be difficult or impossible to remove from the gaming machine, thereby preventing fraudulent acts with respect to the setting means. The effect is that you can.

In gaming machine Ku0 or Ku1,
The setting means includes:
It has a keyhole into which a predetermined key can be inserted,
The keyhole is
A gaming machine cabinet 2, characterized in that when the support body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the gaming machine cabinet faces toward the back surface of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine ku 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ku 0 or ku 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the setting means is configured such that a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and the keyhole is configured to face toward the back surface of the gaming machine when the support body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device. . This has the effect that the protection means that protects the setting means for making various settings for the game can prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine Ku0 or Ku1,
The setting means includes:
It has a keyhole into which a predetermined key can be inserted,
The keyhole is
A game machine cabinet 3, characterized in that when the support body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the game machine faces to the side.

According to the gaming machine ku 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ku 0 or ku 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the configuration is such that a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and when the support body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the keyhole is inserted to the side of the gaming machine (towards the right or left). It is configured to face. This has the effect that the protection means that protects the setting means for making various settings for the game can prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means from the side of the gaming machine.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the gaming machines B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌0, and ku0 to ku3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, O1, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines L1 to L5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines N1 to N5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machine O1, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines T1 and T2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines U1 and U2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines V1 to V9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, B2 to B3, B1 to B4, B1 to B5, B2 to B6, B1 to B7, B2 to B7, B1 to B8, B2 to B9, B1 to B9, B2 to B10, B2 to B21, B2 to B22, B2 to B23, B2 to B24, B2 to B25, B2 to B26, B2 to B27, B2 to B28, B2 to B29, B2 to B30, B2 to B31, B2 to B32, B2 to B33, B2 to B34, B2 to B35, B2 to B36, B2 to B37, B2 to B38, B2 to B39, B2 to B40, B2 to B41, B2 to B31, B2 to B32, B2 to B33, B2 to B34, B2 to B35, B2 to B36, B2 to B37, B2 to B39, B2 to B41, B2 to B31, B2 to B32, B2 to B33, B2 to B34, B2 to B35, B2 to B36, B2 to B36, B2 to B36, B2 to B36, B2 to B36 A configuration limited to any one of 1-U5, E1-E3, O1, O2, Ka1, Ka2, Ki1-Ki3, Ku1-Ku3, Ke1-Ke6, Ko1-Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1-Tsu3, Te1-Te3, To1, To2, Ichi0-Ichi10, Ni0-Ni8, San0-San7, Shi0-Shi7, Go0-Go9, Riku0-Riku7, Urushi0, Eight0, Ku0-Ku3 may also be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines W1 to W7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines X1 to X6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the above gaming machines C1 to C5, the above gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, E1 to E3, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, O1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines O1 and O2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌0, and ku0 to ku3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines F1 and F2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1 to K 3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines Ki1 to Ki3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki1 to Ki3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines 1 to 5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki1 to Ki3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines 1 and 2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki1 to Ki3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌0, and ku0 to ku3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki1 to Ki3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌0, and ku0 to ku3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines SE1 and SE2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki1 to Ki3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, So1, So2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines So1 and So2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 - Tsu 3, Te 1 - Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 - 1 10, 2 0 - 2 8, 3 0 - 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines T1 and T2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So1, So2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1~tsu3, Te1~te3, To1, To2, 10~110, 20~28, 30~37, 20 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines 1 and 2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Tsu1~tsu3, Te1~te3, To1, To2, 10~110, 20~28, 30~37, 20 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Te1~Te3, To1, To2, 10~10, 20~28, 30~37, 20 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines Te1 to Te3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 ~ Tsu 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 ~ 1 10, 2 0 ~ 2 8, 3 0 ~ 3 7, 2 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of either of the gaming machines 1 and 2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 ~ Tsu 3, Te 1 ~ Te 3, 1 0 ~ 1 10, 2 0 ~ 2 8, San 0 ~ San 7, Shi 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 10 to 110, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 ~ Tsu 3, Te 1 ~ Te 3, To 1, To 2, Ni 0 ~ Ni 8, San 0 ~ San 7, Shi 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the above gaming machines 20 to 28, the above gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 10 to 1 10, San 0 to San 7, Shi 0 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines No. 0 to No. 7 above, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1~tsu3, Te1~te3, To1, To2, 10~110, 20~28, 20 A configuration limited to any one of ~肆7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines 0 to 7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1~tsu3, Te1~te3, To1, To2, 10~110, 20~28, San0 A configuration limited to any one of the following may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines 5 to 9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1~tsu3, Te1~te3, To1, To2, 10~110, 20~28, San0 A configuration limited to any one of the following may be applied: - 7, 0 - 7, 0 - 7, Urushi 0, 0, 0 - 3.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines Land 0 to Land 7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1~tsu3, Te1~te3, To1, To2, 10~110, 20~28, San0 A configuration limited to any one of the following may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine Urushi 0, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3 , I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, K 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 to Tsu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 10 to 10, 20 to 28, San0 to San7 , 肆0～肆7, 伍0～弍9, 国0～迍7, 卌0, 玖0～玖3. You may apply a configuration limited to any one of the following.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine 0, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3 , I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, K 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 to Tsu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 10 to 10, 20 to 28, San0 to San7 , 0 to 7, 0 to 9, 0 to 7, Urushi 0, and 0 to 3 may be used.

In addition, for the configuration of any of the gaming machines ku0 to ku3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1~tsu3, Te1~te3, To1, To2, 10~110, 20~28, San0 A configuration limited to any one of the following may be applied.

In these cases, additional effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, A1 to A7, U1 to C5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, Ki1 to Ki3, K1 to K3, K1 to K6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 10 to 10, 20 to 28, San 0 to San 7, Shi 0 to Shi 7, Go 0 to Go 9, Land 0 to Land 7. A gaming machine Y1 in any one of Urushi 0, 捌0, ku0 to ku3, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, A1 to A7, U1 to C5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, Ki1 to Ki3, K1 to K3, K1 to K6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 10 to 10, 20 to 28, San 0 to San 7, Shi 0 to Shi 7, Go 0 to Go 9, Land 0 to Land 7. A gaming machine Y2, characterized in that in any one of Urushi 0, 捌0, ku0 to ku3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (big prize opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win balls, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes is awarded. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, A1 to A7, U1 to C5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, Ki1 to Ki3, K1 to K3, K1 to K6, Ko1 to Ko5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 10 to 10, 20 to 28, San 0 to San 7, Shi 0 to Shi 7, Go 0 to Go 9, Land 0 to Land 7. A gaming machine Y3 in any one of Urushi 0, 捌0, ku0 to ku3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means is provided for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium, and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

In addition, the "ball" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "game medium" or "game ball" in the claims, and the "accessory object ratio" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "game ball" in the claims. Corresponding to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings to the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means, The "accessory object ratio" corresponds to the "ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winnings in the second winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying out means" in the claims. do.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
11 Outer frame (part of the support)
11d Right side plate (part of side part)
11e Cover upper mounting hole (part of side insertion hole)
11f Lower cover mounting hole (part of side insertion hole)
11g Fixing screw (part of the fixing member)
12 Inner frame (part of opening/closing body)
14 Front frame (part of decorative body)
20 Cylinder lock (part of the locking device, part of the first locking means, part of the second locking means)
63a 1st normal winning opening (winning opening)
63b 2nd normal winning opening (winning opening)
64a 1st starting opening (winning opening, 1st winning opening)
64b 2nd starting opening (winning opening, 1st winning opening)
65a Big winning opening (winning opening, 1st winning opening, 2nd winning opening)
100 Board box (part of storage means, part of main storage means)
100c Sealing unit (part of sealing means, part of influencing means)
100d Setting part (part of change part, part of exposed part (keyhole))
100e Setting section side wall (part of immersion section)
100f Bottom of setting section (part of immersive section)
100h Connector attachment part (part of wiring attachment part, part of influencing means)
101 Board box (part of payout storage means)
110 Main control device (main control means, display control means, part of control means, part of influence means)
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means, part of dispensing control means, part of influencing means)
111a Sealing part (part of the sealing means, part of the influencing means, part of the dispensing sealing means)
112a Ball firing unit (launching means)
122 RAM erase switch (predetermined operating means, information erasure instruction means, first operating means, part of the third operating means, part of the erasing means, part of the influencing means)
140 Protective cover member (part of protective means)
150 Cover mounting part (part of the mounting part)
152 Upper mounting hole (part of the mounting insertion hole)
153 Lower mounting hole (part of the mounting insertion hole)
154 Curved part (part of flexible part)
160 Standing part (part of protective means)
170 Cover part (part of protection means)
171 Cover plate (part of protective means)
172 Cover side protrusion (part of the protrusion)
173 Key cover part (part of protection means)
200 Register 201 MPU (calculating means, part of microchip)
202e Prize pitch number table (payout information storage means)
202f Trigger information data (predetermined trigger information storage means)
203 RAM (storage means)
203b Reserved ball storage area (part of lottery information acquisition means)
203l Real-time base value data (part of gaming performance information storage means, 0th storage area)
203m Previous base value data (part of gaming performance information storage means, first storage area)
203n Base value data from the previous game (part of gaming performance information storage means, second storage area)
203o Base value data from the previous game (part of gaming performance information storage means)
203p New startup flag (new startup identification means)
203x Area within the used area (first storage means)
203x1 outside work area (first work area)
203x2 outer stack area (first stack area)
203x11 probability setting value data (first storage means)
203x12 Update probability setting value data (second storage means)
203x16 RAM erase switch flag (storage means)
203y Area outside the usage area (second storage means)
203y1 Outside work area (work area, 2nd work area)
203y2 Outer stack area (stack area, second stack area)
203r Base value data (storage means)
203s Accessory ratio data (storage means)
203t Error data (error history storage means)
207 Accessory ratio management chip (microchip)
207a Inspection terminal (external device connection means)
208a First starting port switch (winning detection means)
208b Second starting port switch (winning detection means)
208c 1st normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208d 2nd normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208e Big winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208g1 Inner frame open switch (part of open/close detection means)
208g2 Front frame release switch (part of decorative opening/closing detection means)
211 MPU (part of microchip)
261 CPU (external device connection detection means, second calculation means, ratio calculation means)
263 First reading memory (second storage means)
264 Second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 Capacitor (power supply means)
300 Inspection device (external device)
401 Base display device (gaming performance information display means, output means)
401a, 401b 7 segment display (segment display, second display means)
401c, 401d 7 segment display (segment display, first display means)
501 Setting key (permission means, first operation means, part of setting means, part of changing means)
502 Error display button (error history display reception means)
S103 Large opening opening/closing process (part of game value imparting means)
S152 (Payout number setting means)
S307 Fluctuation start processing (part of determination means)
S717 (Power cutoff detection means)
S728 (second storage control means)
S729 (determination means)
S740, S741 (memory control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (Third storage control means)
S761 (memory control means)
S751 to S754, S771, S772 (output means)
S2022 (Evacuation means)
S2024 (Stack pointer setting means)
S2025 (return means)
S2031 (first fixed value storage means)
S2041 (Second fixed value storage means)
S3007 (confirmation display means)
S3008 (stopping means)
S3208 (gaming performance information acquisition means, shift processing means)
S3302 (Special display mode display means)
S4004: Yes (first mode startup means)
S4004: No (3rd mode startup means)
S4011: Yes (second mode startup means)
S4011: No (4th mode startup means)
S4005 (change means)
S4210 (Confirmation processing execution means)
S4213 (change processing execution means)
S4301 (Interrupt permission means)
S4308 (Detection means)
S4309 (Detection means)
S4312 (Interrupt prohibition means)
S4401 (Interrupt permission means)
S4405 (Interrupt prohibition means)
S4407 (Part of specific detection transition means)
S4408 (Part of the means for determining whether confirmation is possible)
S4412 (Part of changeability determination means)
S4451 (Part of confirmation migration means)
S4452 (Part of confirmation migration means)
S4453 (Part of change migration means)
S4454 (Part of change migration means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can grant benefits to players when predetermined conditions are met,
a gaming performance information display means for displaying gaming performance information indicating the performance of games executed in the gaming machine;
a confirmation display means for displaying a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether normal display is possible in the gaming performance information display means;
storage means for storing information regarding the gaming performance information displayed by the gaming performance information displaying means;
initializing means for initializing the information stored in the storage means after the gaming machine is powered on;
When the information stored in the storage means is initialized by the initialization means, the gaming performance information based on the information newly stored in the storage means is stored in a manner different from normal for at least a specific period of time. post-initialization display means for displaying on the gaming performance information display means;
a control means provided with the gaming performance information display means;
an operation means that acts on the control content by the control means on the condition of at least a predetermined operation;
a second control means different from the control means;
connection means for connecting the control means and the second control means;
A gaming machine comprising: cover means that covers at least a part of the rear side of the gaming machine of the control means so that the operating means is exposed, and cover means that covers at least the rear side of the gaming machine of the connecting means. .

Images